Commissioning Guide (V100R006C01 02)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01
Commissioning Guide
Issue Date 02 2011-10-31
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide
About This Document
About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX OSN 8800 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 iManager U2000 iManager U2000 Web LCT Version V100R006C01 V100R006C01 V100R006C01 V100R005C00 V100R005C00
Intended Audience
This document provides information about commissioning and testing operations after hardware installation. It describes the preparations, methods and procedures for station and network commissioning. This document is intended for: l Installation and commissioning engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
ii
About This Document
Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
WARNING
CAUTION
TIP
NOTE
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

The update of contents is described as follows: Update All Description Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

The update of contents is described as follows:
Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
About This Document
Update 2 Quick Guide 15.35 Managing NE Power Consumption All
Description Quick Guide is added. Managing NE Power Consumption is added.
Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

The update of contents is described as follows: Update 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site 8 Automatic Commissioning All Description Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board is deleted.
Automatic Commissioning is modified. Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Update 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During Deployment 4 Configuring NE and Network 5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board Description The procedures for commissioning and configuration during deployment are added.
4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is added.
5.10.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD9 +WSMD9) is added.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
iv
About This Document
Update 5.12 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) SingleWavelength System 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power 9 Configuring Services and System Features 10 Commissioning the Network
Description 5.12.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9 +WSMD9) is added.
6.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths and link at ROADM station C (WSMD9+WSMD9) is added. The chapter "Configuring Services and System Features" is added and provides hyperlinks to the Configuration Guide and Feature Description where detailed procedures for configuring services and system features are described. In this manner, the whole commissioning process during deployment is provided. 10.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms, 10.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection, 10.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System, 12 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment, and 13 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board are added. The section "Reference for Commissioning During Deployment" is added.
15 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration 16 Parameters Reference
The section "Parameter Description" is added.

The update of contents is described as follows: l Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04, and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
About This Document
Update Whole manual
Description l This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 3800. Any difference between the products is described in the manual. l The equipment name is changed from OptiX OSN 8800 I to OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or from OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
4 Configuring NE and Network 5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site 7 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40 Gbit/s SingleWavelength System 8 Automatic Commissioning
Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search is added. Description of commissioning the optical power of Raman boards is modified. The structure of the contents is adjusted and certain contents are added.
10.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks is added.
10.6.3 Testing Items is added.
7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System, 7.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System, 7.3 Preparations for Commissioning, and 7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G System are added.
Automatic Commissioning is added. This section describes the scenarios where the WDM optical power commissioning tool is used to automatically commission optical power of sites and the preparations and procedure for the commissioning.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
vi
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Preparations for Commissioning................................................................................................1
1.1 Safety Operation Guide......................................................................................................................................2 1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols........................................................................................................................2 1.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers..................................................................................................................................2 1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on............................................................................................5 1.1.4 ESD............................................................................................................................................................5 1.2 Instruments and Tools........................................................................................................................................6 1.3 Reference Documents.........................................................................................................................................8 1.4 Engineering Design Information........................................................................................................................9 1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document..................................................................................................................9 1.4.2 Engineering Design Document..................................................................................................................9 1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check ....................................................................................................................9 1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers.....................................................................................................9 1.7 Testing Connection Points................................................................................................................................10 1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer.......................................................................................................................17 1.8.1 Connecting the U2000 Server Directly...................................................................................................17 1.8.2 Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN.......................................................................................19
2 Quick Guide.................................................................................................................................22
2.1 U2000 Quick Guide..........................................................................................................................................23 2.1.1 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows)................................................................23 2.1.2 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Solaris)....................................................................25 2.1.3 Starting the U2000 Server (HA System, Windows)................................................................................28 2.1.4 Starting the U2000 Server in a High Availability System (Solaris)........................................................29 2.1.5 Logging In to the U2000 Client...............................................................................................................31 2.1.6 Shutting Down U2000 Clients.................................................................................................................33 2.1.7 Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows)....................................................34 2.1.8 Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Solaris)........................................................35 2.1.9 Shutting Down the High Availability System (Windows)......................................................................37 2.1.10 Shutting Down the U2000 Server in a High Availability System (Solaris)..........................................39 2.2 Web LCT Quck Guide......................................................................................................................................41 2.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to NEs............................................................................................................42 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
Contents
2.2.2 Starting the Web LCT..............................................................................................................................42 2.2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT....................................................................................................................43 2.2.4 Shutting Down the Web LCT..................................................................................................................43 2.3 Entering the Common Views...........................................................................................................................44 2.3.1 Opening the Main Topology on the U2000.............................................................................................44 2.3.2 NE List on the Web LCT.........................................................................................................................44 2.3.3 Opening the NE Explorer........................................................................................................................45 2.3.4 Opening the NE Panel.............................................................................................................................46 2.4 Using Online Help............................................................................................................................................50
3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During Deployment...............................52 4 Configuring NE and Network...................................................................................................57

4.1 Creating NEs in Batches...................................................................................................................................59 4.2 Creating Optical NEs........................................................................................................................................62 4.3 Logging In to an NE.........................................................................................................................................62 4.4 Uploading the NE Data.....................................................................................................................................63 4.5 Setting NE ID and IP........................................................................................................................................64 4.6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually......................................................66 4.7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE....................................................................................67 4.8 Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication...........................................................................................68 4.9 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions...................................................................................................72 4.10 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode................................................................................................73 4.11 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search..............................................................................................................76 4.12 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection........................................................................................77 4.13 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64............................................................79 4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16.............................................................................83 4.15 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800....................................................................................87
5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site...................................................................................92

5.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power.................................................................................................94 5.1.1 Basic Requirements.................................................................................................................................94 5.1.2 General Commissioning Sequence..........................................................................................................94 5.1.3 Commissioning Tools and Instruments...................................................................................................96 5.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board.................................................................................................96 5.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light....................................................................................................96 5.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU Board..................................................................................97 5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board..........................................................................................98 5.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board.................................................................................................98 5.5 Testing Specifications of an SDH Board..........................................................................................................99 5.5.1 Testing the Mean Launched Optical Power of Optical Interface Boards................................................99 5.5.2 Testing the Actual Received Optical Power of an Optical Interface Board..........................................101 5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board...............................................................103 5.6.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Optical Amplifier Board...........................................................104 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii
Contents
5.6.2 Adjusting the Gains for the Optical Amplifier Board...........................................................................105 5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier.............................................................................................106 5.7.1 Preparations...........................................................................................................................................106 5.7.2 Checking the Fiber Connections............................................................................................................110 5.7.3 Connecting the Fiber Jumpers on the Line Side....................................................................................111 5.7.4 Checking the Configuration of the IPA Function..................................................................................113 5.7.5 Adjusting the Optical Power in the Receive Direction..........................................................................113 5.7.6 Adjusting the Gain Spectrum................................................................................................................115 5.8 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory Channel................................................................................116 5.8.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of the OSC Board..........................................................................116 5.8.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of ESC Board.................................................................................121 5.9 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board.....................................................121 5.9.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V and D40V Boards..........................................................121 5.9.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU/SFIU Board........................................................................122 5.9.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board...............................................................................124 5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board......................................................................................126 5.10.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM+ROAM)...............................................126 5.10.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+WSM9).................................................128 5.10.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+RMU9).................................................129 5.10.4 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (RDU9+WSM9).................................................131 5.10.5 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD4+WSMD4)..........................................132 5.10.6 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD2+WSMD2)..........................................134 5.10.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD9+WSMD9)..........................................136 5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM......................................................................................................137 5.12 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System...........138 5.12.1 Example Description...........................................................................................................................138 5.12.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station....................................................139 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA..............................................................................................143 5.12.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End........................................................................145 5.12.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board)...................149 5.12.6 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MRx+MRx)..................................................................151 5.12.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM+ROAM)..........................................................155 5.12.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)...........................................................158 5.12.9 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)............................................................162 5.12.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (RDU9+WSM9)..........................................................168 5.12.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)...................................................172 5.12.12 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD2+WSMD2)...................................................174 5.12.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9+WSMD9)...................................................177
6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power............................................................................ 181

6.1 General Commissioning Sequence.................................................................................................................182 6.1.1 Commissioning Procedure for the Chain Network................................................................................184 6.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring Network.................................................................................185 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
Contents
6.1.3 Commissioning Procedure for the Mesh Network................................................................................187 6.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power Commissioning...............................................................189 6.2.1 Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards..................................................................................................189 6.2.2 Adjusting Internal Attenuators on Boards.............................................................................................191 6.2.3 Configuring the MCA Board.................................................................................................................192 6.2.4 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line Boards..............................................................................192 6.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain Network....................................................193 6.3.1 Example Description.............................................................................................................................193 6.3.2 Commissioning Procedure.....................................................................................................................196 6.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A..................................202 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B..................................................................206 6.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9 +RMU9)..........................................................................................................................................................210 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9 +WSM9).........................................................................................................................................................217 6.3.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9 +WSM9).........................................................................................................................................................219 6.3.8 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (ROAM +ROAM).........................................................................................................................................................221 6.3.9 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD4 +WSMD4)......................................................................................................................................................222 6.3.10 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD2 +WSMD2)......................................................................................................................................................224 6.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths and link at ROADM station C (WSMD9 +WSMD9)......................................................................................................................................................225 6.3.12 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station D......................................................................226 6.3.13 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V) ........................................................................................................................................................................227 6.3.14 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board +Demultiplexer Board)...................................................................................................................................230 6.3.15 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station F.......................................................................232 6.3.16 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OTM Station G....................................................................233 6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization.............234 6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization.............239 6.3.19 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Station E and OLA Station F for Equalization..............240 6.3.20 Commissioning Optical Power (Without MCAs)...............................................................................241 6.3.21 Commissioning Input Optical Power of OTU.....................................................................................242 6.3.22 Commissioning BERs..........................................................................................................................244 6.3.23 Commissioning OSNR........................................................................................................................249 6.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long Spans......................................................................250
7 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System.............................................................................................................................................253

7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System........................................................................................................255 7.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System.....................................................................................................259 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x
Contents
7.3 Preparations for Commissioning....................................................................................................................260 7.3.1 Checking Design Documents................................................................................................................260 7.3.2 40G Commissioning Meter...................................................................................................................263 7.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System....................265 7.4.1 Example Description.............................................................................................................................265 7.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the OTM Station................................270 7.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station and the OTM Station at the Receive End ........................................................................................................................................................................272 7.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization...................................................................................274 7.4.5 Commissioning BERs............................................................................................................................274 7.4.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System..........................................................................................280 7.4.7 OSNR Penalties.....................................................................................................................................286 7.4.8 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation.....................................................................................................299 7.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System...............................301 7.5.1 Example Description.............................................................................................................................301 7.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station.......................................................307 7.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station..............................................................................310 7.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station........................................................312 7.5.5 Commissioning Optical Power for Equalization...................................................................................315 7.5.6 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation.....................................................................................................316 7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G System.....................................................................317 7.6.1 OSNR Failure........................................................................................................................................317 7.6.2 Excessively High Incident Optical Power.............................................................................................317 7.6.3 Incorrect Dispersion Configuration.......................................................................................................317 7.6.4 Methods for Handling Other Faults.......................................................................................................318
8 Automatic Commissioning......................................................................................................320
8.1 Version Mapping............................................................................................................................................322 8.2 Network Models and Application Scenarios..................................................................................................322 8.3 Precautions for Commissioning......................................................................................................................335 8.4 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of a New Network.......................................................336 8.4.1 Preparing for the Commissioning..........................................................................................................336 8.4.2 Commissioning Process.........................................................................................................................337 8.4.3 Uploading Commissioning Data...........................................................................................................338 8.4.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters...........................................................................................339 8.4.5 Creating a WDM Link...........................................................................................................................340 8.4.6 Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning................................................................................346 8.4.7 Commissioning Optical Power..............................................................................................................347 8.4.8 Viewing the Commissioning Result......................................................................................................353 8.5 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of an Expanded Network.............................................354 8.5.1 Preparing for the Commissioning..........................................................................................................354 8.5.2 Commissioning Process.........................................................................................................................355 8.5.3 Uploading Commissioning Data...........................................................................................................356 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
Contents
8.5.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters...........................................................................................357 8.5.5 Creating a WDM Link...........................................................................................................................359 8.5.6 Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning................................................................................365 8.5.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of Expanded Wavelengths.............................................................366 8.5.8 Viewing the Commissioning Result......................................................................................................375 8.6 Optical Power Commissioning Report...........................................................................................................376 8.6.1 Preparing for Generating a Commissioning Report..............................................................................376 8.6.2 Generating a Commissioning Report of an OTU Board.......................................................................376 8.6.3 Generating a Commissioning Report of the Optical Amplifier Board..................................................379 8.7 Managing the Commissioning Index Data.....................................................................................................383 8.8 Viewing Information About Subnets Under Commissioning........................................................................385 8.9 Synchronizing Data on the NMS....................................................................................................................385 8.10 FAQ..............................................................................................................................................................387 8.10.1 FAQs in the Optical Power Commissioning Window.........................................................................387 8.10.2 FAQs and Solutions During the Generation of WDM Links..............................................................389 8.10.3 FAQs About Setting Subnet Parameters.............................................................................................390 8.10.4 FAQs About Link Commissioning......................................................................................................390
9 Configuring Services and System Features..........................................................................392

9.1 Configuring Boards........................................................................................................................................393 9.1.1 Checking Board Parameters..................................................................................................................393 9.1.2 Adding Ports..........................................................................................................................................408 9.1.3 Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board................................................................................................408 9.2 Configuring Services......................................................................................................................................409 9.3 Configuring System Features.........................................................................................................................410
10 Commissioning the Network................................................................................................412

10.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms........................................................414 10.2 Testing Protection Switching........................................................................................................................415 10.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection..............................................................................416 10.2.2 Testing the 1+1 Protection of the Cross-Connect Board and Clock Board for OptiX OSN 8800......418 10.2.3 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching of the Cross-Connect Board for OptiX OSN 6800.......................419 10.2.4 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the SCC Boards..................................................................420 10.2.5 Testing Optical Line Protection Switching.........................................................................................421 10.2.6 Testing Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Switching....................................................................................423 10.2.7 Testing Client 1+1 Protection Switching.............................................................................................425 10.2.8 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching.............................................................................................428 10.2.9 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection Switching........................................................................................432 10.2.10 Testing VLAN SNCP Protection Switching.....................................................................................435 10.2.11 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection Switching.................................................................................438 10.2.12 Testing Board-Level Protection Switching.......................................................................................440 10.2.13 Testing Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP Protection Switching...........................442 10.2.14 Testing DBPS and ERPS Protection Switching................................................................................446 10.2.15 Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection Switching...........................................................................449 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii
Contents
10.2.16 Testing DLAG Protection (OTN) Switching.....................................................................................453 10.2.17 Testing ODUk SPRing Protection Switching....................................................................................455 10.2.18 Testing Optical Wavelength Shared Protection Switching...............................................................458 10.2.19 Testing Linear MS Protection Switching..........................................................................................461 10.2.20 Testing Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection Switching...................................................462 10.2.21 Testing Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection Switching...................................................464 10.2.22 Testing SNCP Protection Switching..................................................................................................467 10.2.23 Testing SNCTP Protection Switching...............................................................................................469 10.2.24 Testing Transoceanic MSP Ring Protection Switching ...................................................................471 10.2.25 Testing ERPS Protection Switching..................................................................................................474 10.2.26 Testing the DLAG(OCS)...................................................................................................................476 10.3 Testing Data Characteristics.........................................................................................................................477 10.3.1 Testing the LCAS................................................................................................................................477 10.3.2 Testing the LAG..................................................................................................................................480 10.3.3 Testing the LPT...................................................................................................................................481 10.3.4 Testing the STP/RSTP.........................................................................................................................482 10.3.5 Testing the MSTP................................................................................................................................484 10.4 Testing System Features...............................................................................................................................485 10.4.1 Testing IPA..........................................................................................................................................485 10.4.2 Testing ALC........................................................................................................................................488 10.4.3 Testing APE.........................................................................................................................................489 10.4.4 Testing EAPE......................................................................................................................................491 10.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks.....................................................................................................................494 10.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2....................................................................................................................................496 10.6.1 Testing Process....................................................................................................................................497 10.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation...............................................................................................................498 10.6.3 Testing Items.......................................................................................................................................501 10.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels...............................................................................................................504 10.7.1 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using Laptops........................................................................504 10.7.2 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using the Ethernet OAM Function........................................506 10.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System.......................................................................................................507 10.8.1 Setting the Orderwire Board................................................................................................................507 10.8.2 Configuring Orderwire........................................................................................................................508 10.8.3 Configuring Conference Calls.............................................................................................................509 10.8.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets................................................................................................................510 10.9 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS System..................................................................................511 10.9.1 Configuring Orderwire........................................................................................................................511 10.9.2 Configuring Conference Calls.............................................................................................................512 10.9.3 Dividing Orderwire Subnets................................................................................................................513 10.10 Testing Orderwire Functions......................................................................................................................514
11 Testing Bit Errors.....................................................................................................................516

11.1 Testing 10-Minute Bit Errors for Each Optical Channel..............................................................................518 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii
Contents
11.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors.....................................................................................................................520
12 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment.........................................................523 13 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board................................................................525 14 Analyzing and Handling Common Deployment Problems...........................................527
14.1 OSC/ESC Conflict........................................................................................................................................528 14.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports..........................................................................................................529
15 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration...............................531

15.1 Configuring the NE Data..............................................................................................................................535 15.1.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually.....................................................................................................535 15.1.2 Replicating the NE Data......................................................................................................................536 15.2 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack..............................................................................................................537 15.2.1 Master/Slave Subrack Configuration...................................................................................................537 15.2.2 Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of an NE................................................................................537 15.2.3 Changing a Subrack Attribute.............................................................................................................538 15.2.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack..............................................................................................538 15.2.5 Deleting a Slave Subrack.....................................................................................................................539 15.3 Configuring Wavelength Grooming.............................................................................................................540 15.3.1 Basic Concepts....................................................................................................................................540 15.3.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow........................................................................................541 15.3.3 Configuring the ROADM....................................................................................................................541 15.4 Configuring the NE Time.............................................................................................................................552 15.4.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the U2000/Web LCT and NEs...................................................553 15.4.2 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with the NMS Time..........................................553 15.4.3 Configuring the Standard NTP Key....................................................................................................554 15.4.4 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server Time......................................................555 15.5 Performance Management............................................................................................................................556 15.5.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold...........................................................................................556 15.5.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters......................................................................................556 15.5.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers..............................................................................................559 15.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEs..................................................................................................................560 15.6.1 Modifying the NE Name.....................................................................................................................560 15.6.2 Modifying the Optical NE Name.........................................................................................................561 15.6.3 Modifying GNE Parameters................................................................................................................561 15.6.4 Changing the GNE for NEs.................................................................................................................562 15.6.5 Changing a GNE to a Normal NE.......................................................................................................563 15.6.6 Changing a Normal NE to a GNE.......................................................................................................563 15.6.7 Deleting NEs........................................................................................................................................564 15.7 Modifying the Boards Configuration...........................................................................................................565 15.7.1 Deleting Boards...................................................................................................................................565 15.7.2 Adding Boards.....................................................................................................................................565 15.8 Modifying the Fibers Configuration.............................................................................................................566 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv
Contents
15.8.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information....................................................................................................566 15.8.2 Deleting Fibers....................................................................................................................................567 15.9 Creating a Single NE....................................................................................................................................568 15.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User................................................................................................................569 15.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode..................................................................................................570 15.12 Configuring the Edge Port..........................................................................................................................572 15.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection.................................................................................................574 15.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes..................................................................................................575 15.15 Configuring Board SDH Port Attributes....................................................................................................576 15.16 Opening/Closing Lasers.............................................................................................................................576 15.17 Setting the Rated Optical Power of the OA Board.....................................................................................577 15.18 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards........................................................................................578 15.19 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters............................................................................................579 15.20 Configuring the Service Mode...................................................................................................................580 15.21 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC).......................................................................................................581 15.22 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board...........................................................................582 15.23 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board.............................................................................582 15.24 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering Protection Switching..............................................................583 15.25 Setting the NULL Mapping Status.............................................................................................................584 15.26 Configuring Path Binding...........................................................................................................................585 15.27 Configuring Centralized Wavelength Monitoring......................................................................................586 15.28 Configuring the FEC Function...................................................................................................................588 15.29 Enabling and Disabling LPT......................................................................................................................589 15.30 Setting the Speed Level of Fans.................................................................................................................589 15.31 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm Signals Using the RS232 Serial Port...................................590 15.32 Configuring Ethernet Boards......................................................................................................................591 15.32.1 Configuring Internal Ports.................................................................................................................592 15.32.2 Configuring External Ports................................................................................................................593 15.33 Verifying Ethernet Services........................................................................................................................595 15.34 Configuring the PRBS Test........................................................................................................................595 15.34.1 PRBS Application Scenarios.............................................................................................................596 15.34.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary Board...............................................................597 15.34.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board ....................................................................................598 15.35 Managing NE Power Consumption............................................................................................................599 15.35.1 Monitoring NE Power Consumption.................................................................................................599 15.35.2 Configuring Energy Conservation for an NE....................................................................................601 15.35.3 Viewing the Network-wide NE Power Consumption Report...........................................................602 15.36 Configuring NE Clock Sources..................................................................................................................603 15.36.1 Adding Clock Sources.......................................................................................................................603 15.36.2 Setting the Clock Source Priority Table for an NE...........................................................................604 15.37 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data...........................................................................................................605 15.37.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods..............................................................605 Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv
Contents
15.37.2 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card......................................................................607 15.37.3 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client.....................................................608 15.37.4 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board..............................................................................609 15.37.5 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card..................................................................................610 15.37.6 Restoring Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client....................................................611
16 Parameters Reference..............................................................................................................613
16.1 Parameters (Creating a Network).................................................................................................................614 16.1.1 Laser Spectrum Analysis.....................................................................................................................614 16.1.2 Wavelength Monitoring Management.................................................................................................616 16.1.3 Orderwire Board Settings....................................................................................................................616 16.1.4 General.................................................................................................................................................616 16.1.5 Conference Call...................................................................................................................................618 16.1.6 Auxiliary..............................................................................................................................................619 16.1.7 NE Attributes.......................................................................................................................................619 16.1.8 NE User Management.........................................................................................................................620 16.1.9 NE Time Synchronization...................................................................................................................625 16.1.10 Standard NTP Key Management.......................................................................................................629 16.1.11 Path Binding......................................................................................................................................630 16.2 Parameters: WDM Interface.........................................................................................................................630 16.2.1 Optical Transponder Board.................................................................................................................631 16.2.2 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board.................................................................................................641 16.2.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplex Board..............................................................................................645 16.2.4 Tributary and Line Boards...................................................................................................................648 16.2.5 Optical Amplifier Board......................................................................................................................650 16.2.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Board....................................................................................................656 16.2.7 Protection Board..................................................................................................................................658 16.2.8 Spectrum Analysis Board....................................................................................................................659 16.2.9 Variable Optical Attenuation Board....................................................................................................662 16.2.10 Dispersion Compensation Board.......................................................................................................664 16.3 Parameters (Configuring Wavelength Grooming)........................................................................................665 16.3.1 Parameters: Edge Port.........................................................................................................................665 16.3.2 Parameters: Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection........................................................................666 16.3.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection.........................................................................667 16.3.4 Parameters: Enabling the Port Blocking Function..............................................................................668
A Glossary......................................................................................................................................670
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
xvi
1 Preparations for Commissioning
Preparations for Commissioning
About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to prepare for commissioning. 1.1 Safety Operation Guide This section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal safety regulations and equipment operating regulations. These regulations must be followed to prevent personal injuries or damages to the equipment during operations. 1.2 Instruments and Tools This section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning. 1.3 Reference Documents This section describes the reference documents required during the commissioning process. 1.4 Engineering Design Information This section describes the engineering design information required for equipment commissioning. 1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check Before commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions. 1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers This section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers. 1.7 Testing Connection Points This section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function and connection types. 1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer This section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the NMS manages the NE.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
1.1 Safety Operation Guide

This section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal safety regulations and equipment operating regulations. These regulations must be followed to prevent personal injuries or damages to the equipment during operations.
1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols

During equipment installation and maintenance, observe the precautions indicated by the alarm and safety symbols to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage. Table 1-1 describes the alarm and safety symbols on the WDM equipment. Table 1-1 Symbols on the WDM equipment Symbol Describes ESD protection symbol. You must wear an ESD wrist strap or glove to avoid damage caused by electrostatic discharge to boards.
Laser level symbol.

CAUTION
Indicates the laser level and warns that laser beams can cause injuries to eyes.
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
Grounding symbol. Indicates the position of the grounding point. Regular cleaning symbol. Warns you to regularly clean the air filter. Fan warning symbol. Warns you not to touch the fan blade until the fan stops moving.
1.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers

This section describes how to safely use fibers.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
DANGER
Laser beams on the optical interface board or inside the optical fiber can cause damage to your eyes. When installing and maintaining optical interface boards and optical fibers, avoid directly exposing your eyes to the laser beams originating from the optical interfaces or fiber connectors.
Protection of Optical Connectors

All idle optical connectors for fiber jumpers and optical ports on the optical interface boards must be covered with protective caps. The optical ports on the replaced boards must be promptly covered with protective caps. In addition, properly store these boards in their packages to keep the optical ports clean. Recommended protective caps are shown in Figure 1-1. Figure 1-1 Recommended protective caps
Protective caps that are not recommended are shown in Figure 1-2. Figure 1-2 Protective caps that are not recommended
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

NOTE
Do not use protective caps that are made of soft rubber. These caps tend to collect dust and other material. These caps are hard to clean and do not resist the build-up of dust.
Connecting Fibers
CAUTION
When applying a physical fiber loopback between two optical ports, increase the attenuation to avoid equipment damage in case the laser optical power is excessively high. For boards that have the capability of having optical attenuators added, add an optical attenuator at the Rx optical port rather than at the Tx optical port. Insert fibers into optical connectors carefully when connecting fibers. If the optical power is excessively high, add a fixed optical attenuator before the optical port to avoid damages to the device caused by a high input of optical power.
DANGER
Before removing or inserting fibers from/into the CRPC board, shut down the pump laser to avoid injuries due to the high optical power from the laser. The CRPC board has specific requirements on fiber loss of the line nearby. For details, see Table 1-2. Table 1-2 Fiber connection requirements of the CRPC Distance 010 (km) 1020 (km) Loss (dB) 0.1 0.2 Connector (piece) 0 0
NOTE
The ODF has only one connector for connecting to the CRPC board. All the other fiber connection points must be spliced.
Cleaning Fibers
CAUTION
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flanges for each external fiber must be cleaned before the fibers from the ODF are inserted into the optical ports on the boards in the equipment.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
The fiber connectors and optical ports for the lasers must be cleaned by using special cleaning tools and materials. Some common cleaning tools are: l l l l l l Cleaning solvent. Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used (alcohol or formalin is never used) Non-woven lens tissue Special compressed gas Dust-free cotton stick Special cleaning roll used along with cleaning solvent, either isoamylol or propyl Fiberscope
For details on how to clean fibers, see the Supporting Tasks.
1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on

This section describes the requirements for performing operations on the equipment when the power is on. Follow these requirements when performing operations on the equipment when the power is on: l l l Do not install or disassemble equipment when the power is on. Do not install or remove power cables when the power is on. Before connecting a cable, ensure that the cable and cable label comply with installation requirements.
1.1.4 ESD
During installation and maintenance, follow antistatic procedures to prevent equipment damage: l l Always wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation. Check that the equipment is securely grounded.
CAUTION
Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch equipment or boards. Make sure that the wrist strap touches your skin. Insert the ESD strap connector into the ESD socket of the equipment. For information about how to wear an ESD wrist strap, see Figure 1-3.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Figure 1-3 Wearing an ESD wrist strap
NOTE
Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the equipment port. For details, see the Quick Installation Guide.
When you are following antistatic procedures, take the following precautions: l Check the validity and functionality of the wrist strap. Its resistance value must be between 0.75 mega ohm to 10 mega ohm. If the wrist strap validity period (usually two years) has expired, or if the resistance value fails to meet requirements, replace it with a wrist strap that provides the required resistance value. Do not touch a board with your clothing. Clothing generates static electricity that is not protected by the wrist strap. Wear an ESD wrist strap and place the board on an ESD pad when you replace boards or chips. Use ESD tweezers or extraction tools to replace chips. Do not touch chips, circuits, or pins with your bare hands. Keep the boards and other ESD-sensitive parts you are installing in ESD bags. Place the removed boards and components on an ESD pad or ESD material. Do not use non-antistatic materials such as white foams, common plastic bags, or paper bags to pack boards, and do not let these materials touch the boards. Wear an ESD wrist strap when operating the ports of boards because they are also ESDsensitive. Discharge the static electricity of cables and protective sleeves before you connect them to the ports. Keep packing materials (such as, ESD boxes and bags) available in the equipment room for packing boards in the future.
l l
ESD complies with IEC Publication 1000, EN 55022, EN 55024, IEC 61000 and GR-1089CORE.
1.2 Instruments and Tools

This section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning. Table 1-3 lists the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6
Table 1-3 Instruments and tools Tool or Tester Optical power meter Usage Used to measure the received optical power, the receiver sensitivity, and the receiver overload at an optical port. It is mainly used to measure the optical power on the client side and the WDM side of the OTU, and the total optical power of the multiplexed signals. Used to install the U2000 Web LCT and U2000 during the network element (NE) commissioning. Used to test the voltage, resistance, and current intensity during the power test. Used for checking the cleanliness of the endface of the fiber. Used for connections during the optical power test of optical ports on the optical distribution frame (ODF) side. Used to clean the end faces of fibers. Used to transfer the fiber jumper. Used to attenuate the received optical power, which may damage the optical component, during the received optical power test for an optical port. Used for testing the receiver sensitivity and overload optical power of an optical port. Used mainly to test the optical power, optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR), and the central wavelength for each wavelength in the multiplexed signals. Used in the network commissioning and index test of the SDH service. Used for the GE service index test. Used for the 10GE service index test. Used for the OTN service index test. Used for the ESCON service index test. Used for the data service index test. Used for the FICON service and FC service index test. Used to install or uninstall the board screws. Used to clean optical ports of boards.
Laptop Multimeter Fiber microscope Fiber jumper Cassette cleaner or lens tissue Flange Fixed optical attenuator
Variable optical attenuator (VOA) Optical spectrum analyzer
SDH analyzer GE analyzer 10GE analyzer OTN analyzer ESCON analyzer Ethernet analyzer FICON/FC analyzer Phillips screwdriver Special compressed gas
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

NOTE
In a DWDM system, the optical power of a single wavelength in the multiplexed signals needs to be measured by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The commissioning result from this method is more accurate. When using this method, the noise impact does not need to be considered.
Calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to perform the test. Use the following method to verify the calibration: Measure the optical power of the OUT optical port on the OTU by using the optical spectrum analyzer. Then compare it with the optical power obtained by using an optical power meter. If the difference is less than 0.5 dB, the calibration is acceptable. If the difference is greater than 0.5 dB, recalibrate the optical spectrum analyzer.
1.3 Reference Documents

This section describes the reference documents required during the commissioning process. The following reference documents are required for OptiX OSN 8800 equipment commissioning: l l l l l l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Planning Guidelines OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Configuration Guide OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Feature Description
The following reference documents are required for OptiX OSN 6800 equipment commissioning: l l l l l l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Planning Guidelines OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Configuration Guide OptiX OSN 6800/3800 Feature Description
The following reference documents are required for OptiX OSN 3800 equipment commissioning: l l l l l l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Planning Guidelines OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Configuration Guide OptiX OSN 6800/3800 Feature Description
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
1.4 Engineering Design Information

This section describes the engineering design information required for equipment commissioning.
1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document

This section describes the required engineering survey documents. The required engineering survey documents include the survey report and the work instructions associated with the engineering survey.
1.4.2 Engineering Design Document

This section describes the engineering design documents required during equipment commissioning. The following engineering design documents are required for equipment commissioning: l l l l l l l l Network diagram (including the networking diagram for the entire network, the basic topological diagram, and the network management diagram) Board layout diagram of the cabinet Wavelength allocation diagram Cabinet fiber connection diagram Configuration diagram of the optical amplifiers Fiber connection diagram Optical attenuator list Design description file
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check

Before commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions. For details about checking the commissioning conditions, see the Installation Guide.
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers

This section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers. Commissioning engineers must have received professional training on optical network commissioning and are skilled in using the test equipment. Commissioning engineers must be familiar with: l l l l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
WDM, SDH, and Ethernet theories WDM equipment U2000/Web LCT and service configuration by using the U2000/Web LCT. Analyzers (WDM, SDH and Ethernet)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9
1.7 Testing Connection Points

This section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function and connection types. Figure 1-4 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. For the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-4 and Table 1-8. Figure 1-5 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32. For the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-4 and Table 1-8. Figure 1-6 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. For the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-4 and Table 1-8. Figure 1-7 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800. For the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-5, and Table 1-8. Figure 1-8 shows the testing connection points on the chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800. For the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-6, Table 1-7 and Table 1-8. Figure 1-4 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64
EFI2
LAMP1 LAMP2
EFI1
NM_ETH2
PIU
RTN
53A PWR
STI
-48V
ATE
ALMI2 ALMO3 ALMI1 ALMO1
ETH1 ETH2 ETH3
CLK2 TOD2
CLK1 TOD1
SERIAL
Front
NM_ETH 1
ALMO4
Back
ALMO2
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
10
Figure 1-5 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32
EFI2 EFI1
NM_ETH2 LAMP1 LAMP2
PIU
RTN
53A PWR
ATE
-48V
ETH1 ETH2 ETH3
ALMI2 ALMO3 ALMO4
ALMI1 ALMO1
SERIAL
NM_ETH1
ALMO2
Fan
Fan
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
11
Figure 1-6 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16
PIU
EFI
AUX
ATE
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
12
Figure 1-7 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800
COM ETH3 ALM01 ALM02 ALM04 ALM03 SERIAL ALMI1 ALMI2 LAMP1 ALMP2
xcs
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SCC
STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC
PIU
RUN
NEG(-) RTN(+)
SubRACK_ID
NM_ETH1 ETH1
NM_ETH2 ETH2
Fan
RESET STAT PROG LAMP TEST
AUX
ALM CUT
xcs
SCC
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
13
Figure 1-8 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 3800
FAN
STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC
STAT PROG
RUN
DO not hot plug this unit

NM_ETH1
S1 S11 S2 S4 S5 S6 PIU SCC SCC AUX PIU
RESET LAMP TEST ALM CUT PWR CRI MAJ MIN
NM_ETH2
NEG(-) RTN(+)
EXT
SCC
AUX
PIU
Table 1-4 Function description of the testing connection points on the OptiX OSN 8800 Interface SilkScreen ALMO1 ALMO2 ALMO3 ALMO4 Function Description Generally the alarm output is sent to the centralized alarm and power distribution cabinet by output ports and cascading ports. Other modes can be configured to send the alarm output for assembling and displaying the alarm. The OptiX OSN 8800 provides eight channels of alarm output. The first three channels, by default, are critical alarms, major alarms, and minor alarms. The other five channels are reserved for alarm output cascading. OAM port is a serial network management (NM) port which supports the X.25 protocol. Connection Type RJ-45
SERIAL
DB9
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
14
Interface SilkScreen ALMI1 ALMI2
Function Description The external alarm input function is designed for an external system that has alarms requiring remote monitoring (for example, an environment monitoring system). The names for the eight alarm channels can be set to achieve remote monitoring of the external alarms with the external system. Used to drive the running indicators and alarm indicators for the cabinet where the subrack is housed. Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port on the OptiX OSN 8800 using a network cable to the network port on the U2000 server to achieve management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 8800. Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.
Connection Type RJ-45
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2
RJ-45
RJ-45
ETH1/ETH2/ETH3
Connect the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 port on one subrack using a network cable to the same ports on another subrack to achieve communication between the master subrack and its slave subracks.
RJ-45
Table 1-5 Function description of the testing connection points on the OptiX OSN 6800 Interface SilkScreen COM ALMO1 ALMO2 ALMO3 ALMO4 Function Description Commissioning port used for communications between the EFI and AUX boards. Generally the alarm output is sent to the centralized alarm and power distribution cabinet by output ports and cascading ports. Other modes can be configured to send the alarm output for assembling and displaying the alarm. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight channels of alarm output. The first three channels, by default, are critical alarms, major alarms, and minor alarms. The other five channels are reserved for alarm output cascading. OAM port is a serial network management (NM) port which supports the X.25 protocol. Connection Type RJ-45 RJ-45
SERIAL
DB9
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
15
Interface SilkScreen ALMI1 ALMI2
Function Description The external alarm input function is designed for external system that has alarms requiring remote monitoring (for example, an environment monitoring system). The names of the eight alarm channels can be set to achieve remote monitoring of the external alarms with the external system. Used to drive the running indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet where the subrack is housed. Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 on the OptiX OSN 6800 using a network cable to the network port on the U2000 server to achieve management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800. Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port on one NE using a network cable to the network port on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.
Connection Type RJ-45
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2
RJ-45
RJ-45
ETH1/ETH2/ETH3
Connect the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 port on one subrack using a network cable to the same ports on another subrack to achieve communication between the master subrack and its slave subracks.
RJ-45
Table 1-6 Function description of the testing connection points on the OptiX OSN 3800 Interface SilkScreen NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 Function Description Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port on the OptiX OSN 3800 using a network cable to the network port on the U2000 server to achieve management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 3800. Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port on one NE using a network cable to the network port on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. EXT Accesses and outputs all external signals. DB64 Connection Type RJ-45
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
16
Table 1-7 Function description of the testing EXT connectors on the OptiX OSN 3800 Interface SilkScreen (on Cables) ETH F&f ALMO Connection Type RJ-45 DB9 RJ-45
Function Description Used as the COM commissioning port. Debugs the serial port. The alarm output is sent to the centralized alarm and power distribution cabinet by output ports and cascading ports. The port provides two channels of alarm output and two channels of output cascading. The external alarm input function is designed for an external system that has alarms requiring remote monitoring (for example, an environment monitoring system). It is used to input six channels of external alarms. Used to drive the running indicators and alarm indicators for the cabinet where the chassis is housed.
ALMI1 ALMI2
RJ-45
LAMP1 LAMP2
RJ-45
Table 1-8 Function description of the testing buttons Interface Silk-Screen RESET ALM CUT Function Description Used to reset the SCC board. The trigger switch is used to mute the alarm from the subrack. You can either hide the prompt of current alarms by pressing and then immediately releasing the button, or mute the alarms by pressing the button for five seconds. When the audible alarm function is turned off, the ALMC indicator on the SCC board remains on. Otherwise, the audible alarm function is turned on, and the ALMC indicator on the SCC board remains off. Used to test the indicators. After you press this button, all indicators are lit.
LAMP TEST
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer

This section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the NMS manages the NE.
1.8.1 Connecting the U2000 Server Directly

This section describes how to connect the U2000 server to Ethernet port in the subrack using a cable.
Prerequisite
The subrack must work normally. The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the U2000 server belong to the same network segment.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials

U2000, network cable
Precautions
If the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the U2000 server to the master subrack through a network cable.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the cable. One end of the cable should be connected to the network port of the NMS computer. The other end should be connected to the specified port on the board.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board. For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI board. For the OptiX OSN 6800, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board. For the OptiX OSN 3800, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.
Step 2 Determine if the green indicator of the network card interface of the NMS computer remains constantly on. Step 3 Check the indicators on the board. The green "LINK" indicator should remain constantly on. The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 board or the indicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board. For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port or the indicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI board. For the OptiX OSN 6800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board. For the OptiX OSN 3800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.
Step 4 On Windows XP on the U2000 server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the Start Menu. The Control Panel window is displayed. Step 5 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection window is displayed. Step 6 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed. Step 7 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties window is displayed.
Step 8 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) window is displayed. Step 9 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP address that is in the same network segment with the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is an integer from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address must be unique and cannot be the same as any of the existing IP addresses. Step 10 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.
CAUTION
When configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct connection, do not configure the gateway. Otherwise, the configured gateway may lead to a failed connection. If the U2000 server has more than one network card, select the corresponding local connection for the network card connected to the subrack. Step 11 Click OK. ----End
1.8.2 Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN

This section describes how to connect the U2000 server to the NE through a LAN.
Prerequisite
When the U2000 server connects to the NE through a LAN, the IP address is set in a way that is similar to connecting the U2000 server to an Ethernet port in the subrack using a cable. Note the following requirements: l l The subrack must work normally. The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the U2000 server belong to the same network segment.

U2000, network cable
Precautions
If the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the U2000 server to the master subrack through a network cable.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the NMS computer into the LAN. Step 2 Check the cable. The NMS computer is connected to the LAN using cables. The equipment is connected to the LAN through the specified port on the board using cables.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board. For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI board. The OptiX OSN 6800 is connected to the LAN through the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board using cables. The OptiX OSN 3800 is connected to the LAN through the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board using cables.
Step 3 Determine if the indicator for the network card interface of the NMS computer remains constantly on. Step 4 Check the indicators on the board. The green "LINK" indicator should remain constantly on. The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 board or the indicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board. For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port or the indicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI board. For the OptiX OSN 6800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board. For the OptiX OSN 3800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.
Step 5 In Windows XP on the U2000 server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the Start Menu. The Control Panel window is displayed. Step 6 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection window is displayed. Step 7 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed. Step 8 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties window is displayed. Step 9 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) window is displayed. Step 10 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP address that is in the same network segment with the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is an integer from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address is unique and cannot be the same as any of the existing IP addresses. Step 11 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
20
CAUTION
When configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct connection, do not configure the gateway. Otherwise the configured gateway may lead to a failed connection. If the U2000 server has more than one network cards, select the corresponding local connection for the network card connected to the subrack. Step 12 Click OK. ----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
21
2 Quick Guide
2
About This Chapter
Quick Guide
The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT and the U2000. The U2000 is an integrated management platform for all Huawei equipment. It can centrally manage transport equipment, access equipment, and IP equipment (including routers, security equipment, and Metro Ethernet equipment). With powerful management functions at the NE and network layers, the U2000 is the major future-oriented network management product and solution for Huawei equipment. In the telecommunication management network (TMN) hierarchy, the U2000 is located between the element management layer and network management layer, and supports all functions of the NE and network layers. The Web LCT is an element management system (EMS) in an optical transport network. In the TMN, the Web LCT is located at the NE layer. Based on the browser/server architecture, the Web LCT allows you to perform all operations of NE-level configuration and maintenance. The Web LCT accesses a local NE through a LAN or a serial port, and accesses a remote NE over data communications channels (DCCs). 2.1 U2000 Quick Guide The U2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. You are recommended to start or shut down the U2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in order not to affect other users who are operating the U2000. 2.2 Web LCT Quck Guide The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT. 2.3 Entering the Common Views This task describes how to display the common views of the network management system (NMS) and functions of the views. 2.4 Using Online Help Online Help provides help information about the U2000.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
22
2 Quick Guide
2.1 U2000 Quick Guide

The U2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. You are recommended to start or shut down the U2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in order not to affect other users who are operating the U2000.
Context
You are recommended to start the computer and the U2000 application according to the following sequence: l l l Start the computer. Start the U2000 server. Start the U2000 client.
You are recommended to shut down the U2000 application and the computer according to the following sequence: l l l Exit the U2000 client. Stop the U2000 server. Shut down the computer.
2.1.1 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows)

Three steps are required to start the U2000 server: power on the server safely, start the database, and start the U2000 server processes.
Starting the Database

The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. This topic describes how to start the database on the Windows single-server system.
Prerequisite
The OS must have been started.
Context
Generally, the database starts along with the OS.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights. Step 2 Choose Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Service Manager to check whether Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running. The SQL Server Service Manager dialog box is displayed. If Start/Continue is dimmed, Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running.
2 Quick Guide
Step 3 If Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is not running, click Start/Continue. ----End
Starting the U2000 Server Processes

You can log in to the U2000 to manage the network only after starting the computer where the U2000 is installed and the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to start the U2000 server processes on the Windows single-server system.
Prerequisite
The OS on the computer where the U2000 server is installed must be running properly, and the database must have been started.
Context
Generally, the U2000 server processes start along with the OS. During the installation of the U2000 software, only one default NMS user, admin, is provided. The admin user is a U2000 administrator, who has the highest rights of the U2000 system.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights. Step 2 In Windows Task Manager, view the startup information about the U2000 server processes. If imapmrb.exe, imapwatchdog.exe, imapsysd.exe, imapeventmgr.exe, imap_sysmonitor.exe, ResourceMonitor.exe, imapsvcd.exe, EmfGnlDevDm.exe, and imapPortTrunkSvc.exe are displayed in the process list, the U2000 server processes have started. Step 3 If the U2000 server processes have not started, choose Start > Programs > Network Management System > U2000 Server > U2000 Server or click the shortcut icon on the desktop to start the U2000 server. Starting the U2000 server processes takes about 3 minutes. Step 4 Choose Start > Programs > Network Management System > U2000 System Monitor or click the shortcut icon on the desktop to start the U2000 System Monitor client. Step 5 In the Login dialog box, enter a user name and a password to access the System Monitor client window. The user name is admin, and the password is empty by default. You are required to change the password at the first login.
NOTE
Two data transmission modes are available: Common and Security(SSL). You can run a command on the server to query the data transmission mode. The default data transmission mode is Common.
Step 6 Check whether the U2000 processes start properly. The processes for which the start mode is manual must be started manually. l If the U2000 processes for which the start mode is automatic start successfully, the U2000 runs properly. l If any process does not start, right-click the process and choose Start Process from the shortcut menu.
2 Quick Guide
l If the U2000 runs abnormally, contact Huawei engineers. ----End
Follow-up Procedure
The network management system maintenance suite is applicable to U2000 commissioning, maintenance, and redeployment. Generally, the network management system maintenance suite server processes start along with the OS. In Windows Task Manager, check whether msdaemon.exe and msserver.exe are listed. l l If the two processes are listed, the MSuite server has started. If the two processes are not listed, the MSuite server does not start. Navigate to the C: \HWENGR\engineering directory, double-click startserver.bat to start the MSuite server.
2.1.2 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Solaris)


The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. This topic describes how to start the database on the Solaris single-server system.
Prerequisite
Context
Generally, the database starts along with the OS.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the sybase user.
TIP
Run the su - sybase command to switch to the sybase user.
Step 2 Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:
$ ps -ef | grep sybase
Information similar to the following is displayed:

sybase 4848 4847 0 May 18 ? 167:11 server -sDBSVR -d/opt/sybase/data/lv_master -e/opt sybase 5250 5248 0 May 18 ? 0:00 upserver -SDBSVR_back -e/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/insta sybase 4847 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR sybase 5248 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back ... /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/data /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/back /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-1 /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-1
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
25

NOTE
2 Quick Guide
The database is running if the displayed information contains /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/ RUN_DBSVR and /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back.
Step 3 Run the following commands to start the Sybase database if it is not running:
# $ $ $ su - sybase cd /opt/sybase/ASE*/install ./startserver -f ./RUN_DBSVR & ./startserver -f ./RUN_DBSVR_back &
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:

sybase 4848 4847 0 May 18 ? 167:11 server -sDBSVR -d/opt/sybase/data/lv_master -e/opt sybase 5250 5248 0 May 18 ? 0:00 upserver -SDBSVR_back -e/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/insta sybase 4847 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR sybase 5248 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back ...
NOTE
/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/data /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/back /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-1 /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-1

You can log in to the U2000 to manage the network only after starting the computer where the U2000 is installed and the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to start the U2000 server processes on the Solaris single-server system.
Prerequisite
Context
Generally, the U2000 server processes start along with the OS.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the nmsuser user. Step 2 Run the following command to check whether the U2000 is running:
$ daem_ps

nmsuser 27069 nmsuser 27079 1 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0 10:31:39 ? 1:39 imapmrb 0:00 imapwatchdog -cmd start
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
26

nmsuser nmsuser nmsuser nmsuser
NOTE
2 Quick Guide
27075 27086 23679 27116 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 10:31:39 10:31:39 17:57:06 10:31:40 ? ? pts/8 ? 0:50 0:09 0:02 0:52 imapsysd -cmd start imapeventmgr imap_sysmonitor -cmd start ResourceMonitor -cmd start
The U2000 is running if the displayed information contains imap_sysmonitor -cmd start.
Step 3 Run the following command to start the U2000 if it is not running:
$ cd /opt/U2000/server/bin $ ./startnms.sh
Step 4 View the running status of each process through the System Monitor as user nmsuser to log in to the server GUI, as follows:
CAUTION
If you cannot log in to the GUI of the server, run the svc_adm -cmd status command to view the status of processes as user nmsuser. 1. On the desktop of the OS, double-click the U2000 System Monitor shortcut icon.
NOTE
The default ACL range is the entire network segment. It is recommended that you set the ACL restriction range based on the security requirements. .
2.
In the dialog box that is displayed, enter the U2000 user name and password (to open the System Monitor window). The default password of user admin is blank. You must change the default password during first-time login.
NOTE
There are two data transmission modes, namely, Normal and Security(SSL). You can run the ssl_adm -cmd query command to query data transmission modes on the server. The ssl_adm -cmd query command must be run as user nmsuser in Solaris and SUSE Linux OS. The default data transmission mode is Normal.
The U2000 is functioning properly if it can initiate in automatic startup mode, indicating that the U2000 is functioning properly. If a process cannot start, right-click the process and choose Start the Process from the shortcut menu. If the U2000 works properly, contact Huawei engineers. ----End
Follow-up Procedure
The network management system maintenance suite is used to debug, maintain, and redeploy the U2000. Generally, the network management system maintenance suite server processes start along with the OS. If the processes do not start, run the following command:
$ su - root password: password_of_the_root_user # cd /opt/HWENGR/engineering # ./startserver.sh
Run the following command to switch back to the nmsuser user:


# exit
2 Quick Guide
Run the following command to check whether the network management system maintenance suite process is started:
$ ps -ef | grep java root 19913 19907 0 04:04:09 pts/1 0:00 grep java ... root 18382 18311 0 03:42:33 pts/2 12:20 /opt/HWNMSJRE/jre_sol/bin/java server -Dequinox.conf=engineering/conf/installE
NOTE
If the displayed information contains /opt/HWNMSJRE/jre_sol/bin/java -server, it indicates that the network management system maintenance suite process is started.
2.1.3 Starting the U2000 Server (HA System, Windows)


The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. This topic describes how to start the database on the Windows HA system.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the high availability system, log in to the OS as the user who has administrator rights. Step 2 Start the VCS client. 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster Manager - Java Console to start the VCS client. Choose File > New Cluster. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client. Then, click OK.
Step 3 Choose AppService from the navigation tree and click the Resources tab. Then, right-click AppService-SQLServer2000 and choose Online > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes. ----End

You can log in to the U2000 to manage the network only after starting the computer where the U2000 is installed and the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to start the U2000 server processes on the Windows HA system.
Prerequisite
2 Quick Guide
Context
During the installation of the U2000 software, only one default NMS user, admin, is provided. The admin user is a U2000 administrator, who has the highest rights of the U2000 system.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights. Step 2 Run the following command to manually start the U2000 processes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster Manager - Java Console to start a VCS client. Choose File > New Cluster. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client. Then, click OK. Right-click AppService in the navigation tree and choose Online > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The network management system maintenance suite is applicable to U2000 commissioning, maintenance, and redeployment. Generally, the network management system maintenance suite server processes start along with the OS. In Windows Task Manager, check whether msdaemon.exe and msserver.exe are listed. l l If the two processes are listed, the MSuite server has started. If the two processes are not listed, the MSuite server does not start. Navigate to the C: \HWENGR\engineering directory, double-click startserver.bat to start the MSuite server.
2.1.4 Starting the U2000 Server in a High Availability System (Solaris)

Four steps are required to start the U2000 server in a high availability system (Solaris): power on the server safely, check the high availability system, start the database, and start the U2000 server processes.

The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. This topic describes how to start the database on the HA system (Solaris).
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
The OS must have been started. The VCS service must have started along with the OS and the disk must function properly.
2 Quick Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Perform the following operations to start the Sybase database service in the HA system: l GUI mode: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Log in to the primary site as user root. Run the following command to start the VCS client:
# hagui &
Choose File > New Cluster from the main menu. In the window that is displayed, enter the IP address of the server and click OK. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password of the VCS client. Click OK. Expand the AppService node in the navigation tree, and expand the SybaseBk node. Right-click BackupServer and check whether the Enabled check box is selected. If it is not selected, select it and choose Online > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes. Wait until BackupServer and DatabaseServer on the Resources tab page are available, which indicates that the Sybase database service is running.
6.
l CLI mode: 1. 2. Log in to the primary site as user root. Run the following command to start the Sybase database service: # hares -online BackupServer -sys hostname ----End

You can log in to the U2000 to manage the network only after starting the computer where the U2000 is installed and the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to start the U2000 server processes on the Solaris HA system.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the primary site as user root. Step 2 Start the U2000 server processes. l GUI mode: 1. Open a terminal window, run the following command:
# hagui&
NOTE
If the login window fails to be displayed and the terminal displays a message indicating that the current status is "STALE_ADMIN_WAIT", run the # hasys -force host name of node command.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Click Connect to Cluster name.


NOTE
2 Quick Guide
If you are logging in to the VCS for the first time, you need to create a new Cluster. a. Click File > New Cluster. b. Enter the IP address of application network. c. Click OK.
3.
Enter User Name and Password.

NOTE
The default user name of the VCS is admin and the password is password.
4. 5.
Click OK. In the Cluster Explorer window, right-click the AppService resource group in the navigation tree and choose Online > primary from the shortcut menu to start the Sybase process and U2000 server process.
TIP
Click the Resources tab to view the start status of each resource.
Normally, on the Status tab page, Online is displayed for State in the Group Status on Member Systems area on the active site, and Online on primary is displayed for Status in the Resource Status area.
NOTE
l In actual configuration, use the actual host name. l If a fault has occurred during start of the AppService process, right-click AppService and choose clear fault from the shortcut menu to clear the fault. Then, choose Online > host_name to start the AppService process.
6.
In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
l CLI mode: # hagrp -online AppService -sys hostname ----End
2.1.5 Logging In to the U2000 Client

Log in to a U2000 using the client, and then perform management operations in the GUI of the U2000 client.
Prerequisite
Before logging in to the U2000 client, ensure that the following conditions are met: l l The U2000 processes are started. The network communication between the U2000 client and the U2000 is available.
NOTE
Run the ping peer_IP_address command to check network communication.
In a single-server system (centralized), the IP address is the system IP address of the server. In a single-server system (distributed), the IP address is the system IP address of the master server. In a high availability system (centralized), the IP address is the IP address of NMS application network in the active site server.
2 Quick Guide
In a high availability system (distributed), the IP address is the IP address of NMS application network in the master server of active site. l l The ports used between the U2000 client and the U2000 are opened by the firewall. The IP address of the client must be contained in the access control list (ACL) that is configured on the U2000.
NOTE
The default ACL range is the entire network segment. It is recommended that you set the ACL restriction range based on the security requirements.
l l
The legitimate U2000 user account and password must be allocated. U2000 Licenses have been correctly loaded to the server.
Context
By default, after you enter an incorrect password for three consecutive times, the user account that you use is locked by the U2000. The super user admin can unlock the account of a common user. In addition, the system can automatically unlock the account in 30 minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS where the client program is installed. l On Windows OS, log in to the OS as user administrator. l On Solaris OS, log in to the GUI as user nmsuser. Step 2 On the OS desktop, double-click the U2000 Client shortcut icon. The Login dialog box is displayed.
TIP
l In the case of a Windows OS, you can double-click the startup_all_global.bat file in the D:\U2000 \client directory to start the client. l In the case of a Solaris OS, you can run the command of ./startup_all_global.sh in the /opt/U2000/ client directory to start the client.
Step 3 In the Server drop-down list, select the server to be logged in to. Then, set User Name and Password to the valid values, and click Login. l If the intended server is not configured, perform the following operations to add a server: 1. 2. Click the ... button. In the Server List dialog box, click Add. In the Add Server Information dialog box, set the parameters of the U2000 server to be added, and then click OK. Table 2-1 Server parameter settings Parameter Name Settings It is recommended that you set this parameter to the IP address for login or the related host name.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
32
2 Quick Guide
Parameter Server Name (or IP Address)
Settings It is recommended that you set this parameter to an IP address. l In a single-server system (centralized), the IP address is the system IP address of the server. l In a single-server system (distributed), the IP address is the system IP address of the master server. l In a high availability system (centralized), the IP address is the IP address of NMS application network in the active site server. l In a high availability system (distributed), the IP address is the IP address of NMS application network in the master server of active site.
Port
There are two data transmission modes, namely, Normal and Security(SSL). By default, port 31037 is used in Normal mode and port 31039 is used in Security(SSL) mode. There are two data transmission modes, namely, Normal and Security(SSL). You can run the ssl_adm -cmd query command to query data transmission modes on the server. The ssl_adm cmd query command must be run as user nmsuser in Solaris and SUSE Linux OS. The default data transmission mode is Normal.
NOTE l If the client and server applications are on the same host and the server uses the SSL mode, then the client can use the Normal or SSL mode. The client can only use the Normal mode if the server uses the Normal mode. l If the client and server applications are not on the same host, the client can log in to the server only when it uses the same mode as the server.
Mode
3.
In the Server List dialog box, select a record from the record list. Then, click OK.
l When you log in to the U2000 client, if the system detects that the local version is earlier than the server version, a prompt is displayed, asking you whether to upgrade the client. Click Yes to upgrade the client. Click No to log in to the client. ----End
Result
After the login to the U2000 client is successful, the U2000 client obtains related data from the U2000.
2.1.6 Shutting Down U2000 Clients

You must ensure that all U2000 clients are shut down before you shut down the U2000 server.
Prerequisite
The U2000 clients must be started properly.
2 Quick Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the main menu. Step 2 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. If certain operations are performed on the Main Topology but not saved, a prompt is displayed, asking you whether to save them. ----End
2.1.7 Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows)
Three steps are required to shut down the U2000 server: stop the U2000 server processes, shut down the database, and power off the server safely.
Stopping the U2000 Server Processes

Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop the U2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system time of the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes how to stop the U2000 server processes on the Windows single-server system.
Prerequisite
Exit all running U2000 clients.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights. Step 2 In Windows Task Manager, view the startup information about the U2000 server processes. If imapmrb.exe, imapwatchdog.exe, imapsysd.exe, imapeventmgr.exe, imap_sysmonitor.exe, ResourceMonitor.exe, imapsvcd.exe, EmfGnlDevDm.exe, and imapPortTrunkSvc.exe are displayed in the process list, the U2000 server processes have started. Step 3 In the U2000 software installation directory, for example, D:\U2000\server\bin, run stopnms.bat to stop U2000 server processes. ----End
Result
In Windows Task Manager, click the Processes tab and check that imapmrb.exe, imapwatchdog.exe, imapsysd.exe, imapeventmgr.exe, imap_sysmonitor.exe, ResourceMonitor.exe, imapsvcd.exe, EmfGnlDevDm.exe, and imapPortTrunkSvc.exe have been stopped.
Shutting Down the Database

The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down the database, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the database on the Windows single-server system.
2 Quick Guide
Prerequisite
The U2000 server processes must have been stopped.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights. Step 2 Choose Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Service Manager to check whether Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running. The SQL Server Service Manager dialog box is displayed. If Start/Continue is dimmed, Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running. Step 3 Choose Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Service Manager. Step 4 In the dialog box that is displayed, click Step 5 In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes. ----End .
2.1.8 Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Solaris)
Three steps are required to shut down the U2000 server: stop the U2000 server processes, shut down the database, and power off the server safely.

Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop the U2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system time of the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes how to stop the U2000 server processes on the Solaris single-server system.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the nmsuser user. Step 2 To check the running status of the U2000 process, run the following command:
$ daem_ps

nmsuser nmsuser nmsuser nmsuser nmsuser nmsuser 27069 27079 27075 27086 23679 27116 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 10:31:39 10:31:39 10:31:39 10:31:39 17:57:06 10:31:40 ? ? ? ? pts/8 ? 1:39 0:00 0:50 0:09 0:02 0:52 imapmrb imapwatchdog -cmd start imapsysd -cmd start imapeventmgr imap_sysmonitor -cmd start ResourceMonitor -cmd start
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
35

NOTE
2 Quick Guide
The U2000 is running if the displayed information contains imap_sysmonitor -cmd start.
Step 3 Run the following commands to stop U2000 if it is running:

$ cd /opt/U2000/server/bin $ ./stopnms.sh
----End
Result
Run the following command to check the running status of the U2000 process:
$ daem_ps
NOTE
The process is stopped if the displayed information is empty.

The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down the database, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the database on the Solaris single-server system.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the sybase user.
TIP
Run the su - sybase command to switch to the sybase user.
Step 2 Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:

sybase 4848 4847 0 May 18 ? 167:11 server -sDBSVR -d/opt/sybase/data/lv_master -e/opt sybase 5250 5248 0 May 18 ? 0:00 upserver -SDBSVR_back -e/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/insta sybase 4847 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR sybase 5248 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back ...
NOTE
/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/data /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/back /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-1 /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-1
Step 3 Run the following commands to stop the Sybase database if it is running:
$ su - sybase $ . /opt/sybase/SYBASE.sh $ cd /opt/sybase/OCS*/bin $ ./isql -SDBSVR -Usa -PChangeme123 1> shutdown SYB_BACKUP
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
36

2> go 1> shutdown 2> go
NOTE
2 Quick Guide
l Leave a space between the dot (.) and the command /opt/sybase/SYBASE.sh. l In the ./isql -SDBSVR -Usa -PChangeme123 command, Changeme123 specifies the password for the sa user of the Sybase database.
----End
Result
Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:
NOTE
The database is stoped if the displayed information does not contain /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/ RUN_DBSVR and /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back.
2.1.9 Shutting Down the High Availability System (Windows)

This topic describes how to shut down a system. Do not power off a U2000 when it is properly managing NEs. The U2000 only needs to be shut down in special circumstances, such as switching the power supply.
Procedure
Step 1 Stop all running U2000 clients. Step 2 On the primary site, do as follows to stop the U2000 processes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster Manager - Java Console to start the VCS client. Choose File > New Cluster. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in the following figure. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client. Then, click OK. Right-click AppService in the navigation tree and choose Offline > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
Wait patiently. If all the resources on the Resources tab page turn grey, it indicates that the NMS processes are stopped. Step 3 Log in to the server of the active site and run the following commands to stop the VCS service: C:\> hastop -all -force In the Task Manager, check whether the had.exe process exists. If yes, right-click the process and stop it. Step 4 Log in to the server of the standby site and perform the preceding step to stop the VCS service on the server of the standby site. Step 5 Shut down the OS of the standby site.
2 Quick Guide
1. 2.
Choose Start > Shut Down. In the dialog box that is displayed, select Shut Down. Then, click OK.
Step 6 Shut down the OS of the active site. 1. 2. Choose Start > Shut Down. In the dialog box that is displayed, select Shut Down. Then, click OK.
----End

Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop the U2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system time of the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes how to stop the U2000 server processes on the Windows HA system.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights. Step 2 End the U2000 processes of the Veritas high availability system. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster Manager - Java Console to start the VCS client. Choose File > New Cluster. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client. Then, click OK. Choose AppService from the navigation tree and click the Resources tab. Then, right-click NMSServer and choose Offline > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
----End

The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down the database, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the database on the Windows HA system.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the high availability system, log in to the OS as the user who has administrator rights.
2 Quick Guide
Step 2 Start the VCS client. 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster Manager - Java Console to start the VCS client. Choose File > New Cluster. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client. Then, click OK.
Step 3 Choose AppService from the navigation tree and click the Resources tab. Then, right-click NMSServer and choose Offline > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes. Step 4 After the NMSServer resource is stopped, right-click AppService-SQLServer2000 and choose Offline > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes. ----End
2.1.10 Shutting Down the U2000 Server in a High Availability System (Solaris)
Four steps are required to shut down the U2000 server in a high availability system (Solaris): stop the U2000 server processes, shut down the database, stop the VCS service, and power off the server safely.

Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop the U2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system time of the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes how to stop the U2000 server processes on the Solaris HA system.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the active site as the root user. Step 2 Stop the U2000 server processes. l GUI mode: 1. Open a terminal window, run the following command:
# hagui&
NOTE
If the login window fails to be displayed and the terminal displays a message indicating that the current status is "STALE_ADMIN_WAIT", run the # hasys -force host name of node command.
2.
Click Connect to Cluster name.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
39

NOTE
2 Quick Guide
If you are logging in to the VCS for the first time, you need to create a new Cluster. a. Click File > New Cluster. b. Enter the IP address of application network. c. Click OK.
3.
Enter User Name and Password.

NOTE
The default user name of the VCS is admin and the password is password.
4. 5. 6.
Click OK. Choose AppService from the navigation tree. Click the Resources tab. Right-click NMSServer and choose Offline > Host name from the shortcut menu. Wait about 1 minute. If the NMSServer icon changes to grey, the U2000 processes have been stopped.
l CLI mode: # hagrp -offline AppService -sys hostname ----End

The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down the database, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the database on the Solaris HA system.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Perform the following operations to disable the Sybase database service at the primary site in the HA system:
NOTE
By default, the Sybase database service at the secondary site is not running.
l GUI mode: 1. 2. 3. 4. Log in to the primary site as user root. Run the following command to start the VCS client at the primary site: # hagui & In the Cluster Monitor window, click the server record in the list. In the dialog box that is displayed, enter the user name and the password of the VCS, and click OK.
NOTE
The default user of the VCS is admin and the default password is password.
5.
On the VCS client of the primary site, right-click the NMSServer node and choose Offline > hostname from the shortcut menu.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
2 Quick Guide
6. 7. 8. 9.
In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes. Right-click the BackupServer node and choose Offline > hostname from the shortcut menu. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes. Right-click the DatabaseServer node and choose Offline > hostname from the shortcut menu.
10. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes. l CLI mode: 1. 2. 3. Log in to the primary site as user root. Run the following command to shut down the U2000: # hares -offline NMSServer -sys hostname Run the following command to disable the Sybase database service: # hares -offline BackupServer -sys hostname # hares -offline DatabaseServer -sys hostname Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database service is disabled: # ps -ef | grep sybase If the following message is displayed, the Sybase database service has been disabled:
root 9629 14603 0 07:46:52 pts/3 0:00 grep sybase
----End
Stopping the VCS Service

This topic describes how to stop the VCS service.
Prerequisite
The U2000 and database must have been shut down.
Context
Before powering off the server safely, manually stop the VCS service; otherwise, the server may fail to shut down properly.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS on the server as the root user. Step 2 Run the following command to stop the VCS service: # hastop -all -force ----End
2.2 Web LCT Quck Guide

The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT.
2 Quick Guide
2.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to NEs

To configure and manage NEs by using the Web LCT, first connect the Web LCT to the NEs with Ethernet cables or serial port cables.
Procedure
l Connect the Web LCT to the NEs by using Ethernet cables. 1. 2. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Web LCT computer. Route the cable to the equipment side and connect the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable to the NMS interface of the equipment panel.
NOTE
The IP address of the NMS and the IP address of the equipment must belong to the same network segment.
Connect the Web LCT to the NEs over the DCN. 1. 2. Connect the Web LCT computer to the DCN using an Ethernet cable. Connect one end of another Ethernet cable to the NMS interface of the equipment panel and connect the other end of the line to the DCN. Connect the serial port cable to the Web LCT computer. Route the cable to the equipment and connect the RS 232 connector of the serial port cable to the RS 232 interface of the equipment panel.
NOTE
Connect the Web LCT to the NEs by using the RS 232 serial port cable. 1. 2.
For the location of the RS 232 serial interface and Ethernet interface on the equipment, see the Hardware Description for your equipment.
----End
2.2.2 Starting the Web LCT

You need to start the Web LCT before logging in to configure and manage NEs.
Prerequisite
The Web LCT computer and equipment must be correctly connected.
Procedure
Step 1 Start the Web LCT computer. Step 2 Double-click the shortcut icon Start Web LCT on the desktop. The Web LCT starts and the login page for the Web LCT is displayed. Step 3 Enter Password.
NOTE
By default, the User Name is admin, and the initial Password is admin. To protect the Web LCT from illegal logins, immediately change the initial password and keep the new one.
Step 4 Click Login. The NE List is displayed. ----End

2 Quick Guide
2.2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT

You can log in to the Web LCT server through Internet Explorer without installing the server on the local computer.
Prerequisite
l l The Web LCT server must be started correctly. The Internet Explorer pop-up blocker must be turned off.
Procedure
Step 1 Open Internet Explorer. Step 2 Enter the IP address of the Web LCT server in the address field. The Web LCT Login dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
Enter the IP address of the server, for example, http://10.70.73.1:11080/WebLCT. The four octets 10.70.73.1 is the IP address of the server computer and 11080 is the port number.
NOTE
The IP address of the Web LCT server is case-sensitive. Ensure that WebLCT is entered correctly.
Step 3 Enter the Password.

NOTE
By default, the User Name is admin, and the initial Password is admin. To protect the Web LCT from illegal logins, immediately change this password and keep the new one. If a user account is used to log in to the NE with incorrect passwords for consecutive five times, the user account is locked and will be unlocked 15 minutes after the last failed login. Two login attempts are considered as consecutive if the interval between the two attempts is within three minutes. The unlocking operation cannot be performed through the NMS. Only the system can (automatically) unlock the user account. Here locking means that the user account of a specified NE is locked and the other NEs are not affected.
Step 4 Click Login. The NE List is displayed.

NOTE
An NE supports the login of a single Web LCT user at a time. Concurrent logins of several Web LCT users on an NE is not supported on an NE.
----End
2.2.4 Shutting Down the Web LCT

You are recommended to shut down the Web LCT by strictly observing the following procedure.
Prerequisite
The Web LCT must be started normally.
Procedure
Step 1 Click
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
to close the NE Explorer.

2 Quick Guide
Step 2 lick
to close the NE list.
Step 3 Double-click the shortcut icon for Web LCT shutdown to stop the Tomcat service. ----End
2.3 Entering the Common Views

This task describes how to display the common views of the network management system (NMS) and functions of the views.
2.3.1 Opening the Main Topology on the U2000

On the Main Topology, you can manage topologies, protection subnets, and trails.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with " Monitor Group" authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment and Materials

U2000
Procedure
l l To open the Main Topology, log in to the U2000 client. Choose Window > Main Topology from the Main Menu.
----End
2.3.2 NE List on the Web LCT

NE List is the main user interface of the Web LCT. The Web LCT performs the following NE management operations through NE List: adding NEs, logging in to NEs, logging out of NEs, deleting NEs, browsing system logs, and setting time format.
NOTE
NE List is refreshed periodically and the NE information is automatically refreshed every five seconds. The Web LCT supports the focus display function. After the mouse cursor resides on a shortcut icon for about two seconds, the description of the shortcut icon is displayed. After the Web LCT client is successfully started, the NE List window is displayed. The Web LCT supports backup of the NE database to the SCC board so that the configuration data of the NE can be stored.
User Interface
Figure 2-1 shows the NE List window of the Web LCT.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
44
2 Quick Guide
Figure 2-1 NE List
2.3.3 Opening the NE Explorer

The NE Explorer is the key interface for the U2000 to configure a single station. After opening the NE Explorer, you can configure, manage and maintain each NE, board or port in a hierarchical manner.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with " Monitor Group" authority or higher.
Background Information
You can open a maximum of five NE Explorer windows at the same time.

U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)
Procedure on the U2000

l Double-click an optical NE on the Main Topology. In the displayed window, right-click an NE in the left-hand pane and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800/6800, the icon of the NE can be directly placed on the Main Topology. Double-click the NE icon and then click to display the NE Explorer.
----End
Procedure on the Web LCT

l In the NE List, select an NE and click NE Explorer, or double-click the NE in the NE List. Then, the NE Explorer is displayed.
----End
2 Quick Guide
2.3.4 Opening the NE Panel

The NE Panel displays subracks and boards on an NE. The color of the icon indicates the current state of the component. On the NMS, the NE Panel is a key user interface for configuring, monitoring, and maintaining equipment.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.


l In the Main Topology, double-click an NE icon and select the NE in the pane on the left side. The pane on the right side displays the NE Panel by default.
----End

l Right-click the NE and choose NE Explorer. The pane on the right side displays the NE Panel by default.
----End
User Interface
NE Panel is product-specific. Figure 2-2 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32. Figure 2-3 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Figure 2-4shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 6800. Figure 2-5shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 3800.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
46
2 Quick Guide
Figure 2-2 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
47
2 Quick Guide
Figure 2-3 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
48
2 Quick Guide
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
49
2 Quick Guide
Figure 2-4 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 6800
Figure 2-5 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 3800
2.4 Using Online Help

Online Help provides help information about the U2000.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Help > Help Topics from the Main Menu. The Online Help page is displayed.

TIP
2 Quick Guide
When using the U2000 client, press the F1 key to quickly display the related Online Help page.
----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
51
3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During Deployment
3
l l
Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During Deployment
This section describes the general commissioning procedures. The commissioning procedures for the equipment can be divided into two parts: optical power commissioning and network commissioning. Optical power commissioning procedures individually commission the optical power values of NEs and boards based on the optical signal flow. They also remove the abnormal attenuation of lines or boards based on the requirements of optical power, and the gain and insertion losses of the boards. Network commissioning procedures include the commissioning protection function, testing bit errors, and other functional commissioning operations at the network level.
Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 provides the general commissioning procedures.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
52
Figure 3-1 General commissioning procedures for OptiX OSN 8800/6800

Installation
Installing the Equipment Creating an NE Creating Fibers Creating OCh trails using the trail search function
Checking the Installation Powering On and Checking the Equipment Setting Up Optical Paths
Creating an Optical Network Element Uploading the NE Data
Checking Network-Wide Software Version

Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE
Configuring the ROADM
Setting NE ID and IP Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS
Configuring NE and Network
Commissioning Optical Power Configuring the Service Configuring Port of the Board Refer to Configuring the Service on Configuration Guide
Configuration & Commissioning
Configuring the WDM Protection Configuring the WDM Feature Refer to Configuring the Feature on Feature Description
Commissioning the System
Testing Bit Errors Backing Up the NE Data
: Mandatory : Optional
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
53
Figure 3-2 General commissioning procedures for OptiX OSN 3800

Installation
Installing the Equipment Creating an NE Creating Fibers Creating OCh trails using the trail search function
Checking the Installation Powering On and Checking the Equipment Setting Up Optical Paths
Creating an Optical Network Element Uploading the NE Data
Checking Network-Wide Software Version

Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE
Setting NE ID and IP Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS
Commissioning Optical Power Configuring the Service Refer to Configuring the Service on Configuration Guide
Configuring Port of the Board
Configuration & Commissioning
Configuring the WDM Protection Configuring the WDM Feature Refer to Configuring the Feature on Feature Description
Commissioning the System Testing Bit Errors Backing Up the NE Data
: Mandatory : Optional
You can perform the commissioning and configuration during deployment of the equipment by using either the iManager U2000 (hereinafter referred to as U2000) or the OptiX iManager U2000 Web LCT (hereinafter referred to as Web LCT). All the operations that can be performed on the Web LCT can be performed on the U2000. Compared with U2000, the Web LCT has lower requirements on the computer hardware and can be started quickly. Table 3-1 lists the tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment. Table 3-1 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment No. Task Mandato ry/ Optional Mandatory Mandatory Tool
1 2
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Creating NEs in Batches. Creating Optical NEs.

U2000 or Web LCT U2000

54
No.
Task
Mandato ry/ Optional Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Optional
Tool
3 4 5 6 7
Uploading the NE Data. Setting NE ID and IP. Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually. Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE. Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication. Perform this task when the network uses HWECC for communication and more than four Huawei equipment NEs use the extended ECC for communication. Configuring IP over DCC. Perform this task when the network uses IP over DCC for communication. Configuring OSI over DCC. Perform this task when the network uses OSI over DCC for communication.
U2000 U2000 or Web LCT U2000 or Web LCT U2000 or Web LCT U2000
Optional Optional Optional Mandatory on the U2000 Mandatory on the U2000 Optional according to the network Mandatory
U2000 U2000 U2000 U2000
8 9
Checking Network-Wide Software Version. Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode. Perform this task on the U2000. Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search. Perform this task on the U2000. Creating Single-Station Optical CrossConnection. Perform this task when ROADM stations are configured on the actual network. Commission optical power by using one of the following methods as required: l Commissioning Optical Power on Site l Remotely Commissioning Optical Power l Automatic Commissioning
NOTE See Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System to commission optical power of a 40Gbit/s system.
10
U2000
11
U2000 or Web LCT
12
U2000 or Web LCT
13 14
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Configuring Boards. Configuring Services.

Mandatory Mandatory
U2000 or Web LCT U2000

55
No.
Task
Mandato ry/ Optional Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Optional
Tool
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Configuring System Features. Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms. Testing Protection Switching. Testing Data Features. Testing System Features. Testing Ethernet Service Channels. Configuring Orderwire of OTN System and Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS System. Testing Orderwire Functions. Testing Bit Errors. Checking the entire network against the Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment. Ensure that the network configurations are correct. Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board.
U2000 U2000 or Web LCT U2000 U2000 U2000 U2000 U2000 or Web LCT U2000 or Web LCT OTN analyzer or SDH analyzer U2000 or Web LCT U2000 or Web LCT
22 23 24
Optional Mandatory Mandatory
25
Mandatory
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
56
4 Configuring NE and Network
4
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to configure NEs and networks. 4.1 Creating NEs in Batches When the U2000/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs that communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to which the IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is quicker and more accurate than manual creation. Therefore, the method of creating NEs in batches is recommended. 4.2 Creating Optical NEs The U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for management. There are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA and WDM_OTM. 4.3 Logging In to an NE On the U2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE. 4.4 Uploading the NE Data By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network management system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that you configure the NE data by uploading the data. 4.5 Setting NE ID and IP ECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word for searching on the U2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you must assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision is caused. In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or expansion process, if you need to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can change the NE ID on the U2000. 4.6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually For NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time is consistent with the U2000/Web LCT server time, so that the U2000/Web LCT can correctly record the time that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with the time of the U2000/Web LCT server.
4.7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by maintenance personnel. 4.8 Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE takes the auto-extended ECC communication. When more than eight Huawei devices need to use the extended ECC communication, the manually extended ECC communication must be used instead. 4.9 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions After you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of each board on the NE. 4.10 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flow diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number of fiber connections one by one. 4.11 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail information does not exist at the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, search for the cross-connections and fiber connections data over the network to generate end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000. 4.12 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of singlestation optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured. 4.13 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64 The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI1 board in the subrack. 4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16 The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI board in the subrack. 4.15 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800 The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
58
4.1 Creating NEs in Batches

When the U2000/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs that communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to which the IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is quicker and more accurate than manual creation. Therefore, the method of creating NEs in batches is recommended.
Prerequisite
l l l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" authority. The U2000 must communicate properly with the GNE. The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.
For Web LCT, only NEs that use the Ethernet port to communicate can be searched out.

U2000 or Web LCT

1. 2. 3. Choose File > Discovery > NE... from the Main Menu. The NE Discovery window is displayed. Select the Transport NE Search tab. Select the search mode from the drop-down list of Search Mode. l Sets the Search Mode as Search for NE. (1) In the Search Domain dialog box, click Add and the Input Search Domain dialog box is displayed. (2) Set Address Type to IP Address Range of GNE, IP Address of GNE, or NSAP Address, and enter Search Address, User Name, and Password. Then, click OK.
NOTE
You can repeat the above steps to add more search domains. You can delete the system default search domain. l If you use IP address to search for NEs: l only the NEs (not across routers) in the same network segment can be searched out in normal conditions if you select the IP Address Range of GNE because broadcasting is usually disabled for the routers in the network (to prevent network storm). l search out the NEs in the network segment by using the IP Address of GNE if you need to search for the NEs across routers. l If you search for NEs by using the NSAP address, you can only select NSAP Address.
(3) In the Search for NE dialog box, you can perform the following operations: Select Create NE after search, and enter NE user and Password.

NOTE
l The default NE user is root. l The default password is password.
Select Upload after being created, so that the NE data can be uploaded to the U2000 after the NE is created.
NOTE
You can select all options in the Search for NE area to search for NEs, create NEs, and upload the NE data at a time.
l Sets the Search Mode is IP auto discovery.

NOTE
If you fail to enter a network segment correctly, enable IP auto discovery. After enabling IP auto discovery, you can obtain the IP address of the GNE and search out all the NEs related to the GNE.
CAUTION
In the case of NEs that are connected to the NMS through the router, these NEs cannot be searched out by IP auto discovery. They can be searched out only by network segment. 4. Click Next and the Result area is displayed.
TIP
You can select the Display uncreated NEs to only display the uncreated NEs.
5.
Optional: Click Change NE ID. Then, the Change NE ID dialog box is displayed. Users can check against the Bar Code List by the value of Bar Code, and then modify the NE Name, Extend NE ID, Base NE ID, and IP Address fields accordingly.
NOTE
The Bar Code List is provided by the hardware installation personnel to the software commissioning personnel. The list contains the bar codes of stations.
6.
Optional: If you select only Search for NE, after the U2000 completes the search, you can select the uncreated NEs from the Relust list and click Create. The Create dialog box is displayed. Enter the NE User and Password. Click OK. Optional: Select the NEs from the Result list and click Set Gateway NE. The Set Gateway NE dialog box is displayed. Enter the message, and click OK.
7.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. The Search NE dialog box is displayed. Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed. Click Add, and the New Domain dialog box is displayed. Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address, and enter an IP address in the Domain Address field. Click OK.

NOTE
You can repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains.
6. 7.
Click Cancel to exit the Manage Domain Search dialog box. Select appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click Search.
NOTE
l The NE search function searches out only the NEs in the specified network segment. l When the search is in progress, you can click End Search.
8. 9.
After the search is complete, select an NE from the list and click Add NE. A prompt message is displayed, indicating that the NE is successfully added. Click OK. Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or rightclick the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed, enter lct and password in the User Name and Password fields, and then click OK.
TIP
You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift. If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box, you can log in to multiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line. If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box, you do not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name and password for login last time.
Reference Information
Category (Optional) Related Operation Item Creating a Single NE Description If you have obtained the ID of an NE, you can create the NE manually. You can switch a login NE user without logging out of the U2000 or Web LCT. You can change the NE name as required. This operation does not affect the running of the NE. If you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the U2000 or Web LCT.
Switching a Logged-In NE User Modifying the NE Name
Deleting NEs
Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows: l l The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user. The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
61
4.2 Creating Optical NEs

The U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for management. There are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA and WDM_OTM.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" authority. For OptiX OSN 8800, the license must be installed and the license must support creating the NE of the type.

U2000

1. 2. 3. 4. Right-click in the Main Topology and choose New > NE. In the Create NE dialog box that is displayed, click corresponding to Optical NE in the left pane, and then select the type of the optical NE that you want to create. Click Basic Attributes and enter the attributes such as the optical NE name according to the customer's planning. Click Resource Division and select an NE or a board from the idle optical NEs, and then click
TIP
To re-allocate the resources of an optical NE that has been created, right-click the optical NE and choose Object Attribute. Click the Resource Division tab, select an NE or a board from the list on the left, and then click to allocate the NE or board to the optical NE.
5. 6.
Click OK. Click the Main Topology to create the optical NE icon.
Category (Optional) Related Operation Item Modifying the Optical NE Name Description See this section to change the name of an optical NE independently.
4.3 Logging In to an NE
On the U2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.
Prerequisite
The NE must be created and must be working normally. The user must have logged in to the U2000.

U2000
On the U2000, a user can see an NE only when the user has the authority to log in to the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the desired ONE icon in the Main Topology to display the NE Panel for the ONE. Step 2 Right-click the NE and choose Login from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
4.4 Uploading the NE Data

By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network management system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that you configure the NE data by uploading the data.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The NE must be created successfully.

U2000

1. 2. 3. 4. In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management. . In Configuration Data In the left topology tree, select a created NE and click Management List, select an NE whose NE Status is Unconfigured. Click Upload. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK to start the upload. When the upload is complete, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
63
Category (Optional) Related Operation Item Configuring the NE Data Description You can configure the NE data in upload or manual mode.
4.5 Setting NE ID and IP

ECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word for searching on the U2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you must assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision is caused. In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or expansion process, if you need to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can change the NE ID on the U2000.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE and network operator authority or higher. The ECC GNE or ECC non-gateway NE must be created.

U2000
The master and slave subracks are displayed as one NE on the U2000. They share one NE ID and one NE IP.
Precautions
CAUTION
l l Changing the NE ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt NE communication. Before changing the NE ID, delete the function connected with the NE ID, for example, the Client 1+1 Protection group, the Intra-Board 1+1 Protection group, the Optical Wavelength Shared Protection group, the Optical Line Protection group, IPA, ALC, APE, EAPE, fiber connection and so on. After changing the NE ID, reconnect the fiber connection and re-configure the protection group, IPA, ALC and other function connected with NE ID on the U2000. Before changing the NE ID, delete the manually added monitoring relationship between the WMU board and the OTU board on the NE. After changing the NE ID, restore the deleted monitoring relationship on the U2000.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
64
Procedure
l For Non-Gateway NEs 1. 2. 3. Log in to U2000, delete the NE service configuration and the NE fiber connection. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Click the Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID window, enter the New ID and the New Extended ID. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box.
CAUTION
For non-gateway NEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between this NE and other NEs on the U2000. l For Gateway NEs 1. 2. 3. Log in to U2000, delete the NE service configuration and the NE fiber connection. In the NE Explorer, select the GNE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Click Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID window, enter the New ID and the New Extended ID. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box.
CAUTION
For GNEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between this NE and other NEs on the U2000. Also, you need to specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs that are originally connected to the GNE. l Setting NEs IP
NOTE
If the IP address of an NE is not changed before you change the NE ID, the IP address of the NE varies with the NE ID. Once the IP address of the NE is changed, the association between the NE ID and IP address is deleted automatically.
1. 2. 3.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Set the communication parameters of the NE, including IP, extended ID, gateway IP and subnet mask. Click Apply. Click OK in the two displayed Warning dialog boxes. Then click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.
NOTE
For GNEs, after you set the NE IP, you need to specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs that are originally connected to the GNE.
----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
65
4.6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually
For NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time is consistent with the U2000/Web LCT server time, so that the U2000/Web LCT can correctly record the time that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with the time of the U2000/Web LCT server.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. On the Web LCT, the synchronous mode of NE time must be set to NM or NULL.

U2000 or Web LCT
Synchronizing the NE time does not affect services. Before synchronizing the NE time, verify that the system time on the U2000/Web LCT server is correct. If you want to change the system time, exit the U2000/Web LCT to reset the time, and then restart the U2000/Web LCT.

1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Function Tree. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. A dialog box is displayed. Click Yes. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. In this manner, the NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.

1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Function Tree. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply. Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. In this manner, the NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
66
Category (Optional) Related Operation Item Configuring the NE Time Description With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and the U2000/Web LCT server time.
4.7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by maintenance personnel.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The NE time must be synchronized with the U2000/Web LCT server time.

U2000 or Web LCT

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose Performance > Set NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Main Menu of the U2000. Select an NE in the left-hand pane, and click Select the desired NE in the right-hand pane. Select the check box 15-Minute, and click radio button Enabled; or select the check box 24-Hour, and click radio button Enabled. behind From field, select the date, and enter the time to set the beginning Click the time and end time for monitoring.
NOTE
The start time must be later than the current time of the NMS and NE. If you need to monitor the performance immediately, set the start time just a little later than the current time of the NMS and NE. To set the end time, select the check box before To first. The end time must be later than the start time. If the check box before To is not selected, it indicates that the monitoring function is enabled all the time.
6. 7.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Click Apply. The Warning dialog box is displayed, click OK. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close to finish the operation.

1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor Time from the Function Tree. In NE Performance Monitor Time, select the desired NE.
NOTE
An NE must be selected at this step. Otherwise, it is impossible for you to proceed with the task.
2.
In the Set 15-Minute Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind the From field to set the start time for monitoring the 15-minute performance of the NE.
TIP
The method of setting the time is as follows: In the hour, minute, or second time control, right-click the time to increase it, or press Shift and right-click the time to decrease it.
3. 4.
behind the From In the Set 24-Hour Monitoring field, select Enabled and click field to set the start time for monitoring the 24-minute performance of the NE. Click Apply to apply the settings.
Category (Optional) Related Operation Item Performance Management Description To ensure the normal functioning of the network, the network management and maintenance personnel should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance management measures.
4.8 Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication

When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE takes the auto-extended ECC communication. When more than eight Huawei devices need to use the extended ECC communication, the manually extended ECC communication must be used instead.
Prerequisite
The NE must be created on the U2000. The communication between the U2000 and the NE must be normal. The communication between NEs must be normal.

U2000
Precaution
The extended ECC communication is disabled by default. To use the automatic extended ECC communication, you must enable the extended ECC communication on the U2000 as follows:
In the NE Explorer, select Communication > ECC Management from the function tree, and click Apply. And click OK in the Warning dialog box.
l l l l OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port on the EFI1 and EFI2 board. OptiX OSN 8800 T16 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port on the EFI board. OptiX OSN 6800 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port on the AUX board. OptiX OSN 3800 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port on the AUX board.
When configuring the manually extended ECC, one server end NE can have a maximum of seven client end NEs. One client end NE can function as the server end NE of another ECC group. Normally, the NE without the optical supervisory channel board is configured as the client end, and the NE with the optical supervisory channel board is configured as the server end. The manually extended ECC communication can be set on site or remotely. When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, with the normal communication between the NE and the U2000, set the client NE first and then the server NE. When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, set the NE without the optical supervisory channel board first and then the NE with the optical supervisory channel board. In the case of the NE without the optical supervisory channel board, the communication between the U2000 and the NE stops after the ECC extended mode is set remotely. The communication between the U2000 and the NE is restored after the setting on the NE with the optical supervisory channel board at the station is complete.
CAUTION
When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, strictly follow the setting sequence as required. The ECC extended mode of the remote NEs must be modified first, and that of the gateway NE must be modified last. Otherwise, the communication between the U2000 and the unreachable NEs cannot be restored automatically. In this case, the ECC extended mode of the NEs must be set again on site. The extended ECC communication is avoided between the subnet gateway NEs. Hence, when setting the ECC extended mode remotely, work out the ECC setting plan in advance to ensure that the settings are correct. For example, a station has nine NEs. The optical supervisory channel board is configured at NE A. NE A is the server end. NE H is the client end of NE A and the server end of NE I. Figure 4-1 shows the network topology and Table 4-1 provides the IP addresses of the NEs and the ECC setting plan. For example, a station has nine NEs.
Figure 4-1 Network topology of a station

B
DCN
Client NE Server NE
NOTE
NEs of the station are cascaded through network cables.
Table 4-1 Manually extended ECC setting plan NE IP Address Set Server IP A B C D E F G H I 132.37.49.130 132.37.49.131 132.37.49.132 132.37.49.133 132.37.49.134 132.37.49.135 132.37.49.136 132.37.49.137 132.37.49.138 0.0.0.0a 0.0.0.0a Port 1601 1602 Set Client Opposite IP 132.37.49.130 132.37.49.130 132.37.49.130 132.37.49.130 132.37.49.130 132.37.49.130 132.37.49.130 132.37.49.137 Port 1601 1601 1601 1601 1601 1601 1601 1601 1602
a: Indicates the local NE.

When setting the manually extended ECC communication at the station remotely, follow the sequence below:
NOTE
The default ECC extended mode is automatic mode.
IH client endG, F, E, D, C and BA server endH server end During the configuration, the status of the communication between the U2000 and NEs changes frequently. l l l l l After the setting at NE I is complete, the communication between the U2000 and NE I stops. After the setting at NE H client end is complete, the communication between the U2000 and NE H stops. After the settings on NEs B, C, D, E, F, and G client end are complete, the communication between the U2000 and NEs B, C, D, E, F, and G stops. After the setting at NE A server end is complete, the communication between the U2000 and NEs B, C, D, E, F, G, and H restores automatically. After the setting at NE H server end is complete, the communication between the U2000 and NE I restores automatically.
Procedure
l Setting the Client NE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon, and the Running Status of the ONE is displayed. Select one NE as the server NE. Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameter from the left-hand Function Tree. Observe the NE IP in the right-hand view and record the NE IP. In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click any one remote NE and select NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the left-hand Function Tree. Set the ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode in the right-hand Functional Panel. Enter the IP of the server NE in the Opposite IP field and the port number in the Port field in the Set Client dialog box.
NOTE
The port number is the port number of the local NE for communication with the server NE.
9.
Click Apply in the Set Client dialog box.
10. An Operation Result dialog is displayed indicating an Operation succeeded message. Click Close.
NOTE
l The IP addresses of NEs cannot be repeated and must be within the same subnet. l The client NE can be the server NE of the next lower level. At that time, the client port and the server port of the local NE cannot be the same. For specific procedure, refer to Setting the Server NE. l The port number must be within the range from 1601 to 1699, for example, 1610.
l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Setting the Server NE

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon, and the Running Status of the ONE is displayed. Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the left-hand Function Tree. Set the ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode in the right-hand Functional Panel. Enter the port number in the Port field in the Set Server dialog box. The port number must be the consistent with that value entered in the Port field in the Set Client dialog box of the client NE.
NOTE
l The port number is the port number of the local NE for communication with the client NE. l The port number of the server NE must be the same as that of the client NE for communication.
7. 8. ----End
Click Apply in the Set Server dialog box. A dialog box is displayed indicating an This operation will reset the NE communication. Continue? message. Click OK.
4.9 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions

After you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of each board on the NE.
Prerequisite
The U2000 server and client must be started up.

U2000
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. In the Main Topology view, choose Inventory > Physical Inventory from the main menu. Select Board in the Physical Inventory Type. The Board List tab is displayed. Click Filter... in the Board List tab. The Filter window is displayed. corresponding to NE Object. The Select NE Object tab is displayed. Then Click select the desired NE from the tab, and click OK. The status and version information of each board of the NE are displayed in the user interface. Click Query. In the displayed Please Select Query Scope dialog box, select Selected rows or All rows as prompted. Then click OK to query information, such as the software version of the board. In the displayed Operation Result dialog box, click Close. Obtain the software version of each board in the Software Version column and make records.
7.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

NOTE
The NEs that are loaded with the same software package should have the same software version. Similarly, the same boards on different NEs that are loaded with the same software package should also have the same software version. If version inconsistency occurs, immediately provide feedback to the regional office of Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.
4.10 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode

In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flow diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number of fiber connections one by one.
Prerequisite
l l l l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Optical NEs and NEs must be created. Logic board has been created on the U2000. Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the tunable OTU as the designed wavelength. Applies to WDM equipment.

U2000
After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might exist on the NE. You can synchronize on the U2000 the internal fiber connection data of the NE with the U2000 side. Conflicting fibers refer to the different fibers configured on the NE and U2000 sides. Click Synchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, and then the conflicting fibers are displayed in the Uncreated Fiber in NMS and Uncreated Fiber in NE user interfaces. The conflicting fibers cannot be synchronized between the U2000 and the NE. In this case, based on the networking design, delete the incorrect fibers. After that, click Create Fiber/Cable and re-create the remaining fibers.
NOTE
The U2000 supports the ability to synchronize WDM fibers in batches. To do so: In the Main Topology view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > WDM Fiber/Cable Synchronization from the Main Menu.

Step 1 Optional: Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Fiber/Cable Synchronization from the Function Tree. Click Synchronize, and the data of the internal fiber connections on the U2000 side and that on the NE side are displayed.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

NOTE
Synchronized Fiber: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the U2000 and NE sides. U2000 is the same as the fiber data on NEs. Fiber/Cable on the NE Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side. Fiber/Cable on the NMS Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the U2000 side.
3.
Handle different situations as follows: l If uncreated fiber in U2000 or uncreated fiber in NE exists, select all the fibers. Click Create Fiber/Cable, and the dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The synchronized fibers are displayed in the list of Synchronized Fiber/Cable. l If conflicting fibers exist, fibers cannot be created. You can click Delete Fiber/Cable to delete the uncreated fibers in U2000 or uncreated fibers in NEs, and then click Create Fiber/Cable to re-create the remaining fibers.
Step 2 To create fiber connections inside an NE, do as follows:

NOTE
The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot edge ports. For how to select an edge port, see Configuring the Edge Port.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Double-click an optical NE on the Main Topology. Click the Signal Flow Diagram tab. In the Signal Flow Diagram, right-click in the blank area and choose Create Fiber from the shortcut menu. The cursor is displayed as "+". Select the source board and port and click OK. The cursor is displayed as "+". Select the sink board and port and click OK.
TIP
When a wrong source or sink board or port is selected, right-click to cancel the operation and exit object selection.
5.
In the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the attributes of the fiber.
6.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Click OK.

TIP
To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.
Step 3 To creating fiber connections between NEs, do as follows:

NOTE
The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot edge ports. For how to select an edge port, see Configuring the Edge Port.
NOTE
Creating fiber connections between NEs is performed on the Main Topology. In fact, the FIU fiber connections between stations are created.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Click the shortcut icon
on the Main Topology and the cursor is displayed as "+" .
Click the source NE of the fiber on the Main Topology. Select the source board and source port in the Select Fiber/Cable Source dialog box displayed. Click OK. The Main Topology is displayed and the cursor is displayed as "+" again. Click the sink NE of the fiber in the Main Topology. Select the sink board and sink port in the Select Fiber/Cable Sink dialog box displayed. Click OK and enter the attributes of the fiber in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed.
8.
Click OK. The created fiber is displayed between the source NE and the sink NE on the Main Topology.
TIP
To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.
Step 4 Move the cursor to the fiber that is created and then information about the fiber is displayed. Read the information to check whether the fiber is created correctly. ----End
Category (Optional) Related Operation Item Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode Description Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in the list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a few fiber connections only.
Postrequisite
After you create fiber connections, you need to verify all fibers are created to ensure that the fiber connections are correct and the line communication is available.
4.11 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search

After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail information does not exist at the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, search for the cross-connections and fiber connections data over the network to generate end-to-end WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Fiber connections must be correctly created for the WDM equipment.
Precautions
l If certain cross-connections exist, you can create an optical-layer trail by using any of the following methods: Delete the original cross-connection and create the optical-layer trail by using the trail function. This method affects services. Complement cross-connections on NEs and search for the trail. l You can create only single-NE optical cross-connections from the AM port to the OUT port of the RMU9 board and from the IN port to the DM port of the WSMD4/WSMD2 board. In this case, the board optical cross-connection is not supported. These types of single-NE optical cross-connections do not impact services. You need to create these types of single-NE optical cross-connections and search for trails if you want to manage the services transmitted in the cross-connections by using the trail management function.

U2000
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
76
Procedure for the U2000

1. 2. In the Main Topology view, choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail from the main menu. Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.
NOTE
In the searching by subnet mode, the selected subnet range should be independent from the networking. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the area beyond the selected subnet range.
3.
Click Next to begin the search for trails. The U2000 takes a while to return the results, depending on the number of services.
NOTE
l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end to end trails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation. l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: If the networking changes, the trail may cause interruption of service flow. For example, the key information for the trail, including deleting a cross-connection or fiber, is verified.
4.
Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. If you want to set a trail management flag, check the Management Flag check box, or right-click it and select the management flag.
NOTE
Skip this step if you selected the "Automatically create trails after searching policy" in Step 2.
5.
Click Next to view all discrete services in the network.

NOTE
If Step 4 is performed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the network layer. This does not affect services for the actual NE or the data for an individual NE on the U2000.
6.
After the search is complete, click Finish.
4.12 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection

Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of singlestation optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The logic fiber connection inside a single station has been set up on the U2000/Web LCT. The edge port must be configured. When creating an optical cross-connection of a single station, make sure that the optical crossconnection of a board in this single station does not occupy the wavelength that the optical crossconnection of the single station uses.

U2000 or Web LCT
When you create an optical cross-connection, the optical power can be adjusted automatically or manually. If you select Auto, the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board automatically adjusts the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the board. If you select Manual, you need to manually adjust the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board. The Auto option is available for the several types of optical crossconnection trails. For details, see Feature Description.
NOTE
The WSMD9/WSMD4/WSMD2 can be used to replace the WSD9 or the WSM9. OA indicates the optical amplifier boards such as OAU1 and OBU1. The FIU can be added before or after the OA. In drop networking, the demultiplexer boards such as D40, D40V and MR2 can be added between the WSD9 and OTU. In add networking, the multiplexer boards such as M40, M40V and MR2 can be added between the OTU and WSM9.
NOTE
The optical cross-connect services created are unidirectional. The reverse services need to be configured in addition. The configuration in the other direction is similar. Optical cross-connections are created by creating optical cross-connections on the board or on a single station. Creating optical cross-connections on a single station is recommended.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand pane. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
NOTE
2.
Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the wavelengths from the Available Wavelength list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelength. Click OK.
3.
Click OK. The created single-station optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.
NOTE
When the operation is performed on the U2000, a dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand pane. Click Create. The Create NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
NOTE
2.
1. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the wavelengths from the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Click OK.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
78
3.
Click OK. The created single-station optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.
Category (Optional) Related Operation Item Configuring the Edge Port Description Setting an edge port is to set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this NE and another NE. The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board that performs grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through the creation of single-board optical cross-connection.
Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection
4.13 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI1 board in the subrack.
Prerequisite
The U2000 server and client should be started normally. The master/slave subracks should be installed. Fiber connection should be done.

U2000
The master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 of the EFI2. The EFI1 board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack is 0. The setting is implemented by DIP switches. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 14 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 correspond to bits 14 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. The bits from high to low are ID6-ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. Currently, the first 32 states are used. As shown in Figure 4-2, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
l l
Along the direction reaching from a point close to the CPLD, the two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2. When the DIP switch is toggle to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
NOTE
For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
Figure 4-2 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board
EFI1
CPLD
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
SW1
SW2
Figure 4-3 The ID of the subrack: 1-15

SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
10
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
11
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
12
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
13
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
14
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
15
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
80

SW1
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
SW1
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
SW1
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
16
17
18
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
19
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
20
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
21
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
22 25 28 31
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8) (ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
23 26 29
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
24 27 30
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
The LED front panel of the SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrack is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31. On the U2000, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE with one ID and one IP.
Precautions
CAUTION
Changing the subrack ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt service.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the SCC boards in the master and slave subracks. If two subrack IDs repeat each other, it indicates a subrack ID conflict. If a subrack ID displayed on an LED blinks, it indicates a subrack ID mismatch. In either case, adjust the DIP switches on the EFI1 board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the DIP switches setting for each subrack is unique.
NOTE
After the adjustment of the DIP switches (change of the subrack ID) is complete, perform a power-off reset on the NE or the subrack. For details, see step Step 4.
Step 2 Log in to the U2000. Step 3 Double-click the optical NE to display the Running Status of the ONE.
Step 4 Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer. 1. 2. If there is repetition or blink of the master subrack ID in step 1, perform a power-off reset on the NE after the DIP switches adjustment. If there is repetition or blink in slave subrack ID in step 1, after jumper adjustment, warm reset all boards in this slave subrack, or power-off reset the NE.
NOTE
l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be realized by rebooting the subrack power supply. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all master and slave subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating. l To prevent service interruption during upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset operation as follows: First, perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks. Then, change the ID of the subrack where the subrack ID conflict or mismatch occurs. At last, reboot the power supply of this subrack.
Step 5 In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE and select Browse Current Alarms to display the Browse Current Alarms. Step 6 Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms. 1. If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the master subrack and the slave subracks are chains.
Step 7 Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms. 1. If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, adjust the DIP switches on the EFI1 board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the DIP switches setting for each subrack is unique. Reset the board with reference to step Step 4.
2.
Step 8 Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms. 1. Optional: If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, adjust the DIP switches on the EFI1 board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning to set the ID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED on the SCC board in this subrack. Reset the NE or the subrack with reference to Step 4.
2.
Step 9 Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board in the slave subrack and add the corresponding logical board on the U2000. Check whether the board is available and operate normally (displayed as green). If yes, the configuration of the master/slave subrack is correct. ----End
Category (Optional) Related Operation Item Configuring Master/Slave Shelf Description Describes how to modify the attributes of a master or slave shelf.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
82
4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16

The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI board in the subrack.
Prerequisite

U2000
The master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 of the EFI. The EFI board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack is 0. The setting is implemented by DIP switches. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 14 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 correspond to bits 14 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. The bits from high to low are ID6-ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. Currently, the first 32 states are used. As shown in Figure 4-5, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1. l l Along the direction reaching from a point close to the T1, the two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2. When the DIP switch is toggle to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
NOTE
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
83
Figure 4-5 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board
U8 SERIAL T1
NM_ETH2
SW1
SW2

SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
SW1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW2
ON
ON
Subrack ID
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
10
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
11
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
12
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
13
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
14
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
15
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
84

SW1
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
SW1
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
SW1
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
SW2
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
Subrack ID
16
17
18
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
19
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
20
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
21
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
22 25 28 31
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
23 26 29
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
24 27 30
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
The LCD front panel of the AUX indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrack is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31. On the U2000, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE with one ID and one IP.
Precautions
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LCDs on the AUX boards in the master and slave subracks. If two subrack IDs repeat each other, it indicates a subrack ID conflict. If a subrack ID displayed on an LCD blinks, it indicates a subrack ID mismatch. In either case, adjust the DIP switches on the EFI board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the DIP switches setting for each subrack is unique.
NOTE
After the adjustment of the DIP switches (change of the subrack ID) is complete, perform a power-off reset on the NE or the subrack. For details, see step Step 4.
Step 2 Log in to the U2000. Step 3 Double-click the optical NE to display the Running Status of the ONE.
Step 4 Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer. 1. 2. If there is repetition or blink of the master subrack ID in step 1, perform a power-off reset on the NE after the DIP switches adjustment. If there is repetition or blink in slave subrack ID in step 1, after DIP switch adjustment, warm reset all boards in this slave subrack, or power-off reset the NE.
NOTE
l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be realized by rebooting the subrack power supply. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all master and slave subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating. l To prevent service interruption during upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset operation as follows: First, perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks. Then, change the ID of the subrack where the subrack ID conflict or mismatch occurs. At last, reboot the power supply of this subrack.
Step 5 In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE select Browse Current Alarms to display the Browse Current Alarms. Step 6 Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms. 1. If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the master subrack and the slave subracks are chains.
Step 7 Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms. 1. If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, adjust the DIP switches on the EFI board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the DIP switches setting for each subrack is unique. Reset the board with reference to step Step 4.
2.
Step 8 Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms. 1. Optional: If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, adjust the DIP switches on the EFI board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning to set the ID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LCD on the AUX board in this subrack. Reset the NE or the subrack with reference to Step 4.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
86
4.15 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800

The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack.
Prerequisite

U2000
For OptiX OSN 6800, the master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ ETH2 of the AUX or the ETH3 of the EFI. The ID of the master subrack is 0 by default. The AUX board can be used to set the ID of the slave subrack. The setting is realized by jumpers. l l The TN11AUX01 has three jumpers, Figure 4-8 shows the jumpers. The bits from high to low are 13. The TN11AUX02 has eight jumpers, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. Figure 4-9 shows the jumpers. The bits from high to low are J16, J15, J4, J3, and J2.
Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. The three jumpers of the TN11AUX01 can be used to realize eight states that represent decimal values 07. The default value of the three jumpers is 000. The five jumpers of the TN11AUX02 can be used to realize 32 states that represent decimal values 031. The default value of the three jumpers is 00000. l l When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure, it represents the value 1. When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure or the three pins are not placed with any jumper cap, it represents the value 0.
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 6800, in Figure 4-10 the value represented by the three jumpers is 0001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
87
Figure 4-8 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX01

jumpers
3 CPU
Figure 4-9 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02

Jumpers
J4 J17
J3 J16
J2 J15
J18
J14
CPU
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
88
Figure 4-10 Jumper on the AUX

TN11AUX01 jumper cap
representing 0
representing 0
representing 1
TN11AUX02 jumper cap
representing 0
representing 0
representing 0
representing 0
representing 1
J16
J15
J4
J3
J2
NOTE
The dashed line between two pins in the figure indicates that a jumper cap may or may not be placed over the two pins.
The LED front panel of the SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrack is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31. On the U2000, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE with one ID and one IP.
Precautions
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the SCC boards in the master and slave subracks. If two subrack IDs repeat each other, it indicates a subrack ID conflict. If a subrack
ID displayed on an LED blinks, it indicates a subrack ID mismatch. In either case, adjust the jumpers on the AUX board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the jumper setting for each subrack is unique.
NOTE
After the adjustment of the jumpers (change of the subrack ID) is complete, perform a power-off reset on the NE or the subrack. For details, see step Step 4.
Step 2 Log in to the U2000. Step 3 Double-click the optical NE to display the Running Status of the ONE. Step 4 Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer. 1. 2. If there is repetition or blink of the master subrack ID in step 1, perform a power-off reset on the NE after the jumper adjustment. If there is repetition or blink in slave subrack ID in step 1, after jumper adjustment, warm reset all boards in this slave subrack, or power-off reset the NE.
NOTE
l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be realized by rebooting the subrack power supply. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all master and slave subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating. l To avoid service interruption during upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform the reset operation in this manner: First, perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks. Then, change the ID of the subrack where the subrack ID conflict or mismatch occurs. At last, reboot the power supply of this subrack.
Step 5 In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE to display the Browse Current Alarms. Step 6 Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms. 1. 2. If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the master subrack and the slave subracks are chains. Perform a warm reset on all boards in the master and slave subracks.
Step 7 Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms. 1. If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, adjust the jumpers on the AUX board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the jumper setting for each subrack is unique. Reset the board with reference to step Step 4.
2.
Step 8 Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms. 1. Optional: If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, adjust the jumpers on the AUX board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning to set the ID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED on the SCC board in this subrack. Reset the NE or the subrack with reference to Step 4.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
91
5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site
Commissioning Optical Power on Site
About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to commission optical power on site. 5.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power This section describes the basic operations, methods, and tools for configuring optical power. 5.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTU board. 5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board This section describes how to commission the optical power of the tributary board. 5.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board This section describes how to commission the optical power of the line board. 5.5 Testing Specifications of an SDH Board If the received optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment. When this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged. By testing the specifications of the optical ports, you can check whether the received/transmitted optical power for each optical port on the equipment is normal. 5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board This section describes how to commission the optical power of the EDFA optical amplifier board. 5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier This section describes the commissioning of and precautions for the deployment of the Raman amplifier. 5.8 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory Channel This section describes how to commission the optical power of supervisory channel. 5.9 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the multiplexer and demultiplexer board. 5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
92
This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the ROADM board. 5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM The single-wavelength input optical power of the DCM must be equal to or lower than 3 dBm. 5.12 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System This section uses Project X as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning procedures for the OTM, OLA and OADM stations.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
93
5.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power

This section describes the basic operations, methods, and tools for configuring optical power.
5.1.1 Basic Requirements

This section describes the basic requirements on commissioning optical power. Basic requirements on commissioning optical power are as follows: l l l l After commissioning, the optical power should be in the range of the minimum and maximum values. Certain optical power margins should be reserved during commissioning to ensure that the power fluctuations in a range do not affect services. After commissioning, the optical power must meet the requirements for system expansion. The CWDM network does not support the OA (Optical Amplifier). Therefore, for a CWDM network, only the optical power needs to be commissioned. The OSNR and flatness do not need to be commissioned. Only the receive optical power of the OTU needs to be commissioned. Specific commissioning requirements and procedures are similar to those for the DWDM network.
Requirements of commissioning the CWDM network are as follows:
During capacity expansion, the maximum number of wavelengths that you can add at one time is half the number of existing wavelengths or less. If there is only one wavelength in the system, only one wavelength can be added at a time.
5.1.2 General Commissioning Sequence

This section describes the general sequence of commissioning optical power.
General Sequence of Commissioning Optical Power

Optical power for NEs and boards is commissioned individually based on the optical signal flow. During the commissioning, ensure that the line attenuation is normal based on the requirements on optical power, gain, and insertion loss for each board. Generally, the optical power for the OTU board, optical amplifier (OA), and the supervisory channel board is commissioned based on the corresponding optical power requirements on the boards.
Optical Power Commissioning Procedures

Usually, the spans between two OTMs in an OptiX WDM system are considered as one network segment. One network segment has two signal flow directions, the transmit direction and the receive direction. For an OptiX WDM system, the optical power for a network segment is commissioned on a perNE basis according to the signal flow. First, commission the transmit optical power for one OTM. Then commission the optical power for each downstream NE along the transmit direction. Finally, commission the receive optical
power for the destination OTM. After commissioning the optical power along the transmit direction, commission the optical power in the reverse direction of the system. Project X is used as an example to describe how to commission the optical power of an OptiX WDM system. Figure 5-1 shows the networking diagram of Project X. A, B, C, D, E and F are optical NEs (ONEs). The equipment forms a ring network. ONE A and ONE C are back-to-back OTM stations, ONE B, ONE D, and ONE F are OLA stations, and ONE E is an OADM station. Figure 5-1 Networking diagram of Project X
Station A 2OTM Station F OLA Station E OADM
135km/39dB 55km/15dB 80km/26dB
Station B OLA
Station C 2OTM
Station D OLA
:OTM
:OLA
: OADM
Project X consists of two network segments: A-B-C and A-F-E-D-C. First, commission the optical power on the A-B-C network segment according to the following sequence. l Commission the optical power along the A-B-C signal flow: At ONE A, commission the optical power to ONE B. At ONE B, commission the optical power from ONE A. At ONE B, commission the optical power to ONE C. At ONE C, commission the optical power from ONE B. l Commission the optical power along the C-B-A signal flow: At ONE C, commission the optical power to ONE B. At ONE B, commission the optical power from ONE C. At ONE B, commission the optical power to ONE A. At ONE A, commission the optical power from ONE B. Based on the previous procedure sequence, commission the optical power for the A-F-E-D-C network segment in both directions.
NOTE
For details on how to commission the optical power of an NE, see 5.12 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
95
5.1.3 Commissioning Tools and Instruments

The optical power meter and the optical spectrum analyzer are required for commissioning optical power. l l Optical power meter: Used to measure the optical power on the client side and the WDM side of the OTU, and measure the total optical power of the multiplexed signals. Optical spectrum analyzer: Used to measure the optical power, optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR), and the central wavelength of each wavelength in the multiplexed signals. Calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to measure the optical power. Use the following method to verify the calibration: Measure the optical power at the OUT optical port on the OTU by using the optical spectrum analyzer. Compare it with the optical power obtained by using the optical power meter. If the difference is less than 0.5 dB, the calibration is acceptable. If the difference is more than 0.5 dB, recalibrate the optical spectrum analyzer.
NOTE
The optical power of a single wavelength in the multiplexed signals needs to be measured by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The commissioning result is more accurate when this method is used. When this method is used, the noise impact does not need to be considered.
5.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTU board.
CAUTION
The overload of the APD receiver laser is -9 dBm. If the input optical power is higher, the APD laser may be damaged. Therefore, it is recommended that you insert the fiber loosely from the input optical port of the OTU during commissioning. After commissioning, make sure the input optical power is lower than the receiver overload before you insert the fiber. For the receiver sensitivity, overload, and output optical power specifications for the OTU, see the Product Description.
5.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light

This section describes how to force the OTU board to emit light.
Prerequisite
The NE must be created on the U2000.

U2000
The signals accessed on the client side or the WDM side should be service signals in actual transmission, or the optical signals generated by forcing the board to emit light.
The WDM side of the OTU board by default is forced to emit light. If it does not emit light, refer to the following procedure to query whether the board is forced to emit light. If the board is not forced to emit light, set the board to emit light.
NOTE
See the Hardware Description to determine whether Automatic Laser Shutdown can be set for the OTU board.
Precautions
NOTE
l The prerequisite for commissioning the ESC (Electric Supervisory Channel) is that the OTU is forced to emit light.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer window, select the desired OTU and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select Channel from the drop-down list. Step 3 Optional: Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Automatic Laser Shutdown of the optical port on the WDM side of the OTU to DISABLE.
NOTE
Only the LWX2, LWXD and LWXS can set Automatic Laser Shutdown of the WDM side.
Step 4 Set the Laser Status of the optical port on the WDM side of the OTU to OPEN. Step 5 Click Apply. ----End
5.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU Board

This section describes how to adjust the input optical power of OTU board.

Optical power meter
Precautions
CAUTION
Before the equipment is powered on, verify that the fixed optical attenuator is configured according to the configuration rules. Verify the input optical power of the OTU (including the WDM side and client side) is lower than the receiver overload to avoid damage to the optical module during commissioning. Note that the overload of the APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm. For the specifications about the sensitivity and overload point of the OTU board, see the Product Description.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
97
Commissioning Requirements
l For the 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from -11 dBm to -4 dBm; adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm. For the other OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client side and the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm.
NOTE
For certain OTUs, if the overload point of the optical module is 0 dBm, and if the receiver sensitivity is -17 dBm, the receive optical power should be adjusted within the following range: from -14 dBm to -5 dBm.
Confirm the optical preamplifier on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end has output the standard optical power of single wavelength. When this occurs, the input optical power on the WDM side can be adjusted based on the actual optical power by adding, changing or removing the fixed optical attenuators. After commissioning, insert a fiber into the input optical port on the OTU when the input optical power reaches a normal state.
5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the tributary board.

Optical power meter
The tributary boards include the TDX, TOM, TOG, TQS, TDG, TBE, TQM, TSXL, THA, TOA and TQX. For the tributary unit specifications, see the Product Description.
Before the optical signals of a single wavelength are sent to the corresponding tributary board, adjust the input optical power by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator at the RXn on the client side of the tributary board. This ensures that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload point - 5) dBm.
5.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the line board.

Optical power meter
The line board includes the NS2, NS3, NQ2 and ND2. For the line unit specifications, see the Product Description.
l For the 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s line units: before the optical signals of single wavelength are accessed by the corresponding line unit, adjust the input power of the WDM-side optical port IN of the line unit by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator to be within the optimal range: from -11 dBm to -4 dBm. For the other line units: before the optical signals of single wavelength are accessed by the corresponding line unit, adjust the input power of the WDM-side optical port IN of the line unit by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator to be within the optimal range: from higher than the sensitivity by 3 dBm to lower than the overload point by 5 dBm. Generally the commissioning of the output optical power is not needed. However, if the station is an OADM station or configured with wavelength protection, adjust the VOA of the output port on the WDM side of the line unit to make the gain flatness for each add wavelength amplified by the OAU to be less than 2 dB.
5.5 Testing Specifications of an SDH Board

If the received optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment. When this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged. By testing the specifications of the optical ports, you can check whether the received/transmitted optical power for each optical port on the equipment is normal. The test items are the mean launched optical power and actual received optical power of an optical interface board.
CAUTION
If the rate of the optical port is variable, add the logical port with the corresponding rate through the U2000 before testing the specifications of this optical port.
5.5.1 Testing the Mean Launched Optical Power of Optical Interface Boards
If the mean launched optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment. When this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged. This section describes how to test the mean launched optical power of an optical interface board. This test is performed to ensure that the mean launched optical power of each port is correct.
Prerequisite
The optical port to be tested must be enabled.

NOTE
The optical port of certain SDH optical interface boards is disabled by default. Before performing the test, you need to check whether the optical port to be tested is enabled. Determine if it is enabled by doing as follows: In the NE Explorer window of the U2000 or U2000 LCT, select the board to be tested. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface, and check the status of the Laser Switch in the list. The status should be Open.
The optical fiber connections must be tested to ensure the optical fibers are connected correctly.

Optical power meter, fiber jumpers with different connectors, optical fiber connectors, fiber cleaning tools
Test Connection Diagram

Figure 5-2 shows the connections for testing the mean launched optical power of an optical interface board. Figure 5-2 Connection diagram for testing the mean launched optical power of an optical interface board.
Optical power meter
SDH Board
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
100
Precautions
DANGER
During NE commissioning, avoid directly exposing your eyes to the laser light.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the optical fiber from the OUT port of the optical interface board to be tested. Cap the removed optical fiber with a protective cap. Step 2 Use the test jumper to connect the OUT port and the optical power meter.
NOTE
The port of the optical power meter varies. Select a fiber jumper with the corresponding connector.
Step 3 Identify the board feature code and the type of the corresponding optical port by referring to the section that describes the board bar code in the Hardware Description. Query the specifications of the corresponding optical port by referring to the Technical Specification Reference. By doing this, you can obtain the working wavelength for the optical port to be tested. Step 4 Set the test wavelength of the optical power meter according to the working wavelength of the optical port. Step 5 Check the value displayed on the optical power meter. Record the value when it becomes stable. The recorded value is the mean launched optical power. It should be within the range of the transmitted optical power for this optical port, specified in the Technical Specification Reference. Step 6 If the actual transmitted optical power is outside the range, check and clean the optical fiber connectors used for the equipment test and the optical power meter. For more information, see "Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors" in the Supporting Tasks. After cleaning the connectors, repeat Steps 1-5. Step 7 After the test is complete, reconnect the optical fiber to the test optical port. ----End
5.5.2 Testing the Actual Received Optical Power of an Optical Interface Board
If the received optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment. When this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged. This section describes how to test the actual received optical power for an interface board. This test is performed to ensure the actual received optical power for each port is correct.
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
The test of optical fiber connections must be complete. Ensure that the optical fibers are connected correctly. The test result of the mean launched optical power at the optical port must be normal.
The fibers for the opposite station must be routed to the ODF of the local station. In addition, the opposite station must be commissioned and powered on.

Optical power meter, optical fiber connectors

Figure 5-3 shows the connections for testing the actual received optical power. Figure 5-3 Connection diagram for testing the actual received optical power for an optical interface board
Optical interface board Fiber jumper ODF ODF
Tested optical interface Fiber jumper

IN OUT
Local station
Adjacent station
Procedure
Step 1 At the local station, remove the fiber jumper from the IN port of the optical interface board. Connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter through the fiber connector. Step 2 Identify the number of the optical port by referring to the section that describes the board bar codes in the Hardware Description. Query the specifications of the corresponding optical port by referring to the Technical Specification Reference. By doing this, you can obtain the working wavelength for the optical port to be tested. Step 3 Set the test wavelength for the optical power meter based on the working wavelength of the optical port. Step 4 Check the value displayed on the optical power meter. Record the value when it becomes stable. The recorded value is the value for the actual received optical power. Step 5 Check whether the value of the actual received optical power is correct by referring to the optical power range, which is specified in the Technical Specification Reference.
NOTE
The actual received optical power should meet the following requirement: Minimum sensibility + 3 dB Actual received optical power (measured value) Minimum overload point 5 dB
Step 6 If the received optical power is not correct, do as follows:

l If the received optical power is excessively low, check whether the fiber connector, ODF fiber adapter, and optical attenuator are normal. For information about cleaning the fiber connector, see "Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors" in the Supporting Tasks. l If the received optical power is excessively high, check whether the optical attenuator is normal or add an attenuator on the ODF. For information about the values of the optical attenuators, see the Technical Specification Reference and the description about the actual received optical power in Step 5. Step 7 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 until the measured value is normal. Step 8 When the measured value is normal, reconnect the removed optical fiber to the optical port under test. ----End
5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the EDFA optical amplifier board. The EDFA optical amplifier board includes HBA, OAU1, OBU1, and OBU2. l Five types of OAU1 are valid: OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103 and OAU105. l Three types of OBU1 are valid: OBU101, OBU103 and OBU104. l One type of OBU2 is valid: OBU205. The relationship between the multiplexed signal and the single wavelength of the optical amplifier board with regard to the optical power is as follows. Optical power of multiplexed signal = Optical power of single wavelength + 10lgN (where N is the number of wavelengths of the multiplexed signal)
Because the maximum output power of the HBA board is high (26 dBm), the end face of a fiber at an optical port may be burned. To prevent this from happening, the following two solutions can be adopted. l 1. When there is direct fiber fusion splicing on the ODF, complete the following operations: (1) Remove the flange on the ODF, and prepare to directly splice fiber 1 to fiber 2 on the ODF. See Figure 5-4. Figure 5-4 Fiber splicing on the ODF
1 3 F I U 0 2
HBA
OUT RC
OUT ODF
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
103
(2) Cut off the redundant connectors on the fiber jumpers that are to be spliced. Use a fiber stripper to remove the external sheath of the fiber jumpers. If you break the 250 um bare fiber core, cut the fiber core at the break and re-strip the fiber. (3) Use a fiber cutter to cut the fiber jumpers. Splice the fiber jumpers in the standard single mode. The splice point must be free of flaws and voids. If the splice point is not free of flaws and voids, re-splice the fiber jumpers. (4) After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tube to sheath the splice point. Also ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The heat shrink tubes should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room and be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tube slot. l 2. When there is fiber splicing through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF, complete the following operations: (1) Replace the original flange on the ODF with an LSH/APC-LSH/APC (also called the E2000-E2000) flange. The flange can only be installed on the ODF for the SC. (2) Use a 3 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper to connect the OUT port of the FIU board to fiber 3 of the LSH/APC-LSH/APC flange on the ODF. See Figure 5-5. Figure 5-5 Fiber splicing on the line side
1 3 F I U 0 2
HBA
OUT RC
OUT ODF
(3) Cut off a 0.9 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper of 2 m long at an intermediate point. Connect the cut end of one of the two fiber jumpers to the client-side line fiber at point 4, as shown in Figure 5-5. (4) After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tube to sheath the splice point. Also ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The heat shrink tubes should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room and be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tube slot. The redundant fiber needs to be spooled on the fiber management tray after the splicing.
5.6.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Optical Amplifier Board

This section describes how to adjust the input optical power of the optical amplifier board.
Adjust the average single wavelength input optical power of the IN port of the optical amplifier board to the typical input power for single wavelength 1 dB. Ensure that the number of wavelengths whose optical power is higher than the typical value is equal or close to the number of wavelengths whose optical power is smaller than the typical value.
l l l l l l l l l l
Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11HBA is 19 dBm (40-channel) and 13 dBm (10-channel). Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OBU101/TN12OBU101 is 20 dBm (40-channel) and 23 dBm (80-channel). Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OBU103/TN12OBU103 is 19 dBm (40-channel) and 22 dBm (80-channel). Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OBU104/TN12OBU104 is 17 dBm (40-channel) and 20 dBm (80-channel). Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OBU205/TN12OBU205 is 16 dBm (40-channel) and 19 dBm (80-channel). Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/ TN13OAU101 is 16 dBm (40-channel) and 19 dBm (80-channel). Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 is 19 dBm (40-channel) and 22 dBm (80-channel). Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU103/TN12OAU103/ TN13OAU103 is 20 dBm (40-channel) and 23 dBm (80-channel). Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU105/TN12OAU105/ TN13OAU105 is 16 dBm (40-channel) and 19 dBm (80-channel). Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN12OAU100 is 14 dBm (40-channel) and 17 dBm (80-channel).
If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the optical amplifier board is added with a VOA that is higher than the typical input power of single wavelength, adjust the VOA before the optical amplifier board to make the average single wavelength input optical power reach the typical value.
NOTE
For the TN12/TN13 OA board, the input end of the OA is not added with a VOA, but instead uses the inner EVOA.
If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the optical amplifier board is added with a VOA that is lower than the typical input power of single wavelength, no VOA is needed.
5.6.2 Adjusting the Gains for the Optical Amplifier Board

This section describes how to adjust the gains for the optical amplifier board.
Prerequisite
The commissioning of the optical power for the upstream board must be complete.

U2000, optical power meter
For the optical amplifier board, set the gain to ensure that the mean output optical power equals the maximum output optical power for single wavelength. Gain = Maximum output power of single wavelength - Mean input optical power of single wavelength.
After setting the gain, use the optical spectrum analyzer to check whether the mean output optical power of single wavelength is in the range of maximum output optical power of single wavelength - 0.5 dBm to maximum output optical power of single wavelength + 0.5 dBm. If it exceeds this range, fine tune the gain value.
Procedure
Step 1 Display the NE Explorer on the U2000. Step 2 Select the desired optical amplifier board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select Channel from the drop-down list. Step 4 In the Basic Attributes tab, query Nominal Gain Upper Threshold and Nominal Gain Lower Threshold to get the nominal range for the gain. Step 5 In the Basic Attributes tab, query Upper Threshold of Actual Gain and Lower Threshold of Actual Gain to get the settable gain range for the OAU board. Step 6 Ensure that the input power of the OAU is the average input power of single wavelength. Calculate the gain value. Gain = Maximum output power of single wavelength - Average input power of single wavelength
NOTE
The average per-channel input optical power is measured by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 7 Check whether the gain is within the value range calculated in Step 6. l If the gain is less than the minimum gain calculated in Step 6, increase the attenuation value of the VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board. This decreases the average input power of single wavelength to the standard value. l If the gain is more than the maximum gain calculated in Step 6, decrease the attenuation value of the VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board. This increases the average input power of single wavelength. If the gain cannot meet the requirement, confirm the network design value with the network designer. Step 8 In the Basic Attributes tab, set the Nominal Gain of the OAU1 board. Step 9 Click Apply. Step 10 Click Query. Query the Gain displayed on the U2000. If the gain difference of the actual value and the set nominal value is within 0.5 dB, the setting is successful. If the setting fails, check whether the gain is within the gain range. ----End
5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier

This section describes the commissioning of and precautions for the deployment of the Raman amplifier.
5.7.1 Preparations
This section describes the requirements on the fiber line, precautions, and tools required for commissioning the Raman amplifier.
Compared with general amplifiers, the Raman amplifier has a lower noise figure. When general amplifiers and the Raman amplifier are used in one system, the system can achieve better OSNR. After the Raman amplifier is used, the optical power that is close to the fiber line should be tested on the LINE port on the Raman amplifier. Shut down the pump lasers of the Raman amplifier before the test.
Requirements on the Fiber Line

The additional loss of a single point on the fiber line should meet the following requirements:
NOTE
Whether the single-point loss exceeds the threshold must be determined by performing a bi-directional test. Use an OTDR to test the additional loss at both ends of the fiber line and calculate the average of the tested two loss values. Before the deployment of the Raman amplifier, OTDR must be used to determine if the quality of the local 40 km optical cable meets the requirements of deployment.
0 km20 km (0 mi.- 12 mi.): Do not use fiber connectors. The fibers should be connected to each other by splicing. If the fiber connector is used, components may be burned and the on-off gain of the Raman amplifier is affected. 0 km10 km (0 mi.6 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.1 dB (G.652) or 0.2 dB (G.655). 10 km20 km (6 mi.- 12 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.2 dB (G.652) or 0.4 dB (G.655). 20 km30 km (12 mi.- 18 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.4 dB. 30 km40 km (18 mi.- 24 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 1 dB. Over 40 kilometers: The single-point additional loss is less than 1 dB. The single-point return loss is not less than 40 dB.
l l l l l l
Precautions
The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. Therefore, take the following precautions when using the Raman amplifier: l Do not insert or remove a fiber when the laser is enabled When the laser of the Raman amplifier is enabled, do not insert or remove the fiber connector. Otherwise, the laser may result in fire after the fiber connectors are burned or there may be personal injuries especially to the eyes. l Clean the fiber surface. The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. If the surface of the fiber jumper is dirty, the filth of the fiber surface absorbs the energy and heats. As a result, the jumper is easy to be damaged or burned, and the system performance is affected. l Perform cable testing. The gain medium of the Raman amplifier is the transmission cable. Hence, the type and quality of the transmission cable influences the performance of the Raman amplifier. If the fiber, especially the end near the Raman amplifier has the poor quality (big loss point or large reflection factor), the system performance is greatly influenced, and may result in the line being burned. Hence, testing the cable before enabling the Raman amplifier is necessary. l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Dedicate the LSH/APC fiber connector.

The reverse output optical power of the Raman amplifier reaches 30 dBm. Hence, the fiber connector must be the dedicated LSH/APC fiber connector. If the PC fiber connector is used, a large reflection is formed, which damages the fiber connector. l Do not bend the fiber. The bend radius of the fiber jumper of the Raman amplifier should meet the requirements and cannot be bent. Otherwise, the fiber jumper will burn. l Enable the laser of the Raman amplifier on the U2000. For security consideration, if the laser is disabled after the Raman amplifier is working normally, the Raman amplifier will stop working. You can issue the corresponding command on the NMS to enable the laser of the Raman amplifier. l Review the jumper connection before enabling of the laser. Before enabling the laser of the Raman amplifier, you must connect the jumper at the input port and the corresponding ODF subrack jumper. l Meet output optical power requirements. When the Raman amplifier is used, the pump optical power is high. The requirements of the near-end fiber increase directly with the optical power. High optical power may bring damages to equipment and injuries to human body. Hence, the power of the Raman pumping light should be as low as possible on the premise that the on-off gain is not less than 10 dB. Before you enter the equipment room, perform the following operations: l l Wear laser-protective glasses (Class 4). Wear long-sleeve ESD coat, shoe covers, and protective gloves. Confirm the number of adopted Raman boards. Be familiar with the fiber connection between the local Raman boards and remote boards. Be familiar with the connection between these fibers and the upstream/downstream sites. Be familiar with the location of the connector. Take the drawings into the equipment room. Prepare tools for fiber cleaning: CLETOP cassette cleaner, a video fiberscope (400x or higher magnification). Clean solvent with wipes. Use only video fiberscopes. For more information, see Inspecting and Cleaning the Fiber-Optic Connectors. U2000 or Web LCT has been installed on the local engineer's PC before the single station commissioning is performed. This section uses the U2000 as an example to describe the commissioning procedure.
After the CRPC board works properly, to connect the board to a subrack on another NE, you must reset the board instead of removing and re-inserting the network cable. The operation of resetting the CRPC board, however, may interrupt services.
Setting Jumper
There are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 and J4.Figure 5-6 shows the number of each jumper.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
108
Figure 5-6 Jumpers on the CRPC board

CRPC J4
10 1 9
J3
2 10
CPU
Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 and 1 to 6 in J4 are used for internal identification on the board. To ensure the normal operation of the board, follow the requirements below to set the jumpers. l l l l l l l l l Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 7 to 8 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Non-extended slot numbering mode) Connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3.(Extended slot numbering mode) Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4. Connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J4. Connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J4.
NOTE
Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 cannot be connected only when the OptiX OSN 6800 is in non-extended slot numbering mode.
Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are jumper setting regulations in the non-extended slot numbering mode: l l l l When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU28. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU29. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU30. When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU31.
The following are jumper setting regulations in the extended slot numbering mode: l l l l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU120. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU121. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU122. When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU123.
5.7.2 Checking the Fiber Connections

This section describes the method of checking the fiber connections of the Raman amplifier.
Prerequisite
The fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct. Generally, the Raman amplifier is used in the case of extremely low input optical power. When the SYS port of the Raman amplifier is connected to an optical amplifier board, the variable optical attenuator (VOA) is not required and it should be replaced with a fiber.

l l l l l l l l Optical power meter. Optical fiberscope with 400x magnification. A video fiberscope is recommended. CLETOP cassette cleaner. Clean solvent. Isoamylol is preferred and propyl can be used. Alcohol or formalin cannot be used. Non-woven lens tissue, lint-free wipes, or fiber cleaning tissue. Non-woven lens tissue is recommended. Special compressed gas. Special cleaning roll. Optical cleaning sticks used for optical connectors or cotton swabs.
Precautions
CAUTION
l Strictly comply with the following procedure to ensure the operation safety. l The LINE port of the Raman board has extremely high output optical power. Be very careful during operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the Raman board is in "power-off" state before any operation. Do not completely insert the Raman board in the designated slot. That is, the board can be placed in the designated slot but not plugged thoroughly. In this case, the board will not receive power from the subrack. Step 2 Determine if the SYS port of the Raman board is well connected to the IN port of the FIU or optical amplifier board with fibers. Step 3 Before you connect the line-side fiber to the LINE port of Raman board, ensure that the fiber loss is normal and that the connection surface of the fiber is clean. Check this with a video fiberscope (400x or higher magnification). Step 4 The connection surface should have no dust or scratches. If there is any, immediately replace the line-side fiber. It is recommended that the customer prepares spare fibers. ----End
5.7.3 Connecting the Fiber Jumpers on the Line Side

This section describes how to connect the fiber jumpers on the line side of the Raman amplifier.

Fiber cutter, fiber stripper, fusion splicer, heat shrink tubing
Precautions
CAUTION
l The Raman amplifier board must be powered off before the fiber jumpers are spliced, and the personnel to splice the fiber jumpers must be experienced in fusion splicing. l Ensure that the endfaces of fiber connectors are clean before you install the fiber connectors. l The flange must be cleaned using an ultrasonic cleaner. l To ensure the quality of fiber connectors, it is recommended that you insert and remove an E2000-E2000 connector for less than 500 times.
Context
The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. In this case, if the endface of a fiber connector inserted to a port on the Raman amplifier is contaminated, the probability is high that the fiber endface is damaged. The high output optical power can cause eye damage or skin burns in case of misoperation. The Raman amplifier has very strict requirements on the loss of the near-end line fiber. The fiber should have no connector within the distance of 0 km to 20 km (12 mi.) and fibers should be connected to each other by means of fusion splicing. There are two fiber splicing modes. (Select the slicing mode according to the actual situations on site.) Fiber Splicing Mode on the ODF Direct fiber fusion splicing on the ODF Fiber splicing through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF Probabilit y of Endface Damage None Risks of Personal Injury None Difficulty of On-Site Operation Medium Difficulty of Maintena nce Low Preference Level
High
Low
Very low
Medium
Medium
Medium
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of direct fiber fusion splicing on the ODF, the procedure is as follows:
1.
Remove the flange on the ODF, and ready to directly splice fiber 1 to fiber 2 on the ODF. The CRPC board shown is used as an example.
ODF
Line
CRPC
Sys
2.
Cut off the redundant connectors on the fiber jumpers to be spliced, and use a fiber stripper to remove the external sheath of the fiber jumpers. If you break a 250 um bare fiber core, cut the fiber core at the break and re-strip the fiber. Add a heat shrink tubing to one of the fiber jumper to protect the melting point after fiber splicing. Use a fiber cutter to cut the fiber jumpers. Then, splice the fiber jumpers in the standard single mode. The splice point must be free of flaws or voids. Otherwise, re-splice the fiber jumpers. After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tubing to sheath the splice point. In addition, ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The heat shrink tubing should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room and be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tubing slot.
3. 4.
5.
Step 2 In the case of fiber splicing through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF, the procedure is as follows: 1. 2. Replace the original flange on the ODF with an LSH/APC-LSH/APC (also called E2000E2000) flange. Use a 3 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper to connect the LINE port of the CRPC board to fiber 3 of the LSH/APC-LSH/APC flange on the ODF. The CRPC board shown is used as an example.
ODF
Line
CRPC
Sys
3.
Cut off a 0.9 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper of 2 m long at an intermediate point. Add a heat shrink tubing to one of the fiber jumper that is cut off or the customer line cable to protect the melting point after fiber splicing. Then splice the cutoff end of the fiber with the customer line cable at point specified by 4 in the figure above. After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tubing to sheath the splice point. In addition, ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The heat shrink tubing should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room and
4.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
112
be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tubing slot. The redundant fiber after the splicing needs to be spooled on the fiber management tray. Step 3 Insert the Raman board thoroughly into the designated slot. If this is a new cabinet that is installed, proceed in powering on the cabinet and the corresponding subrack. If the cabinet and the subrack are already in service and therefore powered on, see 5.7.4 Checking the Configuration of the IPA Function. ----End
5.7.4 Checking the Configuration of the IPA Function

This section describes the procedure for checking the configuration of the IPA function when you commission the Raman amplifier.
Prerequisite
The fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct.
Precautions
CAUTION
The optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. It is recommended to configure the IPA function should be previously. When a Raman amplifier is configured, set the threshold for the detection board when configuring the IPA function. Before the commissioning at each station, disable the IPA function and the laser of the Raman board. For more information regarding configuring the IPA function, see Intelligent Power Adjustment (IPA) of Raman System.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the Function Tree. For more information regarding IPA configuration, refer to Intelligent Power Adjustment (IPA) of Raman System. Step 2 Ensure that the IPA Status attribute of the IPA Group is Disabled. If not, set them to Disabled and click Apply. Step 3 Select the desired CRPC board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Step 4 Select By Board/Port (Channel). Step 5 Click the Basic Attributes tab, and ensure that the Laser Status of the NE**-Shelf0(subrack)**-CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-1 port and the NE**-Shelf0(subrack)-**-CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-2 of the Raman board WDM interfaces are Close. If not, set them to Close and click Apply. ----End
5.7.5 Adjusting the Optical Power in the Receive Direction

This section describes the procedure for adjusting the optical power of the Raman amplifier in the receive direction.
Prerequisite
The fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct. The commissioning must be performed after all the current services are added. Return loss detection is enabled.

Spectrum analyzer, U2000.
Precautions
NOTE
The on-off gain of each channel must be greater than 10 dB, which is required by the backward Raman amplifier. The gain medium of the reverse Raman amplifier is transmission fiber, so the gain value depends on the type, length and attenuation of the transmission fiber. If the gain values are required to be the same, different fibers should correspond to different optical power of pumps. Set the initial optical power of the Raman amplifier during network commissioning to the optical power values in the following table.
Table 5-1 Recommended optical power values of Raman pump for different fibers Fiber Type P1 (Optical Power of Pump Group 1) G.652/G.655 G.653 +24.0 dBm +23.0 dBm P2 (Optical Power of Pump Group 2) +24.0 dBm +22.5 dBm
Procedure
Step 1 Disconnect the fiber between the SYS port of the RAMAN board and the IN port of the FIU or optical amplifier board. Step 2 Connect the fiber from the SYS port to the test port of the spectrum analyzer. Scan the spectrum. Obtain the actual signal optical power and record it. Step 3 Reconnect the SYS port of the RAMAN board to the IN port of the FIU or optical amplifier board. Step 4 Select the desired CRPC from the left-hand Navigator Tree, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Step 5 Select By Board/Port(Channel) and click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 6 Set the optical power of the pump laser to the recommended value. Step 7 On the U2000 select the desired NE from the left-hand Navigator Tree and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the Function Tree. Step 8 Set the IPA Status attribute of the IPA pair to Enabled.
Step 9 Connect the fiber from the MON port of the RAMAN board to the test port of the spectrum analyzer. Scan the spectrum and obtain the actual signal optical power and record it. Step 10 Calculate the on-off gain of the SYS port by using the following formula: SYS on-off gain = MON output power (CRPC laser enabled) + 20 SYS output power (CRPC laser disabled)
NOTE
1 dB offset between the on-off gain that is obtained by using the preceding formula and the actual on-off gain is allowed.
Step 11 Adjust the On-off Gain.

NOTE
The on-off gain of each channel must be greater than 10 dB, which is required by the CRPC board. If the onoff gain is smaller than 10 dB, adjust the on-off gain to make it meet the requirements.
1. 2. 3.
Select the desired CRPC in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel from the drop-down list. Click Advanced Attributes. Increase the Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm) of the CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-1 port and the CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-2 port of Optical Interface/ Channel. Increase the optical power of both groups of pumps by 0.1 dBm respectively at a time until the minimum on-off gain of each channel is higher than 10 dB.
NOTE
If the pump optical power is set too high, the PUM_BCM_ALM alarm is generated. If this alarm occurs, the pump optical power set is excessive and must be decreased. If this alarm occurs while the gain does not reach 10 dB, shut down the pump lasers and check the line fiber. Replace or repair the line fibers if necessary.
----End
5.7.6 Adjusting the Gain Spectrum

This section describes the procedure for adjusting the gain spectrum of the Raman amplifier.
Prerequisite
The fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct. The commissioning must be performed after all the current services are added.

Spectrum analyzer, U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Adjust the pump power to ensure that the gain spectrum meets the requirement. l After adjusting the on-off gain to 10 dB, determine if the gain flatness among all the wavelengths is within 3 dB. If yes, the gain flatness requires no adjustment. l If the gain flatness among all the wavelengths exceeds 3 dB, proceed to the next step to adjust the pump optical power according to the Raman gain spectrum to improve the gain flatness. Step 2 Find the wavelengths of the highest and lowest gains.
Step 3 If the shortwave gain is low, increase the optical power of pump laser group 1 to elevate the shortwave gain or decrease the optical power of pump laser group 2 to lower the long-wave gain. Adjust the pump optical power in steps of 0.1 dBm until the optical power difference meets the requirement. That is, the gain flatness among all the wavelengths is within 3 dB. Step 4 If the shortwave gain is high, decrease the optical power of pump laser group 1 to lower the shortwave gain or increase the optical power of pump laser group 2 to elevate the long-wave gain. Adjust the pump optical power in steps of 0.1 dBm until the optical power difference meets the requirement. That is, the gain flatness of each wavelength is within 3 dB. Step 5 Retest the on-off gains to determine if the on-off gain of each wavelength is higher than 10 dB. If not, increase the optical power of both pump laser groups 1 and 2 in steps of 0.1 dBm until the on-off gain of each wavelength is greater than 10 dB.
NOTE
After item 3 of step 6, the pump optical power is changed. As a result, the on-off gains need be retested. If the on-off gain of any wavelength is smaller than 10 dB, the optical power of both pump laser groups 1 and 2 need be increased to meet the gain requirement according to the new optical power rate between the two pump laser groups. The gain difference between the two pump laser groups cannot change.
----End
5.8 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory Channel

This section describes how to commission the optical power of supervisory channel. The system offers two types of supervisory channels: l l Optical supervisory channel (OSC) Electrical supervisory channel (ESC)
The OSC requires the optical supervisory channel unit HSC1, SC1 or SC2. The unit is used to transmit and receive the supervisory information. The ESC does not need the optical supervisory channel units. In this mode, the optical transponder unit (OTU) multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channels for transmission.
NOTE
After the boards are commissioned and work normally, the ESC and OSC are enabled by default.
5.8.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of the OSC Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OSC board.
Prerequisite
The commissioning of the optical power at the transmit end of the upstream station must be complete.

Optical power meter, fixed attenuator
The receive optical power of OSC is in the range of -48 dBm to -3 dBm. The transmit optical power of OSC is in the range of -4 dBm to 0 dBm. Basic requirements of the optical power commissioning on the OSC are as follows: l The receive optical power of the OSC should be in the range of -45 dBm to -8 dBm.
NOTE
The receive optical power of the ST2 board and the OSC unit on the DAS1 board is in the range of 41 dBm to 10 dBm.
To prevent the laser on the OSC board at the receive end from being burnt, fixed attenuators that are required must be configured properly by referring to the following tables. l When the SC1 or SC2 board is used as the OSC board, Table 5-2 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the SC1 or SC2 board System Rate Line Fiber Type Standard Optical Power Incident Scenario or Not Yes (and an EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier) No (and an EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier) G.653/SMFLS No (and no EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier) Yes (and an EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier) 15 dBa N/A Fix Attenuator on the SC1/ SC2 Board (Line Insertion Loss Is the EOL Value) 0 Insertion Loss < 20 15 dBa Insertion Loss 20 N/A
10 Gbit/s
SSMF/LEAF/ TWRS/TWC/ TW+
40 Gbit/s, or a mixture of 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s
SSMF/LEAF/ TWRS/TWC
15 dBa
N/A
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
117
System Rate
Line Fiber Type
Standard Optical Power Incident Scenario or Not No (and no EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier)
Fix Attenuator on the SC1/ SC2 Board (Line Insertion Loss Is the EOL Value) 0 Insertion Loss < 20 Insertion Loss 20
LEAF/TWRS/ TWC/TW+/ SMF-LS/G. 653
a. Configure the fixed attenuator at the TM port on the SC1 board or the TM1/TM2 port on the SC2 board. l When the ST2 board is used as the OSC board, Table 5-3 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the ST2 board System Rate Line Fiber Type Standard Optical Power Incident Scenario or Not Yes (and an EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier) No (and an EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier) G.653/ SMF-LS No (and no EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier) 20 dBb 10 dBa N/A Fix Attenuator on the ST2 Board (Line Insertion Loss Is the EOL Value) 0 Insertion Loss < 15 15 dBa 15 Insertion Loss < 25 N/A Insertion Loss 25 N/A
10 Gbit/s
SSMF/ LEAF/ TWRS/ TWC/TW+
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
118
System Rate
Line Fiber Type
Standard Optical Power Incident Scenario or Not Yes (and an EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier) No (and no EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier)
Fix Attenuator on the ST2 Board (Line Insertion Loss Is the EOL Value) 0 Insertion Loss < 15 15 dBa 15 Insertion Loss < 25 N/A Insertion Loss 25 N/A
40 Gbit/s, or a mixture of 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/ s
SSMF/ LEAF/ TWRS/ TWC
LEAF/ TWRS/ TWC/TW+/ SMF-LS/G. 653
20 dBb
10 dBa
N/A
a. Configure the fixed attenuator at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board. b. Configure a 10 dB fixed attenuator at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board and a 10 dB fixed attenuator at the RM port on the FIU board.
When the DAS1 board is used, Table 5-4 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the OSC unit of the DAS1 board System Rate Line Fiber Type Standard Optical Power Incident Scenario or Not Yes (and an EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier) No (and an EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier) G.653/ SMF-LS Fix Attenuator on the OSC Unit of the DAS1 Board (Line Insertion Loss Is the EOL Value) 0 Insertion Loss < 15 15 dBa 15 Insertion Loss < 25 N/A Insertion Loss 25 N/A
10 Gbit/s
SSMF/ LEAF/ TWRS/ TWC/TW+
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
119
System Rate
Line Fiber Type
Standard Optical Power Incident Scenario or Not No (and no EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier)
Fix Attenuator on the OSC Unit of the DAS1 Board (Line Insertion Loss Is the EOL Value) 0 Insertion Loss < 15 20 dBb 15 Insertion Loss < 25 10 dBa Insertion Loss 25 N/A
40 Gbit/s, or a mixture of 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/ s
SSMF/ LEAF/ TWRS/ TWC
Yes (and an EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier) No (and no EVOA is configured before an optical amplifier)
15 dBa
N/A
N/A
LEAF/ TWRS/ TWC/TW+/ SMF-LS/G. 653
20 dBb
10 dBa
N/A
a. Configure the fixed attenuator at the TX port on the DAS1 board. b. Configure a 10 dB fixed attenuator at the TX port on the DAS1 board and a 10 dB fixed attenuator at the RM port.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of the OSC unit. l The RM port of the OSC board connects to the TM port of the FIU board at the local station. l The TM port of the OSC board connects to the RM port of the FIU board at the local station. l The RX port on the DAS1 board is the receive optical port of the OSC unit and must be connected to the TM port. The TX port is the transmit optical port of the OSC unit and must be connected to the RM port. Step 2 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the transmit optical power of the OSC board. It should be in the range from -4 dBm to 0 dBm. If it does not meet the requirement, replace the board.
NOTE
The supervisory channel on the ST2 board supports the following wavelengths: 1491 nm and 1511 nm.
Step 3 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the actual receive optical power of the OSC board. It should be in the range from -48 dBm to -3 dBm. The input optical power of the OSC board can be adjusted on the basis of the actual optical power by adding, changing or removing the fixed optical attenuators.

NOTE
The supervisory channel on the ST2 board supports the following wavelengths: 1491 nm and 1511 nm.
NOTE
If the result does not meet the requirements, clean the fiber connector. If the problem persists, check whether the OSC is faulty, and if so, clear the fault.
Step 4 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then test the insertion loss between the IN and TM ports, and between the RM and OUT ports of the FIU. The values should be less than 1.5 dBm. ----End
5.8.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of ESC Board

This section describes the basic requirements on commissioning the optical power of the ESC board.
When the OTU starts to work and the service is normal (or the WDM side of the OTU side transmits light), the ESC route is set up. By default the WDM side of the OTU board emits light forcibly. If it does not emit light, see 5.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light to query whether the board is forced to emit light. If the board is not forced to emit light, configure the board so that it emits light forcibly.
5.9 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board

This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the multiplexer and demultiplexer board.
5.9.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V and D40V Boards

This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the M40V and D40V boards.
Tools, Equipment, and materials

Optical spectrum analyzer, U2000
Adjust the optical power and the flatness of OSNR by adjusting the built-in VOA for each wavelength at the receive end to meet the requirements. l Adjust the attenuation of the VOA on each channel of the M40V or D40V at the transmit end to 5 dB before commissioning. 1. In the NE Explorer and select the desired M40V board, choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
2. 3. l
Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to 5dB. Click Apply. A prompt appears telling you that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow. Then measure the optical power and the OSNR for each channel in the WDM mode. Or connect the INx port of the MCA4/MCA8 board to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow. Then measure the optical power and the OSNR for each channel on the U2000 as follows: Select the desired MCA4/MCA8 board in the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum Analysis from the left-hand Function Tree. Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query. In Spectrum Data, query Optical Power (dBm) and OSNR(dB) for each current wavelength.
NOTE
l The MON port of the OAU1, OBU1, OBU2 and CRPC board is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal power). l The MON port of the HBA board is a 1/999 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30dB lower than the actual signal power).
According to the optical spectrum figure, determine the channels with the largest or the smallest optical power (or OSNR). Adjust the VOA for the corresponding channels of the M40V/D40V to make the optical power (or OSNR) near the average value. Ensure that the maximum difference of optical power among all the channels is within 4 dB, and the maximum different of the OSNR among all the channels is within 2 dB.
NOTE
Generally the output optical power values of all OAUs do not have obvious changes after this commissioning. If changes are obvious, adjust the VOA before the first OAU of the signal flow to make the input optical power reach the standard value. There is no need to adjust the successive OAUs. Ensure that the OSNR is flat and that the optical power is near the standard value.
5.9.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU/SFIU Board

This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the insertion loss of the FIU board.
Tools, Equipment, and materials

Optical power meter, Optical spectrum analyzer
CAUTION
If fiber connectors or fiber adapters are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously affected. Therefore, the two end faces and the fiber adapter for every external fiber that is connected into the equipment through the ODF must be cleaned. Perform the cleaning before inserting an external fiber to an optical port on the equipment. Note the insertion loss for the FIU boards:
l l l l
IN>TC insertion loss = Input optical power of IN port Output optical power of TC port RC>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RC port Output optical power of OUT port IN>TM insertion loss = Input optical power of IN port Output optical power of TM port RM>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RM port Output optical power of OUT port LINE1>SYS1 insertion loss = Input optical power of SYS1 port Output optical power of LINE1 port LINE2>SYS2 insertion loss = Input optical power of SYS2 port Output optical power of LINE2 port LINE1>OSC1 insertion loss = Input optical power of OSC1 port Output optical power of LINE1 port LINE2>OSC2 insertion loss = Input optical power of OSC2 port Output optical power of LINE2 port
Note the insertion loss for the SFIU boards: l l l l
The optical power can be measured with an optical power meter or an optical spectrum analyzer. The basic requirements for the measurements are as follows. Method one: measurement with an optical power meter of the FIU/SFIU l l For IN>TC insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB. For RC>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT port when disconnecting the fiber of the RM port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB. For IN>TM insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB. For RM>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT port when disconnecting the fiber of the RC port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB. For LINE1>SYS1 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE1 port when disconnecting the fiber of the OSC1 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB. For LINE2>SYS2 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE2 port when disconnecting the fiber of the OSC2 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB. For LINE1>OSC1 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE1 port when disconnecting the fiber of the SYS1 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB. For LINE2>OSC2 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE2 port when disconnecting the fiber of the SYS2 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB. For IN>TC insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port with the optical power of the TC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB. For RC>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port with the optical power of the RC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.
l l
Method two: measurement with an optical spectrum analyzer of the FIU/SFIU l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
For IN>TM insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port at 1510 nm with the optical power of the TM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB. For RM>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port at 1510 nm with the optical power of the RM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB. For LINE1>SYS1 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port with the optical power of the TC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB. For LINE2>SYS2 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port with the optical power of the RC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB. For LINE1>OSC1 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port at 1510 nm with the optical power of the TM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB. For LINE2>OSC2 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port at 1510 nm with the optical power of the RM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
5.9.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board

This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the FOADM board.
Network with MR2+MR2

Figure 5-7 shows the diagram of a network with MR2+MR2. Figure 5-7 Diagram of a network with MR2+MR2
1 2 3 4
OA IN
MO
F I U
TC
IN
OUT
IN
MI
OUT IN
OA OUT RC
OUT
MR2
MI
MR2 OA
TC
F I U
IN
OA
OUT RC OUT IN
OUT
MO
IN
OUT
West
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
East
1: West FIU 3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end
2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end 4: East FIU
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
124
Network with MR8V+MR8V

Figure 5-8 shows the diagram of a network with MR8V+MR8V. Figure 5-8 Diagram of a network with MR8V+MR8V
1 2 3 4
OA IN
MO
OUT
MI
OA IN OUT RC
F I U
TC
IN
OUT
VI
OUT
MR8V
OUT
MI MO
MR8V OA
TC
F I U
IN
OA
OUT RC OUT IN
VI
OUT
West
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
East
The commissioning requirements for the FOADM board are as follows.
NOTE
For the specifications of the OAU board, see the Hardware Description.
In the pass-through direction: For MR8V, adjust the VOA on the MR8V in the pass-through direction. Make the passthrough wavelength meet the requirements for the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end. For MR2, adjust the VOA between MR2s. Make the pass-through wavelength meet the requirements for the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end.
In the drop wavelength direction, add an appropriate fixed optical attenuator at the input end of the OTU. Make the drop wavelength meet the requirements for the input optical power of the OTU. In the add wavelength direction: For MR8V, adjust the VOA between the OUT port on the OTU for adding wavelengths and the MR8V to ensure gain flatness between the add wavelength and the pass-through wavelength. For MR2, adjust the VOA between the OUT port on the OTU for adding wavelengths and the MR2 to ensure gain flatness between the add wavelength and the pass-through wavelength.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
125
5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board

This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the ROADM board. This section describes how to commission the optical power of a ring network using ROADM boards along the west-to-east signal flow. In general, the ring network uses the following ROADM boards: l l l l l l ROAM+ROAM WSD9+WSM9 WSD9+RMU9 RDU9+WSM9 WSMD4+WSMD4 WSMD2+WSMD2
NOTE
l The requirements of the intra-ring grooming and inter-ring grooming of the WSM9, WSD9, RMU9, RDU9, RDU9, WSMD2 and WSMD4 are the same. l The automatic power adjustment mode can be chosen in creating optical cross-connection. For applications not supporting automatic power adjustment, choose the manual power adjustment mode. l The optical power of the OUT port at the receive end and the rated optical power of the IN port at the transmit end of the OAU have their default values on the U2000.
5.10.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM +ROAM)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with ROAM +ROAM.
Network with ROAM+ROAM

Figure 5-9 shows the diagram of a network with ROAM+ROAM.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
126
Figure 5-9 Diagram of a network with ROAM+ROAM

1 2 3 4
OAU
OAU
OAU
OUT
IN
OUT
OAU
F I U
IN
OUT
ROAM
ROAM
IN
OUT IN
F I U
OBU West D40
OBU East D40
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
NOTE
TDC and RDC of the OAU are connected to the port of the DCM for dispersion compensation or connected directly.
l Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in add and pass-through wavelength directions. In the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. The system then automatically determines and adjusts the output optical power to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add wavelength. In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the rated optical power of the IN port of east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. The system then automatically determines and adjusts the output optical power to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength. l Manual power adjustment is required in the drop wavelength direction. Configure the fixed optical attenuator at the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end. Select the fixed optical attenuator according to the input optical power of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power meets the requirements. The VOA (in the dashed frame) between the ROAM and D40 boards is used to adjust the input optical power of the optical amplifier to a value in the nominal range. If the input optical power is in the nominal range when the VOA is not added, then the VOA is not required.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

NOTE
l If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required. l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an avalanche photodiode (APD) is configured on the WDM side of the OTU board at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required. l If the PIN photodiode is configured at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are required.
5.10.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9 +WSM9)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with WSD9+WSM9.
Network with WSD9+WSM9

Figure 5-10 shows the diagram of a network with WSD9+WSM9. Figure 5-10 Diagram of a network with WSD9+WSM9
O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U
D40
M40
OA F I U
IN OUT
WSD9
WSM9
IN
OA
OUT
F I U
OA
OUT
IN
WSM9
WSD9
OUT
OA
IN
West
M40 O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U
D40 O T U O T U
East
NOTE
Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in the add, drop, and pass-through wavelength directions.
In the drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end. Set the optical power of the OUT port of the west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU meets the requirements for the drop wavelength.
NOTE
Automatic power adjustment can be realized when the WSD9 drops wavelength directly to the OTU or through the MRx or D40 to the OTU.
In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the optical power of the OUT port of the west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. Set the rated optical power of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 and WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength. I the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to typical input power of single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU board directly adds/drops wavelengths or when it adds/drops wavelengths through the MRx board, a VOA (in the dashed frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU board adds wavelengths through the M40 board, the VOA is not required.
NOTE
MRx can be MR8, MR8V, MR4, or MR2.
5.10.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9 +RMU9)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with WSD9+RMU9.
Network with WSD9+RMU9

Figure 5-11 shows the diagram of a network with WSD9+RMU9.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
129
Figure 5-11 Diagram of a network with WSD9+RMU9

O T U O T U O T U O T U O O T T U U MRx O O T T U U
OA
M40 T
O A
D40
F I U
OA
IN
OUT IN
WSD9
RMU9
ROA IN
OA
OUT
F I U
OA
OUT
ROA
RMU9
T O A M40
WSD9
OUT
OA
IN
OA
West
MRx O O T T U U O T U O T U
D40 O T U O T U
East
O T U
O T U
NOTE
l Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in the add, drop, and pass-through wavelength (the wavelength is added either directly or through the MRx or M40V board) directions. In the wavelength-dropping direction: Create a single-station optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 board to ensure that the optical power of each drop wavelength sent to the OTU board meets the specification requirements.
NOTE
Automatic power adjustment can be used when the WSD9 drops a wavelength directly to the OTU or drops a wavelength to the OTU board through the MRx or D40.
In the pass-through direction: Create a single-station optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength. In the wavelength-adding direction (the OTU board adds wavelengths directly): Create a single-station optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each port of the RMU9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
When wavelengths are added through the MRx board or the M40 board, the optical power needs to be manually adjusted. When wavelengths are added through the M40/M40V board, an optical amplifier needs to be configured between the TOA and ROA ports on the RMU9 board. And a VOA needs to be configured between the ROA port and the optical amplifier. When wavelengths are added through the MRx board, the TOA and the ROA ports on the RMU9 board are connected to each other directly by a fiber. Adjust the VOA between the OTU and the MRx or M40 board to ensure that the input power flatness of the add wavelengths and the pass-through wavelengths on the east OAU at the transmit end meet the system requirements.
In the case of a network with WSD9+RMU9, to implement the APE function, the RMU9 board has certain requirements on configuration. These requirements are as follows: Configure the VA1 or VA4 board between the OTU and RMU9 boards when the OTU board adds wavelength directly to the RMU9 board. In this case, the APE function can be automatically implemented. When a multiplexer board, through which the OTU adds wavelength to the RMU9 board, needs to be configured, configure the M40V board. In this case, the APE function can be automatically implemented. If the VA1, VA4, or M40V board is not used, the APE function cannot be implemented.
5.10.4 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (RDU9 +WSM9)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with RDU9+WSM9.
Network with RDU9+WSM9

Figure 5-12 shows the diagram of a network with RDU9+WSM9. Figure 5-12 Diagram of a network with RDU9+WSM9
MRx
D40V
M40
OA F I U
IN OUT
RDU9
WSM9
IN
OA
OUT
F I U
OA
OUT
IN
WSM9
RDU9
OUT
OA
IN
West
M40 O T U O T U O T U O T U
D40V O T U O T U
MRx O T U O T U
East
1: West FIU
2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
131

3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end

4: East FIU
NOTE
NOTE
l Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in add wavelength, pass-through wavelength, and drop wavelength through the MRx board or the D40V board. In the drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end. Set the optical power of the OUT port of the west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the MRx board or the D40V board to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU meets the requirements for the drop wavelength. In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the optical power of the OUT port of the west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the passthrough wavelength. In the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to typical input power of single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU board directly adds/drops wavelengths or when it adds/drops wavelengths through the MRx board, a VOA (in the dashed frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU board adds wavelengths through the M40 board, the VOA is not required.
When wavelengths are dropped through the MRx board or the D40 board, the optical power needs to be manually adjusted. Adjust the VOA between the OTU and the MRx board or the D40 board to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU meets the requirements for the drop wavelength.
5.10.5 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD4 +WSMD4)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSMD4 +WSMD4.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
132
Network with WSMD4+WSMD4

This section describes the commissioning requirements for the WSMD4. In this section, the network diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration purposes. The commissioning requirements for multi-dimensional grooming are similar. Figure 5-13 shows the diagram of a network with WSMD4+WSMD4. Figure 5-13 Diagram of a network with WSMD4+WSMD4
1 2 3 4
OA F I U
IN OUT IN
DM4 AM4
OUT IN
OA
OUT
WSMD4
AM4 OA
OUT IN OUT
WSMD4
IN
F I U
DM1
AM1
DM4
AM1
DM1 OA
OUT
OA
IN
OA
West D40 M40 M40
East
D40
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U

NOTE
l l
In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the WSMD4 board are not shown. These two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in the other direction. The single-wavelength signals are transmitted directly to the AMn optical port by the OTU board.
The commissioning requirements for the WSMD4 are as follows: l In the drop wavelength direction, manual power adjustment is required. You need to select and configure a fixed attenuator at the IN optical port of the OTU board on the east and west receive ends respectively, based on the input optical power range of the OTU board. By doing this, the input optical power to the OTU board can meet the OTU design requirement. The optical power of the VOA (in the dashed frame) between the demultiplexer and WSMD4 should be adjusted so that the input optical power is within the nominal input range of the optical amplifier. If the input optical power is already within the nominal input range of the optical amplifier before the VOA is added, the VOA is not required.

NOTE
l If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required. l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD module is configured on the WDM side of OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required. l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame need to be configured.
In pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported. Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD4 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength.
In add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported. Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU and from the west OTU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD4 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA (in the solid frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengths through the M40, the VOA is not required.

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with WSMD2 +WSMD2.
Networking with WSMD2+WSMD2

This section describes the commissioning requirements of the WSMD2. In this section, the networking diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration purposes. The commissioning requirements for multi-dimensional grooming are similar. Figure 5-14 shows the diagram of a network with WSMD2+WSMD2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
134
Figure 5-14 Diagram of a network with WSMD2+WSMD2

1 2 O T U O T U O T U O T U 3 4
D40
DM IN TC OUT EXPI IN EXPO
M40
AM OUT IN OUT RC OUT
OA
IN
OA
West
OUT
F I U
OUT RC
WSMD2 OA
OUT IN EXPI EXPO
WSMD2
IN IN
F I U
TC IN
East
OA
OUT
AM
DM
M40
D40
O T U Fixed attenuator
O T U
O T U
O T U
Variable attenuator
NOTE
l The M40 or M40V can be used as the multiplexer board. l If only one wavelength needs to be added, you can directly connect one OTU to the AM port of the WSMD2.
The commissioning requirements of the WSMD2 are as follows: l In the drop wavelength direction, manual power adjustment is required. You need to select and configure a fixed attenuator at the IN optical port of the OTU board on the east and west receive ends respectively, based on the input optical power range of the OTU board. By doing this, the input optical power to the OTU board can meet the OTU design requirements. l In the pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported. Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD2 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength. l In the add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported. Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU and from the west OTU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and
adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD2 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengths through the M40, the VOA is not required.
NOTE

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSMD9 +WSMD9.
Network with WSMD9+WSMD9

This section describes the commissioning requirements for the WSMD9. In this section, the network diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration purposes. The commissioning requirements for multi-dimensional grooming are similar. Figure 5-15 shows the diagram of a network with WSMD9+WSMD9. Figure 5-15 Diagram of a network with WSMD9+WSMD9
O T U D40
O T U
O T U M40
O T U
DCM
LIN SOUT TM RX IN
DCM
SIN OUT TM RX LOUT
DM1 EXPO EXPI
AM1
DAS1 TX
WSMD9
EXPO OUT AM1 EXPI
WSMD9
IN DM1
RM LOUT SIN
TX DAS1 RM SOUT LIN
DCM
M40
D40
DCM
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
136

NOTE
Optical ports AM2AM8 and DM2DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards in other dimensions.
l In the drop wavelength direction, manual power adjustment is required. You need to select and configure a fixed attenuator at the IN optical port of the OTU board on the east and west receive ends respectively, based on the input optical power range of the OTU board. By doing this, the input optical power to the OTU board can meet the OTU design requirement. l In pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported. Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength. l In add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported. Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU and from the west OTU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM

The single-wavelength input optical power of the DCM must be equal to or lower than 3 dBm.
Prerequisite
Fiber connections on the DCM must be established properly.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, fiber jumper
Procedure
Step 1 Measure the input optical power of the DCM. The single-wavelength input optical power must be equal to or lower than 3 dBm. Step 2 Measure the output optical power of the DCM. Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss of the DCM. The insertion loss should be within the specified range. Otherwise, replace the DCM. Insertion loss of the DCM = Input optical power of the DCM Output optical power of the DCM ----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
137
Related Information
For more information about the specifications of the insertion loss of the DCM, see the Product Description.
5.12 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System
This section uses Project X as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning procedures for the OTM, OLA and OADM stations.
CAUTION
Ensure that the ports and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean. Otherwise, the system performance is affected. l All the channels must be accessed with service signals or forced to emit light before optical power commissioning. Once all the OTUs can emit light normally, start the commissioning station by station. Enable the performance monitoring of NEs during optical power commissioning. Compare the value reported by the NE and the value tested by the instruments. Ensure that the two optical power values are the same.
NOTE
The optical power is queried by using the U2000. The difference between the U2000 value and the value tested by instruments should be within 1 dB.
5.12.1 Example Description

This section describes the network of project X. Figure 5-16 shows the network diagram of project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E and F are the NG WDM systems which form the ring network. Among these ONEs, the ONE A and ONE C are the back-to-back OTM stations. The ONE B, ONE D and ONE F are the OLA stations. And the ONE E is the OADM station. Station E can use the FOADM boards or ROADM boards to form the network. If station E uses the FOADM boards, see 5.9.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board for its commissioning description. If station E uses the ROADM boards, see 5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board for its commissioning description.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
138
Figure 5-16 Network diagram of Project X

Station A 2OTM Station F OLA Station E OADM
Station B OLA
Station C 2OTM
Station D OLA
: OTM
:OLA
: OADM
NOTE
In this commissioning example, the signal flow from west to east is used as an example to illustrate the commissioning procedure. The commissioning method for the signal flow from east to west is the same as the commissioning method for the signal flow from west to east.
NOTE
As shown in Figure 5-16, 2OTM means back-to-back OTM
Table 5-5 shows the incident optical power requirements based on a 10Gbit/s single-wavelength system. Table 5-5 Requirements on incident optical power Module Type NRZ/DRZ Number of Wavelengths 40 80 G.652 SSMF +4 +1 G.655 LEAF +4 +1 G.653 -5 -7
The optical power listed in this table is expressed in dBm.
NOTE
If modules or fibers of another type need to be used, confirm the incident optical power with the product manager or network designer.
5.12.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station

This section describes how to commission the optical power at the transmit end of an OTM station along the west-to-east signal flow.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
139
Prerequisite
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical attenuator, VOA, U2000
Set-up Diagram
Figure 5-17 Fiber connection of OTM station A on the OptiX OSN 8800
Station A
D01 DCM LQM RDC D02 LOM IN D TC OAU1 4 OUT IN TDC Tx Rx M01
LQM LOM
M02
LINE C SYS R P IN C
D40
M40
M OBU1 4 OUT RC 0 OUT

IN RM F
OUT
LSX F TM West To F I U RM
RM1
LSX SC2
TM2 D01 RM2
I
Tx TM U
To B
East
TM1
M01
LQM
RC
Rx
LQM
D02
OBU1
OUT OUT IN OUT
M 4 0
M02
LOM
M40
LOM
D40
D 4 0
OBU1
IN OUT IN
D C M
TC
IN
LSX
LSX
VOA
Fixed optical attenuator
ODF side
Station A
D01 DCM LQM RDC D02 LOM IN D TC OAU1 4 OUT IN TDC Tx Rx M01
LQM LOM
M02
LINE C SYS R P IN C
D40
M40
M OBU1 4 OUT RC 0 OUT

IN RM F
OUT
LSX F TM West To F I U RM
RM1
LSX SC2
TM2 D01 RM2
I
Tx TM U
To B
East
TM1
M01
LQM
RC
Rx
LQM
D02
OBU1
OUT OUT IN OUT
M 4 0
M02
LOM
M40
LOM
D40
D 4 0
OBU1
IN OUT IN
D C M
TC
IN
LSX
LSX
VOA
ODF side
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
140
Tx Rx
Station A
DCM LINE C SY S R P C IN TDC OAU1 TC TM RM IN OUT RM1 IN RDC D1 D2
L Q M
IN
L 4 G
OUT
A1
A2 OBU1 OUT IN TM2 RM2 OUT RC RM TM D C M IN OUT
MR2
West
FI To F U
SC2
TM1
FI U To B
East
OBU1
OUT RC OUT IN OUT D1 D2
MR2
A1 A2 IN
OBU1
OUT
TC
IN
L IN L OUT Q 4 M G
Tx Rx
VOA
ODF side
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical fiber should be loosely inserted to the input port Rx on the client side of the OTU. Step 2 Send the client signal to the east OTU. Step 3 Query the bar code on the front panel or manufacturing information of the board to obtain the optical module information on the client side of the OTU. Step 4 Obtain the launched optical power and optical module information on the client side. Compare the launched optical power of the client equipment with the received optical power on the client side of the OTU. If required, prepare the fixed optical attenuator for later use. Step 5 Measure the optical power of the fiber jumper connected to the RX port on the client side of the OTU by using an optical power meter. Step 6 Install a fixed optical attenuator before the input port on the client side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU meets requirements.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
141
Step 7 If the optical power of all input ports on the OTU meets the specification requirements, insert a fiber into the RX port on the OTU and record the input optical power at the RX port in the commissioning record. Step 8 Check whether the OUT ports on the WDM sides of all the east OTUs emit light. If not, check whether lasers on the WDM sides of the OTU are enabled. Step 9 Measure the optical power at the OUT port on the WDM side of the OTU by using an optical power meter. Step 10 Measure the input optical power at the following port by using an optical power meter, and record the value in the commissioning record. If the variance between the optical power of the port and the optical power at the OUT port on the WDM side of the OTU is greater than 1 dB, check whether fibers are routed properly and whether the fibers are clean. l l l For OptiX OSN 8800, measure the input optical power at the Mn port on the M40 by using an optical power meter. For OptiX OSN 6800, measure the input optical power at the Mn port on the M40 by using an optical power meter. For OptiX OSN 3800, measure the input optical power at the A1 and A2 port on the MR2 by using an optical power meter.
Step 11 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the following board to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the attenuation of the VOA connected to the output port on the OTU to adjust the optical power flatness of add wavelengths. In this manner, ensure that the singlewavelength output optical power of the M40 is consistent with the nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the OA at the transmit end. l l l For OptiX OSN 8800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the M40 board. For OptiX OSN 6800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the M40 board. For OptiX OSN 3800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the MR2 board.
Step 12 Record the optical power of each wavelength and multiplexed signal and calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength for the following board. Check whether the insertion loss of each wavelength meets the requirements after the wavelength passes through the board. If the optical power is abnormal, check the fiber connection to the Mn port. l l l For OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the M40 board. For OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the M40 board. For OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the MR2 board.
Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the West-Receive-to-East-Transmit OBU1 by using a fiber jumper. Then scan the multiplexed signal and measure the optical power at the IN port on the OBU1. Step 14 Measure the optical power of each wavelength at the OUT port on the OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Check whether the mean output optical power of a single wavelength is in the standard range. Step 15 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1 according to the following formula: Gain = Output optical power of a single wavelength - Input optical power of a single wavelength. The gain flatness of a single wavelength must be lower than 2.0 dB.
Step 16 Record the optical power at IN and OUT ports, input and output optical power, and gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. Step 17 Query the input and output optical power of a multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the U2000. The variance between the power displayed on the U2000 and the power measured by using the optical spectrum analyzer must be smaller than 2.0 dB. Otherwise, replace the board. Step 18 Measure the input optical power at the RC port on the FIU by using an optical power meter. If the variance between the optical power at RC port on the FIU and the optical power at the OUT port on the OBU1 is greater than 1 dB, check whether the fibers are routed properly and whether the fibers are clean. Step 19 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU by using an optical power meter (during the test, the RM port must be disconnected). Calculate the insertion loss from the RC to OUT ports on the FIU. The insertion loss must be equal to or lower than 1.0 dB. Step 20 Measure the output optical power at the TM2 port on the SC2 by using an optical power meter, and then measure the input optical power at the RM port on the FIU. If the variance between the optical power at the two ports is greater than 1 dB, check whether the fibers are routed properly and whether the fibers are clean. Step 21 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU by using an optical power meter (during the test, the RC port must be disconnected). Calculate the insertion loss from the RM to OUT ports on the FIU. The insertion loss must be equal to or lower than 1.5 dB. Step 22 Measure the output optical power on the ODF side. Compare the value with the output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU to check whether the fiber is correctly routed. ----End
5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow at an OLA station.
Prerequisite
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete. The optical power commissioning of station A at the transmit end must be complete.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
143
Set-up Diagram
Figure 5-20 Fiber connection of OLA station B
Station B
D C M OBU1 IN OUT RC OUT
IN
TC
West
To A
F TM I U RM
RM1 TM1
SC2
TM2 RM2
RM
F I U TM
To C
East
OBU1
OUT RC OUT IN
D C M
OAU1
OUT RDC IN TC TDC IN
VOA
Fix optical attenuator
ODF side
Procedure
Step 1 Test the optical power of the IN port on the west FIU with an optical power meter. Compare the value with optical power of the OUT port on the east FIU of station A to calculate the line attenuation between station A and station B on the line side. If the actual line attenuation is larger than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determine whether the cable attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are faulty, clear the fault by following the appropriate procedures. Step 2 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power of the TM port on the west FIU at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values in the commissioning record. Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TM port of the west FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB. Step 4 Test the input optical power of the RM1 port on the SC2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Add a proper attenuator to make the input power less than 3dBm. Record the input optical power of the RM1 port in the commissioning record. Step 5 Test the output optical power of the TM2 port of the SC2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the output optical power of the TM2 port in the commissioning record. Step 6 Test the input optical power of the RM port and the output optical power of the OUT port on the east FIU at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting the fiber to the RC port of the FIU board). Record the optical power values in the commissioning record. Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
Step 8 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power of the TC port on the west FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values in the commissioning record. Step 9 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TC port on the west FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.0 dB. Step 10 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN port on the West-Receiveto-East-Transmit OBU to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the VOA before the OBU to commission the mean input optical power of single wavelength of the OBU to nominal value. Step 11 Test and record the input and output optical power of the DCM. Calculate the insertion loss of the VOA and DCM. Step 12 The optical power commissioning method of the OBU is the same as that at the transmit end of the OTM. For more information, see Step 13 through Step 17 in 5.12.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station. Step 13 Test the input optical power of the RC port and the output optical power of the OUT port of the east FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting the fiber to the RM port of the FIU board). Record the optical power values in the commissioning record. Step 14 Calculate the insertion loss from the RC port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.0 dB. ----End
5.12.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow at the receive end of an OTM station.
Prerequisite
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete. The optical power commissioning of station B must be complete.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
145
Set-up Diagram
Figure 5-21 Fiber connection of OTM station C on the OptiX OSN 8800
Station C
D01 TDC RDC IN IN OAU1 D C OBU1 OUT M IN D02 M01 M02 IN RC M OBU1 4 OUT 0 OUT
LQM D 4 0 LOM
Tx
Rx
LQM LOM
TC
D40
M40
OUT
LSX
LSX SC2
TM2 RM2 RM F
West F
To B I U
TM RM
RM1 TM1
M01
LQM
OUT OUT RC
Rx
Tx
D01
I U TM
East
To D
LQM LOM
D02 TC D OUT 4 OAU1 IN 0 IN RDC DCM TDC
OBU1
OUT M IN
M02
4 0
M40
LOM
IN
LSX
LSX
D40
VOA
ODF side
Station C
D01 TDC RDC IN IN OAU1 D C OBU1 OUT M IN D02 M01 M02 IN RC M OBU1 4 OUT 0 OUT
LQM D 4 0 LOM
Tx
Rx
LQM LOM
TC
D40
M40
OUT
LSX
LSX SC2
TM2 RM2 RM F
West F
To B I U
TM RM
RM1 TM1
M01
LQM
OUT OUT RC
Rx
Tx
D01
I U TM
East
To D
LQM LOM
D02 TC D OUT 4 OAU1 IN 0 IN RDC DCM TDC
OBU1
OUT M IN
M02
4 0
M40
LOM
IN
LSX
LSX
D40
VOA
ODF side
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
146
Tx Rx
Station C
TDC RDC D1 D2
L Q M
IN
L 4 G
OUT
A1
A2 OBU1 OUT IN OUT RC RM TM OUT
IN
D OAU1 C OBU1 TC OUT M IN
MR2
F TM
RM1
West To B I
SC2
TM1
TM2 RM2
U RM
F I U
To D East
OBU1
OUT RC OUT IN OUT D1 D2
MR2
A1 A2 IN OUT
OAU1
IN DCM RDC TDC TC IN
L IN L OUT Q 4 M G
Tx Rx
VOA
ODF side
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to fiber connection diagram. The optical fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted. Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM ports on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 4 For optical power commissioning of the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC ports on the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 7 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow. Then measure the optical power and the OSNR of each channel in WDM mode. Or connect the INx port of the MCA4/MCA8 board to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow. Then measure the optical power and the OSNR of each channel on the U2000 by completing the following operations.
l Log in to U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE is displayed. l Right-click the NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. l Select the desired MCA4/MCA8 board, and choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum Analysis from the left-hand Function Tree. l Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query. l In Spectrum Data, query Optical Power (dBm) and OSNR (dB) for each current wavelength display.
NOTE
You can also connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN port on the West-Receive-toEast-Transmit OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the optical power and OSNR of each wavelength of the IN port on the OAU1.
Step 8 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the OUT port on the West-Receiveto-East-Transmit OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the gain of the OAU1 on the U2000 to commission the launched optical power to the maximum value for single wavelength for the OAU1.
NOTE
For the methods and requirements of gain adjustment for the OAU, see 5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board.
Step 9 Calculate the gains of each wavelength of the OAU1. Record the output optical power, gain of each wavelength, and the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal. Step 10 Check whether the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal is compliant to the typical value by using the U2000. Step 11 The tested OSNR of the output signals for the optical amplifier at the receive end must be higher than the designed OSNR in the actual project. Step 12 The commissioning method of the West-Receive-to-East-Transmit OBU and DCM is the same as that of the OLA station. For specific procedures, see Step 10 through Step 12 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper for the following port on the west board to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the input optical power of each wavelength. l l l For OptiX OSN 8800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the D40 board. For OptiX OSN 6800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the D40 board. For OptiX OSN 3800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the MR2 board.
Step 14 Test the output optical power of each wavelength for the following port by using an optical spectrum analyzer. l l l For OptiX OSN 8800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the Dn port on the D40 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. For OptiX OSN 6800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the Dn port on the D40 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. For OptiX OSN 3800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the D1 and D2 ports on the MR2 board by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Step 15 Calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength for the following boards. The insertion loss must satisfy the following requirements and the maximum difference between the insertion loss values must be lower than 2.0 dB. If the difference is greater than 2.0 dB, replace the board with a new board. l l l For OptiX OSN 8800, the insertion loss must be lower than 6.5 dB. For OptiX OSN 6800, the insertion loss must be lower than 6.5 dB. For OptiX OSN 3800, the insertion loss must be lower than 1.5 dB.
Step 16 Test the input optical power for the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU. Check whether the optical power for the IN port on the OTU is within the standard range.
NOTE
If a PIN receiver is used on the WDM side of the OTU, no fixed optical attenuator is needed. If an APD is used on the WDM side of the OTU, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be added to ensure that the input optical power of the IN port of the OTU meets the requirements. If the optical power does not meet the requirements, add, change or remove the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the received optical power is within the standard range.
Step 17 Securely insert the optical fiber into the IN port of the OTU after the input optical power meets the requirements. Step 18 Test the output optical power on the client side of the OTU and the optical power of the ODF. Compare the two values to check whether the fiber jumper on the client side is correctly connected. The fiber attenuation must be lower than 1 dB. Step 19 Query the input and output optical power of each OTU by using the U2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values must be lower than 2.0 dB. The number of error corrections within 15 minutes for the board with FEC function must be less than 100,000. If the number of error corrections is more than 100,000, locate and correct the fault. Step 20 If the client equipment accessed is new, test the 24-hour network-wide bit errors of the client equipment. If the client equipment is not connected or not used, loop back the TX and RX ports on the client side of all OTUs for station C on the ODF side. In addition, a fixed optical attenuator needs to be added before the RX port.
NOTE
Section 5.12.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station, 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA and 5.12.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End show the commissioning process for the optical multiplex section. The commissioning for the multiplex sections at OTM and OLA stations are similar to these.
----End
5.12.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board)

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the FOADM station along the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite
Fiber connections and network configuration must be complete.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
149

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, fibers, fixed optical attenuator, variable optical attenuator (VOA), U2000 computer

Figure 5-24 Fiber connection diagram of the FOADM station
Station E
DCM LINE C SYS R P IN C TDC TC IN OAU1 OUT RDC IN
D 4 D03 OTU 0
D02
Tx
Rx
OTU OTU OTU
M03 4 M02 M01
M 0
OUT IN OBU1 OUT OUT RC
OTU
D01
OTU
West To F
F TM I U RM
RM1
SC2
TM1 M01
TM2 D01 RM2
RM
F I TM U
To B
East
OTU
M02 OUT OUT RC OUT
Rx
Tx
OTU OTU OTU

D02 D03 D OUT D TC C IN M
OTU
OBU1
IN
M M03 OTU 4 0
4 IN 0
OBU1
IN
VOA
Optical distribution frame (ODF)
Procedure
Step 1 For information on how to commission the received optical power of the FOADM station using the multiplexer board and demultiplexer board, see 5.12.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End. Step 2 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical port on the M40 to scan the multiplexed signals. Based on the tested optical power for each pass-through wavelength, adjust the VOA in each pass-through channel. Adjust the optical power flatness of the pass-through wavelength so that the single-wavelength optical power input to the OBU1 is consistent with the nominal single-wavelength input optical power. Step 3 The optical power at the transmit end of the FOADM station is commissioned the same way as the optical power at the transmit end of the OTM station. For more information about the commissioning procedure, see 5.12.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station. ----End
5.12.6 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MRx+MRx)

This section describes how to commission the optical power along the west-to-east signal flow in the FOADM station using the MR2+MR2 scheme.
Prerequisite
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete. The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical attenuator, VOA, U2000 This section uses station E using the MRx boards as an example to describe the optical power commissioning procedure for an FOADM station.
NOTE
MRx can be MR8, MR8V, MR4, or MR2. l For the OptiX OSN 8800, MR8V is considered as an example. l For the OptiX OSN 6800, MR8V is considered as an example. l For the OptiX OSN 3800, MR2 is considered as an example.
Set-up Diagram
Figure 5-25 Fiber connection of FOADM station E on the OptiX OSN 8800
Station E
TM IN RM RM1
SC2
TM1
TM2 RM2
RM OUT
TM
F I TC To D U
RC
D VI C OBU1 M IN OUT
MO MI
OUT IN
OBU1
OUT
MR8V
IN OUT
MI MO
MR8V
VI OUT
F I RC U To F
OBU1
OUT
OAU1
TDC
TC IN
OUT
RDC
DCM
West
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
East
VOA
ODF side
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
151
Station E
TM IN RM RM1
SC2
TM1
TM2 RM2
RM OUT
TM
F I TC To D U
RC
D VI C OBU1 M IN OUT
MO MI
OUT IN
OBU1
OUT
MR8V
IN OUT
MI MO
MR8V
VI OUT
F I RC U To F
OBU1
OUT
OAU1
TDC
TC IN
OUT
RDC
DCM
West
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
East
VOA
ODF side
Station E
TM IN RM RM1
SC2
TM1
TM2 RM2
RM TM OUT
D F C OBU1 I TC M OUT IN West To D U
MO IN
MO MI
OUT IN
OBU1
MR2
MI
MR2
MI OUT MO
MR2
OUT IN
F I OUT RC U
IN TC
To F East
OBU1
RC OUT OUT IN OUT
OAU1
RDC DCM TDC IN
L Q M
L 4 G
L 4 G
L 4 G
L Q M
L 4 G
VOA
ODF side
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
152
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board based on the fiber connection diagram. The optical fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted. Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 3 For information about how to commission the optical power and calculate the insertion loss of the IN and TM ports on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 4 For information about how to commission the optical power of the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 5 For information about how to commission the optical power and calculate the insertion loss of the RM and OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 6 For information about how to commission the optical power and calculate the insertion loss of the IN and TC ports on the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 7 The commissioning method for the OAU at the receive end and the DCM is the same as the commissioning method for the OLA station. For more information, see Step 10 through Step 12 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
NOTE
The TDC and RDC ports on the OAU1 can connect to a DCM module. After input optical power commissioning, set the gain to adjust the output optical power to the standard value. The optical power, gain and OSNR are tested the same way as described previously.
Step 8 Test the output optical power of the following ports in the west after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receive end. Determine the optical port with the highest output optical power. l l l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the output optical power of the D1 - D8 ports on the MR8V boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receiving end. For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the output optical power of the D1 - D8 ports on the MR8V boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receiving end. For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the output optical power of the D1 and D2 ports on the two MR2 boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receiving end.
Step 9 Add a proper fixed optical attenuator at the receive end of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power at the IN port on the OTU meets the requirements.
NOTE
l The optimal range of the input optical power of the OTU is from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload point 5) dBm. l For the specific specifications of OTUs, see the Product Description.
Step 10 Insert the optical fiber into the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU after the input optical power meets the requirements. Step 11 Test the optical power at the following ports by using an optical spectrum analyzer. l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the optical power of the IN, D1 - D8 and MO ports on the west MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
l l
For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the optical power of the IN, D1 - D8 and MO ports on the west MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer. For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of the IN, D1, D2 and MO ports on the west MR2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. For the OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to any one of the D1 - D8 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on the west MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 4 dB. For the OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to any one of the D1 - D8 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on the west MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 4 dB. For the OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the D1 port and to the D2 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on the first west MR2. The insertion loss must be lower than 1.5 dB.
Step 12 Calculate the following drop insertion loss. l
Step 13 For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of each wavelength of the IN, D1, D2 and MO ports on the second MR2 of west. Calculate the drop insertion loss of the MR2 in the same way. Step 14 Test the input optical power of the east OBU1 at the transmit end. l For the OptiX OSN 8800, adjust the value of the VOA between the east MR8V and the west MR8V at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical power of the pass-through wavelength of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end conforms to the standard value. For the OptiX OSN 6800, adjust the value of the VOA between the east MR8V and the west MR8V at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical power of the pass-through wavelength of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end conforms to the standard value. For the OptiX OSN 3800, adjust the attenuation of the VOA between the east MR2 and the west MR2 at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical power of the pass through wavelength for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end conforms to the standard value.
Step 15 Test the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU with an optical power meter. Step 16 Test the input optical power for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Adjust the attenuation of the VOA on the OTU to ensure that the input optical power of the add wavelength for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end conforms to the typical input power for a single wavelength. Step 17 Test the optical power of the following ports by using an optical spectrum analyzer. l l l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the optical power of the MI, A1 - A8 and OUT ports on the east MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer. For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the optical power of the MI, A1 - A8 and OUT ports on the east MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer. For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of the MI, A1, A2 and OUT ports on the east MR2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. For the OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the add insertion loss from any one of the A1 - A8 ports to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to OUT port on the east MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 6 dB.
Step 18 Calculate the add insertion loss as follows. l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
For the OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the add insertion loss from any one of the A1 - A8 ports to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to OUT port on the east MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 6 dB. For the OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the add insertion loss from the A1 port and the A2 port to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to the OUT port on the east MR2. The insertion loss must be lower than 1.5 dB.
Step 19 Test the optical power for each output wavelength at the OUT port on the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 20 Calculate the gain for each wavelength of the OBU1. Gain = Output optical power of a single wavelength Input optical power of a single wavelength. The gain flatness for each wavelength must be lower than 2 dB. Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signals of the OBU1 by using the U2000. The difference between the value on the U2000 and the measured value must be lower than 2 dB. Step 22 For information about how to commission the optical power and insertion loss of the RC and the OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. ----End
5.12.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM+ROAM)

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in the ROADM station in the ROAM+ROAM mode.
Prerequisite

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
155
Testing Diagram (Networking with ROAM+ROAM)

Figure 5-28 Fiber connection of ROADM station E (networking with ROAM)
Station E
TM IN RM TC RM1
SC2
TM1 EXPO EXPI EXPI EXPO DM OUT M 0 1 M 0 2 M M 0 0 1 2 OBU1 F OUT IN I RC U OBU1 OUT IN
TM2 RM2
RM TM OUT RC OBU1 F OUT IN To F TC I U East OAU1 OUT IN TDC IN
To D West
ROAM
ROAM
DM RDC
OBU
OBU
DCM
D40
D40
L Q M
L O G
L Q M
L O G
VOA
ODF side
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted. Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM ports on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC ports on the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 7 The commissioning method of west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of the OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 8 Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU, from the west FIU to the west OTU. Create the optical cross-connection from east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the U2000. Step 9 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN ports for the west OTUs individually. Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power of the west OTUs meets the requirements.
NOTE
l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame need to be configured. If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required. l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD module is configured on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required. Instead, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be configured. l There are two types of optical receive modules: PIN and APD. The specific type can be identified through the bar code information pasted on the front panel of the module. The APD also has a corresponding APD warning identifier on the panel of the board.
Step 10 After ensuring that the optical power meets the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU. Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN, DM and EXPO ports for the west ROAM with an optical power meter. Measure the input optical power at the IN port and the single-wavelength output optical power at the Dn port of the D40. Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DM port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the EXPO port of the west ROAM. Calculate the insertion loss for the D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
NOTE
l For the ROAM board, Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the inside VOA of the board l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about the insertion loss of the ROAM board.
Step 13 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths for the ROAM. Method 1 is recommended. 1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. The ROAM automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for east OTU and west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the ROAM board. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
2.
Step 14 Test the optical power of the EXPI, Mn and OUT ports for the east ROAM by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 15 Calculate the add insertion loss from the Mn port to the OUT port and the pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port for the east ROAM.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
157

NOTE
l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the inside VOA of the board l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about the insertion loss of the ROAM board.
Step 16 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength optical power for each output wavelength of the OUT port for east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 17 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OBU1. The gain flatness for each wavelength should be less than 2 dB. Step 18 Query the input and output optical power for the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the U2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than 2 dB. Step 19 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT ports of the east FIU, sees Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. ----End
5.12.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in the ROADM station in the WSD9+WSM9 mode.
Prerequisite

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
158
Testing Diagram (Networking with WSD9+WSM9)

Figure 5-29 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSD9+WSM9)
L Q M L O G L S X L O G L Q M L O G
L S X
L O G
Station E
D40
TM IN RM RM1
M40 SC2
TM2 RM2 DM AM EXPO EXPI RM TM OUT
TM1
West
To D
F OBU1 I TC IN OUT U
WSD9
IN
WSM9
OUT IN
OBU1 OUT
F I RC U
East
To F
OBU1
RC OUT OUT IN OUT
WSM9
AM
EXPI EXPO
WSD9
DM
OUT IN
OAU1
TDC TC IN
RDC
M40
D40
DCM
L Q M
L O G
L S X
L O G
L Q M
L O G
L S X
L O G
VOA
ODF side
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical fiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted. Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM ports on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the RM and OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TC ports on the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of the OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to west OTU at the receive end, from the west FIU to the east FIU, and from east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the U2000. Step 9 Adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelength. Method 1 is recommended during deployment commissioning. 1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. The WSD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end meets the requirements.
NOTE
After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical port on the OTU. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to finetune the power.
2.
Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the drop wavelength of the WSD9 board. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end meets the requirements.
Step 10 Test the optical power of IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU. Step 11 Adjust the optical power for the west pass-through wavelength. Method 1 is recommended during deployment commissioning. 1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. The WSD9 and the WSM9 automatically adjust the optical power for the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use the second method to fine-tune the optical power.
2.
Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the pass-through wavelength of the WSD9 and WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
Step 12 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west WSD9 board by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 13 Test the input and output optical power of the D40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The insertion loss of the D40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
NOTE
The insertion loss of D40 = the input optical power of D40 the output optical power of D40
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
160
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn port and the pass-through loss from the IN port to the EXPO port of the east WSD9.
NOTE
l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the inside VOA of the board l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSD9 board should be equal to or less than 8 dB.
Step 15 Adjust the output power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. Method 1 is recommended during deployment commissioning. 1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. This ensures that the average input power of add wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of single wavelength.
NOTE
After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to finetune the optical power.
2.
Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA corresponding to the pass-through wavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA (in the solid frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengths through the M40, the VOA is not required.
NOTE
Step 16 Test the input and output optical power of the M40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The insertion loss of the M40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB. Step 17 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports of the WSM9 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 18 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn port to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port of the WSM9.
NOTE
l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the inside VOA of the board l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSM9 board should be equal to or less than 8 dB.
Step 19 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength for each output wavelength of the OUT port for the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness of each wavelength should be less than 2 dB.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
161
Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the U2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than 2 dB. Step 22 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT ports of the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. ----End
5.12.9 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in the ROADM station in the WSD9+RMU9 mode.
Prerequisite

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
162
Testing Diagram (Networking with WSD9+RMU9)

Figure 5-30 Fiber connections of ROADM station E on the OptiX OSN 8800
L S X
L O G
Station E
D40
TM IN RM RM1
MR8V SC2
TM2 RM2 TOA DM AM EXPO EXPI RM TM OUT
TM1
F OBU1 I TC IN OUT IN West To D U

OUT ROA TOA
WSD9
RMU9
ROA OUT
OBU1
IN
F I OUT RC U
To F East
OBU1
RC OUT OUT
RMU9
AM
EXPI EXPO
WSD9
IN DM
OUT
OAU1
IN TC TDC DCM IN
IN
RDC
MR8V
D40
L Q M
L O G
L S X
L O G
L Q M
L O G
L S X
L O G
VOA
ODF side
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
163
L S X
L O G
Station E
D40
TM IN RM RM1
MR8V SC2
TM1
F OBU1 I TC IN OUT IN West To D U

OUT ROA TOA
WSD9
RMU9
ROA OUT
OBU1
IN
F I OUT RC U
To F East
OBU1
RC OUT OUT
RMU9
AM
EXPI EXPO
WSD9
IN DM
OUT
OAU1
IN TC TDC DCM IN
IN
RDC
MR8V
D40
L Q M
L O G
L S X
L O G
L Q M
L O G
L S X
L O G
VOA
ODF side
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
164
L Q M L Q G L S X L Q G L Q M L Q G
L S X
L Q G
Station E
D40
TM IN RM RM1
MR4 SC2
TM1
OUT F TC OBU1 I IN IN West To D U RC OUT OUT OUT ROA TOA
WSD9
RMU9
ROA OUT
OUT OBU1
IN
F I RC U
To F East
OBU1
RMU9
AM
EXPI EXPO
WSD9
IN DM
OUT
IN
OAU1
TC TDC DCM IN
IN
RDC
MR4
D40
L Q M
L Q G
L S X
L Q G
L Q M
L Q G
L S X
L Q G
VOA
ODF side
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted. Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TM ports on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the RM and OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TC ports on the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of the OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to west OTU at the receive end, from the west FIU to the east FIU on the U2000. Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU that is connected with RMU9 directly at the transmit end to the east FIU. Step 9 Adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelengths. Method 1 is recommended during deployment commissioning. 1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. The WSD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop wavelength from the west OTU. This ensures that the input power for the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical port on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to finetune the optical power.
2.
Method 2: Set the attenuation value of each drop channel of the WSD9 on the U2000. Ensure that the input power for the IN port of the west OTU is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
Step 10 Test the optical power of the IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU. Step 11 Test the input and output optical power of the west D40. Calculate the insertion loss of the D40 board, which should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB. Step 12 Adjust the optical power of the west pass-through wavelengths. Method 1 is recommended during deployment commissioning. 1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. The WSD9 automatically adjusts the corresponding VOA for each pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the input power of the single pass-through wavelength for the OBU1 is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical port on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to finetune the power.
2.
Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Test the input power of the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Manually set the corresponding VOA of each pass-through wavelength of the west WSD9. This ensures that the input power of the single pass-through wavelength for the OBU1 is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
Step 13 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west WSD9 board by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DM port and the pass-through loss from IN port to the EXPO port of the WSD9 board.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
166

NOTE
l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the inside VOA of the board l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSD9 board should be equal to or less than 8 dB.
Step 15 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths for the east OTU board (the OTU is directly connected to the RMU9 board). Method 1 is recommended during deployment commissioning. 1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. The RMU9 automatically adjusts the corresponding VOA for each add wavelength of each east OTU. This ensures that the input power the single add wavelength of the OBU1 is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical port on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power as required, use method 2 to fine-tune the optical power.
2.
Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Test the input power of east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. M set the corresponding VOA of each add wavelength for the east OTU in the east RMU9. This ensures that the input power of the single add wavelength of the OBU1 is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
Step 16 For wavelengths added through the RMU9 after the wavelengths are multiplexed by the MRx, perform the following substeps:
NOTE
MRx can be MR8, MR8V, MR4, or MR2. l For the OptiX OSN 8800, MR8V is considered as an example. l For the OptiX OSN 6800, MR8V is considered as an example. l For the OptiX OSN 3800, MR4 is considered as an example.
1. 2. 3.
Set the attenuation of the corresponding RMU9-imbedded VOA connected to the MRx to 3 dB. Set the VOA attenuation between the MRx and OTU to the minimum. Determine the smallest input optical power value for wavelengths added through the MRx to the IN port of the OBU1. Adjust the optical power for each of the other wavelengths to the smallest input optical power value to flatten the optical power. Set the attenuation of the corresponding RMU9-imbedded VOA connected to the MRx to obtain the typical input power of a single wavelength of the OBU1 added through the MRx.
4.
Step 17 Test the input and output optical power of MRx, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The insertion loss of the MRx board must satisfy the following requirements. l l For the MR8V board, the insertion loss for the MR8V board should be equal to or less than 3.5 dB. For the MR4 board, the insertion loss for the MR4 board should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
Step 18 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports for the RMU9 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 19 Calculate the insertion loss for each add wavelength from the AMn port to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port for the RMU9.

NOTE
l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the inside VOA of the board l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about the insertion loss of the RMU9 board.
Step 20 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength for each output wavelength of the OUT port for the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 21 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness for each wavelength should be less than 2 dB. Step 22 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the U2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than 2 dB. Step 23 For the optical power commissioning of the insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT ports of the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. ----End
5.12.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (RDU9+WSM9)

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in the ROADM station in the RDU9+WSM9 mode.
Prerequisite

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical attenuator, VOA
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
168
Testing Diagram (Networking with RDU9+WSM9)

Figure 5-33 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with RDU9+WSM9)
L Q M L O G L Q M L O G
L S X
L O G
Station E
D40V
TM IN RM RM1
M40 SC2
TM2 RM2 RM TM IN OBU1 OUT OUT TC OUT
TM1 DM AM EXPO EXPI
West
To D
IN F OAU1 I OUT U TC OUT RC
IN
RDU9
WSM9
RC F
East
To F
I U
OUT
OBU1
IN
WSM9
AM
EXPI EXPO
RDU9
DM
OUT IN
OAU1
TDC IN
RDC
OUT
M40
D40V
DCM
L Q M
L O G
L S X
L O G
L S X
L O G
VOA
ODF side
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical fiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted. Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TM ports on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the RM and OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TC ports on the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 7 The commissioning method for the west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of the OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end, from the west FIU to the east FIU, and from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the U2000. Step 9 When wavelengths are dropped through the MR8V board or the D40V board, method 1 is recommended to adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelengths during deployment commissioning. 1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. The MR8V board or the D40V board automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop wavelength. This ensures that the average input power for the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end meets requirements.
NOTE
2.
Method 2: In the scenario where the RDU9 is directly connected to the OTU, select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the drop wavelength of the RDU9 board. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the west OTU at the receive end meets the requirements.
Step 10 Test the optical power of the IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU. Step 11 Adjust the optical power of the west pass-through wavelength. Method 1 is recommended during deployment commissioning. 1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of the pass-through wavelengths of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
2.
Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA corresponding to the pass-through wavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through wavelengths of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
Step 12 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west RDU9 board by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 13 Test the input and output optical power of D40V, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The insertion loss of the D40V board should be equal to or less than 8.0 dB.
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn port and the pass-through loss from the IN port to the EXPO port for the east RDU9.
NOTE
l For the insertion loss of the RDU9 board, refer to the Product Description.
Step 15 Adjust the output power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. Method 1 is recommended during deployment commissioning. 1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. This ensures that the average input power for the add wavelengths of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
2.
Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the pass-through wavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of the passthrough wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the D40V, a VOA (in the solid frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengths through the M40, the VOA is not required.
Step 16 Test the input and output optical power of the M40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The insertion loss of the M40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB. Step 17 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports for the WSM9 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 18 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn port to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port of the WSM9.
NOTE
l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the inside VOA of the board l When the attenuation for the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss for the WSM9 board should be equal to or less than 8 dB.
Step 19 Test the optical power of the IN port and the single wavelength for each output wavelength for the OUT port of the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OBU1. The gain flatness of each wavelength should be less than 2 dB. Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal for the OBU1 by using the U2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than 2 dB. Step 22 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT ports of the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. ----End
5.12.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD4 +WSMD4)

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in the ROADM station in the WSMD4+WSMD4 mode.
Prerequisite
l l The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete. The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the WSMD4 board. In this section, the networking diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used for illustration purposes. The network providing multi-dimensional grooming can be considered as multiple networks providing two-dimensional grooming. Figure 5-34 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)
Station E
TM RM IN TC RM1
SC2
TM1
TM2 RM2
RM
TM RC OUT
West To D
OUT
F I U
IN RC
OBU1
DM4 IN AM4 OUT IN
OUT
OAU1
OUT TC
WSMD4
AM4 OUT
WSMD4
IN DM4 AM1 DM1 OUT
F I U
To F East
IN
OBU1
IN OUT
OBU1
DM1
AM1
IN
D40
VOA
OBU
OBU
M40
M40
D40
L L O S G X
L L O S G X
ODF side
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
172
NOTE
l In this diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports for the WSMD4 board are not shown. The two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in other direction. l The single-wavelength signals are transmitted directly to the AMn optical port by the OTU board.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection for each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical fiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted. Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TM ports on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the RM and OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TC ports on the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that for the OLA station. For specific procedures, see Step 12 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 8 Create a Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and create one from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the U2000. Step 9 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN ports for the west OTUs individually. Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power for the west OTUs meets the requirements.
NOTE
l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame need to be configured. If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not required. l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD module is configured on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not required. Instead, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be configured. l The previous commissioning method is for the OTU board with a PIN photodiode. For the OTU with APD, a 10 dB fixed attenuator needs to be configured. l There are two types of optical receive modules: PIN and APD. The specific module type can be identified by the bar code information pasted on the front panel. The APD had a corresponding APD warning identifier on the panel of the board.
Step 10 Test the optical power of the IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU. Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN and DMn ports for the west WSMD4 with an optical power meter. Test the output optical power for the D40.
Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn ports for the west WSMD4, and calculate the insertion loss for the D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
NOTE
l For the WSMD4 board, Insertion Loss = Insertion Loss when the inside attenuation is zero + Attenuation value of the internal VOA of the board. l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about the insertion loss for the WSMD4 board.
Step 13 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths for the WSMD4. Method 2 is recommended during deployment commissioning. 1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. The WSMD4 automatically adjusts the optical power for the add wavelength of the east OTU and the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to finetune the power.
2.
Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the WSMD4 board. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
Step 14 Test the output optical power of the AMn and OUT ports for the east WSMD4 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 15 Calculate the add insertion loss and the pass-through loss from the AMn port to the OUT port for the east WSMD4. Step 16 Test the single wavelength optical power of the IN port and single wavelength optical power of each output wavelength for the OUT port of the east OAU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 17 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OAU1. The gain flatness for each wavelength should be less than 2 dB. Step 18 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal for the OAU1 by using the U2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than 2 dB. Step 19 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT ports of the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. ----End

Prerequisite
The fiber connections must be correct. To make the OTU emit light normally, all channels must be accessed with services or must be forced to emit light.

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber adapter, Fiber, Signal analyzer (selected according to the actual service type), such as SDH/SONET analyzer, Fixed optical attenuator, Variable optical attenuator, U2000

Figure 5-35 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSMD2+WSMD2)
Station E
TM RM RM1 TM2 RM2 EXPO IN EXPI OUT IN RM
SC2
TM1 OUT
TM
IN
TC
RC
OUT
West
To D
F IN I U RC OUT
OAU1
OBU1
OUT
WSMD2 OBU1
OUT IN DM EXPI AM EXPO
WSMD2
IN AM DM OUT
F I TC U
To F IN
East
OUT
OAU1
IN
D40
M40
M40
D40
L L O S G X
L L O S G X
Procedure
Step 1 Check if the fiber connection between boards is correct based on the fiber connection diagram, and check that the fiber on each board is well inserted. If not, immediately correct the error. Step 2 Test the optical power of the west FIU and the SC2. See step 1 to step 9 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 3 Perform the commissioning on the west OAU. See step 10 to step 12 in5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA. Step 4 Create optical cross-connections on a per-NE basis from the west FIU. Create optical crossconnections on a per-NE basis from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the U2000. Step 5 Measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the IN port and the single-wavelength output optical power at the DM and EXPO ports on the west WSMD2. Calculate the insertion loss of the wavelength dropped from the IN port to the DM port and the insertion loss of the wavelength that traverses from the IN port to the DM port on the WSMD2.
Drop insertion loss = Input optical power for a single drop wavelength at the IN port on the WSMD2 Output optical power for a single drop wavelength at the DM port on the WSMD2 Pass-through loss = Input optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the IN port on the WSMD2 Output optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the EXPO port on the WSMD2
NOTE
For information about the parameters of optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description.
Step 6 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the IN port and the single-wavelength output optical power at the Dn port on the west D40. Calculate the insertion loss of the D40. Single-wavelength insertion loss of the D40 = Single-wavelength input optical power at the IN port on the D40 Single-wavelength output optical power at the Dn port on the D40 Step 7 Test the input optical power from the IN port on all the west OTU boards. Replace or remove the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power from the IN port on the OTU boards is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload point 5) dBm. Step 8 Test the client-side transmitting optical power of the west OTU board. There are two possible situations, described as follows: l If the client equipment is also newly installed, connect the OTU boards to the client equipment for test. l If the client equipment is not connected, use a fiber to connect the client-side TX port on the west OTU board to the client-side RX port on the east OTU board of station C by using a fixed optical attenuator on the ODF.
NOTE
The client side of the OTU board is connected to the client equipment normally after commissioning. The interconnection of the OTU boards exists for the testing of 24-hour bit errors in serial after an analyzer is connected to station A after commissioning.
Step 9 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the input optical power of the east OBU. On the U2000, set the attenuation of the VOA which corresponds to each wavelength on the east WSMD4. Set the attenuation to ensure that the input optical power for each pass-through wavelength of the OBU conforms to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
The single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU permits a tolerance of 1 dB. For the technical specifications for the OBU board, see the Product Description.
Step 10 Measure the optical power at the RX port on the east OTU board. Add, replace or remove a fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the optical power at this RX port is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload 5) dBm.
NOTE
Optical ports on the OTU board used in this network scenario are the S-64.2b ports. For client-side specifications for other types of OTUs, see the Product Description.
Step 11 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the east OTU board. This value should be in the range from 0 dBm to 5 dBm. This value is usually about 2 dBm. Step 12 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the received single-wavelength optical power at the Mn port and the single-wavelength output optical power at the OUT port on the east M40. Calculate the insertion loss of the M40.

NOTE
For the parameters for optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description.
Step 13 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the input optical power at the IN port on the east OBU. On the U2000, set the attenuation of the VOA which corresponds to each wavelength on the east WSMD2. Set the attenuation to ensure that the input optical power for each add wavelength of the OBU conforms to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
The single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU permits a tolerance of 1 dB. For the technical specifications of the OBU board, see Product Description.
Step 14 Measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the AM and EXPI ports and the singlewavelength output optical power at the OUT port on the east WSMD2. Calculate the insertion loss of the wavelength added from the AM port to the OUT port, and the insertion loss of the wavelength that traverses from the AM port to OUT port on the WSMD2. Add insertion loss = Input optical power of a single add wavelength at the AM port on the WSMD2 Output optical power of a single add wavelength at the OUT port on the WSMD2 Pass-through loss = Input optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the EXPI port on the WSMD2 Output optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the OUT port on the WSMD2
NOTE
For the parameters for optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description. The insertion loss measured in the previous steps includes the VOA attenuation, which differs from the insertion loss measured when the VOA attenuation is set to 0.
Step 15 Perform the commissioning on the east OBU. See 5.12.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station. Step 16 Perform the commissioning on the east FIU. See 5.12.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station. ----End

Prerequisite
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete. To make the OTU emit light normally, all channels must be accessed with services or must be forced to emit light.

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber adapter, Fiber, Signal analyzer (selected according to the actual service type), such as SDH/SONET analyzer, Fixed optical attenuator, Variable optical attenuator, U2000
Testing Diagram (Networking with WSMD9+WSMD9)

This section describes the commissioning procedure based on the network in Figure 5-36. If the system is required to support the 1588 clock, see 5.10.5 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD4+WSMD4) for the commissioning procedure. Figure 5-36 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSMD9+WSMD9)
O T U D40
O T U
O T U M40
O T U
DCM
LIN SOUT TM RX IN
DCM
SIN OUT TM RX LOUT
DM1 EXPO EXPI
AM1
DAS1 TX
WSMD9
EXPO OUT AM1 EXPI
WSMD9
IN DM1
RM LOUT SIN
TX DAS1 RM SOUT LIN
DCM
M40
D40
DCM
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection for each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical fiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted. Step 2 Test the optical power of the LIN port on the west DAS1 with an optical power meter. Compare the value with optical power of the OUT port on the east FIU of station D to calculate the line attenuation between station D and station E on the line side. If the actual line attenuation is larger than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determine whether the cable attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are faulty, clear the fault by following the appropriate procedures. Step 3 Test the input optical power of the LIN port and the output optical power of the TM port on the west DAS1 at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values in the commissioning record.
Step 4 Calculate the insertion loss from the LIN port to the TM port of the west DAS1. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB. Step 5 Test the input optical power of the RX port on the DAS1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Add a proper attenuator to make the input optical power less than 3 dBm. Record the input optical power of the RX port in the commissioning record. Step 6 Test the output optical power of the TX port of the DAS1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the output optical power of the TX port in the commissioning record. Step 7 Test the input optical power of the RM port and the output optical power of the LOUT port on the east DAS1 at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting the fiber to the SIN port of the DAS1 board). Record the optical power values in the commissioning record. Step 8 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the LOUT port on the east DAS1. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB. Step 9 Measure the optical power of each wavelength at the SOUT port on the DAS1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Check whether the average output optical power of a single wavelength is in the range of nominal optical power of a single wavelength 2 dB. Step 10 Create a single-station optical cross-connection from the west DAS1 to the east DAS1, and create one from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east DAS1 on the U2000. Step 11 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN ports for the west OTUs individually. Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power for the west OTUs meets the requirements. Step 12 Test the optical power of the IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU. Step 13 Test the optical power of the IN and DMn ports for the west WSMD9 with an optical power meter. Test the output optical power for the D40. Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn ports for the west WSMD9, and calculate the insertion loss for the D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
NOTE
l For the WSMD9 board, Insertion Loss = Insertion Loss when the inside attenuation is zero + Attenuation value of the internal VOA of the board. l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about the insertion loss for the WSMD9 board.
Step 15 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths for the WSMD9. Method 2 is recommended during deployment commissioning. 1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. The WSMD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the add wavelength of the east OTU and the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to finetune the power.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
179
2.
Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the WSMD9 board. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
Step 16 Test the output optical power of the AMn and OUT ports for the east WSMD9 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 17 Calculate the add insertion loss and the pass-through loss from the AMn port to the OUT port for the east WSMD9. Step 18 Test the single wavelength optical power of the SIN port and single wavelength optical power of each output wavelength for the LOUT port of the east DAS1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 19 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the DAS1. The gain flatness of each wavelength must be lower than 2 dB. ----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
180
6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power
Remotely Commissioning Optical Power
About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to remotely commission optical power. 6.1 General Commissioning Sequence This section describes the general sequence for commissioning optical power. 6.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power Commissioning When remotely commissioning optical power of a board, measure the optical power for each channel on the board by using an optical spectrum analyzing board. Then adjust the optical power by changing the attenuation of VOAs built in the board and the gain of an optical amplifier board. 6.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain Network This section uses project X as an example to illustrate the optical power commissioning procedures. 6.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long Spans This section describes how to commission a system with ultra-long spans.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
181
6.1 General Commissioning Sequence

This section describes the general sequence for commissioning optical power.
Basic Conditions for Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

l l l The EVOA configured on the main optical path must be an EVOA board (VA1 or VA4). MCA boards must be configured at optical power monitoring points so that you can query and analyze the optical spectrum through the U2000. Optical fibers on the entire network are properly connected. The attenuation of the optical fibers is normal and the communication between all NEs and the U2000 is normal.
General Sequence for Commissioning Optical Power

Optical power of NEs and boards is commissioned individually based on the optical signal flow. During commissioning, ensure that the line attenuation is normal based on the optical power, gain, and insertion loss requirements for each board. Generally, the optical power of the OTU board, optical amplifier (OA), and the supervisory channel board is commissioned based on the corresponding optical power requirements for the boards.
Optical Power Commissioning Procedures

Figure 6-1 shows the commissioning procedure.
NOTE
If the line attenuation is greater than the End of Life (EOL) specified in the design drawing, check the internal fiber connections and external fiber attenuators. If the customer raises specific requirements on fiber margin and provides the measured value: the line attenuation EOL required fiber margin. If the customer provides only the EOL, it is required that the line attenuation only be smaller than the EOL.
Figure 6-1 General commissioning flow

Commission optical power of add wavelengths
Commission links
Equilibrate optical power
Commission receive optical power of OTUs
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
182
Before commissioning the optical power, determine optical power monitoring sites and optical power commissioning stations on the network according to Figure 6-2. Figure 6-2 Distribution of the stations for commissioning
Power adjusting Power station (in add monitoring direction) station Power Power adjusting monitoring station station Power Power adjusting station (in add monitoring station direction)
MCA\ OSA
MCA\ OSA
MCA\ OSA
OTM
OLA
OLA
ROADM
OLA
FOADM
OLA
OTM
Line attenuation commissioning Optical power equilibrium
Line attenuation commissioning Optical power equilibrium
OSA: Optical Spectrum Analyzer
MCA: Spectrum Analyzer Unit
NOTE
Consider the OTM, FOADM and ROADM stations as the optical power commissioning stations. As the optical power for pass-through wavelengths on the FOADM stations cannot be commissioned for equalization purposes, consider the FOADM stations as fibers during commissioning.
NOTE
If the optical power monitoring point is settled at the OTM or OADM station, the optical power of the OLA stations does not need to be adjusted.
NOTE
To achieve optical power equilibrium, the network needs to be divided according to the network model, the start and end stations should be specified, and the power-adjusting stations should be determined. When determining what stations will have optical power adjustment monitoring, adhere to the following principles: l If the number of spans between two power-adjusting stations is N, determine the power-monitoring station in the middle of the span (N/2). If N is an odd number, the power-monitoring point should be shifted (N/ 20.5). And configure MCA or OPM8 boards at the transmit and received ends as required.
NOTE
OPM8 boards are recommended.
The WDM system commissions the optical power for each NE individually based on the signal flow in each network segment. One network segment has two signal flow directions, the transmit direction and the receive direction. First, complete the optical power commissioning of one OTM in the transmit direction. Then individually commission the optical power for each downstream NE. Complete the optical power commissioning of the destination OTM in the receive direction. Finally, complete the optical power commissioning for the other signal flow in the reverse direction. Project X is used as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning in the following procedures:
6.1.1 Commissioning Procedure for the Chain Network

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the chain network.
Prerequisite
The fiber connection and Network configuration must be complete.
Network Diagram for the Chain Network

Figure 6-3 shows the commissioning procedure for the chain network. Figure 6-3 Commissioning procedure for the chain network
13 West 12 MCA 11 10 MCA 9 8 MCA East
OTM A 1
OLA B 2
ROADM C 3
OLA D 4
FOADM E 5
OLA F 6
OTM G 7
: OTM
: OLA
: OADM
First, commission the optical power in the transmit direction of OTM station A. Then commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow until the optical power commissioning is complete in the west-to-east direction. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-3 (steps 1 through 7). Then commission the optical power in the reverse direction, that is, in the east-to-west direction. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-3 (steps 7 through 13). Commission the optical power along the A-B-C-D-E-F-G signal flow in the following sequence.
NOTE
For the technical specifications for each amplifier board and the OTU board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and then commission the links: l At station A, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the transmit end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA. At station B, commission the B-from-A optical power to ensure that the input optical power for the OA is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
l l
At station C, commission the C-from-B optical power to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the receive end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA. At station C, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and the pass-through wavelengths to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the transmit end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA. At station D, commission the D-from-C optical power to ensure that the input optical power for the OA is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA. At station E, commission the E-from-D optical power to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the receive end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA. At station E, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and the pass-through wavelengths to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the transmit end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA. At station F, commission the F-from-E optical power to ensure that the input optical power for the OA is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA. At station G, commission the G-from-F optical power to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the receive end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.
l l l
l l
Equilibrate the optical power: l If the MCA board is configured at station B, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths at station A for the equilibrium based on the optical power tested by the MCA board at station B. This ensures that: Single-wavelength output optical power = (Nominal single-wavelength output power 1) dBm l If the MCA board is configured at station D, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths at station C for the equilibrium based on the optical power tested by the MCA board at station D. This ensures that: Single-wavelength output optical power = (Nominal single-wavelength output power 1) dBm l If the MCA board is configured at station F, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths at station E for the equilibrium based on the optical power tested by the MCA board at station F. This ensures that: Single-wavelength output optical power = (Nominal single-wavelength output power 1) dBm Commission the receive optical power of the OTUs: l Commission the receive optical power of the OTUs to be in the nominal range of the receive optical power along the A-C-E-G span.
6.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring Network

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the ring network.
Prerequisite
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.
Network Diagram for the Ring Network

Figure 6-4 shows the commissioning procedure for the ring network.
Figure 6-4 Commissioning procedure for the ring network

19 11 9 1 A 10 2 MCA 3 C 18 17
12
MCA
MCA
16
G 7 13
MCA 6 14
E 5 15
: OLA
: OADM
NOTE
When the commissioning of 110 is complete, check the spectrum analysis results on the power-monitoring sites in the B-D-F-H sequence. If the output optical power of each single wavelength meets the equilibrium requirement, that is, the measured output optical power is the nominal output optical power of a single wavelength plus or minus 1.0 dB, perform the commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction, that is, steps 11 through 19. If the optical power of any board fails to meet the equilibrium requirement, re-commission the optical power in a clockwise direction, that is, steps 1 through 10. Do not proceed with the commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction until the optical power for every board meets equilibrium requirements.
Before commissioning a ring network, select the start station and end station according to the following principle: l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
The start station or end station should be a station which adds or drops wavelengths.
First, commission the optical power in the transmit direction of ROADM station A. Commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow indicated by arrows in the figure. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-4 (steps 1 through 10). Then commission the optical power in the reverse direction station by station. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-4 (steps 11 through 19). For details on the commissioning, see the corresponding commissioning procedures on the chain network.
6.1.3 Commissioning Procedure for the Mesh Network

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the mesh network.
Prerequisite
The fiber connection and Network configuration must be complete.
Network Diagram for the Mesh Network

Figure 6-5 shows the commissioning procedure for the mesh network.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
187
Figure 6-5 Commissioning procedure for the mesh network

19 18 17
11
10
1 30 A
2 32 MCA C
20
29 MCA
31 12 8 MCA H
21
28 D I 27 MCA MCA 26
16
22 F G MCA 25 7 6
23 E
24 5
13
14
15
: OLA
: OADM
NOTE
When the commissioning of steps 1 through 10 is complete, check the spectrum analysis results on the powermonitoring sites in the B-D-F-H sequence. If the output optical power for each single wavelength meets the equilibrium requirements, that is, the measured output optical power is the nominal output optical power of a single wavelength plus or minus 1.0 dB, perform the commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction, that is, steps 11 through 19. If the optical power for any board fails to meet the equilibrium requirements, re-commission the optical power in a clockwise direction, that is, steps 1 through 10. Do not proceed with the commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction until the optical power for every board meets equilibrium requirements.
Before commissioning the mesh network, divide the mesh network into chain subnets and ring subnets. Then commission the subnets. Divide the mesh network according to the following principles:
Divide the mesh network into ring and chain subnets according to the wavelength connection. The ring subnets should carry the most wavelength connections, and the chain subnets should carry the least wavelength connections. Determine the ring subnets first and then the chain subnets. Divide the mesh networks into large-scale ring subnets and small-scale chain subnets when possible. When dividing the mesh network is complete, select the start and end stations for each ring subnet. For other principles, see the corresponding commissioning requirements on the ring network.
l l
Divide the mesh network shown in Figure 6-5 as follows: l Ring subnet: A-B-C-D-E-F-G-H-A Commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow indicated by the arrows in Figure 6-5 (steps 1 through 10). Then, commission the optical power in the reverse direction station by station. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 11 through 19). l Chain subnet: A-K-J-I-E Commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 20 through 24). When commissioning the optical power for the chain network is complete, the optical power at station E changes. Therefore, you need to measure and analyze the optical power between the adjacent D and F stations. In addition, you need to re-commission the optical power at station E for equilibrium purposes. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 24 through 26). Then commission the optical power in the reverse direction along the signal flow. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 27 through 30). Measure and analyze the optical power between station H and station B. At station A, commission the optical power for equilibrium purposes. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 30 through 32). For details on the commissioning, see the corresponding commissioning procedures on the chain network.
6.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power Commissioning

When remotely commissioning optical power of a board, measure the optical power for each channel on the board by using an optical spectrum analyzing board. Then adjust the optical power by changing the attenuation of VOAs built in the board and the gain of an optical amplifier board.
6.2.1 Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards

This section describes how to set the gain and Rated Optical Power for an optical amplifier (OA) board.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NM operator authority or higher. The board must be created.
Impact on System
None

U2000
l OAU and OBU are OA boards that support gain adjustment. In practical use, calculate the gain range that can be set based on the intermediate insertion loss.
NOTE
Adjust the gain of the OBU board only when the ALC function is used.
Before enabling the OPA function, set the value in the Rated Optical Power field of the OA board at the transmit end as the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength.
Procedure
1. On the U2000, set the gain for an OA board. (1) Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE is displayed. (2) Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. (3) Select the desired OA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. (4) Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list. (5) On the Basic Attributes tab page, double-click Nominal Gain field, and enter an appropriate value. (6) Click Apply. Then click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box. 2. On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power for an OA board. (1) Select the desired OA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. (2) Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list. (3) On the Advanced Attributes tab page, set the value in the Rated Optical Power field as the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength.
NOTE
For the technical specifications for each type of the OA boards, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
(4) Click Apply. 3. On the U2000, close the laser of the OUT port for the OA board. (1) Select the desired OA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. (2) Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list. (3) On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Laser Status to Off. (4) Click Apply. Then click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box. 4.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
On the U2000, enable the laser at the OUT port on the OA board.
(1) Select the desired OA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. (2) Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list. (3) On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Laser Status to On. (4) Click Apply. Then click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.
6.2.2 Adjusting Internal Attenuators on Boards

When a board has an internal attenuator, you can adjust the optical power of this board by changing the attenuation of the internal attenuator. This section describes how to adjust the attenuation based on engineering design documents.
Prerequisite
Impact on System
None

U2000
The electrical variable attenuator boards are the VA1, VA4, M40V, MR8V, ROAM, RMU9, WSM9, WSD9, WSMD4, WSMD9 and WSMD2 boards.
NOTE
l The variable attenuator built in the WSM9 or WSD9 board can be adjusted only when the board has been configured with routes. l The variable attenuator built in the AMx port of the WSMD2 or WSMD4 board can be adjusted only when the board has been configured with routes.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE is displayed. Right-click an NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list. On the Basic Attributes tab page, double-click the Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio field, and then enter an appropriate value.
NOTE
The adjustable range of the built-in attenuator for a board depends on the board type.
6.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Click Apply. Click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.
6.2.3 Configuring the MCA Board

This section describes how to set the parameters for an MCA board so that it monitors the optical power for the specified channels.
Prerequisite
Impact on System
None

U2000
The MCA boards include the MCA4 ,MCA8 and OPM8 boards.
Procedure
1. Set parameters for an MCA board to monitor the optical power of wavelengths. (1) Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE is displayed. (2) Right-click an NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. (3) Select the desired MCA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. (4) Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Monitor Wavelength from the dropdown list. (5) Click Query. (6) Set Wavelength Monitor Status of the specified wavelength to Monitor or No Monitor as required. (7) Click Apply. Click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box. 2. Query the optical power and OSNR of the wavelengths on the specified channels by using an MCA board. (1) Select the desired MCA board, and then choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum Analysis from the Function Tree. (2) Select the number for the desired channel from Port Number, and click Query.
6.2.4 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line Boards
This section describes how to set the board relay mode for the Line boards.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NM operator authority or higher.
The board must be created.
Impact on System
None

U2000
The board works either in Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When the opticallayer ASON is applied, however, the board must work in Optical Relay Mode. When there is no optical-layer ASON applied, the board can work in either electrical relay mode or optical relay mode. But, it is recommended that the board be configured to work in electrical relay mode.
NOTE
For the line boards that support the regeneration mode, see the Hardware Description.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE is displayed. Right-click and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the desired line board, and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Board from the drop-down list. Set Board Mode to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.
NOTE
The board mode can be set to either Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer ASON is applied, however, the board mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode. When there is no opticallayer ASON applied, the board can work in either electrical relay mode or optical relay mode. But, it is recommended that the board be configured to work in electrical relay mode.
6.
Click Apply, and click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.
6.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain Network

This section uses project X as an example to illustrate the optical power commissioning procedures.

This section describes the networking for project X. Figure 6-6 shows the networking diagram of project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E, F and G are the WDM systems which form the chain network. Among these ONEs, the ONE A and ONE G are the OTM stations, the ONE B, ONE D and ONE F are the OLA stations, the ONE C is the ROADM station and the ONE E is the FOADM station.
Networking Diagram of the Project X

Figure 6-6 shows the networking diagram of project X. Figure 6-6 Networking diagram of project X
OTM A 1
OLA B 2
ROADM C 3
OLA D 4
FOADM E 5
OLA F 6
OTM G 7
:OTM
:OLA
: OADM
In this commissioning example, the signal flow from west to east is used as an example to illustrate the commissioning procedure. The commissioning method for the signal flow from east to west is the same as the signal flow from west to east. Figure 6-7 shows the commissioning procedure.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
194
Figure 6-7 General commissioning flow of project X

OTM\FOADM OPA function is available in the ROADM?
No
Yes
Commission optical power of add wavelengths Force one OTU to emit light and close WDM-side lasers of other OTUs Preset VOA or VA1 of add wavelengths of multiplexer board as 5 dB
Commission optical power of add wavelengths Set "Rated Optical Power" to typical input optical power of a single wavelength for the OA
In the station, set the "OPA Mode" to "Auto"
Adjust VOA or VA1 before OA or gain of OA so that the output optical power reaches the nominal optical power
In the station, set the "OPA Mode" to "Manual"
Commission links
Preset VOA or VA1 of links
Adjust the gain of the line amplifier to compensate the line attenuation
Equilibrate optical power Make sure that the overall optical power of the multiplexed wavelength is constant and adjust VOA or VA1 of each add wavelength for power equilibrium of each wavelength
Commission receive optical power of OTUs Measure the receive optical power of each OTU and adjust VOA or VA1 of the channel so that the receive optical power of the OTU meets requirements
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
195
Requirements on Incident Optical Power

Table 6-1 shows the incident optical power requirements based on a 10Gbit/s single-wavelength system. Table 6-1 Requirements on Incident Optical Power Module Type NRZ/DRZ Number of Wavelengths 40 80 G.652 SSMF +4 +1 G.655 LEAF +4 +1 G.653 -5 -7
The optical power listed in the table is expressed in dBm.
NOTE
For other optical modules or fiber types, contact the product managers or network design personnel to determine the incident optical power.
NOTE
The dispersion of G.653 fiber is close to zero, which causes strong non-linear effects. Therefore, the incident power is relatively low. Hence, in the WDM system based on the G.653 fiber, a variable optical attenuator (VOA) must be added at the output end of the transmit optical amplifier board. This ensures the per-channel incident optical power meets the requirement of the G.653 fiber.
OAU FIU
OAU
: VOA
6.3.2 Commissioning Procedure

This section describes the procedure for commissioning optical power.
Commissioning Procedure for the Add-Wavelength and Link Optical Power

Table 6-2 lists the procedure for each site.
Table 6-2 Commissioning procedures Proced ure From West to East 1 (OTM) Y 2 (OLA) 3 (ROAD M) Y 4 (OLA) 5 (FOAD M) Y 6 (OLA) 7 (OTM) N
Commis sioning Optical Power for the Add Wavelen gths Commis sion links
NOTE
l Y indicates that the commissioning procedure should be performed. l N indicates that the procedure need not be performed.
NOTE
The optical power for single channel is not optimized at this step, but during equalization.
NOTE
Before starting, set the attenuation of DEMUX to maximum, if EVOA is available.
The commissioning flowchart for the optical power of the OTM/OADM is shown in Figure 6-8.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
197
Figure 6-8 Commissioning procedure for OTM/OADM optical power

Start
OPA is available?
Configure the E2E OCH trail of ROADM node if ROADM is there
Y
Configure the E2E OCH trail Block all wavelengths except one local added wavelength
Set reference OA power by NMS
Set OA Gain to minimum if variable Gain OA
Enable OPA of ROADM node (OPA set attenuation of EVOA to calculated value)
Adjust input power of local wavelength to target power
Set OPA to manual
Release all the blocked traffic which is going to downstream
End
The commissioning flowchart for the optical power of an OLA is shown in Figure 6-9.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
198
Figure 6-9 Commissioning procedure for OLA optical power

Start
Calculate and set the target attenuation according to the design span loss
Design loss < minimum Gain OA?
N
Set EVOA at the receive end to Minimum
Span loss is less than design data?
N
Check fiber
Y N
Set VOA make Span loss=Min gain
Span loss is more than minimum gain of OA?
Y
Set OA Gain=Span loss
End
Commissioning Procedure for Optical Power Equalization

Table 6-3 lists the procedures for each site. Table 6-3 Commissioning procedures Proced ure From West to East 1 (OTM) Y 2 (OLA) 3 (ROAD M) Y 4 (OLA) 5 (FOAD M) Yb 6 (OLA) 7 (OTM) N
Equalize optical power
Ya
Ya
Ya
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
199

NOTE
l Y indicates that the commissioning procedure should be performed. l N indicates that the procedure need not be performed. l a indicates that the OLA station works as a monitoring station during the commissioning process of commissioning the optical power for equilibrium purposes. l b indicates that the optical power for each add channel at the FOADM station is commissioned for equalization purposes.
The commissioning flowchart for equalizing wavelength optical power is shown in Figure 6-10. Figure 6-10 Commissioning procedure for equalizing wavelength optical power
Start
Query the power level of each channel at monitor site
Compare to the reference level and get target attenuation set
Set EVOA by NMS
Is flatness in range of target?
Y N
Is the last OEQ in equalization order?
End
Commissioning Procedure for Drop-Wavelength Optical Power

Table 6-4 lists the procedures for each site.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
200
Table 6-4 Commissioning procedures Proced ure From West to East 1 (OTM) Y 2 (OLA) 3 (ROAD M) Y 4 (OLA) 5 (FOAD M) Y 6 (OLA) 7 (OTM) Y
Commis sion receive optical power of OTUs
NOTE
l Y indicates that the commissioning procedure should be performed. l N indicates that the procedure need not be performed.
The commissioning flowchart for drop wavelength optical power is shown in Figure 6-11.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
201
Figure 6-11 Commissioning procedure for drop wavelength optical power
Start
Is EVOA available?
Y
Set default attenuation by NMS
Query input Power of OTU by NMS
Is it in recommended range?
N N
Go to the site to change the fixed attenuator or adjust attenuation of MVOA until the power is inside the recommended range
Is EVOA available?
Y
Adjust the EVOA until the power is inside the recommended range
End
6.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A
This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station A that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete. The ECC communication must be created. The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete. The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.

U2000
For the technical specifications of each type of the boards, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-12 Fiber connections of OTM station A
Station A
Rx
OTU OTU
M31 M32
M OUT OUT 4 OAU1 0 IN RC V M40

TM RM RM F
OUT
To B
OTU SC1
Tx D31
I U TM
OTU OTU
D32
D 4 0
OAU1
IN OUT DCM TDC RDC TC IN
From B
OTU
D40
EVOA
NOTE
ODF side
As shown in Figure 6-12, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, you must configure the MVOA and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
Procedure
Step 1 Set Laser Shutdown to Disabled.
1.
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the Main Topology. Click from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane to update the Navigator Tree. Select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow button. In the row of Laser Shutdown under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Disabled. Click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
2. 3. 4.
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light and close WDM-side lasers for the other OTUs.
NOTE
After the OTU board is installed in the subrack, the WDM-side laser of the OTU is automatically enabled and is forced to emit light.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE A is displayed. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the lefthand Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to Off. Click Apply.
----End
Scenario 1: An EVOA Is Installed Before the Optical Amplifier Board

Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel to 5 dB.
NOTE
The EVOA attenuation set at this point is the preset value. It is used to adjust the optical power of each wavelength during commissioning of the optical power equilibrium.
1. 2. 3.
Select the desired M40V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to 5dB. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed telling you that the operation is successful. Click Close. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Nominal Gain to 20.0dB. Click Apply.
NOTE
Step 2 On the U2000, set the gain of the OAU1 to the minimum nominal gain. 1. 2. 3.
The OAU101 is used as an example of the OAU1. The minimum nominal gain is 20 dB, and the nominal singlewavelength input optical power is 16 dB (40 channels). For the technical specifications of the amplifier, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OAU1 in the transmit direction. 1. 2. 3.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the left-hand Function Tree. Click Query to query the Input Power of the OAU1. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the VA1 board (EVOA) so that the actual input optical power of the OAU1 reaches about -16 dBm, based on the Input Power of the OAU1 queried by using the U2000. 1. 2. 3. Select the desired VA1 board (EVOA), and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to the desired value. Click Apply.
NOTE
If the input optical power of the OAU cannot meet the requirements after adjusting the attenuation of the VA1, you can adjust the gain of the OAU to ensure that the output optical power meets requirements.
NOTE
In the Basic Attributes tab, Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) indicate the adjustable range of the gain of the OAU1.
Step 5 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers for the other OTUs. 1. 2. 3. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the lefthand Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to On. Click Apply.
Step 6 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled. 1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the Main Topology. from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane to update the Navigator Tree. Click Select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow button. In the Laser Shutdown row under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Enabled. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
2. 3. 4.
----End
Scenario 2: No EVOA Is Installed Before the Optical Amplifier Board

Step 1 On the U2000, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel to 10 dB. Step 2 Set the gain of the OAU1 to the minimum nominal gain. Step 3 Query the input optical power of the OAU1 in the transmit direction. Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at the add wavelength channel so that the input optical power of the OAU1 reaches the nominal input optical power, based on the input optical power of the OAU1 queried by using the U2000. Step 5 Shut down the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the OTU that accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform the commissioning based on Step 1 through Step 4. Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths based on the preceding steps.
Step 7 Step 7 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the other OTUs. 1. 2. 1. Select the desired OTU boards, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to On. Click Apply. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the Main Topology. from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane to update the Navigator Tree. Click Then select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow button. In the Laser Shutdown row under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Enabled. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 8 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled.
2.
3. 4.
----End
6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station B that is in the westto-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of the board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
206
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-13 Fiber connections of OLA station B (OAU1)
Station B
DCM
TDC RDC OUT
TC IN
IN
OAU1
RC OUT
From A West
F TM I U RM
RM1
SC2
TM1
TM2 RM2
RM
F I U TM
To C East
RC OUT
OUT
OAU1
TDC
IN
TC IN
RDC
DCM
EVOA
ODF side
Figure 6-14 Fiber connections of OLA station B (OBU1+OBU1)
Station B
TC IN
IN
OBU1
OUT
D C M
IN
OBU1
OUT
RC OUT
From A West
F TM I U RM
RM1
SC2
TM1
TM2 RM2
RM
F I U TM
To C East
RC OUT
OUT
OAU1
TDC
IN
TC IN
RDC
DCM
EVOA
ODF side
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-13 and Figure 6-14, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure the MVOA and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
207

NOTE
The preset values for the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input optical power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Scenario 1: Commissioning for the OLA (OAU1) Networking

Step 1 Calculate the link attenuation for this span of optical transmission line based on the engineering design documents provided by the client. Step 2 You should preset the attenuation of the VA1 located before the amplifier by using the following formula: Attenuation of the VA1 = Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the upstream station - link attenuation - Nominal input optical power of the amplifier at the OLA station.
NOTE
If the calculated preset value is a negative number, preset the attenuation of the VA1 to the minimum attenuation.
NOTE
For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 3 Query the output optical power (Pout) of the OA at the upstream station A and input optical power (Pin) of the OA at the downstream station B. Calculate the attenuation between the two amplifiers according to the following formula: Attenuation between the two amplifiers = Pout Pin.
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Querying the optical power of the OA in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 4 If the actual attenuation between amplifiers is smaller than the attenuation specified in the engineering design document, increase the attenuation of the VA1 so that the input optical power reaches the minimum nominal input optical power. If the actual attenuation between amplifiers is greater than the attenuation specified in the engineering design document, decrease the attenuation of the VA1 so that the input optical power of the amplifier reaches the nominal input optical power.
NOTE
For the technical specifications of each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Step 5 See Step 3, and calculate the attenuation between amplifiers after adjustment. Step 6 Set the gain of the amplifier according to the following formula: Gain of the amplifier = Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the station - Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the upstream station + Attenuation between amplifiers. 1. 2. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Nominal Gain according to the following formula: Gain of the amplifier = Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the station Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the upstream station + Attenuation between amplifiers. Click Apply.
3.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Step 7 Optional: If the calculated gain exceeds the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU, the output optical power of the OA cannot reach the nominal output optical power. Therefore, set the gain to the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU.
NOTE
Maximum gain that can be set = Maximum gain of the OA - Intermediate insertion loss. Intermediate insertion loss = Output optical power of the PAOUT optical port - Input optical power of the BAIN optical port.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree. In the Basic Attributes tab, click Query. Check Nominal Gain Upper Threshold and Nominal Gain Lower Threshold to obtain the tunable range of the gain for the OAU1. Choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the left-hand Function Tree. Click Query. Query and record the value of Output Power of PAOUT and the value of Input Power of BAIN, and calculate the insertion loss. Calculate the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU1 based on the insertion loss. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree. In the Basic Attributes tab, set Nominal Gain to the maximum gain that can be set. Click Apply.
----End
Scenario 2: Commissioning for the OLA (OBU1+OBU1) Networking

Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the VA1 located before the OBU1 at the input end to the minimum value (1 dB). For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A". Commission the two OBU1 amplifiers as one amplifier. Query the output optical power of the amplifier at the transmit end of the upstream station (Pout) and the input optical power of the OBU1 amplifier at the receive end of the station (Pin). Calculate the line attenuation according to the following formula: Line attenuation = Pout Pin. For the operations on the U2000, see Querying the Optical Power of the OA in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
NOTE
If the input optical power is within the input range of the optical power amplifier, you do not need to adjust the optical power of the VA1. Otherwise, you should adjust the attenuation of the VA1 to make sure that the input optical power meets the requirements for the input optical power of the optical power amplifier.
Step 2 Adjust the optical power of the VA1 between the two OBU1 amplifiers based on the line attenuation, making the following formula valid. Output optical power of the OBU1 at the receive end - input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end = fixed gain of the OBU1 + fixed gain of the OBU1 - line attenuation.
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
209
6.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of the board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
210
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-15 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSD9+RMU9)
Station C
TM RM
M40V D40
RM1 TM2 RM TM
SC2
TM1 RM2
OBU1
IN
OUT DM AM EXPO EXPI TOA ROA OUT IN OBU1 OUT
West
F I OBU1 U TC IN OUT To D
RC
WSD9
IN
RMU9
F I U RC
To F
East
OBU1
OUT OUT IN
OUT ROA TOA

OBU1
RMU9
AM
EXPI EXPO
WSD9
IN DM
OUT
IN
OAU1
TDC TC IN
RDC
DCM
M40V O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U
D40 O T U O T U
EVOA
ODF side
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-15, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, you must configure the MVOA, then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-15, if the 80-wavelength system is used, it is recommended to add the VA1 in the dashed frame.
NOTE
NOTE
The preset values for the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength input optical power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Procedure
Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA at each drop channel of the WSD9 on the receiving side of the ROADM station to the maximum value.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE C in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE C is displayed. Right-click an NE icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the desired WSD9 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to the maximum value (15.0). Click Apply.
----End
Scenario 1: Wavelengths Are Directly Added from OTU to the RMU9 (OPA)
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end WSD9 are used for compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B. Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power of a single wavelength for the OBU1 at the transmit end based on the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies with system (40-channel system or 80-channel system). 1. 2. 3. Select the desired OBU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Then set Rated Optical Power to -19.0. The OBU103 (40 channels) is used as an example here. Click Apply.
Step 3 Optional: If the OA at the transmit end is an OAU, set Rated Optical Power of the OAU1 at the transmit end based on the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies with system (40-channel system or 80-channel system). For more information, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see step Step 2 .
Step 4 Set OPA Mode to Auto. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer window. Choose the NE C, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab. Right-click OPA Mode and choose Auto for the desired optical cross-connections. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
----End
Scenario 2: Wavelengths Are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (OPA)
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end WSD9 are used for compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B. Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power of a single wavelength for the OBU1 at the transmit end according to the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies with system (40-channel system or 80-channel system).

NOTE
Rated Optical Power should be set for the OBU1 behind the M40V and the OBU1 behind the RMU9. The recommended OBU to use behind the M40V is the OBU104.
NOTE
Step 3 Optional: If the OA at the transmit end is an OAU, set Rated Optical Power of the OAU1 at the transmit end according to the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies with system (40-channel system or 80-channel system). See Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
Step 4 Set OPA Mode to Auto.

NOTE
----End
Scenario 3: Wavelengths Are Directly Added from OTU to the RMU9 (Manual Power Adjustment)
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and shut down the WDM-side lasers for all the other OTUs.
NOTE
Deactivate the optical cross-connections on WSD9 to block the pass-through wavelengths. Activate the optical cross-connections after adjusting the add wavelengths. For details, see the Configuration Guide.
NOTE
For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end. 1. 2. 3. Select the desired OBU1, and choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the Function Tree. Click Query to query the current input optical power of the OBU1. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel of the RMU9 so that the single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end is the same as the nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers and the type of system should be considered.)

NOTE
For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
1. 2. 3.
Select the desired RMU9. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set the Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio of the desired channel to the desired value. Click Apply.
Step 5 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the OTU that accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform commissioning based on steps Step 3 through Step 4. Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the preceding steps. Step 7 Disable the lasers on all the OTU boards with add wavelengths at the station. In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B. Step 8 Optional: If the EXPO port of the WSD9 is connected to the EXPI port of the RMU9, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each of pass-through wavelengths channel to 7 dB. 1. 2. 3. Select the desired WSD9 board. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for each wavelength in the pass-through direction to 7.0. Click Apply.
Step 9 Optional: If the DM port for the WSD9 is connected to the AM port of the RMU9, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. In addition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the RMU9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to the minimal attenuation value. Step 10 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the Laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths at OTM station A". Step 11 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A". ----End
Scenario 4: Wavelengths are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (Manual Power Adjustment and the VA1 Appears in the Dashed Frame)
NOTE
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and shut down the WDM-side lasers for all the other OTUs.

NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 3 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel to 5 dB. 1. 2. 3. Select the desired M40V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Attenuation(dB) for each wavelength in the add wavelength direction to 5.0. Click Apply.
Step 4 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V. For details, see step Step 3. Step 5 Adjust the attenuation of the VA1 after the M40V so that the single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V is the same as the nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers and the type of system should be considered.)
NOTE
Step 6 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end. For details, see Step 3. Step 7 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the RMU9 so that the single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the RMU9 is the same as the nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1.
NOTE
For the technical specifications of each type of the amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Step 8 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the OTU that accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform commissioning based on steps Step 3 through Step 4. Step 9 Adjust the optical power of all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the preceding steps. Step 10 Disable the WDM-side lasers for all OTUs on the add channels. Step 11 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B. Step 12 Optional: If the EXPO port of the WSD9 is connected to the EXPI port of the RMU9, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 7 dB. Step 13 Optional: If the DM port of the WSD9 is connected to the AM port for the RMU9, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. In addition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the RMU9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to the minimal attenuation value. Step 14 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs again. For details, see Setting the Laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 15 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A". ----End
Scenario 5: Wavelengths Are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (Manual Power Adjustment and the VA1 Does not Appear in the Dashed Frame)
NOTE
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser of only one OTU to emit light, and shut down WDM-side lasers for all the other OTUs.
NOTE
Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V. For details, see step Step 3. Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the M40V so that the single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V is the same as the nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers and the type of system should be considered.)
NOTE
Step 5 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for each of the other wavelength add channels for the M40V to the attenuation value of the EVOA in the wavelength add channel mentioned in step Step 4. Step 6 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end. For details, see step Step 3. Step 7 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the RMU9 so that the single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the RMU9 is the same as the nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1.
NOTE
Step 8 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU and enable the WDM-side laser on only the OTU that accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform commissioning based on steps Step 3 through Step 4. Step 9 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the preceding steps. Step 10 Disable the WDM-side lasers for all OTUs on the add channels.
Step 11 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B. Step 12 Optional: If the EXPO port of the WSD9 is connected to the EXPI port of the RMU9, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 7 dB. Step 13 Optional: If the DM port of the WSD9 is connected to the AM port of the RMU9, preset the attenuation of the EVOA of the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. In addition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the RMU9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to the minimal attenuation value. Step 14 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A". Step 15 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled. For details, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A". ----End
6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (WSD9 +WSM9) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
217
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-16 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSD9+WSM9)
Station C
D40
TM IN RM RM1
M40V SC2
TM1
West
F OAU1 I TC IN OUT To D U
WSD9
IN
WSM9
OUT IN
OBU1 OUT
RC U
F I
To F
East
OBU1
RC OUT OUT IN OUT
WSM9
AM
EXPI EXPO
WSD9
IN DM
OUT
OAU1
RDC TDC TC IN DCM
M40V
D40
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
EVOA
ODF side
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-16, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, you must first configure the MVOA and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
NOTE
NOTE
The preset values in the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength input optical power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Procedure
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the optical amplifier before the WSD9 at the receive end is used to compensate the line optical attenuation. Commission the optical power for the pass-through channel based on the procedure for 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B. Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power for the OBU1 at the transmit end based on the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength, which varies with the system (40-channel system or 80-channel system).

NOTE
NOTE
For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the rated optical power of the OA in "Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths and link at ROADM station C".
Step 3 Set OPA Mode to Auto.

NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting the OPA function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C".
Step 4 According to the analysis result of the optical power spectrum monitored on the downstream station, adjust the EVOA for each add channel and pass-through channel for power equilibrium purposes. For the specific commissioning steps, see 6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization. ----End
6.3.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9+WSM9)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (RDU9 +WSM9) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
219
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-17 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with RDU9+WSM9)
O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U
Station C
D40
TM IN RM RM1
M40V SC2
TM1
West
F OAU1 I TC IN OUT To D U RDU9
IN
WSM9
OUT IN
OBU1 OUT
F I RC U
East
To F
OBU1
RC OUT OUT IN OUT
WSM9
AM
EXPI EXPO
RDU9
IN DM
OUT
OAU1
RDC DCM TDC TC IN
M40V
D40
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
EVOA
ODF side
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-17, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure the MVOA and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
NOTE
NOTE
The preset values in the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input optical power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9). ----End
6.3.8 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (ROAM+ROAM)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (ROAM +ROAM) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-18 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with ROAM+ROAM)
Station C
TM IN RM TC RM1
SC2
TM1 OAU1 EXPO EXPI EXPI EXPO DM OUT M 0 1 M 0 1
TM2 RM2 OBU1
RM TM RC OUT
West
F OUT IN I RC U OBU1
OUT IN
ROAM
ROAM
OUT
F IN OUT I TC U OAU1
IN TDC
East
DM RDC
OBU
OBU
DCM
IN
D40
D40
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
EVOA
ODF side
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
221
NOTE
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 See Step 1 through Step 3 in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9). Step 2 Based on the analysis result of the optical power spectrum monitored on the downstream station, adjust the EVOA for each add channel for power equilibrium. For specific commissioning steps, see 6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization.
NOTE
The ROAM board cannot be used to commission the optical power for the wavelength in the pass-through channels, and only the optical power for the add wavelength at the local station can be commissioned.
----End
6.3.9 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD4+WSMD4)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (WSMD4 +WSMD4) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
222
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-19 Fiber connection of ROADM station (networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)
Station C
TM RM RM1
SC2
TM1
TM2 RM2
RM
TM
IN
TC
West
F IN I U RC OUT
OAU1
DM4 IN AM4 OUT IN
RC
OUT
OUT
OBU1
OUT
WSMD4 OBU1
OUT DM1 AM4 AM1 DM4
WSMD4
IN AM1 DM1 OUT
F I TC U
East
IN
OUT
IN
OAU1
IN
D40
EVOA
OBU
OBU
M40V
M40V
D40
O O T T U U
O O T T U U
ODF side
NOTE
NOTE
l In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the WSMD4 board are not shown. The two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in the other direction. l The single-wavelength signals are transmitted directly to the AMn optical port by the OTU board.
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 See the steps included in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9). ----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
223
6.3.10 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD2+WSMD2)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (WSMD2 +WSMD2) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-20 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSMD2+WSMD2)
Station C
TM RM RM1
SC2
TM1
TM2 RM2
RM
TM
IN
TC
West
F IN I U RC OUT
OAU1
EXPO IN EXPI OUT IN
RC
OUT
OUT
OBU1
OUT
WSMD2 OBU1
OUT DM EXPI AM EXPO
WSMD2
IN AM DM OUT
F I TC U
East
IN
OUT
IN
OAU1
IN
D40
EVOA
OBU
OBU
M40V
M40V
D40
O O T T U U
O O T T U U
ODF side
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
224
NOTE
NOTE
The preset values in the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input optical power for the amplifier. For technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Procedure
6.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths and link at ROADM station C (WSMD9+WSMD9)
Prerequisite

U2000
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
225

Figure 6-21 Fiber connections of ROADM station (networking with WSMD9+WSMD9)
O T U D40
DM1 LIN SOUT TM RX IN EXPO EXPI OUT
O T U
O T U M40
O T U
DCM
DCM
SIN TM RX LOUT
AM1
DAS1 TX
WSMD9
EXPO OUT AM1 EXPI
WSMD9
IN DM1
RM LOUT SIN
TX DAS1 RM SOUT LIN
DCM
M40
D40
DCM
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
NOTE
l
NOTE
The preset values in the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input optical power for the amplifier. For technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Procedure
6.3.12 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station D

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station D that is in the westto-east signal flow.
Prerequisite
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete. The ECC communication must be created.
The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete. The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B. ----End
6.3.13 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of FOADM station E that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
227
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-22 Fiber connections of FOADM station E
Station E
TM IN RM RDC DCM RM1
SC2
TM1 TDC IN
MI VO MO VI VO MI
TM2 RM2
RM OUT
TM
West
F TC I To D U
RC
OAU1 IN OUT IN OUT
OUT IN
OBU1
OUT
MR8V
VI MO
MR8V
IN OUT
F I RC U To F
East
OBU1
OUT
OAU1
TC TDC IN
OUT
RDC
DCM
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
EVOA
ODF side
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-22, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If no VA1 or VA4 is configured on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure MVOA and commission the optical power on site.
NOTE
Procedure
NOTE
Step 2 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA on each add channel for the MR8V to 7 dB. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Double-click NE E in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE E is displayed. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the desired MR8V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for each add channel of the MR8V to 7.0. Click Apply.
Step 3 Block all add wavelengths.


NOTE
Step 4 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B. Step 5 On the U2000, query the output optical power for the receive-end amplifier OAU1. 1. 2. 3. Select the desired OAU1, and choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the Function Tree. Click Query to query the Output Power for the amplifier board. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 6 According to the nominal input optical power of the transmit-end amplifier OBU1, calculate and set the attenuation of the EVOA for the VI port between the two MR8V boards and the VA1 board before the OBU1 at the transmit end as follows: Attenuation = Output optical power of the receive-end amplifier - Nominal input optical power of the transmit-end amplifier - Insertion loss of the MR8V at the receive end - Insertion loss of the MR8V at the transmit end.
NOTE
Step 7 Equally distribute the attenuation value (10 dB) to the EVOA for the VI port in the MR8V at the transmit end and the VA1 board. Set the attenuation of the EVOA for the VI port in the MR8V at the transmit end and the VA1 board to 5 dB. For the adjustment of the VA1 on the U2000, see Step 2 and Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
NOTE
The OBU103 is used as the example of the transmit-end OBU1. The typical single-wavelength input optical power of OBU103 is 19 dB (40 channels), and the typical single-wavelength output optical power of the receiveend OAU1 is +4 dB. Therefore, the whole attenuation of the EVOA for the VI port in the MR8V at the transmit end and the VA1 board is as follows: Attenuation = 4 + 19 - 3.5 -3.5 6= 10 dB.
Step 8 Block the pass-through wavelengths.

NOTE
For details about the operations on the U2000, see Disabling the laser at an output port on an OA board in "Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards".
Step 9 Enable the laser on an OTU that accesses the longest wavelength. Step 10 On the U2000, adjust the attenuation of the VOA on the add channel for the MR8V based on the input optical power for the OBU1 displayed in response to a query. This ensures that the input optical power of the OTU is equal to the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength. Step 11 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side lasers on the OTUs that access adjacent wavelengths. Then perform commissioning based on Step 10. Step 12 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths based on the preceding steps. Step 13 Enable the disabled WDM-side lasers on the OTUs. For details, see Setting the Laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 14 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled. For details, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A". ----End
6.3.14 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of FOADM station E that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description. The optical power for the first wavelength after being adjusted is used as the reference optical power during commissioning. In general, the longest wavelength is selected as the first wavelength.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
230
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-23 Fiber connection of FOADM station E
Station E
DCM LINE C SYS R P IN C TDC TC IN OAU1 OUT RDC
D D03 IN 4 OTU 0
D02
M
Tx Rx M03 4
OTU OTU OTU
OTU
D01
0 M02 V
M01 TM2
IN OBU1 OUT OUT
RC OUT
West
OTU
RM1
F TM I To F U RM
RM
SC2
TM1 M01
OTU
M02 OUT OUT RC OUT M
Rx
Tx
D01 RM2
F I TM U
East
To B
OTU OTU OTU

D02 D03 D OUT D TC C IN M
OTU OTU
OBU1
IN
4 0 V
M03
4 IN 0
OBU1
IN
EVOA
ODF side
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-23, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If no VA1 or VA4 is configured on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure MVOA and commission the optical power on site.
NOTE
The preset values in the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength input optical power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Procedure
Step 1 Block the pass-through wavelengths.
NOTE
For details about the operation on the U2000, see "Disabling the laser on an output port on an OA board" in Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards.

NOTE
Step 3 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and close WDM-side lasers for all the other OTUs.

NOTE
After the OTU board is installed in the subrack, the WDM-side laser for the OTU is automatically enabled and is forced to emit light.
Step 4 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel to 5 dB.
NOTE
The attenuation set here is the preset value and is used to adjust the optical power for each wavelength at the commissioning stage for the optical power equilibrium purposes.
Step 5 Set the attenuation of the VA1 before the OBU1 at the transmit end to the minimum value. Step 6 On the U2000, set the attenuation of the VOA on the add channel for the MR8V based on the input optical power for the OBU1 displayed in response to a query. This ensures that the input optical power for the OTU is equal to the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength. Step 7 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser on another OTU. Then perform commissioning based on Step 6. Step 8 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths based on the preceding steps. Step 9 Block all add wavelengths.
NOTE
Step 10 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B. Step 11 Unblock the pass-through wavelengths.
NOTE
For details about operations on the U2000, see "Enabling the laser at an output port on an OA board" in Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards.
Step 12 At the upstream station, enable the WDM-side laser on only the OTU that accesses the longest wavelength. Disable the lasers on the OTUs that transmit pass-through wavelengths. Then, perform commissioning according to step Step 6. Step 13 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU and enable the WDM-side lasers on the OTUs that access adjacent wavelengths. Then perform commissioning based on step Step 6. Step 14 Adjust the optical power for all the other pass-through wavelengths based on the preceding steps. Step 15 Re-enable the lasers on the OTUs that transmit pass-through wavelengths, and enable the lasers on OTUs that add wavelengths. Step 16 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A". ----End
6.3.15 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station F

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station F that is in the westto-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 See the steps included in 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B. ----End
6.3.16 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OTM Station G

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station G that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
233
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-24 Fiber connections of OTM station G
Station G
D31
OTU
Tx
From F
IN TC
OAU1
OUT IN DCM TDC RDC
D 4 0
D32
OTU
D40 TM RM
OTU
F RM I U TM
OUT
SC1
M31
OTU
OUT M OAU1 OUT RC IN M32
Rx
To F
4 0 V M40
OTU
OTU
EVOA
NOTE
ODF side
As shown in Figure 6-24, each EVOA can be considered as aVA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure the MVOA and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
Procedure
Step 1 See the steps included in 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B. ----End
6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization
This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station A and OLA station B that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.
Prerequisite

U2000
After wavelengths are transmitted over a certain distance, the optical power for different wavelengths differs greatly because the loss or gain varies according to the components, boards, fibers, and the non-linear effects of fibers. As a result, the input optical power of different wavelengths at the downstream optical amplifier unit (OAU) is different and the OSNRs of different wavelengths at the receive end are different. When the optical power variation is very great, the wavelengths with very low optical power have much lower OSNR than the wavelengths with high optical power once the wavelengths are transmitted in the system. To ensure that wavelengths with the lowest optical power meet system requirements, you need to increase the original OSNR tolerance. You must ensure that the optical power at the intermediate station is flattened. For more information, see Figure 6-25. Figure 6-25 Equalizing optical power at the intermediate station
OA OA at the transmit end Flattening the optical power at the transmit end
OA OA at the intermediate station Flatness of 2.5 dB
OA OA at the receive end Flatness of 5.2 dB Flattening the optical power at the receive end
Flatness of 5.2 dB
Flatness of 2.5 dB
Flatness of 2.5 dB
Flattening the optical power at the intermediate station
Flatness of 2.5 dB
Objectives of single-wavelength optical power commissioning:
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
235
According to the engineering requirements, the optical power flatness for each wavelength of the intermediate OAU must be ensured. The optical power at the transmit end remains at a certain slope that is opposite to the optical power slope at the receive end. According to the engineering requirement, the optical power of a single wavelength can deviate from the nominal single-wavelength input optical power by at most 3 dB at the transmit and receive ends.
NOTE
l When the attenuation of a channel is adjusted, the optical power of the adjacent channels also changes. The number of affected adjacent channels depends on the attenuation adjustment step. The number of affected adjacent channels increases when the attenuation adjustment step increases. In general, when the attenuation adjustment step is equal to or smaller than 1 dB, one adjacent channel on each side is affected (based on an 80-channel system). The change in attenuation for the adjacent channels is the same as that for the adjusted channel. l It is recommended that the value of the attenuation adjustment step be smaller than 1 dB. In addition, it is recommended that you adjust the attenuation channel by channel. Do not repeatedly adjust the attenuation for a channel, and do not adjust the attenuation for multiple channels simultaneously. l Equalizing optical power at intermediate stations is intended to correct any unflat link optical power resulting from accumulated unflatness of OAs and non-linear effects from long distance transmission. When the optical power equalization is complete, the optical spectrums at the transmit and receive ends are unflat (2 dB). But each wavelength on the line has almost the same optical power and OSNR, which results in the same transmission performance.
Procedure
Step 1 The optical power equalization is commissioned by using the following methods: l If the MCA is not configured at OLA station B, at the MON port for each supervisory point OA, use the optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) to monitor the optical power for each wavelength on site. Commission the EVOA for each wavelength channel for the M40V at the upstream station A based on tested data. Equalize the optical power of the channels. That is, verify that the following formula is satisfied while the total output optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power 1.0 dBm. l If OLA station B where the MCA is configured is considered as the supervisory station, test the flatness of the optical power for each wavelength through the MCA. Commission the EVOA for each wavelength channel of the M40V at the upstream station A based on the tested data. Equalize the optical power of the channels. That is, verify that the following formula is satisfied while the total output optical power remains unchanged: Singlewavelength output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power 1.0 dBm. l Query the optical power of each wavelength through the MCA8 as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology and the Running Status of NE B is displayed. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the desired MCA8 board, and choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum Analysis from the Function Tree. Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query.
Step 2 Adjust the attenuation of the channel with the highest optical power and the attenuation of the channel with the lowest optical power. Use a step of 0.5 dB based on the spectrum analysis result of the MCA8 board. After the attenuation is adjusted, the optical power for the two channels must satisfy the following formula: Optical power = Highest optical power - (Highest optical
power - Nominal single-wavelength optical power)/2 or Optical power = Lowest optical power + (Nominal single-wavelength optical power - Lowest optical power)/2. For the adjustment process on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each channel of the M40V in Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A. Step 3 Use the MCA8 board again to measure the optical power for each wavelength and determine the wavelengths with the highest and lowest optical power. Then equalize the optical power of the wavelengths based on Step 2. Step 4 View the spectrum analysis result of the MCA8 board. If the deviation between the optical power of each wavelength and the nominal single-wavelength optical power does not exceed 1 dB, the optical power for the wavelengths is equalized. ----End
Equalizing Optical Power (the MCA Board at the Transmit/Receive End)

When the MCA boards are configured at the transmit and receive ends, observe the following principles to commission optical power: l When there are less than four (inclusive) spans and there is no ROADM station on the link, commission the optical power at the transmit end to ensure that the optical power is flattened at the transmit end. When there are more than four spans and there is no ROADM station on the link, after flattening the optical power at the transmit end, ensure that the system optical power is equalized. When there are more than four spans and there is an ROADM station on the link, adjust the attenuation of all channels of the ROADM station (configured with WSD9 and RMU9 boards, for example) to the same value. After flattening the optical power at the transmit end, ensure that system optical power is equalized. If there is an REG station on the link, divide the link into two spans with the REG station as the dividing point. In this case, consider the REG station as either the transmit end or the receive end.
Step 1 When the optical power at the transmit end is flattened and the commissioning at the OLA station is complete, monitor the optical power for each wavelength by using an MCA board at the receive end. Calculate the difference between the optical power for each wavelength and the average optical power of the wavelengths. The difference is actually the flatness deviation.
NOTE
Equalize the optical power at an intermediate station in compliance with the principles of "Commissioning the Optical Power at the Transmit End based on that at the Receive End".
Step 2 Check the optical power at the receive end. Identify the channel that has the highest optical power as channel A, and identify the channel that has the lowest optical power as channel B. If the optical power difference between the two channels is greater than 2 dB, calculate the difference between the optical power of channel A and the nominal single-wavelength optical power, and record it as X. Also calculate the difference between the optical power of channel B and the nominal single-wavelength optical power, and record it as Y. Then consider half of X or Y as the target flatness deviation for commissioning the optical power at the transmit end. See Figure 6-26. Step 3 Commission the optical power at the transmit end. Increase the attenuation of channel A for the M40V at the transmit end by X/2 and decrease the attenuation for channel B by Y/2. After that, the flatness deviation at the transmit end has the same absolute amount but the reverse value as
the flatness deviation at the receive end. See Figure 6-27. For example, the optical power for a wavelength at the receive end is 6 dBm, and the nominal single-wavelength optical power is 3 dBm. Adjust the optical power for this wavelength based on the following equation: 6 - (6 - 3)/ 2 = 4.5 dBm. Figure 6-26 Checking the optical power at the receive end
X Y/2 Y
X/2
B Optical power at the transmit end
B Optical power at the receive end
Figure 6-27 Commissioning the optical power at the transmit end
B Optical power at the transmit end
B Optical power at the receive end
Step 4 Ensure that the total optical power remains unchanged when adjusting the optical power flatness for each wavelength. To keep the total optical power unchanged, decrease the highest optical power by 0.5 dB, but increase the lowest optical power by 0.5 dB. Step 5 Adjust the optical power of wavelengths sequentially. After adjusting the highest and lowest optical power, query the optical power for the two wavelengths again. If the optical power difference between the two wavelengths is equal to or smaller than 2 dB, it indicates that the optical power for the wavelengths is equalized. If they are not equalized, repeat steps Step 1 through Step 4 to recommission the optical power again.

NOTE
When the equalization of optical power is complete, if the average optical power for the wavelengths is not equal to the nominal single-wavelength optical power, do not adjust the optical power for each wavelength at the transmit end. Instead, check and adjust the total optical power at the OLA station so that the average optical power is equal to the nominal single-wavelength optical power.
----End
6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization
This section describes how to commission the optical power equalization of the ROADM station C and OLA station D that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of the boards, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Procedure
Step 1 At ROADM station C, set OPA Mode to Manual. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE C in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE C is displayed. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab. Right-click OPA Mode, and choose Manual for the optical cross-connections. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 2 For the information about querying the optical power spectrum supervisory of the MCA, see Querying the optical power spectrum supervisory of the MCA inCommissioning the Optical Power Equalization of the OTM station A and OLA station B. Step 3 Adjust the EVOA of each add channel for the RMU9 (or M40V) based on the optical power analysis result. The single-wavelength optical power for each add wavelength is equalized.

NOTE
Equalize the optical power for the channels. That is, make sure that the following formula is satisfied while the total output optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal singlewavelength output optical power 1.0 dBm.
NOTE
For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each add channel of the RMU9 or Setting the attenuation of each add channel of the M40V in Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C.
Step 4 Adjust the optical power equalization in the pass-through direction based on the optical spectrum analysis result from the downstream supervisory station D.
NOTE
Equalize the optical power for the channels. That is, make sure that the following formula is satisfied while the total output optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal singlewavelength output optical power 1.0 dBm.
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each pass-through channel of the WSD9 in Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C.
----End
6.3.19 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Station E and OLA Station F for Equalization
This section describes how to commission the optical power of FOADM station E and OLA station F that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description. The static optical add/drop multiplexer board cannot be used to commission the optical power of the wavelength for the pass-through channels. Only the optical power for the add wavelength at the local station can be commissioned.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
240
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization. ----End
6.3.20 Commissioning Optical Power (Without MCAs)

This section describes how to commission optical power for a network that has no MCA board configured.
Prerequisites
Fibers must be connected and network configuration must be complete. ECC communication must be established. Commissioning of an optical supervisory channel must be complete. The cross-connections at each station must be configured.
Tools, Meters, and Materials

U2000
For the technical specifications for all the boards, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description. If no MCA board is configured for the entire network, commission the optical power for each wavelength to ensure that the optical power for each wavelength is consistent with the nominal optical power for a single wavelength, and that the performance of each wavelength is optimal.
l l The commissioning must start at the station where the wavelength with the worst BER performance is added. The wavelengths with better performance and involving fewer spans are preferred for BER optimization.
Commissioning Procedure
Step 1 Shut down lasers on all OTU boards. Commission the optical power for each add wavelength based on6.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A so that the optical power before entering the OA at the transmit end is equal to the nominal optical power for a single wavelength. Step 2 For the methods of commissioning an OLA station on the line, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B. Step 3 After commissioning and equalizing the optical power for each add wavelength at a back-toback OTM or OADM station on the line, suppress all add wavelengths. In the case of an OADM station configured with a WSS module, commission the optical power for each pass-through
wavelength so that the optical power for each pass-through wavelength is equal to the nominal optical power for a single wavelength. For details about the commissioning methods, see 6.3.14 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board), 6.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9), and 6.3.13 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V).
NOTE
If an FOADM station (excluding the back-to-back OTM) is an intermediate station, commission only the optical power for the multiplexed pass-through wavelength.
Step 4 After commissioning the optical power for each wavelength, test the total input optical power of an OA at the transmit end to verify that it satisfies the following formula: Total input optical power = Nominal input optical power for each wavelength + 10logN (N represents the number of wavelengths) + input offset. If the total input optical power fails to satisfy this formula, adjust the attenuation of the VA1 board before the OA or the attenuation of the EVOA built in the OA to ensure that the total input optical power meets requirements.
NOTE
The offset value is determined by the number of wavelengths and OSNR and varies inversely with the OSNR. The input offset is generally smaller than 0.5 dB.
Step 5 Optimize the performance of each wavelength based on the procedures included in6.3.22 Commissioning BERs because the optical power flatness of each wavelength in a multiplexed wavelength cannot be measured. Ensure that the system performance is optimal, and at the same time, ensure that the optical power for each wavelength is equal to the nominal optical power for a single wavelength, and that the multiplexed optical power remains unchanged. ----End
6.3.21 Commissioning Input Optical Power of OTU

This section describes how to commission the input optical power of the OTU in a west-to-east signal flow. Follow the commissioning sequence of A-C-E-G.
Prerequisite
NOTE
If no VA1 (or EVOA in the drop wavelength channel) is configured before the IN port of the OTU at the station, it indicates that a fixed optical attenuator or MVOA is configured. In this case, check only the receive optical power of the OTU. If the measured receive optical power of the OTU is not within the required range, replace the fixed optical attenuator or adjust the MVOA on site.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Query the input optical power of the OTU on the U2000. 1. 2. 3. 4. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the stations to be queried in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the stations to be queried is displayed. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 2 Compare the queried input optical power of the OTU to the range of the input optical power of the OTU. l If the actual input optical power is higher than the upper threshold of the input optical power of the OTU, increase the VA1/EVOA attenuation for this channel. The actual input optical power is then within the range of the input optical power. l If the actual input optical power is lower than the lower threshold of the input optical power of the OTU, decrease the VA1/EVOA attenuation of this channel. After the attenuation is adjusted to the minimum value, if the actual input optical power is still not within the range of the input optical power, check the internal fiber connections.
NOTE
For the specifications for the input optical power of the OTU, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
For the 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from -11 dBm to -4 dBm; adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm. For the other OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client side and the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm.
NOTE
For certain OTUs, if the overload point of the optical module is 0 dBm, and if the receiver sensitivity is 17 dBm, the input optical power should be adjusted within the range from 14 dBm to 5 dBm.
NOTE
When commissioning the input optical power of the OTU at the ROADM station, you do not need to configure the VA1 before the IN port on the WDM-side of the OTU. You need to adjust only the EVOA for each drop channel of the WSD9. For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each drop channel of the WSD9 in Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C.
NOTE
For operations of the VA1 on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A.
----End
6.3.22 Commissioning BERs

The objective of BER commissioning is to optimize a BER. To ensure stable operation of the system, a certain BER margin must be reserved for the system.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher. The optical power of the main optical path must be commissioned.

U2000
Precautions
CAUTION
During the deployment commissioning, ensure that the bit errors before FEC meet the customer requirements, and that the bit errors after FEC are zero considering the line attenuation and the configurations.
Networking Application
BER commissioning involves two types of networks: networks on which wavelengths share the same source and the same sink, and networks on which wavelengths have different sources and different sinks. See Figure 6-28. Figure 6-28 Networking application
u uand the same sink
With the same source
ubut different sinks u u but different sources u uand different sinks u

With the same sink
With different sources
Commissioning Rules
Figure 6-29 shows the BER commissioning process.
Figure 6-29 BER commissioning process

Finish power commissioning for main optical path Start BER optimization
Query BER before correction of each wavelength
Yes
Is the BER before correction of all wavelengths better than the specified value?
No
Start from the transmit end of the wavelengths to be optimized and select required wavelengths for BER optimization
Yes
Are there required wavelengths for BER optimization?
No
Request maintenance engineers to remove network faults.
Are the faults removed?
Yes
Allocate attenuation to relevant wavelengths Adjust the attenuation of each relevant wavelength with a step of 0 5 dB
No
Provide feedback on the optimization failure.
No
Is the BER before correction of all wavelengths is better than the specified value?
Yes
Finish BER optimization
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
245
The BER before correction must at least meet the acceptance requirement. If the BER before correction of a wavelength fails to meet the acceptance requirement, you need to optimize the BER. Otherwise, you do not need to optimize the BER.
NOTE
l If the BER before correction fails to meet the acceptance requirement, the BER will be affected by either excessively high or low optical power. l For the ODB modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 1.5 dB in the OSNR of the system. l For the DQPSK modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 2 dB in the OSNR of the system.
BER optimization for a single node is implemented by reducing the wavelength power for a channel with better performance to increase the wavelength optical power for a channel with poorer performance. For BER optimization of a single node, the performance of the wavelength to be optimized is compared with the performance of the adjacent wavelengths. By doing this, the adjustment point can be determined. During BER optimization, you need to consider the efficiency and must understand the status of all the services on the network. Control the BERs for all wavelengths at the same adjustment point only once. BER optimization is performed based on the service performance before BER at the transmit end of each node. BER flatness control is performed based on the average performance of the associated wavelengths for the wavelength to be optimized. The optical power of the wavelength to be optimized can be adjusted by at most 2 dB. If an MCA board is used in the system, you also need to pay attention to the optical power flatness (+/-3 dB). According to the BER performance, the wavelengths whose BERs are three orders of magnitude higher than the average BER must be optimized first. In this case, the adjacent wavelengths for all the wavelengths that meet the optimization requirement are preferred for BER optimization. During the optimization, monitor the trend of how performance changes for all wavelengths. If the BERs of the wavelengths with better performance degrade by more than two orders of magnitude after the power compensation, restore the optical power to the state before optimization. During BER optimization, reserve a margin for the optical power of the main optical path for each node and comply with the WDM principles. You are not allowed to improve wavelength performance by forcibly increasing the optical power of the main optical path because this consumes the power margin reserved for future expansion. During BER optimization, adjust the optical power for the wavelengths that have poorer performance with a step of 0.5 dB. After adjusting the optical power, re-query the service performance and provide the feedback with the commissioning results. During BER optimization, you can restore the optical power to the state before optimization. If the service performance fails to improve by one order of magnitude after the wavelength optical power is increased by 2 dB, decrease the optical power by 2 dB and provide the failure information to the maintenance engineers. Ask the engineers to check the network conditions. During BER optimization, the fluctuation of the total optical power on the line must be controlled within +/-1 dB.
Principles for Selecting Wavelengths for BER Optimization

l If a wavelength is dropped at the downstream OADM node and then added again or a new wavelength is added at this OADM node, consider this wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
If a wavelength is dropped at the downstream OADM node and a group of wavelengths is added at this OADM node, and the BER performance of this group of wavelengths is better than the performance of the wavelengths to be optimized, consider this wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs. If the following four conditions are met, consider each pass-through wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs: A wavelength is dropped at a downstream OADM station and a group of wavelengths is re-added at this OADM station. The optical power of each added wavelength cannot be separately adjusted. The BER performance for this group of wavelengths has little room for optimization when compared with the BER performance for the wavelengths to be optimized. The optical power for each pass-through wavelength can be separately adjusted.
l l
In the WSD+RMU configuration mode, if the RMU+M40V boards are configured at the wavelength-adding direction, the single-wavelength power must be adjusted first. If no wavelength is added at the downstream OADM node after a wavelength is dropped at this OADM node, and the optical power of each pass-through wavelength can be adjusted separately, consider this wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs. If an MVOA is configured at the downstream FOADM that a wavelength traverses, do not consider this wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs.
The BER before correction must at least meet the acceptance requirement. If the BER before correction of a wavelength is higher than the value specified by the acceptance requirement, you do not need to optimize the BER. Otherwise, you need to optimize the BER.
NOTE
l If the BER before correction fails to meet the acceptance requirement, the BER will be affected by either higher or lower optical power. l For the ODB modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 1.5 dB in the OSNR of the system. l For the DQPSK modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 2 dB in the OSNR of the system.
Scenario 1: With Different Sources or Sinks

Step 1 When optical power commissioning is complete, read the BERs before and after correction of each wavelength at the OTM station at the receive end to determine the BER optimization plan. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the U2000, and click the Current Performance Data tab. Select the desired boards in the left pane, and click the red double-right-arrow button. Select the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition. In Monitor Period, select 15-Minute or 24-Hour. Click the Count option button. Select options under Performance Event Type, and select Display Zero Data for the Display Options. Click Query to query the performance value for the bit error on the NE side. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to finish the operation.
8.
In the Monitored Object, FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC, and FEC_AFT_COR_ER represents the BER after FEC.
Step 2 Start the optimization from the transmit end of the wavelength that has the BER that needs to be optimized. Select all required wavelengths based on Principles for Selecting Wavelengths for BER Optimization. Step 3 Increase/Decrease the power at the first adjustment point (the transmit end of the wavelength to be optimized) by 1 dB (the adjustment step is 0.5 dB). If the BER performance improves, continue to adjust the power at the first adjustment point. If the BER performance degrades, decrease/increase the optical power by 1 dB so that the optical power is restored to the previous state. Step 4 Along the signal flow, adjust the optical power for the remaining nodes based on the methods described in step Step 3 until the BER before the correction reaches the optimal state. Step 5 After the BERs for all the wavelengths are optimized, recheck the BERs before and after correction for each wavelength. Step 6 If the BER for a certain wavelength worsens but still meets the acceptance requirement, you do not need to further commission the BER. Otherwise, repeat steps Step 1 through Step 5 to commission the BER for this wavelength. Step 7 When the BER commissioning is complete, the change in the total optical power must be limited to the range of 1 dB to +1 dB. If the change reaches 1 dB or +1 dB, further commissioning is required. In the subsequent process of commissioning BERs, ensure that the total optical power after the commissioning remains unchanged. To achieve this, the optical power for the wavelength with the highest BER and the wavelength with the lowest BER must be adjusted with a step of 0.5 dB simultaneously. That is, decrease the optical power for the wavelength that has the highest BER by 0.5 dB, but increase the optical power for the wavelength that has the lowest BER by 0.5 dB. By doing this, the change magnitude for the total optical power is controlled.
NOTE
In the adjustment process, if the BER remains the same after the optical power is adjusted for 2 dB, stop the commissioning. Analyze why this is occurring and perform specific commissioning.
----End
Scenario 2: With the Same Source and the Same Sink

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
8.
Step 2 Adjust the optical power at the transmit end by at most 1 dB. Observe the changes in the BER before correction at the receive end. Continue adjusting the optical power at the transmit end until the BER before correction reaches the optimal value. Note that the total adjustment magnitude cannot exceed 2 dB, and the adjustment magnitude for each time is 0.5 dB. Step 3 After the BERs for all wavelengths are optimized, recheck the BERs before and after correction of each wavelength. Step 4 If the BER for a certain wavelength worsens but still meets the acceptance requirement, you do not need to further commission the BER. Otherwise, repeat steps Step 1 through Step 3 to commission the BER for this wavelength. Step 5 When the BER commissioning is complete, the change in the total optical power must be limited to the range of 1 dB to +1 dB. If the change reaches 1 dB or +1 dB, further commissioning is required. In the subsequent commissioning of BERs, ensure that the total optical power after the commissioning remains unchanged. To achieve this, the optical power of the wavelength with the highest BER and the wavelength with the lowest BER must be adjusted with a step of 0.5 dB simultaneously. That is, decrease the optical power for the wavelength that has the highest BER by 0.5 dB, but increase the optical power of the wavelength that has the lowest BER by 0.5 dB. By doing this, the change magnitude of the total optical power is controlled.
NOTE
In the adjustment process, if the BER remains the same after the optical power is adjusted by 2 dB, stop the commissioning. Determine why this is occurring and then perform specific commissioning.
----End
6.3.23 Commissioning OSNR

This section describes how to commission the OSNR for a wavelength.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.

Optical spectrum analyzer, U2000
The objective of OSNR commissioning is to ensure that the OSNR for every wavelength is higher than the design OSNR tolerance. OSNR tolerance refers to the tolerance at which the boards at the receive end cannot restore the error-free carrier signals when the OSNR is lower than a specified threshold. In certain special situations, this objective can be properly adjusted, but a certain OSNR margin must be ensured. By adjusting the OSNR, the lowest OSNR for the wavelengths that have the same source and sink can be improved. Note that the wavelengths that have different sources or sinks have different OSNRs. The detected OSNR value may be incorrect if there is a parallel OADM station using M40/D40, WSMD4, or WSM9+WSD9 boards on the link. Therefore, OSNR commissioning should be performed only when there is no parallel OADM station on the link.
Procedure
Step 1 When adjusting the OSNR flatness, ensure that the total optical power after the commissioning remains the same. During the commissioning, decrease the optical power for the wavelength that has the highest OSNR by 0.5 dB, and increase the optical power of the wavelength that has the lowest OSNR by 0.5 dB. Step 2 The commissioning should be performed in a specific sequence. That is, you need to recheck the existing wavelengths to identify the wavelength that has the highest or lowest OSNR. Then continue the commissioning in the same way as specified in Step 1. If the OSNRs for the two wavelengths are equal to the design OSNRs, it indicates that the OSNR commissioning is successful.
NOTE
If the OSNR remains the same or decreases after the optical power is increased, stop the commissioning, analyze the cause, and then continue with specific commissioning.
----End
6.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long Spans

This section describes how to commission a system with ultra-long spans.
Prerequisite

U2000
Networking Diagram
Figure 6-30 shows the network topology of Project Y. In a chain network, optical network elements (ONEs) 1 - 24 are the stations installed with the WDM equipment. ONE 1 and ONE 24 are configured as OTM stations. ONE 26, 812, 1419, and 2123 are OLA stations. ONE 7 and 20 are ROADM station. ONE 13 is an OEQ station. Figure 6-30 shows the span loss and distance between NEs.
Figure 6-30 Service requirement matrix in Project Y

West 1 2 Commissioning Span 1
60km 16.5dB
80km 22dB
92km 25.3dB
80km 22dB
80km 22dB
76km 20.9dB
86km 23.65dB
16
Commissioning Span 2
86km 23.65dB 80km 22dB 80km 22dB 60km 16.5dB 80km 22dB 60km 76km 16.5dB 12 20.9dB 60km 16.5dB 60km 16.5dB 72km 19.8dB 80km 22dB 80km 22dB 80km 22dB
80km 22dB
90km 24.75dB 60km 16.5dB
15
14
13
11
10
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24 East
OTM
OLA
ROADM
Commissioning Requirement
l In an ultra long-haul transmission system with multiple transmission spans, divide the line into different commissioning spans according to service stations and equalization stations (namely, ROADM and back-to-back OTM stations) and then commission the system span by span. As shown in Figure 6-30, the network is divided into four commissioning spans. Determine the stations that can serve as optical power equalization stations. For example, the stations represented as dotted rectangles in the figure. Determine the optical power monitoring station for each commissioning span based on the principle of equalizing optical power at the middle of a transmission link, for example, stations 4, 10, 17, and 22 (represented as dotted rectangles).
NOTE
l l
Define the OTM, FOADM, and ROADM stations as optical power commissioning stations. For an FOADM station, the optical power of pass-through wavelengths cannot be equalized. Therefore, an FOADM station is regarded as a fiber during the commissioning.
NOTE
If you select an OTM or OADM station as the optical power motioning station, skip the step for equalizing optical power at an OLA station.
NOTE
Before equalizing optical power, divide the network into different parts and select the source and sink stations according to the network model. Then determine the optical power adjustment station. The principles for selecting a station for monitoring optical power on a line are as follows: l If the number (N) of transmission spans between two optical power equalization stations is greater than 4, determine the position of a monitoring station by dividing N by 2 (N/2). If N is an odd number, determine the position of the monitoring station according to N/20.5. l If the number (N) of transmission spans between two optical power equalization stations is equal to 4, determine the transmit end as the monitoring station.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
251
Commission the entire network from west to east. Then, commission the entire network in the reverse direction.
Procedure
Step 1 For the steps for commissioning the add wavelength optical power at station 1 (OTM), see 6.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A. Step 2 For the steps for commissioning the link optical power at station 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (OLA), see 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
NOTE
The input optical power of an optical amplifier (OA) cannot be out of the range of the total optical power of the OA. That is, an OA cannot work with over-saturated optical power.
Step 3 For the steps for commissioning the add wavelength optical power and link optical power at station 7 (ROADM), see 6.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9), 6.3.13 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V) or 6.3.14 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board). Step 4 For the steps for equalizing the optical power for the span 1, see 6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization.
NOTE
l When the attenuation of a channel is adjusted, the optical power of the adjacent channels also changes. The number of affected adjacent channels depends on the attenuation adjustment step. The number of affected adjacent channels increases when the attenuation adjustment step increases. In general, when the attenuation adjustment step is equal to or smaller than 1 dB, one adjacent channel on each side is affected (based on an 80-channel system). The change in attenuation for the adjacent channels is the same as that of the adjusted channel. l It is recommended that the value of the attenuation adjustment step be smaller than 1 dB. In addition, it is recommended that you adjust the attenuation channel by channel. Do not adjust the attenuation of for a channel repeatedly, or adjust the attenuation for multiple channels simultaneously. l Equalizing optical power at intermediate stations is intended to correct the unflat link optical power due to accumulated unflatness of OAs and non-linear effects after long distance transmission. When the optical power equalization is complete, the optical spectrums at the transmit and receive ends are unflat (2 dB), but each wavelength on the line has almost the same optical power and OSNR and therefore has the same transmission performance.
Step 5 Commission the optical power in commissioning spans 2, 3, and 4 based on Step 1 through Step 4. Step 6 Optimize the BER and OSNR for the entire network based on 6.3.22 Commissioning BERs and 6.3.23 Commissioning OSNR so that the system performance of the entire network is optimal. ----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
252
7 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
Example of Commissioning Optical Power
Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
About This Chapter

This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40 Gbit/s (hereinafter referred to as 40G) OTM and OLA stations.
CAUTION
Ensure that the optical ports and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean. Otherwise, system performance will be affected.
NOTE
When commissioning the optical power, ensure that all channels configured for the project access service signals, or that the WDM side is forced to emit light. By doing this, all the OTUs can emit light normally. Then start the commissioning station by station.
NOTE
The optical power queried on the U2000 is general optical power. The difference between this value and the value tested by instruments should be within 1 dB.
7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System This section describes the general rules and requirements for commissioning a 40G system. 7.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System This section describes the general process for commissioning a 40G system. 7.3 Preparations for Commissioning 7.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40G OTM and OLA stations on the U2000. 7.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40Gbit/s (hereinafter referred to as 40G) OTM and OLA, stations on site. 7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G System
This chapter describes the methods for analyzing and handling the common problems that may happen in the process of commissioning a 40G system. You need to analyze and handle the problems according to actual situations.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
254
7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System

This section describes the general rules and requirements for commissioning a 40G system.
Requirements on Incident Optical Power

Table 7-1 shows the incident optical power requirements. Table 7-1 Requirements on Incident Optical Power Module Type 40G ODB 40G DQPSK Number of Wavelengt hs 80 40 80 G.652 G.655 LEAF +1 +2 +1 TW-RS TW-C
+1 +4 +1
+1 +2 +1
+1 +2 +1
The optical power listed in the table is expressed in dBm, and is applicable to optical amplifiers with total output optical power of 20 dBm.
NOTE
If a high-power optical amplifier with a total output optical power of 23 dBm is used on the link, the incident optical power between the high-power optical amplifier needs to be increased by 3 dB in the commissioning process. The optical power of 2 dBm listed in the table, however, is changed to 4 dBm.
NOTE
A 40G signal is sensitive to non-linear effects. It is prohibited to randomly increase the optical power of 40G signals. Also, it is prohibited to let an optical amplifier work in an abnormal state.
For information about the single-wavelength incident power for fiber G.653, see Table 7-2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
255

NOTE
The dispersion of G.653 fiber is close to zero, which causes strong non-linear effects. Therefore, the incident power is relatively low. Hence, in the WDM system based on the G.653 fiber, a variable optical attenuator (VOA) must be added at the output end of the transmit optical amplifier board. This ensures the per-channel incident optical power meets the requirement of the G.653 fiber.
OAU FIU
OAU
: VOA
Table 7-2 Single-Wavelength Incident Power for fiber G.653 Module Type Channel Spacing OAU Type Standard SingleWavelength Incident Power -4 dBm
40G eDQPSK
100 GHz (no wavelength at the zero dispersion point) 100 GHz (full configuration, including the zero dispersion point) 50 GHz (no wavelength at the zero dispersion point) 50 GHz (full configuration, including the zero dispersion point)
OAU101, 0AU103, 0BU103 OAU101, 0AU103, 0BU103
-5 dBm
OAU101, 0AU103, 0BU103 OAU101, 0AU103, 0BU103
-4 dBm
-5 dBm
Selection of Channels for Mixed Transmission of 10G and 40G Signals

In the system design, a 10G channel is separated from a 40G channel with an idle channel in between. Therefore, do not configure a 10G channel as an adjacent channel of a 40G channel.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
256
40G channels are preferred for carrying medium or long wavelengths. After all the medium and long wavelengths are allocated, properly allocate the short wavelengths. 10G channels are preferred for carrying short wavelengths. Mixed transmission of 10G and 40G signals are described as follows in the order of the smallest impact to the greatest impact: l Mixed transmission with maximum spacing between a 10G channel and a 40G channel. For G.652 fibers, the spacing is at least one channel. For G.655 fibers, the spacing is at least 400 GHz. l l l One-side neighboring transmission. That is, a channel of 10G signals is present on one side of a 40G channel. Two-side neighboring transmission. That is, a channel of 10G signals is present on each side of a 40G channel. Do not apply mixed transmission of 10G and 40G signals when there are fiber types other than G.652 and G.655.
Commissioning Rules
Observe the following rules when commissioning a 40G system: l When commissioning the 40G system, the MCA boards or an optical spectrum analyzer must be used in the commissioning to ensure that the optical power is precisely commissioned. Optical power is commissioned based on the nominal optical power. It is prohibited to improve the optical power performance by increasing the transmit optical power in the initial engineering phase. During the equalization of the system optical power, the actual incident optical power for every section cannot deviate from the typical incident optical power over 1.5 dB regardless of the fiber type. Otherwise, the system performance degrades quickly and the BER before FEC increases rapidly. For an ODB board, the residual dispersion compensation on a line must be accurate to within 5.0 km. (In a network using G.652 fibers, a 10 km or 5 km DCM module must be used to ensure this level of accuracy.) For an eDQPSK board, the residual dispersion compensation on a line must be accurate to within 5.0 km. (In a network using G.652 fibers, a 10 km or 5 km DCM module must be used to ensure this level of accuracy.) The optical power at the IN optical port on a 40 OTU board must be within the range of 8 dBm to 3 dBm. The objective of the system commissioning is to ensure the optical power flatness and the OSNR flatness. When the difference between the OSNR flatness and optical power flatness is small, the system OSNR flatness is obtained by maintaining the optical power flatness. In the case of 40G system commissioning, adjust the optical power difference between each wavelength in the middle of two equilibrium stations (stations that balance the optical power, including ROADM, and back-to-back OTM) to a value not more than 0.5 dB. If the spacing between two equilibrium stations is less than or equal to four spans, you only need to adjust the output optical power difference of equilibrium stations at the transmit end to 0.5 dB. If equalizing optical power at intermediate stations, objectives of single-wavelength optical power commissioning at the transmit and receive ends are as follows:
l l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
According to the engineering requirement, the optical power of a single wavelength can deviate from the nominal single-wavelength input optical power by at most 3 dB at the transmit and receive ends. l When the 10G signal and the 40G signal are mixed in transmission, the general commissioning method is same as that for 40G system commissioning. When the 10G signal is adjacent to the 40G signal, however, make sure that the optical power of the 10G signal is not higher than the nominal power of a single wavelength. If the 10G signal is stable for a long time, commission the 10G signal power to a value 1 dB less than the power of the adjacent 40G signal. In the mixed spectrum of the 40G signal and the 10G signal, the spectrum of the 40G signal is wider and its amplitude is lower than that of the 10G signal. Actually, the power of the 10G signal is equal to the power of the 40G signal. Therefore, measure optical power of the 40G wavelength and the 10G wavelength accurately, Figure 7-1 shows the mixed optical spectrum.
Figure 7-1 Mixed optical spectrum of 40G signals and 10G signals
10G signals
40G signals
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
258

TIP
When the system has more than 20 spans, the noise signal of the short wavelengths increases and there is a great difference between OSNR flatness and optical power flatness. Therefore, during the extra long-haul 40G transmission, avoid using short wavelengths. If short wavelengths must be used, you need to consider the OSNR limits of the short wavelengths when planning the network.
7.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System

This section describes the general process for commissioning a 40G system. Figure 7-2 shows the process for commissioning a 40G system. Figure 7-2 Process for commissioning a 40G system
Start
Design documents and network conditions comply with the commissioning requirements? Yes Configure boards and stations
No
Identify the nonconformance with relevant network design department
Flatten the optical power of the OTM station at the transmit end
Commission the optical power of an OLA station Equalize the optical power at intermediate stations Optimize performance of each wavelength Document and save the commissioning result End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
259
7.3 Preparations for Commissioning

7.3.1 Checking Design Documents
Before starting the deployment commissioning, check the design documents to ensure that the designs, such as dispersion configuration and compensation method, PMD, OSNR, ITL configuration, and channel allocation for hybrid transmission of 10G and 40G signals, meet the requirements for setting up a 40G system.
The optical amplifier (OA) design for a 40G system is the same as that for an Nx10G system. Compared with an Nx10G system, a 40G system has higher requirements on incident optical power, dispersion compensation, OSNR, and PMD.
Checking Dispersion Configurations

Check whether the dispersion compensation module (DCM) configured on each optical path meets the actual dispersion compensation requirement. First, obtain the dispersion value of each optical path from the parameter document for optical paths. Then check whether the DCM specified in the System Configuration Diagram at each station on the optical path can compensate dispersion properly based on the following table. If a DCM fails to compensate the dispersion on the optical path, provide feedback to the commissioning leader immediately. Table 7-3 Dispersion configuration checklist for a G.652 fiber system No. 1 2 Checklist Precompensation of 20 km at the transmit end The dispersion on the line is compensated equally and the compensation deviation does not exceed 10 km. Overcompensation (for example, the 80 km DCM is used on 65, 70, or 75 km span) is generally applied. When under-compensation is applied, compensation is supplemented on the first or second subsequent span. The compensation for the chromatic dispersion (CD) at a fiber entry point on the line is within the range of -30 km to -10 km.
Check Result Yes No Yes No
Yes No
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
260
No. 4
Checklist The compensation for the CD at the end point on the line is in the range of -5 km to +5 km.
Check Result Yes No
Table 7-4 Dispersion configuration checklist for a leaf fiber system No. 1 Checklist No dispersion precompensation is provided at the transmit end. If ODB OTU boards are used, overcompensation of 10 km to 25 km is applied to each span. The dispersion of the fourth or fifth span is 0 after periodic compensation. Over-compensation (for example, the 80 km DCM is used on 65, 70, or 75 km span) is generally applied. When under-compensation is applied, compensation is supplemented on the first or second subsequent span. The compensation for the CD at a fiber entry point on the line is within the range of -100 km to +100 km. The compensation for the CD at the end point on the line is in the range of -5 km to +5 km. Check Result Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Checking PMD Configurations

Check whether the PMD penalty on each optical path is within the range specified in the engineering design. Check whether the PMD value for an optical path is smaller than the PMD tolerance for the optical path against the parameter document for optical paths.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
261
Table 7-5 PMD configuration checklist No. 1 Checklist The PMD value for an optical path is smaller than the PMD tolerance for this optical path. Check Result Yes No
Checking OSNR Configurations

The OSNR penalty for a network includes PMD penalty, dispersion penalty, and individual device OSNR penalty. These OSNR penalties can be obtained from the parameter document for optical paths. Compare the OSNR penalties specified in this document with the system OSNR tolerance. Table 7-6 OSNR configuration checklist No. 1 Checklist The sum of OSNR penalty and aging margin is smaller than the system OSNR tolerance. Check Result Yes No
Checking ITL Board Configurations of a 40G System

Currently, only the TN11ITL04 board uses an interleaver at the transmit and receive ends. Check the ITL board configurations against Table 7-7. If an ITL board using an interleaver at the transmit and receive ends must be configured, check whether the ITL board type in the engineering configuration is TN11ITL04.
NOTE
After a 40G electrical signal is encoded (ODB), two peaks appear at the spectral edges. This affects the signal quality of the receiver. In addition, the peaks make the bottoms of the CD and OSNR curves unflat, which affects the TDCM in searching for the optimal compensation value. Configuring an ITL board with 0.3 nm bandwidth between the transmit end (behind the MUX board) and the receive end (before the DEMUX board) helps filter noise and optimize OSNR tolerance, and it has no negative impact on signals.
NOTE
The 40G DQPSK signal spectrum is comparatively wide. The 20 dB spectrum width is about 0.8 nm. Therefore, the signal overlapping in an 80-channel system is of major concern, and an ITL board that uses an interleaver at the transmit and receive ends must be configured in an 80-channel system.
Table 7-7 ITL configuration checklist for a 40G DQPSK 80-channel system No. 1 Checklist The TN11ITL04 board is used in a 40G DQPSK system with 50 GHz channel spacing.
Check Result Yes No
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
262
No. 2
Checklist The TN11ITL04 board is used at an OADM station to add/drop DQPSK wavelengths with 50 GHz channel spacing. An ITL board is used at a WSS-based ROADM station to add/drop wavelengths with 100 GHz channel spacing.
Check Result Yes No
Yes No
7.3.2 40G Commissioning Meter

This section describes the types of test meters used to commission a 40G system.
Context
A 40G SDH analyzer, an optical spectrum analyzer, and a power meter are required to commission a 40G system. Table 7-8 lists certain 40G SDH analyzers. Table 7-9 lists certain optical spectrum analyzers intended for testing a 40G system.
NOTE
A 40G system requires high-precision optical power. Before using an optical spectrum analyzer, calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer with respect to the optical power setting.
Table 7-8 40G SDH analyzers Name ONT-506 Appearance
NX 4000
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
263
Name MP1797A
Appearance
Table 7-9 Optical spectrum analyzers intended for 40G system testing Name MTS8000 Appearance
Agilent86145B/86142
AQ6370/6370B/6319/6317
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
264
7.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40G OTM and OLA stations on the U2000.

The commissioning of the 40G system has higher requirements when compared with the commissioning requirements of a low-rate service line. In this example, the system to be commissioned is a long-haul 40G link.
Networking Diagram
Figure 7-3 shows the network topology of Project H. In a chain network, optical network elements (ONEs) A, B, C and D are the stations installed with the WDM equipments. ONE A and ONE D are configured as OTM stations. ONE B and ONE C are two OLA stations. There are several OLA stations between ONE B and ONE C. 10-channel 40G services are transmitted between ONEs A and D. Figure 7-3 shows the span loss and distance between NEs. The G.652 fiber is used as the line optical fiber. Figure 7-3 Service requirement matrix in Project H
A 80 km/22dB B OLA C 76 km/20.9dB D
OTM
OLA
Wavelength Allocation Diagram

Figure 7-4 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project H. The solid line represents the working channel and the dashed line represents the protection channel.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
265
Figure 7-4 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project H

A LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL 192.10THz 192.20THz 192.30THz 192.40THz 192.50THz 192.60THz 192.70THz 192.80THz 192.90THz 196.00THz STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL D 192.10THz 192.20THz 192.30THz 192.40THz 192.50THz 192.60THz 192.70THz 192.80THz 192.90THz 196.00THz
Optical Amplifier Configuration Diagram

Figure 7-5 shows the configuration for an optical amplifier at each station in project H. Figure 7-5 Optical amplifier configuration diagram of project H
A B DCM OBU from 103 M40 OAU 103 DCM 80 km 22dB OAU 103 OLA OAU 103 DCM OAU 103 DCM 76 km 20.9dB OBU 103 from M40 C DCM OAU 103 D DCM OAU 103 to D40
to D40
NOTE
For the 40G ODB and DQPSK code patterns, an ITL board integrating two interleavers must be used in an 80channel system for wavelength filtering.
NE Board Configuration
NOTE
The type of OAU1 is OAU103, and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.
Figure 7-6 shows the board configuration for ONE A and ONE D. The board configurations for ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other OLAs, as shown in Figure 7-8.
Figure 7-7 shows the board configuration of ONE A and ONE D. The board configurations for ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other OLAs, as shown in Figure 7-9. Figure 7-6 Board Configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)
PDU
PDU
L F S I X U L
L S X L
L S X L
P I U S P C I CU A U X
F M I 4 U 0
O D M B 4 R U 0 2 1
L S X L
L S X L
L F S I X U L
L S X L
O O F A B M I U U C U 1 1 A
S C 1
L F S I X U L
L S X L
L S X L
DCM
DCM
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
267
Figure 7-7 Board Configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)
PDU
PIU
PIU
A U X
PIU
PIU
O O B A U U 1 1 X X CC HH M C A L S X L L S X L
S C C
S C C
M 4 0
D 4 0
S F C I 1 U
PIU
PIU
A U X
PIU
PIU
L S X L
L S X L X X CC HH
S C C
L S X L
L S X L
L S X L
L S X L
S C C
L S X L
L S X L
NOTE
The TN11LSXL occupies four slots.

NOTE
The TN12LSXL occupies three slots.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
268
Figure 7-8 Board Configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)
PDU
O O F F A A I I U U U U 1 1
S C 2
DCM
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
269
Figure 7-9 Board Configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)
PDU
PIU
PIU
A U X
PIU
PIU
O A U 1
O A U 1 X X CC HH
S C C
F F S I I C UU 2
S C C
7.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the OTM Station
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTM station that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. The fiber connections must be correct. All channels must be accessed with services or must be forced to emit light, which makes the OTU emit light normally.

U2000
In this example, the specifications for the hardware are as follows: l l l G.655 fiber is used as the line optical fiber. In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added. The type of OAU1 is OAU103 and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-10 Fiber connections of the OTM station
Station A
Rx M31
LSXL LSXL
M32
M 4 OBU1 0 OUT IN OUT RC M40 V

RM F TM
OUT
To B
LSXL SC1
Tx D31 TM RM
I U
LSXL LSXL
D32
D 4 0
OAU1
From B
LSXL
D40
EVOA
NOTE
ODF side
As shown in Figure 7-10, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, configure the MVOA and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A. ----End
7.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station and the OTM Station at the Receive End
This section describes how to commission the link optical power of the OLA station and OTM station at the receive end that are in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-11 Fiber connections of the OLA station (OAU1)
Station B
DCM
TDC RDC
TC IN
IN
OAU1
OUT
RC OUT
MON
MCA
From A
West
F TM I U RM
RM1
SC2
TM1
TM2 RM2
RM
F I U TM
To C
MCA
RC OUT
MON
East
OAU1
TDC
IN
TC IN
OUT
RDC
DCM
EVOA
ODF side
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
272
Figure 7-12 Fiber connections of the OLA station (OBU1+OBU1)
Station B
TC IN
IN
OBU1
OUT
D C M
IN
OBU1
OUT
RC OUT
MON
MCA
From A West
F TM I U RM
RM1
SC2
TM1
TM2 RM2
RM
F I U TM
To C East
MCA
RC
MON OUT
OAU1
TDC
IN
TC IN
OUT
RDC
DCM
EVOA
ODF side
Figure 7-13 Fiber connections of the OTM station at the receive end
Station D
D31
OTU
Tx
From C
IN TC
OAU1
OUT IN DCM TDC RDC
D 4 0
D32
OTU
D40 TM RM
OTU
F RM I U TM
OUT OAU1 OUT RC IN
SC1
M31
OTU
OUT M M32
Rx
To C
4 0 V M40
OTU
OTU
EVOA
ODF side
NOTE
As shown in Figure 7-11, Figure 7-12 and Figure 7-13, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, configure the MVOA and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
273
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures in 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B. ----End
7.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization

This section describes how to commission the optical power equalization that is in the west-toeast signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures in 6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization. Step 2 Optional: When the link commissioning is complete, if the performance for a certain wavelength is poor, improve the performance of this wavelength by changing its optical power. In addition, reversely change the optical power of the wavelength that has the best performance to ensure that the total optical power remains unchanged. The changed optical power cannot exceed 2 dB.
NOTE
When changing the optical power for the wavelength, increase or decrease the optical power. Increasing the optical power or decreasing the optical power can improve wavelength performance.
----End
7.4.5 Commissioning BERs

The objective of BER commissioning is to optimize a BER. To ensure stable operation of the system, a certain BER margin must be reserved for the system.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher. The optical power of the main optical path must be commissioned.

U2000
Precautions
CAUTION
During the deployment commissioning, ensure that the bit errors before FEC meet the customer requirements, and that the bit errors after FEC are zero considering the line attenuation and the configurations.
Networking Application
BER commissioning involves two types of networks: networks on which wavelengths share the same source and the same sink, and networks on which wavelengths have different sources and different sinks. See Figure 7-14. Figure 7-14 Networking application
u uand the same sink
ubut different sinks u u but different sources u uand different sinks u

With the same sink
With different sources
Commissioning Rules
Figure 7-15 shows the BER commissioning process.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
275
Figure 7-15 BER commissioning process

Finish power commissioning for main optical path Start BER optimization
Query BER before correction of each wavelength
Yes
Is the BER before correction of all wavelengths better than the specified value?
No
Start from the transmit end of the wavelengths to be optimized and select required wavelengths for BER optimization
Yes
Are there required wavelengths for BER optimization?
No
Request maintenance engineers to remove network faults.
Are the faults removed?
Yes
Allocate attenuation to relevant wavelengths Adjust the attenuation of each relevant wavelength with a step of 0 5 dB
No
Provide feedback on the optimization failure.
No
Is the BER before correction of all wavelengths is better than the specified value?
Yes
Finish BER optimization
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
276
The BER before correction must at least meet the acceptance requirement. If the BER before correction of a wavelength fails to meet the acceptance requirement, you need to optimize the BER. Otherwise, you do not need to optimize the BER.
NOTE
l If the BER before correction fails to meet the acceptance requirement, the BER will be affected by either excessively high or low optical power. l For the ODB modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 1.5 dB in the OSNR of the system. l For the DQPSK modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 2 dB in the OSNR of the system.
BER optimization for a single node is implemented by reducing the wavelength power for a channel with better performance to increase the wavelength optical power for a channel with poorer performance. For BER optimization of a single node, the performance of the wavelength to be optimized is compared with the performance of the adjacent wavelengths. By doing this, the adjustment point can be determined. During BER optimization, you need to consider the efficiency and must understand the status of all the services on the network. Control the BERs for all wavelengths at the same adjustment point only once. BER optimization is performed based on the service performance before BER at the transmit end of each node. BER flatness control is performed based on the average performance of the associated wavelengths for the wavelength to be optimized. The optical power of the wavelength to be optimized can be adjusted by at most 2 dB. If an MCA board is used in the system, you also need to pay attention to the optical power flatness (+/-3 dB). According to the BER performance, the wavelengths whose BERs are three orders of magnitude higher than the average BER must be optimized first. In this case, the adjacent wavelengths for all the wavelengths that meet the optimization requirement are preferred for BER optimization. During the optimization, monitor the trend of how performance changes for all wavelengths. If the BERs of the wavelengths with better performance degrade by more than two orders of magnitude after the power compensation, restore the optical power to the state before optimization. During BER optimization, reserve a margin for the optical power of the main optical path for each node and comply with the WDM principles. You are not allowed to improve wavelength performance by forcibly increasing the optical power of the main optical path because this consumes the power margin reserved for future expansion. During BER optimization, adjust the optical power for the wavelengths that have poorer performance with a step of 0.5 dB. After adjusting the optical power, re-query the service performance and provide the feedback with the commissioning results. During BER optimization, you can restore the optical power to the state before optimization. If the service performance fails to improve by one order of magnitude after the wavelength optical power is increased by 2 dB, decrease the optical power by 2 dB and provide the failure information to the maintenance engineers. Ask the engineers to check the network conditions. During BER optimization, the fluctuation of the total optical power on the line must be controlled within +/-1 dB.
Principles for Selecting Wavelengths for BER Optimization

l If a wavelength is dropped at the downstream OADM node and then added again or a new wavelength is added at this OADM node, consider this wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
If a wavelength is dropped at the downstream OADM node and a group of wavelengths is added at this OADM node, and the BER performance of this group of wavelengths is better than the performance of the wavelengths to be optimized, consider this wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs. If the following four conditions are met, consider each pass-through wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs: A wavelength is dropped at a downstream OADM station and a group of wavelengths is re-added at this OADM station. The optical power of each added wavelength cannot be separately adjusted. The BER performance for this group of wavelengths has little room for optimization when compared with the BER performance for the wavelengths to be optimized. The optical power for each pass-through wavelength can be separately adjusted.
l l
In the WSD+RMU configuration mode, if the RMU+M40V boards are configured at the wavelength-adding direction, the single-wavelength power must be adjusted first. If no wavelength is added at the downstream OADM node after a wavelength is dropped at this OADM node, and the optical power of each pass-through wavelength can be adjusted separately, consider this wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs. If an MVOA is configured at the downstream FOADM that a wavelength traverses, do not consider this wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs.
The BER before correction must at least meet the acceptance requirement. If the BER before correction of a wavelength is higher than the value specified by the acceptance requirement, you do not need to optimize the BER. Otherwise, you need to optimize the BER.
NOTE
l If the BER before correction fails to meet the acceptance requirement, the BER will be affected by either higher or lower optical power. l For the ODB modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 1.5 dB in the OSNR of the system. l For the DQPSK modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 2 dB in the OSNR of the system.
Scenario 1: With Different Sources or Sinks

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
8.
Step 2 Start the optimization from the transmit end of the wavelength that has the BER that needs to be optimized. Select all required wavelengths based on Principles for Selecting Wavelengths for BER Optimization. Step 3 Increase/Decrease the power at the first adjustment point (the transmit end of the wavelength to be optimized) by 1 dB (the adjustment step is 0.5 dB). If the BER performance improves, continue to adjust the power at the first adjustment point. If the BER performance degrades, decrease/increase the optical power by 1 dB so that the optical power is restored to the previous state. Step 4 Along the signal flow, adjust the optical power for the remaining nodes based on the methods described in step Step 3 until the BER before the correction reaches the optimal state. Step 5 After the BERs for all the wavelengths are optimized, recheck the BERs before and after correction for each wavelength. Step 6 If the BER for a certain wavelength worsens but still meets the acceptance requirement, you do not need to further commission the BER. Otherwise, repeat steps Step 1 through Step 5 to commission the BER for this wavelength. Step 7 When the BER commissioning is complete, the change in the total optical power must be limited to the range of 1 dB to +1 dB. If the change reaches 1 dB or +1 dB, further commissioning is required. In the subsequent process of commissioning BERs, ensure that the total optical power after the commissioning remains unchanged. To achieve this, the optical power for the wavelength with the highest BER and the wavelength with the lowest BER must be adjusted with a step of 0.5 dB simultaneously. That is, decrease the optical power for the wavelength that has the highest BER by 0.5 dB, but increase the optical power for the wavelength that has the lowest BER by 0.5 dB. By doing this, the change magnitude for the total optical power is controlled.
NOTE
In the adjustment process, if the BER remains the same after the optical power is adjusted for 2 dB, stop the commissioning. Analyze why this is occurring and perform specific commissioning.
----End
Scenario 2: With the Same Source and the Same Sink

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
8.
Step 2 Adjust the optical power at the transmit end by at most 1 dB. Observe the changes in the BER before correction at the receive end. Continue adjusting the optical power at the transmit end until the BER before correction reaches the optimal value. Note that the total adjustment magnitude cannot exceed 2 dB, and the adjustment magnitude for each time is 0.5 dB. Step 3 After the BERs for all wavelengths are optimized, recheck the BERs before and after correction of each wavelength. Step 4 If the BER for a certain wavelength worsens but still meets the acceptance requirement, you do not need to further commission the BER. Otherwise, repeat steps Step 1 through Step 3 to commission the BER for this wavelength. Step 5 When the BER commissioning is complete, the change in the total optical power must be limited to the range of 1 dB to +1 dB. If the change reaches 1 dB or +1 dB, further commissioning is required. In the subsequent commissioning of BERs, ensure that the total optical power after the commissioning remains unchanged. To achieve this, the optical power of the wavelength with the highest BER and the wavelength with the lowest BER must be adjusted with a step of 0.5 dB simultaneously. That is, decrease the optical power for the wavelength that has the highest BER by 0.5 dB, but increase the optical power of the wavelength that has the lowest BER by 0.5 dB. By doing this, the change magnitude of the total optical power is controlled.
NOTE
In the adjustment process, if the BER remains the same after the optical power is adjusted by 2 dB, stop the commissioning. Determine why this is occurring and then perform specific commissioning.
----End
7.4.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System

This section describes how to commission the OSNR for a 40G System.
Prerequisite

U2000
The objective of OSNR commissioning is to ensure that the OSNR for every wavelength is higher than the design OSNR tolerance, which refers to the tolerance at which the boards at the receive end cannot restore the error-free carrier signals when the OSNR is lower than a specified threshold. In certain special situations, this objective can be properly adjusted, but a certain OSNR margin must be ensured. By adjusting the OSNR, the lowest OSNR of the wavelengths that have the same source and sink can be improved. Note that the wavelengths that have different sources or sinks have different OSNRs. The detected OSNR value may be incorrect if there is a parallel OADM station using M40/D40, WSMD4, or WSM9+WSD9 boards on the link. Therefore, OSNR commissioning should be performed only when there is no parallel OADM station on the link.
Procedure
Step 1 When adjusting the OSNR flatness, ensure that the total optical power after the commissioning remains the same. During the commissioning, decrease the optical power of the wavelength that has the highest OSNR by 0.5 dB, and increase the optical power of the wavelength that has the lowest OSNR by 0.5 dB. Step 2 The commissioning should be performed in a specific sequence. That is, you need to recheck the existing wavelengths to identify the wavelength that has the highest or lowest OSNR. Then continue the commissioning in the same way as specified in step 1. If the OSNRs for the two wavelengths are equal to the design OSNRs, it indicates that the OSNR commissioning is successful.
NOTE
If the OSNR remains the same or decreases after the optical power is increased, stop the commissioning, analyze the cause, and then continue specific commissioning.
----End
Example
If a wavelength traverses a parallel OADM station, adjust the OSNR based on the OEQ configuration modes and the OSNR tolerance listed in Table 7-10, Table 7-11, and Table 7-12. Table 7-10 OSNR tolerance for a 40G ODB 80-channel system 1. G.652 ODB 50 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR Tolerance Index (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included) Fiber Input Power Dispersion Tolerance Power Equilibriu m +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40) +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V) +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V +OEQ) OSNR Tolerance +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V +OEQ +OEQ) OSNR Tolerance Typical PMD OSNR Penalty 0.0 0.2 0.3 0.5
281
Transmissi on hops
OSNR Tolerance
OSNR Tolerance
1 2 3 4
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
18.6 18.8 19.3 19.6
18.6 18.7 19.1 19.4
18.6 18.7 19.1 19.4
18.6 18.7 19.1 19.4
1. G.652 ODB 50 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR Tolerance Index (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included) Fiber Input Power Dispersion Tolerance Power Equilibriu m +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40) +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V) +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V +OEQ) OSNR Tolerance +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V +OEQ +OEQ) OSNR Tolerance Typical PMD OSNR Penalty 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.7 1.9 -
Transmissi on hops
OSNR Tolerance
OSNR Tolerance
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
20.1 20.4 21.0 21.3 -
19.8 20.0 20.5 20.7 20.9 21.1 21.5 21.7
19.8 20.0 20.5 20.7 20.9 21.1 21.5 21.7
19.8 20.0 20.5 20.7 20.9 21.1 21.5 21.7
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
282
Table 7-11 OSNR tolerance for a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system 1. G.652 eDQPSK 100 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR Tolerance Index (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included) Fiber Input Power Dispersion Tolerance Power Equilibriu m +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40) +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V) +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V +OEQ) OSNR Tolerance +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V +OEQ +OEQ) OSNR Tolerance Typical PMD OSNR Penalty 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 -
Transmissi on hops
OSNR Tolerance
OSNR Tolerance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
15.5 15.7 15.8 16.0 16.1 16.4 16.5 16.8 -
15.5 15.6 15.6 15.8 15.8 15.9 16.0 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.8 16.8 -
15.5 15.6 15.6 15.8 19.8 15.9 16.0 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.8 16.8 16.9 17.0 17.1 17.3 17.6 17.9 18.2
15.5 15.6 15.6 15.8 19.8 15.9 16.0 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.8 16.8 16.9 17.0 17.1 17.3 17.5 17.7 17.9
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
283
1. G.652 eDQPSK 100 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR Tolerance Index (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included) Fiber Input Power Dispersion Tolerance Power Equilibriu m +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40) +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V) +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V +OEQ) OSNR Tolerance +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V +OEQ +OEQ) OSNR Tolerance Typical PMD OSNR Penalty 0.3 -
Transmissi on hops
OSNR Tolerance
OSNR Tolerance
20
18.6
18.2
Table 7-12 OSNR tolerance for a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system 1. G.652 eDQPSK 50 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR Tolerance Index (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included) Fiber Input Power Dispersion Tolerance Power Equilibriu m +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40) +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V) +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V +OEQ) OSNR Tolerance +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V +OEQ +OEQ) OSNR Tolerance Typical PMD OSNR Penalty 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 -
Transmissi on hops
OSNR Tolerance
OSNR Tolerance
1 2 3 4
15.5 15.7 15.8 15.9
15.5 15.6 15.6 15.7
15.5 15.6 15.6 15.7
15.5 15.6 15.6 15.7
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
284
1. G.652 eDQPSK 50 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR Tolerance Index (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included) Fiber Input Power Dispersion Tolerance Power Equilibriu m +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40) +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V) +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V +OEQ) OSNR Tolerance +1 dBm -5 km to 5 km OSNR Tolerance (With M40V +OEQ +OEQ) OSNR Tolerance Typical PMD OSNR Penalty 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 -
Transmissi on hops
OSNR Tolerance
OSNR Tolerance
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
16.0 16.2 16.3 16.5 -
15.7 15.7 15.8 15.8 15.8 15.8 16.1 16.1 -
15.7 15.7 15.8 15.8 15.8 15.8 16.1 16.1 16.2 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.7 17.0 17.3 17.6
15.7 15.7 15.8 15.8 15.8 15.8 16.1 16.1 16.2 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.6 16.8 17.0 17.0
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
285

NOTE
In Table 7-10, Table 7-11, and Table 7-12, "OSNR Tolerance (With M40)" indicates that the M40 board is used at the transmit end, and that neither pre-equalization is applied nor is the OEQ station configured on the line. "OSNR Tolerance (With M40V)" indicates that the M40V is used at the transmit end for pre-equalization but no OEQ station is used on the line. "OSNR Tolerance (With M40V+OEQ)" indicates that the M40V is used at the transmit end for pre-equalization and one OEQ station is configured on the line. "OSNR Tolerance (With M40V+OEQ+OEQ)" indicates that the M40V is used at the transmit end for pre-equalization and two OEQ stations are configured on the line. The concept of the OEQ station covers the back-to-back OTM station and ROADM station on the line. The configuration modes are designed in the engineering design phase. During commissioning, you need to select an appropriate mode and commission the optical power based on the OSNR tolerance given in the tables.
NOTE
The OSNR tolerance given in Table 7-10, Table 7-11, and Table 7-12 increases with the number of spans. The maximum number of transmission spans is 20. That is, the regenerator section must be terminated at the 20th transmission span. If the services on the network need to be transmitted further, a regeneration board must be added. The number of transmission spans (also called the number of transmission levels) corresponding to the OSNR tolerance indicates how many times that a wavelength enters a transmission fiber after being amplified by an optical amplifier. It is equivalent to the number of spans of the transmission fibers or optical transmission sections (OTSs). Note that a fiber connection inside a station is not considered a transmission span.
NOTE
The OSNR tolerance given in Table 7-10, Table 7-11, and Table 7-12 includes the "Typical PMD Penalty" listed in the last column. The typical PMD penalty is obtained when the customer fiber PMD coefficient is .
7.4.7 OSNR Penalties

If the system is still operating abnormally after the preceding commissioning tasks are performed, you need to consider the OSNR penalty. With the OSNR penalty, you can evaluate impacts of configuration nonconformance on the system to meet system requirements.
The OSNR penalty (expressed in dB) covers various penalty types, such as, OSNR penalty resulting from over-limit dispersion and PMD penalty resulting from over-limit PMD. Currently, focus on the following types of OSNR penalties: power penalty, hybrid transmission penalty, high-power hybrid transmission penalty, PDL penalty, PMD penalty, and ROADM penalty.
Power Penalty
In the system design process, if a high-power amplifier is being used as required, you need to consider the extra penalty due to an increase in the single-wavelength signal power. This extra penalty is called the power penalty, and the high-power amplifier in this context refers to an amplifier with the maximum output power higher than +20 dBm. For the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800, these high-power amplifiers include TN11HBA, TN11OAU105, TN12OAU105, and TN11OBU205. If the amplifier has a maximum output power of +20 dBm or less, you do not need to consider the power penalty. If an amplifier has a maximum output power of +26 dBm, you need to consider this amplifier in the 40G system as a separate span. The power penalties in a 40G ODB system are as follows: l In a 40G ODB 80-channel system, the standard incident power configured for a single wavelength is +1 dBm.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
l l
In a regenerator section, if one to two +23 dBm high-power amplifiers are used, you do not need to consider a power penalty. In a regenerator section, if three to five +23 dBm high-power amplifiers dBm are used, you need to consider a power penalty of 0.7 dB.
The power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system are as follows: l l The standard incident power configured for a single wavelength is +4 dBm. Table 7-13 lists the power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system. Table 7-13 Power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system Power Penalty Nu mbe r of trans miss ion span s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Number of +23 dBm High-Power Amplifiers 1 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 2 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 3 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 6 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 7 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 9 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 10 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
The power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system are as follows:
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
287
l l
In a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system, the standard incident power configured for a single wavelength is +1 dBm. Table 7-14 lists the power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system. Table 7-14 Power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system Power Penalty Nu mbe r of tran smi ssio n spa ns 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Number of +23 dBm High-Power Amplifiers 1 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 3 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 6 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 7 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 8 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 9 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 10 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 11 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Hybrid Transmission Penalty

If low-rate modulated signals (including 2.5G NRZ signals, 10G NRZ signals, and 10G RZ signals) need to be transmitted over the channels adjacent to a 40G channel, in the system design process you need to consider an extra penalty, called a hybrid transmission penalty in this case. In this context, hybrid adjacent transmission of a 40G ODB channel refers to transmission of 10G/2.5G signals over channels adjacent to a 40G ODB wavelength channel within 200 GHz channel spacing. In the case of a network on which the standard incident power is +1 dBm for
the entire regenerator section, you can ignore the extra OSNR penalty generated by the hybrid adjacent transmission in each section. In the case of a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system, if the standard incident power for the entire regenerator section is +4 dBm, extra hybrid transmission penalties must be considered. Table 7-15 and Table 7-16 lists the hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system. Table 7-15 Hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system Hybrid Transmission Penalty Adjacency Type One-Side Adjacency 100 GHz NRZ Number of transmission spans 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2.7 2.6 0.8 1.2 0.5 RZ 0.7 200 GHz NRZ 0.0 RZ
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
289
Table 7-16 Hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system Hybrid Transmissi on Penalty Adjacency Type Two-Side Adjacency 100 GHz and 100 GHz NRZ +NR Z Num ber of trans missi on span s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 4.0 4.3 0.4 0.8 0.8 2.5 2.8 2.8 2.5 2.8 2.8 0.2 0.5 0.5 1.5 NRZ +RZ 1.6 RZ +RZ 1.6 100 GHz and 200 GHz NRZ +NR Z 1.5 NRZ +RZ 1.6 RZ +RZ 1.6 200 GHz and 200 GHz NRZ +NR Z 0.0 NRZ +RZ 0.3 RZ +RZ 0.3
For a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system, if the standard incident power for the entire regenerator section is +4 dBm, extra hybrid transmission penalties must be considered. Table 7-17 and Table 7-18 lists the hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
290
Table 7-17 Hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system Hybrid Transmission Penalty Adjacency Type One-Side Adjacency 50 GHz NRZ Number of transmission spans 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1.0 1.5 0.4 0.4 0.6 RZ 0.7 100 GHz NRZ 0.3 RZ 0.3
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
291
Table 7-18 Hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system Hybrid Transmissi on Penalty Adjacency Type Two-Side Adjacency 50 GHz and 50 GHz NRZ +NR Z Num ber of trans missi on span s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1.9 2.6 2.6 1.9 2.6 2.6 0.5 0.7 0.7 1.6 NRZ +RZ 1.7 RZ +RZ 1.7 50 GHz and 100 GHz NRZ +NR Z 1.6 NRZ +RZ 1.7 RZ +RZ 1.7 100 GHz and 100 GHz NRZ +NR Z 0.3 NRZ +RZ 0.5 RZ +RZ 0.5
NOTE
If both 40G and 10G signals are transmitted and high-power amplifiers are used on the network, you need to consider the overall penalty instead of only the separate 40G/10G hybrid transmission penalty and the power penalty caused by the high-power amplifier. For details, see High-Power and Hybrid Transmission Penalty.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
292
High-Power Hybrid Transmission Penalty

If high-power amplifiers (the maximum output optical power exceeds +20 dBm) are used and 40G and low-rate signals are transmitted on a network at the same time, you need to consider the OSNR penalty on the 40G signals. This type of penalty is referred to as a high-power hybrid transmission penalty. If a 10G or 2.5G single wavelength, or if both 10G and 2.5G wavelengths, are transmitted over channels adjacent to a 40G ODB wavelength channel within 200 GHz channel spacing, the highpower hybrid transmission penalties are as follows: l l In a regenerator section, if one to three +23 dBm high-power amplifiers are used, you do not need to consider a high-power hybrid transmission penalty. In a regenerator section, if four to five +23 dBm high-power amplifiers are used, you need to consider a high-power hybrid transmission penalty of 0.5 dB.
Table 7-19 and Table 7-20 lists the high-power hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system. Table 7-19 High-power hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system High-Power Hybrid Transmission Penalty Adjacency Type One-Side Adjacency 100 GHz NRZ Number of transmission spans 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
200 GHz RZ 1.8a NRZ 0.8a RZ 1.0a
1.5a
Adjacency Type One-Side Adjacency 100 GHz NRZ RZ 200 GHz NRZ RZ
17 18 19 20
Table 7-20 High-power hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system High-Power Hybrid Transmissi on Penalty Adjacency Type Two-Side Adjacency 100 GHz and 100 GHz NRZ +NR Z Num ber of trans missi on spans 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 l 1.5
b
100 GHz and 200 GHz NR Z +N RZ l 1. 5

b
200 GHz and 200 GHz NRZ +NR Z 1.0a NRZ +RZ RZ +RZ
NRZ +RZ
RZ +RZ
NRZ +RZ
RZ +RZ
l 2.2
c
l 1. 7b l 2. 7c
l 1. 7b l 2. 7c
l 2. 2
c
l 1. 7b l 2. 7c
l 1. 7b l 2. 7c
1.2a
1.2a
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
294
High-Power Hybrid Transmissi on Penalty
Adjacency Type Two-Side Adjacency 100 GHz and 100 GHz NRZ +NR Z NRZ +RZ RZ +RZ 100 GHz and 200 GHz NR Z +N RZ NRZ +RZ RZ +RZ 200 GHz and 200 GHz NRZ +NR Z NRZ +RZ RZ +RZ
15 16 17 18 19 20 -
NOTE
l "a" indicates that one to five +23 dBm amplifiers are used. If more than five +23 dBm amplifiers are used, reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value smaller than five. l "b" indicates that one or two +23 dBm amplifiers are used. l When no +23 dBm amplifier is used, see Hybrid Transmission Penalty. l "c" indicates that three +23 dBm amplifiers are used. When the number of +23 dBm amplifiers exceeds three, reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value smaller than three.
Table 7-21 and Table 7-22 lists the high-power hybrid transmission penalties for a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system. Table 7-21 High-power hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system High-Power Hybrid Transmission Penalty Adjacency Type One-Side Adjacency 50 GHz NRZ Number of transmission spans 1 2 3 4 5 l 1.3a l 2.1b RZ l 1.4a l 1.5b 100 GHz NRZ l 0.2a l 0.2b RZ l 0.2a l 0.4b
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
295
Adjacency Type One-Side Adjacency 50 GHz NRZ RZ 100 GHz NRZ RZ
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 l 2.6c l 2.7d
Table 7-22 High-power hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system HighPower Hybrid Transmissi on Penalty Adjacency Type Two-Side Adjacency 50 GHz and 50 GHz NRZ +NR Z Num ber of trans missi on 1 2 3 4 l 1. 8a l 2. 5b NRZ +RZ l 1. 8a l 2. 5b RZ +RZ l 1. 3a l 2. 0
b
50 GHz and 100 GHz NRZ +NR Z l 1. 8a l 2. 5b NRZ +RZ l 1. 8a l 2. 5b RZ +RZ l 1. 3a l 2. 0b
100 GHz and 100 GHz NRZ +NR Z l 0. 3a l 0. 5b l 0. 8c NRZ +RZ l 0. 2a l 0. 4b l 0. 6c RZ +RZ l 0. 2a l 0. 4b l 0. 6c
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
296
HighPower Hybrid Transmissi on Penalty
Adjacency Type Two-Side Adjacency 50 GHz and 50 GHz NRZ +NR Z NRZ +RZ RZ +RZ 50 GHz and 100 GHz NRZ +NR Z NRZ +RZ RZ +RZ 100 GHz and 100 GHz NRZ +NR Z NRZ +RZ l 1. 2d RZ +RZ l 1. 2d
span s
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 -
NOTE
l "a" indicates that one to three +23 dBm amplifiers are used. When no +23 dBm amplifier is used, see Hybrid Transmission Penalty. l "b" indicates that four to five +23 dBm amplifiers are used. l "c" indicates that six to eight +23 dBm amplifiers are used. l "d" indicates that nine to twelve +23 dBm amplifiers are used. l When the number of +23 dBm amplifiers exceeds 12, reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value smaller than 12.
PDL Penalty
If no ROADM station exists in a regenerator section, the OSNR tolerance specification described in 7.4.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System includes the PDL penalty in a normal situation. In this case, you do not need to consider an extra PDL penalty.
If an ROADM station exists in a regenerator section, you need to consider an extra PDL penalty caused by the WSS component at the ROADM station. In this case, you need to consider a PDL penalty of 0.15 dB for each WSS component that a 40G ODB or 40G eDQPSK wavelength traverses.
PMD Penalty
The "Typical PMD OSNR Penalty" value in the OSNR tolerance table in 7.4.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System includes the typical PMD penalty, which is given based on the fiber PMD coefficient of a regenerator section. If customers provide the actual fiber parameter values or the actual fiber PMD coefficient is greater than the provided PMD coefficient, you need to calculate the PMD penalty based on the following formula, then substitute the calculated PMD penalty for the "Typical PMD OSNR Penalty" value in the OSNR tolerance table in 7.4.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System. The calculated PMD penalty is used as the OSNR tolerance of the regenerator section after the PMD penalty is considered.
NOTE
The PMD tolerance is a key specification in a module test of a WDM system. As a random function of optical wavelengths and time, the PMD may be different for different fibers at a specified time. The differential group delay (DGD) is used to measure the PMD of a line. As a statistical value, the DGD probability distribution must comply with the Maxwell distribution rate when long fibers are used. As the maximum DGD value is three times the average DGD value, you need to calculate the PMD value permitted by a fiber based on the maximum DGD value.
In general, the actual PMD coefficient expressed in ps/(km)1/2 is given in engineering design documents. Based on this PMD coefficient, you can calculate the DGD value (ps) of each optical amplifier span and optical multiplex section. , where For optical amplifier spans, the DGD calculation formula is DGD represents the DGD value expressed in ps for each span, PMD represents the PMD coefficient expressed in ps/(km)1/2 for each span, L represents the span distance expressed in km, and L1/2 represents the square root of the span distance. For the multiplex section, the DGD calculation formula is
, where (DGDi) represents the DGD value of each section and is expressed in ps, and Li represents the distance for each section. In a 40G system, a DCM module introduces a PMD penalty while compensating for distributed dispersions. In addition, the board using a WSS component also introduces a PMD penalty of 0.2 ps. For example, there are X (an integer representing the quantity) multiplex sections on the network.
The DGD of these multiplex sections can be calculated by using the formula, where i is an integer equal to or smaller than X. In addition, there are M (an integer representing the quantity) DCM modules and the PMD penalty introduced by each DCM module
can be calculated by using the

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
formula, where j is an integer equal to

298
or smaller than M. Furthermore, there are N (an integer representing the quantity) boards configured with WSS components. In this case, the DGD value of all the multiplex sections can be calculated by using the
formula. You can then convert the DGD value into the OSNR penalty by using the following formulas:
and
ROADM Penalty
Each WSS component at an ROADM station generates a certain OSNR penalty in 40G signals. In a regenerator section, the number of WSS components at the ROADM stations that 40G signals traverse corresponds to an OSNR penalty. This type of OSNR penalty is called the ROADM penalty. For the association between the number of the WSS components and the OSNR penalty, see Table 7-23. Table 7-23 OSNR penalty Num ber of WSS Com pone nts That 40G Signa ls Trave rse Extra Trans missio n Penalt y 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0.1
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
7.4.8 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation

This section describes how to adjust dispersion compensation.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The commissioning for the optical power for a 40G link must be complete.

U2000
When the optical power commissioning is complete, a 40G board generally starts the automatic dispersion search. If the automatic dispersion search is not started, manually start it for a 40G board on the U2000.
NOTE
The turnable dispersion compensator module (TDCM) may report an OTU_LOF alarm or bit errors in the process of the automatic dispersion search. This, however, does not indicate an exception.
Procedure
Step 1 On the U2000, check the current Dispersion Compensation Value of a 40G board. In addition, determine whether the current dispersion compensation value is correct based on the following principles. l If the value is inside the range of -200 to +200, the dispersion compensation is proper. l If the value is outside the range of -200 to +200 but is inside the range of -300 to +300, attention is required. The project manager should provide feedback to the network design personnel. l If the value is outside the range of -300 to +300, immediately provide feedback to the project manager and ask the network design personnel to optimize the design for the dispersion compensation module (DCM) for the network. 1. 2. 3. 4. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE is displayed. Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the required LSXL board, and choose Configuration > Dispersion Compensation Management from the Function Tree on the left side of the window. Optional: Select the IN/OUT port row under Port, and click Start Search.
CAUTION
Searching for dispersion configurations interrupts service. 5. 6. Click Query to obtain the current Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm). Set Fine Tune Switch to Enabled.
----End
7.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/ s Single-Wavelength System

This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40Gbit/s (hereinafter referred to as 40G) OTM and OLA, stations on site.

The commissioning of the 40G system has higher requirements when compared with the commissioning requirements for a low-rate service line. In this example, the system to be commissioned is a long-haul 40G link.
Networking Diagram
Figure 7-16 shows the network topology of Project H. In a chain network, optical network elements (ONEs) A, B, C, and D are the stations installed with the WDM equipment. ONE A and ONE D are configured as OTM stations. ONE B and ONE C are two OLA stations. There are several OLA stations between ONE B and ONE C. 10-channel 40G services are transmitted between ONEs A and D. Figure 7-16 shows the span loss and distance between NEs. The G.652 fiber is used as the line optical fiber. Figure 7-16 Service requirement matrix in project H
A 80 km/22dB B OLA C 76 km/20.9dB D
OTM
OLA

Figure 7-17 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of project H.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
301
Figure 7-17 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project H

A LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL 192.10THz 192.20THz 192.30THz 192.40THz 192.50THz 192.60THz 192.70THz 192.80THz 192.90THz 196.00THz STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 STM-256 LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL LSXL D 192.10THz 192.20THz 192.30THz 192.40THz 192.50THz 192.60THz 192.70THz 192.80THz 192.90THz 196.00THz
Optical Amplifier Configuration Diagram

Figure 7-18 shows the configuration of an optical amplifier at each station in project H. Figure 7-18 Optical amplifier configuration diagram of project H
A B DCM OBU from 103 M40 OAU 103 DCM 80 km 22dB OAU 103 OLA OAU 103 DCM OAU 103 DCM 76 km 20.9dB OBU 103 from M40 C DCM OAU 103 D DCM OAU 103 to D40
to D40
NOTE
In the case of the 40G ODB and DQPSK code patterns, an ITL board integrating two interleavers must be used in an 80-channel system for wavelength filtering.
NE Board Configuration
NOTE
The type of OAU1 is OAU103, and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.
Figure 7-19 shows the board configurations for ONE A and ONE D. The board configurations for ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other OLAs, as shown in Figure 7-21.
Figure 7-20 shows the board configurations for ONE A and ONE D. The board configurations for ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other OLAs, as shown in Figure 7-22. Figure 7-19 Board configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)
PDU
PDU
L F S I X U L
L S X L
L S X L
F M I 4 U 0
O D M B 4 R U 0 2 1
L S X L
L S X L
L F S I X U L
L S X L
O O F A B M I U U C U 1 1 A
S C 1
L F S I X U L
L S X L
L S X L
DCM
DCM
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
303
Figure 7-20 Board configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)
PDU
PIU
PIU
A U X
PIU
PIU
O O B A U U 1 1 X X CC HH M C A L S X L L S X L
S C C
S C C
M 4 0
D 4 0
S F C I 1 U
PIU
PIU
A U X
PIU
PIU
L S X L
L S X L X X CC HH
S C C
L S X L
L S X L
L S X L
L S X L
S C C
L S X L
L S X L
NOTE
The TN11LSXL occupies four slots.

NOTE
The TN12LSXL occupies three slots.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
304
Figure 7-21 Board configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)
PDU
O O F F A A I I U U U U 1 1
S C 2
DCM
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
305
Figure 7-22 Board configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)
PDU
PIU
PIU
A U X
PIU
PIU
O A U 1
O A U 1 X X CC HH
S C C
F F S I I C UU 2
S C C
Commissioning Procedures
Table 7-24 Commissioning stations reference list Station A B, C D Commissioning Method and Fiber Connection Diagram Refer to 7.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station Refer to 7.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station Refer to 7.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
For the commissioning method for each station in project H and the fiber connection diagram of each station, see Table 7-24. The commissioning is performed in two directions: Direction 1: ABCD Direction 2: DCBA Because the commissioning for the two directions are performed similarly, only the commissioning for direction 1 is described in this document.
CAUTION
Before the equipment is connected to the line fiber at each station, you must complete the following operations: l l l Test the span loss to ensure the value is in accordance with the requirement of the engineering design. Test the transmission distance of the line signals to ensure the value is in accordance with the requirement of the engineering design. Check the type of the line fiber to ensure the value is in accordance with the requirement of the engineering design.
If any one of the preceding operation is not performed, the system commissioning will be affected. In this case, provide feedback to the appropriate personnel who are in charge of that particular issue.
NOTE
The fibers between the FIU and ODF subrack, the fibers between the LSXL and client equipment, and the fibers between cabinets are all external fibers that should be routed on site.
7.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station

This section uses direction 1 as an example to describe how to commission the optical power at the transmit end of the OTM. The objective of commissioning is to ensure that the total transmit optical power meets the specification requirements and that the optical power flatness for every wavelength is achieved.
Prerequisite

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Fiber adapter, Fixed optical attenuator, VOA, U2000
In this example, the hardware specifications are as follows: l l In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added. The type of OAU1 is OAU103 and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.
NOTE
When the 40G ODB system is used, a dual-module ITL board must be configured at the transmit and receive ends. If certain OADM stations add/drop ODB wavelengths (wavelengths with 100 GHz channel spacing), a dual-module ITL board must also be used at the transmit and receive ends. For the ROADM stations with 50 GHz channel spacing, no ITL board is required because the 50 GHz WSS module provides the 50 GHz filter function.

Figure 7-23 Fiber connections at OTM station A
Station A
Rx M31
LSXL LSXL
M32
M OBU1 4 OUT RC 0 OUT IN

M40
OUT
To B
LSXL SC1
Tx D31 TM RM RM F
I
TM U
LSXL LSXL
D32
D 4 0
OAU1
From B
LSXL
D40
Variable optical attenuator
ODF
Procedure
Step 1 Check if the fiber connections between boards are correct based on the fiber connection diagram. Check if the fiber on each board is properly connected. If not, correct the error immediately. Step 2 Access real service signals on the client sides of all OTU boards. Step 3 Obtain the information on the optical module of the OTU by referring to the bar code on the front panel or the board manufacturing information. Step 4 Ask the customer equipment engineer to provide the transmitting optical power and the optical module equipment type. Compare the optical power with the receiving optical power on the client side of the OTU to determine if the fixed attenuator should be replaced. Record the receiving optical power on the client side of the OTU.
For project H, the receiving optical power for the client-side OTU (the input optical power of the client-side LSXL ports) must be within the range: l TN11LSXL: from 0 dBm to +3 dBm. l TN12LSXL: from -1 dBm to +1 dBm. Step 5 Check whether the WDM-side OUT ports on all OTUs emit light. If the OUT ports do not emit light, l check whether the accessed SDH/SONET services are normal or not. If the services are abnormal, clear the fault.
Step 6 Test the output optical power of the OUT port on the OTU. For the LSXL, the value must be within the range from -5 dBm to 0 dBm. The normal value is 3 dBm. Step 7 Test the receiving optical power of the Mn port for the M40 and record the value.
NOTE
Mn refers to the M31M40 ports that are used in this example. If the difference between the optical power and the optical power for the OUT port on the OTU is greater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fiber.
Step 8 Pre-adjust the attenuation of the Variable optical attenuator attached to the M40 to +3 dB to facilitate the fine-tuning of the attenuation in the subsequent steps. Step 9 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical port on the M40 by using a fiber jumper. Scan the M40 to output multiplexed signals and record the optical power for every wavelength and the multiplexed optical power. Then calculate the wavelength insertion loss for the M40 to check whether the wavelength insertion loss of the M40 meets the specification requirements.
NOTE
When calculating the wavelength insertion loss of the M40, note that the attenuation of the M40 is preadjusted to +3 dB. If the detected output optical power is abnormal, check whether the optical ports M31M40 are properly connected.
Step 10 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN optical port on the OBU1 to an optical power meter. Adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuator attached to the IN optical port on the OBU1 to ensure that the total input optical power of the OBU1 is near 9 dBm.
NOTE
According to the commissioning rules, commission the total input optical power of the signals to ensure that the total optical power meets the specification requirements. Then, ensure the optical power flatness for every wavelength so that the single-wavelength optical power meets the standards. The total input optical power is calculated based on the nominal single-wavelength optical power. The calculation formula is as follows: Total input optical power = Nominal single-wavelength input optical power + 10logN (N equals 10). If the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is -19dBm, the input total optical power is -9 dBm.
Step 11 Test the output optical power at the OUT optical port on the OBU1, and ensure that the total output optical power of the multiplexed wavelengths reaches near +14 dBm.
NOTE
The fixed gain of the TN11OBU103 is 23 dB. In the case, the input optical power of the IN port on the OBU1 is -9dBm, so the output optical power of the OUT port is +14dBm.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
309

NOTE
The nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the G.655 fiber is +4 dBm, and the maximum singlewavelength input optical power should be not more than +5.5 dBm. Obtain the total output optical power by using the following formula: Total output optical power = Singlewavelength output optical power + 10logN (N equals 10).
Step 12 Connect the OUT optical port on the OBU1 to the optical spectrum analyzer to query the optical power for every wavelength. Adjust the wavelength attenuation of the Variable optical attenuator attached to the M40 so that the output optical power flatness is about 0.5 dB. Step 13 Use an optical power meter to test the optical power at the RC port of the FIU board and record the test result.
NOTE
If the difference between the optical power at the RC port and the optical power at the OUT port on the OBU1 is greater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fibers.
Step 14 Test the optical power for the OUT port on the FIU (when disconnecting the fiber from the RM port), and determine the RC-OUT insertion loss. The RC-OUT insertion loss on the FIU = Input optical power of the RC on the FIU Optical power of the OUT on the FIU Step 15 Test the output optical power for the TM port on the SC1 with an optical power meter, and then test the input optical power for the RM port on the FIU. If the difference between the two values is more than 1 dB, check the routing and the cleanliness of the optical fibers. Step 16 Test the output optical power for the OUT port on the FIU with an optical power meter (when disconnecting the fiber from the RC port). Calculate the insertion loss from RM to OUT port for the FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB. ----End
7.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station

For the OLA station, you need to commission only the total optical power in terms of the optical power commissioning.
Prerequisite

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Signal analyzer, Fiber adapter, Fixed optical attenuator, VOA, U2000
In this example, the hardware specifications are as follows: l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added.

The type of OAU1 is OAU103.

Figure 7-24 Fiber connections of OLA station B
Station B
DCM
TDC RDC
TC IN
IN
OAU1
OUT
RC OUT
From A West
F TM I U RM
RM1
SC2
TM1
TM2 RM2
RM
F I TM U
To C East
RC OUT
OUT
RDC
OAU1
TDC
IN
TC IN
DCM
ODF
Procedure
Step 1 Test the optical power for the IN port on the west FIU with an optical power meter. Compare the value with the optical power for the OUT port on the east FIU of station A to calculate the line attenuation between station A and station B on the line side. If the actual line attenuation is larger than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determine whether the cable attenuation is excessively high or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are faulty, clear the fault immediately. Step 2 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power for the TM port on the west FIU at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values in the commissioning record. Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TM port for the west FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB. Step 4 Test the input optical power of the RM1 port by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Add a proper attenuator to make the input power less than 3 dB. Step 5 Test the output optical power for the TM2 port of the SC2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the input optical power for the RM1 port and the output optical power for the TM2 port in the commissioning record. Step 6 Test the input optical power for the RM port and the output optical power for the OUT port on the east FIU at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values in the commissioning record.
Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB. Step 8 Test the input optical power for the IN port and the output optical power for the TC port on the west FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values in the commissioning record. Step 9 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TC port on the west FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.0 dB. Step 10 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN optical port on the west OAU1 to an optical power meter. Adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuator attached to the IN optical port on the OAU1 to ensure that the total input optical power for the OAU1 is about 10 dBm.
NOTE
According to the commissioning rules, commission the total input optical power of the signals to ensure that the total input optical power meets the specification requirement. Then ensure the optical power flatness for every wavelength so that the single-wavelength optical power meets the specification requirements. The total input optical power is calculated based on the nominal single-wavelength optical power. The calculation formula is as follows: Total input optical power = Nominal single-wavelength input optical power + 10logN (N equals 10). If the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is -20 dBm, the input total optical power is -10 dBm.
Step 11 Query the output optical power at the OUT optical port on the west OAU1. Then adjust the gain of the OAU1 on the U2000 to ensure that the total output optical power for the multiplexed wavelengths reaches near +14 dBm.
NOTE
The nominal single-wavelength input optical power for the G.655 fiber is +4 dBm, and the maximum singlewavelength input optical power should be not exceed +5.5 dBm. The total output optical power for the multiplexed wavelengths can be obtained by using the following formula: Total output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power + 10logN (N equals 10).
Step 12 Test the input and output optical power for the DCM and calculate the DCM insertion loss. DCM insertion loss = DCM input optical power DCM output optical power Step 13 Use an optical power meter to test the optical power for the RC port on the FIU and record the value.
NOTE
If the difference between the optical power and the optical power for the OUT port on the OAU is greater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fiber.
Step 14 Test the optical power for the OUT port on the east FIU (when disconnecting the fiber to the RM port) and calculate the RC-OUT insertion loss. The RC-OUT insertion loss on the FIU = Input optical power of the RC on the FIU Optical power of the OUT on the FIU ----End
7.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station

The commissioning rule for the OTM station is to "commission the optical power at the transmit end based on the optical power at the receive end". At the receive end of the OTM station, you need to commission only the total input optical power. Then adjust the attenuation for every
wavelength of the M40 at the transmit end according to the optical power flatness at the receive end.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. The fiber connections must be established properly. All channels must have service signals, or the laser on each channel emits light forcibly to ensure that the OTU emits light normally.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, fiber jumper, flange, fixed optical attenuator, VOA, U2000
In this example, the hardware specifications are as follows: l l In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added. The OAU1 type is OAU103. The OBU1 type is OBU103.

Figure 7-25 Fiber connections of OTM station D
Station D
TDC RDC DCM D31
LSXL
D32
Tx
From C
IN TC
OAU1 OUT
D 4 IN 0
LSXL
D40
LSXL F TM I U RM
OUT RM1
SC1
TM1 M31
LSXL
Rx
To C
OUT RC
OBU1
OUT IN
M 4 0
M32
LSXL
M40
LSXL
ODF
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
313
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the fiber connections between boards are properly established and whether the fibers on each board are tightly inserted. Immediately correct any issues found. Step 2 Measure the optical power of the FIU and the SC1 by referring to 7.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station. Step 3 Commission the optical power of the OAU1 by referring to 7.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station. Step 4 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN port on the D40 to an optical spectrum analyzer. Scan the multiplexed signal and record the optical power for each wavelength. Step 5 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the west D40 by using a fiber jumper. Scan the multiplexed signal of the D40, and record the input optical power for each wavelength. Step 6 Measure the single-wavelength optical power at the Dn port on the D40 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the D40. The insertion loss must be lower than 6.5 dB, and the maximum insertion loss variance between wavelengths of the D40 must be smaller than 2.0 dB. Step 8 Measure the input and output optical power of the DCM and then calculate the insertion loss for the DCM based on the following formula: Insertion loss of the DCM = Input optical power of the DCM Output optical power of the DCM. Step 9 Measure the optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU. Check whether the optical power at the IN port on the OTU is within the standard range.
NOTE
The input optical power on the WDM side of the LSXL board must be within the range of -11 dBm to -4 dBm. If the measured optical power does not meet the specification requirements, you need to add a proper fixed optical attenuator, or replace/remove the existing fixed optical attenuator according to the measured optical power, so that the receive optical power of the OTU is within the normal range.
Step 10 Securely insert the optical fiber into the IN port on the OTU after the input optical power meets the specification requirements. Step 11 Measure the output optical power on the client side of the OTU and the optical power on the ODF side. Compare the two values to check whether the fiber jumper on the client side is properly connected. The fiber attenuation must be lower than 1 dB. Step 12 On the U2000, query the input and output optical power of each OTU. The variance between the optical power displayed on the U2000 and the measured optical power must be smaller than 2.0 dB. The system OSNR flatness must be near 1 dB after the commissioning. That is, the OSNR measured by the optical spectrum analyzer must meet the specification requirements and the OSNR for every wavelength is flat when the equalizing optical power for every wavelength is normal. In addition, check whether the bit error rate conforms to the expected value. Step 13 If the connected client equipment is new, perform the 24hour BER test on the client equipment. If the client equipment is not connected or not being used currently, configure a loopback between the TX and RX ports on the client side for every OTU at station C. In this case, a fixed optical attenuator needs to be installed between the two ports.

NOTE
7.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station, 7.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station, and 7.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station contain the process for commissioning an optical multiplex section. The commissioning for the multiplex sections at OTM and OLA stations is similar.
----End
7.5.5 Commissioning Optical Power for Equalization

This section describes how to commission the optical power for equalization.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. The fiber connections must be correct. All channels must carry services or must be forced to emit light, which makes the OTU emit light normally.

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Fiber adapter, Fixed optical attenuator, VOA, U2000
In this example, the hardware specifications are as follows: l l l The G.655 fiber is used as the line optical fiber. In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added. The type of OAU1 is TN11OAU103 and the type of OBU1 is TN11OBU103.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the MON port on an OA at an OLA station to an optical spectrum analyzer to scan the multiplexed signals. Then record the optical power for each wavelength. Step 2 Adjust the optical power for each add wavelength by changing the attenuation of the VOA on each add channel to ensure that the optical power is flat. That is, ensure that the optical power for one wavelength differs from that of another wavelength at an intermediate station by less than 2 dB. Step 3 Optional: When the link commissioning is complete, if the performance for a specific wavelength is poor, improve the performance for this wavelength by changing its optical power. In addition, make the opposite change to the optical power of the wavelength that has the best performance to ensure that the total optical power remains unchanged. The changed optical power cannot exceed 2 dB.
NOTE
When changing the optical power for the wavelength, increase or decrease the optical power. Increasing the optical power or decreasing the optical power can improve the wavelength performance.
----End
7.5.6 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation

This section describes how to adjust dispersion compensation.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The commissioning for the optical power for a 40G link must be complete.

U2000
When the optical power commissioning is complete, a 40G board generally starts the automatic dispersion search. If the automatic dispersion search is not started, manually start it for a 40G board on the U2000.
NOTE
The turnable dispersion compensator module (TDCM) may report an OTU_LOF alarm or bit errors in the process of the automatic dispersion search. This, however, does not indicate an exception.
Procedure
Step 1 On the U2000, check the current Dispersion Compensation Value of a 40G board. In addition, determine whether the current dispersion compensation value is correct based on the following principles. l If the value is inside the range of -200 to +200, the dispersion compensation is proper. l If the value is outside the range of -200 to +200 but is inside the range of -300 to +300, attention is required. The project manager should provide feedback to the network design personnel. l If the value is outside the range of -300 to +300, immediately provide feedback to the project manager and ask the network design personnel to optimize the design for the dispersion compensation module (DCM) for the network. 1. 2. 3. 4. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE is displayed. Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the required LSXL board, and choose Configuration > Dispersion Compensation Management from the Function Tree on the left side of the window. Optional: Select the IN/OUT port row under Port, and click Start Search.
CAUTION
Searching for dispersion configurations interrupts service. 5.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Click Query to obtain the current Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm).

6.
Set Fine Tune Switch to Enabled.
----End
7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G System

This chapter describes the methods for analyzing and handling the common problems that may happen in the process of commissioning a 40G system. You need to analyze and handle the problems according to actual situations.
7.6.1 OSNR Failure

This section describes how to resolve the problem with the OSNR that are not up to the design value in the deployment commissioning phase.
Context
The integral method must be used to test the OSNR of a system to check whether the OSNR is up to the network design value. If the input and output optical power and gain for each OA on the network are the same as the network design values but the OSNR is not, inform the project manager to provide this feedback to the network design engineers.
NOTE
Do not increase the optical power at the transmit end to increase the system OSNR. If you increase the transmit optical power, the attendant nonlinear effects cause a sharp degrade in the performance of the system. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether the system OSNR fails.
7.6.2 Excessively High Incident Optical Power

This section describes how to resolve the problem of excessively high incident optical power in the deployment commissioning phase.
Context
A 40G system is sensitive to nonlinear effects. In general, a 40G system requires that the incident optical power should be lower than 4 dBm. If the incident optical power is higher than 4 dBm, nonlinear effects are caused and transmission performance degrade occurs. In the fault identification process, check the output optical power of each OA on the line to ensure that the actual output optical power of each OA deviates from the nominal output optical power by at most 1.5 dB.
7.6.3 Incorrect Dispersion Configuration

This section describes how to resolve the problem of incorrect dispersion configuration in the deployment commissioning phase.
Context
Regardless of whether the system is a 40G or 10G, the methods for handling a dispersion problem are similar. To resolve a dispersion problem, add a fiber or DCM at the receive end to change the system dispersion (note that the optical power of the OTU boards and the OA boards in the
system must remain unchanged after you change the dispersion), and use the TDCM integrated in an 40G OTU board to automatically search for the optimal dispersion compensation value (if possible, fine-tune the dispersion compensation). Ensure that the system OSNR and optical power are normal. If the TDCM fails to automatically search for the optimal dispersion compensation value, you need to adjust the DCM configurations by referring to the dispersion configuration rules.
NOTE
The TDCM integrated in a 40G OTU board has a requirement on a wavelength carrying the receive optical signals. If this wavelength fails to match the TDCM, the dispersion adjustment fails. Therefore, the wavelengths for the two interconnected 40G OTU boards must be the same.
7.6.4 Methods for Handling Other Faults

This section describes how to handle other faults in the deployment commissioning phase.
Context
l The performance of certain 40G channels degrades after the commissioning. Possible cause: The TDCM integrated in the relevant 40G boards fails to adjust the dispersion compensation to the optimal value. Solution: Refer to the TDCM value of the channel that has good performance and shares the same source and sink as the channel being commissioned. Then adjust the TDCM value for a channel with poor performance until the channel performance reaches the optimal value. l All the 40G channels on a route cannot be set up, or the performance of all these channels is poor after the commissioning. Possible cause 1: After the design, the fiber route or length on this link is changed. A 40G system has a high requirement on dispersion compensation deviation. After the fiber route or length is changed, the existing DCM does not match the changed fiber length. As a result, the 40G channels on this link cannot be set up or the performance of these 40G channels is poor. Solution 1: If a fiber on a link is changed (for example, fiber length, attenuation, and PMD), the changed parameter values must be provided to design engineers for evaluation so that the design engineers can determine whether to adjust the design. Possible cause 2: The relevant DCMs are connected incorrectly or the relevant dispersion configurations are incorrect. Solution 2: Focus on the dispersion configurations on the network.
NOTE
Compared with a 10G board, a 40G board has a higher rate and thus can tolerate a narrower range of dispersion. l For ODB and eDQPSK optical modules, the compensation for chromatic dispersion on a line must be accurate to 5.0 km. In a G.652 fiber network, a 10 km or 5 km DCM must be used to ensure this compensation accuracy.
All 40G channels on a route cannot be set up or the performance of these channels is poor after the commissioning. In addition, this problem exists in both directions of this route. Possible cause: The DCMs on the link are connected incorrectly, especially the DCMs that are used for under-compensation or over-compensation.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
318
Solution: Check the input and output optical power for a DCM on the U2000 . Then calculate the attenuation of the DCM, or check the fiber connections for a station at the site to determine whether the DCM at this station is incorrectly connected. l The OSNR for a 40G channel is lower than the design value after the commissioning. (The OSNR for the 40G channel is obtained by using the integral method.) Possible cause: The commissioning is not performed by using a normal method, or the actual attenuation of a span on the link exceeds the design attenuation value. Solution: Recommission this link. If the actual attenuation of a span on the link exceeds the design attenuation value, adjust the fibers on this span.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
319
8 Automatic Commissioning
8
About This Chapter
Automatic Commissioning
This section describes the scenarios where the WDM optical power commissioning tool is used to automatically commission optical power of sites and the preparations and procedure for the commissioning. The WDM optical power commissioning tool is mainly used to commission optical power of a new WDM network or a live WDM network under expansion. This tool supports remote and automatic commissioning of optical power of WDM equipment. 8.1 Version Mapping This topic describes the version mapping between the WDM equipment, and U2000. 8.2 Network Models and Application Scenarios This section describes the network models and topologies that the WDM optical power commissioning tool supports. 8.3 Precautions for Commissioning This topic describes the precautions for WDM commissioning. 8.4 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of a New Network When the entire WDM network is new, and no active service is running on the WDM network, you can commission the optical power of the WDM equipment according to the commissioning process described in this topic. The aim of commissioning the optical power is to optimize network performance and ensure that a certain margin of system optical power is reserved under the condition that expansion is not affected, hence ensuring long-term and stable running of the system. 8.5 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of an Expanded Network When the capacity of an existing network is insufficient, you need to expand the network capacity (by expanding wavelengths) according to the service plan. On the expanded network, optical power commissioning commissions only the optical power of wavelengths without services. During the wavelength expansion, only the single-wavelength optical power of the links on which the specified wavelengths are located is commissioned. You need to set the wavelengths to be commissioned on the U2000 client. 8.6 Optical Power Commissioning Report The U2000 supports various types of reports, helping you to commission the optical power of WDM equipment. 8.7 Managing the Commissioning Index Data
The commissioning index data includes the index data of optical amplifier (OA) boards, the insertion loss index data of components, and code patterns of optical modules. Users can view, add, and delete this data, but cannot modify it. 8.8 Viewing Information About Subnets Under Commissioning The U2000 server allows a maximum of five users to commission different subnets at the same time. However, it does not allow multiple users to commission the same subnet at the same time. If multiple users commission the same subnet at the same time, conflicting operations may occur. Conflicting operations can be prevented by properly dividing a network into different subnets and ensuring that users commission different subnets at the same time. 8.9 Synchronizing Data on the NMS WDM commissioning will be affected if it is not synchronized with NMS data. For example, the system may display a message during link generation, indicating that the OTU board does not have wavelength information. In this case, synchronize the NMS data to be consistent with the WDM commissioning data. 8.10 FAQ This topic describes methods of handling common problems about optical power commissioning.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
321
8.1 Version Mapping

This topic describes the version mapping between the WDM equipment, and U2000.
Matched WDM Equipment Version

Table 8-1, lists the versions of the WDM equipment that supports automatic optical power commissioning and quality evaluation. Table 8-1 Version mapping between the U2000 and WDM equipment WDM Equipment Version OptiX OSN 8800 V100R006C01 OptiX OSN 6800 V100R006C01 OptiX OSN 3800 V100R006C01 V100R005C00 U2000 Version
8.2 Network Models and Application Scenarios

This section describes the network models and topologies that the WDM optical power commissioning tool supports.
Principles for Configuring Optical Spectrum Analyzer Boards

l In automatic deployment, multi-channel spectrum analyzer (MCA) or OPM8 boards are required and must be connected to the MON port of the optical amplifier (OA) board that is connected to the FIU.
NOTE
OPM8 boards are recommended.
If the number of transmission spans between two optical power equalization stations is greater than four, configure MCA or OPM8 boards at the position determined by the formula (Number of transmission spans/2 0.5), and configure MCA or OPM8 boards at the transmit and received ends as required. If the number of transmission spans between two optical power equalization stations is equal to or smaller than four, configure an MCA or OPM8 on the transmit end.
This tool supports commissioning of only the sites described in this section. In addition, this tool cannot be used to implement automatic commissioning if a live network does not use a topology described in this section; instead users need to manually commission the network.
Precautions
NOTE
This section describes how to commission sites OTM, OLA, OADM, and ROADM in a 40-channel system with examples. The WDM optical power commissioning tool also supports automatic commissioning of these sites in an 80-channel system.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
322
Network Models
l Chain network:
OTM A 1
OLA B 2
ROADM C 3
OLA D 4
FOADM E 5
OLA F 6
OTM G 7
: OTM l Ring network:

19 11 9 1 A
: OLA
: OADM
18
17
10 2 MCA 3 C
12
MCA
MCA
16
G 7 13
MCA 6 14
E 5 15
: OLA l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
: OADM
Mesh network:
19
18
17
11
10
1 30 A
2 32 MCA C
20
29 MCA
31 12 8 MCA H
21
28 D I 27 MCA MCA 26
16
22 F G MCA 25 7 6
23 E
24 5
13
14
15
: OLA
: OADM
Availability
Table 8-2 lists the board types supported in the following application scenarios. Table 8-2 Board types Multiplexe r Demultipl exer OA Static Optical Add/Drop Multiplexe r (MRx Series) MR2, MR4, MR8, MR8V MCA VOA
M40, M40V
D40, D40V
OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA
MCA4, MCA8, OPM8
VA1, VA4
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
324

NOTE
This tool supports automatic commissioning of the above-mentioned sites in the figures regardless of whether the electrical variable optical attenuator (EVOA), multi-channel spectrum analyzer (MCA), or optical amplifier (OA) in an area enclosed with red dotted lines is configured.
Application Scenarios of OTM

l Typical OTM
OTU OTU M U X MCA
OA
OTU F I U OTU OTU D M U X
OA
OTU
Back-to-back OTM
OA
D M U X
OTU OTU OTU
OTU OTU OTU
M U X
MCA
OA
F I U OTU OTU OA M U X OTU OTU OTU OTU D M U X
F I U
OA
OTM using Raman amplifiers
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
325

MCA M U X
OA
OTU OTU
OTU F I U OTU OTU D M U X C R P C
OA
OTU
Application Scenarios of OLA

l OLA using only a single OA on a link
MCA
OA
F I U
F I U
OA
OLA using cascaded OAs

MCA
OA
OA
F I U
F I U
OA
OA
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
326
OLA using a Raman amplifier

MCA C R P C F I U
OA
F I U
OA
Application Scenarios of OADM

l OADM using cascaded MR2 boards (1)
MCA
OA OA
F I U OA
MRx
MRx OA
F I U
O T U
O T U
OADM using cascaded MR2 boards (2)

MCA C R P C
OA
OA
F I U OA
MRx
MRx OA
F I U
O T U
O T U
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
327
MCA OA F I U OA MR2 MR2 MR2 MR2 OA OA F I U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U

MCA
OA
RO TO
F I U OA
I T L
TO
OA
RO
RE TE
TE
M R x
M R x
I T L OA
F I U
RE
O T U
O T U
Application Scenarios of ROADM

l ROADM using WSD9+WSM9 boards (1)
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
328

DMUX
MUX
OA
OA MCA
F I U
OA
WSD9
WSM9
OA
F I U
OA
WSM9
WSD9
OA
OA
OA
MUX O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U
DMUX O T U O T U
ROADM using WSD9+WSM9 boards (2)
F I U
OA
W S D 9
W S M 9
MCA OA
F I U
OA
W S M 9
W S D 9
OA
WSM9
WSD9
OA
OA
FIU
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
329
ROADM using WSD9+RMU9 boards (1)

MUX DMUX
OA MCA F I U
TOA ROA
OA
WSD9
RMU9
OA
F I U
OA
ROA TOA
RMU9
WSD9
OA
OA
DMUX O T U O T U
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
330

MUX DMUX
OA
F I U
TOA
MCA OA
OA
WSD9
RMU9
ROA
F I U
OA
ROA TOA
RMU9
WSD9
OA
OA MUX O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U DMUX O T U O T U

MRx
MRx OA
F I U
TOA
MCA OA
OA
WSD9
RMU9
ROA
F I U
OA
ROA TOA
RMU9
WSD9
OA
OA MRx MRx O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U
O T U
O T U
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
331
ROADM using RDU9+WSM9 boards

O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U O T U
DMUX
MUX
OA MCA F I U OA RDU9 WSM9 OA F I U
OA
WSM9
RDU9
OA
OA
DMUX
ROADM using cascaded WSMDx boards

O T U O T U
MCA
F I U
OA WSMDx OA WSMDx
OA
F I U
OA
OA
OA
OA
OA
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
O T U
O T U
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
332

NOTE
WSMDx boards are classified into WSMD4 and WSMD2 boards. If the WSMD2 board is used, an OTU board must be connected to a multiplexer board so that the OTU board can add/drop a wavelength and the demuliplexer board must be connected to the WSMD2 board.
ROADM using cascaded ROAM boards

O T U O T U
MCA
F I U
OA ROAM OA ROAM
OA
F I U
OA
OA
OA
OA
OA
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
O T U
O T U
Application Scenario of PID

l ROADM using PID boards
P T Q X P T Q X MCA F I U OA WSD9 WSM9 OA F I U
OA
WSM9
WSD9
OA
P T Q X
P T Q X
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
333
Application Scenario of OLP

l Optical line protection (1)
TO1 TO2 RI1 RI2
F I U
O L P RI1 RI2 TO1 TO2
O L P
F I U
Optical line protection (2)
M 4 0 V
OA
F I U
F I U
OA
D 4 0
OA O L P
OA
OA O L P F I U F I U
OA
D 4 0
OA
OA
M 4 0 V
Optical line protection (3)
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
334

OTU OTU M 4 0 V
OA
OTU O L P OTU OTU D 4 0 OA
F I U
F I U
OTU
8.3 Precautions for Commissioning

This topic describes the precautions for WDM commissioning. l Optical NEs are classified by function. Ensure that an optical NE is configured with essential boards. For example, an OTM optical NE must be configured with OTU boards and MUX/DEMUX boards. Configuring the OTU and MUX/DEMUX boards separately between separate NEs is not permitted. The U2000 does not support concurrent commissioning on one subnet. For more information, see Viewing Information About Subnets Under Commissioning. The U2000 allows a maximum of five users to commission different subnets at the same time. Subnets selected for expansion commissioning must contain the entire links or wavelengths to be commissioned; otherwise, the result of optical power commissioning is not accurate. Protection groups must be completely configured for to-be-commissioned networks in optical power commissioning. The U2000 commissions optical NEs. Do not add NEs to the Main Topology directly. The network must adopt the OSC not ESC communication mode. For networks supporting both OSC and ESC, manually disable the ESC for new wavelengths on the U2000 to ensure the normal communication during commissioning. After commissioning, manually enable the ESC on the U2000. Ports or channels in the maintenance state on a WDM NE (NA) cannot be commissioned. Prior to commissioning, ensure that the following conditions are met: After importing scripts into the U2000, synchronize NE data on the U2000 to ensure data consistency between the U2000 and NEs. Then, synchronize commissioning data before the commissioning by referring to 8.9 Synchronizing Data on the NMS. NE data is consistent with the data on the U2000. Otherwise, upload the NE data. OCh trails have been created or searched out. Fiber types have been correctly set.
l l l l
l l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
335
8.4 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of a New Network

When the entire WDM network is new, and no active service is running on the WDM network, you can commission the optical power of the WDM equipment according to the commissioning process described in this topic. The aim of commissioning the optical power is to optimize network performance and ensure that a certain margin of system optical power is reserved under the condition that expansion is not affected, hence ensuring long-term and stable running of the system.
8.4.1 Preparing for the Commissioning

Before commissioning the optical power of a newly-deployed network, you need to make preparations for the commissioning. The preparations include preparing related documents, checking the conditions of WDM equipment to be commissioned, preparing the data configuration files for the WDM NEs, and evaluating whether the network scenarios of the network to be commissioned support optical power commissioning.
Evaluating the Network Scenarios of the Network to Be Commissioned

There are certain restrictions on the sites and network modes for automatic optical power commissioning. Before commissioning the optical power of a newly-deployed network, evaluate whether the network scenarios of the WDM network to be commissioned meet the commissioning requirements. For details about the network scenarios, see Network Models and Application Scenarios.
Preparing Documents
The documents that you need to prepare are mainly engineering documents. If there are no engineering documents at some offices, obtain relevant information from the telecommunications design documents and contract. The contents of engineering documents include: l l l Network diagram: Used to set the NE ID, IP address, and other parameters before you commission optical power. Network configuration diagram: Used to check and confirm the network topology after WDM links are generated. Wavelength distribution diagram: Used to obtain information about channels contained in WDM links when the wavelengths that have the same source and sink are in the same WDM link. Cabinet panel diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000. Fiber connection diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000.
l l
Checking the Commissioning Conditions of WDM Equipment

Before commissioning the optical power of WDM equipment, check whether the following conditions are met: l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
The WDM equipment version meets the requirementVersion Mapping.

The equipment is installed properly and has passed the hardware installation check. The expected results are as follows: The optical distribution frame (ODF) of each site is installed correctly. Line fibers are connected correctly through the ODF. A fiber is connected to the dispersion compensation module (DCM) and the DCM fiber connection is checked. The WDM equipment is powered on and ECC communication is proper. 15-min performance events are enabled for the WDM equipment. The optical port on the OTU board is enabled at the transmit end of the WDM equipment.
NOTE
You need to check the installation quality of the preceding hardware before commissioning the optical power. For the check standards of other hardware, see the relevant equipment manual.
8.4.2 Commissioning Process

This topic describes the process of commissioning the optical power of WDM equipment by using the U2000 during the deployment of a new network. Figure 8-1 shows the flowchart for commissioning optical power by using the U2000. Figure 8-1 Flowchart for commissioning the optical power of a new network
Start
Synchronizing Data on the NMS Uploading Commissioning Data Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters
Creating a WDM Link
Commissioning Optical Power
Viewing the Commissioning Result
End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
337

NOTE
Perform the following steps in turn on the entire network after the WDM commissioning component has been installed or deployed: l 8.9 Synchronizing Data on the NMS l 8.4.3 Uploading Commissioning Data l 8.4.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters l 8.4.5 Creating a WDM Link
8.4.3 Uploading Commissioning Data

Before commissioning the optical power of a WDM subnet, you need to upload the commissioning data. The commissioning data includes code pattern of OTU boards and types of optical amplifier boards.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user at the network operator or above level.
Context
A subnet can include other subnets and optical NEs. l l If all subnets included in a subnet are selected, commissioning data of subnets and optical NEs will be uploaded to the U2000. If some subnets included in the subnet are selected, only commissioning data of the selected subnets is uploaded to the U2000. Commissioning data of optical NEs is not uploaded to the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Parameter Configuration from the main menu. Step 2 Click the Upload Commissioning Data tab. Step 3 Select a subnet on root, and then click Upload. A progress bar displays the uploading progress.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
338
Step 4 After the data is loaded, a Prompt dialog box is displayed indicating that the uploading of commissioning data is successful. Click OK. ----End
8.4.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters

This topic describes how to set the commissioning parameters for a subnet. This operation must be completed before the optical power commissioning of a WDM subnet. If any parameter setting is incorrect, the commissioning result will also be incorrect. In this operation, set System Full Wavelengths, that determines the typical value of a single wavelength on an optical amplifier (OA) in the WDM subnet.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user at the network operator or above level. You have obtained the subnet parameter settings.
Context
System Full Wavelengths should be set to the actual value. You can determine the actual value based on the frequency allocation table in the telecommunications design file or the specific product configuration table. For example: l l If the WDM subnet is configured with the ITL and M40 or D40 boards, the System Full Wavelengths value is 80wave. If the WDM subnet is configured with only the M40 or D40 board, the System Full Wavelengths value is 40wave.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
339
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Parameter Configuration from the main menu. Step 2 Click the Set Subnet Parameters tab.
Step 3 Set System Full Wavelengths.

NOTE
To set System Full Wavelengths for multiple subnets at a time, hold down Ctrl to select the required subnets and click Config Batch. In the Config Batch dialog box, you can set System Full Wavelengths for multiple subnets.
Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes to save the settings of the subnet commissioning parameters. Step 6 In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK. Step 7 Click OK to close the Commissioning Parameter Configuration dialog box. ----End
8.4.5 Creating a WDM Link

The U2000 commissions optical power based on the WDM link. Therefore, WDM links (which are logical links) need to be created for a subnet before commissioning its optical power.
Prerequisite
l l l You are an NMS user at the network operator or above level. The fiber connection data is complete and correct. To successfully create a WDM link for a subnet, ensure that the following requirements are met:
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Optical cross-connections are correctly configured for reconfiguration optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) sites in the network. If wavelength protection, extended wavelength protection, or line protection exists in the network, protection groups are correctly configured. If automatic nesting exists, ensure that no fiber connection exists between this subnet and other subnets; otherwise, use their upper-level shared subnet to create WDM links.
Context
CAUTION
Topological resource changes such as fiber deletion or optical cross-connection deactivation will affect existing links. Therefore, recreate links before commissioning the optical power. Logical link: A link that is defined based on add and drop locations of the same wavelength in a network. A wavelength between an add location and a drop location in the network is regarded as a WDM link. Wavelengths that have the same source and sink are regarded as a logical link. Associated link: Two or more logical links that traverse the same optical amplifier (OA) board and affect each other. Logical links are classified into four types: complete logical links, broadcast logical links, sink-free logical links (no-sink), and source-free logical links (nosource). Type Complete Definition Complete indicates that, in a logical link and its associated links on a subnet, all wavelengths have source and sink NEs that are located in the same subnet. Broadcast indicates that broadcast wavelengths exist in a logical link or its associated links on a subnet. No-Sink indicates that in a logical link or its associated links on a subnet, a wavelength is without a sink or it has a sink that is not located in this subnet (for example, the U2000 cannot detect the sink for a link because optical crossconnections are not configured). No-Source indicates that in a logical link or its associated links on a subnet, a wavelength is without a source or it has a source that is not located in this subnet (for example, the U2000 cannot detect the source for a link because of incorrect fiber connection). Remarks l The priority order (from lowest to highest) for displaying these four types of logical links is Complete, Broadcast, NoSink, and No-Source. For example, if a source-free link and a sink-free link coexist in some associated links, Link Status will be displayed as NoSource for each link. l You need to select subnet A and subnet B when creating links in either of the subnets for wavelengths with the sink in subnet A and the source in subnet B; otherwise, a sourcefree or sink-free link will be created.
Broadcast
No-Sink
No-Source
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
341
Type
Definition
Remarks
An example is given below to illustrate a complete link, a source-free link, and a sink-free link and also how to convert a source-free or sink-free link into a complete link. As shown in the following figure, subnets A and B carry four wavelengths, 1, 2, 3, and 4. For 1, its source is not in subnet A but its sink is in subnet A. 2 traverses subnets A and B, with its source in subnet A and sink in subnet B. The sources and sinks of 3 and 4 are in subnet A.
In the following figure, select subnet A to create WDM links. As a result, Link A, Link B, and Link C are created. Link C is a complete link and is composed of 3 and 4. Link A has no source and Link B has no sink. Link A, Link B, and Link C traverse the same OA board so they are associated links. l Link Status for these associated links is Complete only when all the links are complete links. In this example, Link Status for these links is No-Source. l To convert Link A and Link B into complete links, upper-level subnets for subnet A and subnet B, namely, the subnets that contain complete 1 and 2, must be selected when WDM links are recreated.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > WDM Link Management from the main menu. Step 2 Select a subnet in the navigation tree and click subnet are displayed in the right pane. . The WDM links that traverse the
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
342

NOTE
If is displayed, network data has changed. In this case, click to refresh the Root navigation tree. If the topological resources in a subnet have changed, is displayed before the subnet and the Select all subnets with resource changes check box is available. l Select the Select all subnets with resource changes check box to select all subnets before which displayed. l Topological resource changes in a subnet may affect the links that traverse the subnet. In this case, click and a message is displayed prompting you to re-create WDM links. . A message is displayed prompting you is
If WDM links do not exist in the selected subnet, click to create WDM links.
Step 3 Click Fast Troubleshooting. Rectify the error that occurred during the link creation process according to the operation result.
NOTE
After you click Fast Troubleshooting, a temporary link is created for verifying whether the logical fiber connection is correct and whether the EVOA, MCA, OTU, and OA (with a built-in VOA) boards have idle IN/OUT ports. This link will not be saved on the U2000. After creating the temporary link, click Generate to create the formal WDM link.
Step 4 Click Generate in the right pane. A message will be displayed indicating that the original data will be deleted and WDM links will be re-created.
NOTE
If WDM links in a subnet also traverse another link, a message will be displayed after the WDM links are created asking you whether to select the associated subnet. l If you click OK, a message will be displayed indicating that the associated subnet has been selected. Click OK. All links that traverse the selected subnets will be created. l If you click Cancel, the associated subnet will not be selected and only the links whose sources and sinks are in the selected subnets will be created. If an exception occurs during the creation, troubleshoot by referring to 8.10.2 FAQs and Solutions During the Generation of WDM Links.
Step 5 Click OK. A progress bar is displayed indicating the generation progress of WDM links. Step 6 After the links are created, view newly created logical links in the Logical Link area in the upper pane.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
343
NOTE
A logical link is a group of wavelengths that are added at the same NE and are dropped at another same NE. Link creation is a process of grouping wavelengths to several types of logical links. Multiple wavelengths that traverse only one optical NE and do not traverse any optical amplifiers on the optical NE is combined into a source-free link or a sink-free link.
Step 7 Optional: Set the number of wavelengths for the boards to be commissioned. Manually enter the number of wavelengths for each board in the event that the U2000 cannot automatically calculate them due to whatever reason (for example, the network-wide fiber connection data is incomplete) 1. Select a link in the list and click Set Number of Wave. The Set Number of Wave on Board dialog box is displayed.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
344
2.
In the Number of Wave on Board field, enter the number of wavelengths for boards.
NOTE
The number of wavelengths on NG WDM equipment ranges from 1 to 80. Use the total number of wavelengths that traverse a board as the number of wavelengths. You can obtain the total number of wavelengths from the project design file.
3.
Set the maximum number of wavelengths for an OA board in the Full Wave Number field. By default, on the U2000, the maximum number of wavelengths for an OA board is the same as the maximum number of wavelengths for the optical NE where the OA board is located. When the maximum numbers of wavelengths for subnets are different, and the maximum number of wavelengths for an optical NE in a dimension is different from the maximum number of wavelengths for the target subnet, you need to adjust the maximum number of wavelengths for OA boards in this dimension. As shown in the following figure, SITE_1 and SITE_2 belong to SUBNET_1 whose maximum number of wavelengths is 40; SITE_3 belongs to SUBNET_2 whose maximum number of wavelengths is 80. Hence, you need to modify the maximum number of wavelengths for A101 and A105 OA boards in the east dimension at SITE_2 to 80 to make it consistent with the maximum number of wavelengths for SUBNET_2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
345
East
West
4. 5.
Click Save. The Prompt dialog box is displayed indicating that the data was successfully saved. Click OK.
NOTE
When a board is traversed by multiple links, you only need to set Number of Wave on Board for a link. Number of Wave on Board will be automatically updated for other links. If you create WDM links again after Full Wave Number is set, the value will be changed to the maximum number of wavelengths for the subnet. In this case, set Full Wave Number again.
----End
8.4.6 Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning

You can create an optical power commissioning report that records the before-commissioning data. The report assists you in verifying whether you have achieved the commissioning results after commissioning the optical power.
Prerequisite
l l WDM links have been created in the subnet. For details, see 8.4.5 Creating a WDM Link. Commissioning parameters have been set for the subnet. For details, see 8.4.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters.
Context
Before commissioning the optical power, record the following parameters: l l Bit error rate (BER) before forward error correction (FEC) at the receive end Input and output optical power of the optical amplifier board and the OTU board
You can directly commission optical power without generating a commissioning report.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
346
Procedure
Step 1 Export the OTU commissioning report. For details, see 8.6.2 Generating a Commissioning Report of an OTU Board. View the input optical power, output optical power, and the BER before FEC of the OTU board. Record and save the parameter values. Step 2 Export the optical amplifier commissioning report. For details, see 8.6.3 Generating a Commissioning Report of the Optical Amplifier Board. View the input optical power, output optical power, and gain of all optical amplifier boards. Check the optical power and gain of the IN port on the optical amplifier board on the line. Record and save the parameter values. ----End
8.4.7 Commissioning Optical Power

By using the function of automatic optical power commissioning during deployment of a new network, you can commission the optical power of one or more specified links and associated links at a time. In addition, no manual operation is required during the automatic commissioning process. This mode saves manual intervention, shortens the commissioning time, and improves commissioning efficiency.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user at the network operator or above level. The links to be commissioned are complete links or links without sinks. Links without sources cannot be commissioned.
Context
Optical power commissioning commissions the optical power of all optical amplifier boards in a subnet. In the commissioning process, the U2000 logs in to all NEs in the subnet. Because the commissioning may start the automatic level control (ALC) or automatic power equilibrium (APE) function for the NEs, pay attention to the following points: l For NG WDM equipment of versions earlier than V100R005, ensures that the ALC and APE functions of the NEs are in the Disable state and that the OPA function is not in the Auto state before commissioning. For NG WDM equipment of V100R005 or later versions, the U2000 will automatically disable the ALC and APE functions for the NEs before commissioning. After the commissioning, the U2000 enables the ALC and APE functions for the NEs automatically but automatic ALC adjustment is still disabled. The intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function must be disabled for the network to be commissioned before commissioning.
If no MCA board is configured for optical power commissioning, an MUT_LOSLOS-MUT alarm will be reported during commissioning. This alarm does not affect commissioning or networks, and will be stopped after the commissioning is complete. If Raman boards are installed on the link, during the automatic commissioning of optical power, backward Raman commissioning is performed to set the pump optical power of the Raman board. Before the commissioning, ensure that the laser on the link is enabled. If the laser is disabled, the U2000 automatically stops commissioning and displays a message, asking you to turn on the laser. The U2000 generates the Limit OSNR, The Number of Wavelengths of the link, and Independency parameters automatically according to fiber connections and board information.
If a non-40G system needs to be expanded to a 40G system, commission the non-40G system according to the requirements for a 40G system. Specifically, set Commission Mode to 40G Mode and Code Type to the code pattern of the 40G system. If you do not perform the preceding operations, the non-40G system cannot be expanded to a 40G system. If OTUs in other code patterns need to be added to a 40G system, commission the 40G system according to the code pattern with the minimum incident optical power requirement. For example, if you need to add OTUs in the DQPSK code pattern to a 40G system with OTUs in the ODB code pattern, or add OTUs in the ODB code pattern to a 40G system with OTUs in the DQPSK code pattern, commission the system according to the DQPSK code pattern. If the wavelength to be commissioned traverses a regeneration station that supports FEC autoadaptation, select links by wavelength direction in turn. Do not select all links at a time. For example, for wavelength c1 that traverses two regeneration sites, select Link11, Link12, and Link13 in turn to commission them in the forward direction, and select Link21, Link22, and Link23 in turn to commission them in the reverse direction.
During the commissioning, the client may be disconnected from the server due to communication exceptions, but the server will continue the commissioning. When the client is reconnected to to view commissioned subnets. For details, see 8.8 Viewing the server, you can click Information About Subnets Under Commissioning. To ensure successful commissioning, perform the commissioning again after the subnets are commissioned completely.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > New Deployment Commissioning from the main menu. Step 2 In the window that is displayed, select the subnet to be commissioned in the navigation tree and click to import the WDM links to the subnet to be commissioned.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
348

NOTE
If is displayed, network data has changed. In this case, click to refresh the Root navigation tree. If the topological resources in a subnet have changed, is displayed before the subnet. Topological resource changes in a subnet may affect the links that traverse the subnet. In this case, click and a message is displayed prompting you to re-create WDM links. If no WDM link is generated in the subnet to be commissioned, generate WDM links before performing any further operation. For details, see 8.4.5 Creating a WDM Link.
Step 3 In the operation list, view and set each parameter for the WDM link. Field Limit OSNR (dB) Description Indicates the minimum OSNR of a WDM system. If the value of Limit OSNR is 20.0, the OSNR of a WDM link cannot be smaller than 20.0 dB. Otherwise, the signal quality on the WDM link severely degrades. Indicates the OSNR of the optical power of the WDM system. After the U2000 commissions the WDM system, the OSNR of the WDM system cannot be smaller than this value. You can modify the value. If you do not modify the value, the U2000 commissions the WDM system according to the value of Limit OSNR (dB). If OSNR Design Value is set to 0.0 dB, the OSNR of the optical power of the WDM system is not set. In this case, the U2000 commissions the WDM system according to the value of Limit OSNR (dB). The Number of Wavelengths of The Link Independency Indicates the number of wavelengths carried on a WDM link. For example, if the value is 2, the WDM link carries two wavelengths. Specifies whether any link is associated to this link. The options are as follows: l No: Indicates that no link is associated to the WDM link. When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, only the WDM link needs to be commissioned. l Yes: Indicates that the WDM link has an associated link. When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, both the WDM link and its associated link need to be commissioned.
OSNR Design Value
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
349
Field Protect Type
Description Indicates the protection type of a WDM link. l No Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is not protected. When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, only the working link needs to be commissioned. l Line Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is of 1+1 protection. When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, you are advised to commission both the working and protection links. l Wave Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is of wavelength protection. When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, you are advised to commission both the working and protection links. l Expand Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is of extended wavelength protection. When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, you are advised to commission both the working and protection links.
Work State
Indicates the working status of a WDM link. The options are as follows: l Work: Indicates that the WDM link is a working link. l Backup: Indicates that the WDM link is a protection link.
Link Status
Indicates the completeness of the source and sink ends of a wavelength on a link in the current subnet.
NOTE The source end refers to the OTU board that adds wavelengths and the sink end refers to the OTU board that drops wavelengths. A link refers to a group of wavelengths that are added or dropped by the OTU boards on the same site.
The links on the U2000 are classified into the following types: l Complete: Indicates that every wavelength on the links and related links in the current subnet has a source and a sink, and both the source and sink are located in the subnet. l Broadcast: Indicates that there are broadcast wavelengths on the links or the related links in the current subnet. l No-Sink: Indicates that certain wavelengths on the links or the related links have the source but do not have the sink, or the sink of certain wavelengths is not located in the subnet. One instance of No-Sink is that the system cannot locate the sink because the optical cross-connection is not configured. l No-Source: Indicates that certain wavelengths on the links or the related links have the sink but do not have the source, or the source of certain wavelengths is not located in the subnet. One instance of No-Source is that the system cannot locate the source because the fiber connection is incorrect. The preceding link types are displayed in a downward compatible order. For example, if a no-sink link and a no-source link coexist, No-Source is displayed on the U2000.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
350
Field Fiber Cut Point Commission Mode
Description Indicates the position of a fiber cut on the working link. Indicates the modulation mode according to the following rules: 1. For a 40G system, when the system generates WDM links, this parameter is displayed as 40G Mode by default and is dimmed. That is, a user cannot change the commission mode. 2. For a non-40G system, when the system generates WDM links, this parameter is displayed as Non-40G Mode. In this case, a user can change the commission mode as follows: l If the system is not to be expanded to a 40G system, the commission mode does not need to be changed. Retain the parameter setting as Non-40G Mode. l If the system is to be expanded to a 40G system, 40G Mode must be selected for commissioning. During deployment, if the incident optical power is commissioned for a 40G system, the incident optical power does not need to be adjusted when the system is expanded to a 40G system later.
NOTE If 40G Mode is selected for commissioning a non-40G system, a proper coder pattern must be selected. In this case, the incident optical power varies with the code patterns. If Non-40G Mode is selected for commissioning a non-40G system, a code pattern does not need to be selected.
Code Type
Indicates the code pattern that is used during the commissioning of a 40G board. Select a proper code pattern according to the following rules: 1. For a 40G system, the U2000 automatically starts commissioning according to the code pattern of the OTU boards along a link. In this case, this parameter is dimmed and does not need to be set.
NOTE If there are multiple OTU boards along a link and the code patterns of these OTU boards are different, the U2000 starts commissioning according to the code pattern of the OTU board with the minimum incident optical power.
2. If a non-40G system (commission mode: 40G Mode) is expanded to a 40G system, the selected code pattern must be the same as the code pattern of the expanded 40G board. 3. If a non-40G system (commission mode: Non-40G Mode) is not to be expanded, this parameter does not need to be set.
Step 4 Click Save to save the parameters for the objects to be commissioned. Step 5 After saving the parameters, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 6 Select the check box of the link to be commissioned.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
351

NOTE
When you select a link to be commissioned, all the associated links are selected at the same time. You can select one or multiple wavelengths of the WDM links to be commissioned. To do so, click Select Commissioning Wavelength in the WDM Link Management (Deployment) window. You can also cancel commissioning for the associated links. To do so, in the operation list, select the associated links of the link to be commissioned. Click Select Commissioning Wavelength, clear all wavelengths in the Select Commissioning Wavelength dialog box, and then click OK.
Step 7 Click Commission.
Step 8 Optional: In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning (Deployment) dialog box, click Advanced Option. Then, the system displays the Advanced Option dialog box, where you can user-define commissioning options.
NOTE
By default, all the options are selected. If you clear an option and click Start, the system cancels the operation during commissioning.
Step 9 Click Start. The Prompt dialog box is displayed. Check whether the subnet commissioning parameters are set correctly and then click OK to commission the subnet. The system starts to commission the subnet and the progress bar displays the commissioning progress.
NOTE
When the laser on the link under commissioning is shut down, the system displays the OTU laser status dialog box during commissioning. In this case, click the Laser status column and change the OTU laser status to On. If you do not perform this operation, the system skips the optimization for single-wavelength optical power of the link.
Step 10 After commissioning is complete, click OK.

NOTE
If ongoing commissioning pauses due to an exception, for example, a failure to initialize sites, select Resume Broken Commissioning and click Start. Then, the system resumes the last unfinished commissioning. When you select Resume Broken Commissioning, Advanced Option is dimmed.
Step 11 Optional: Click Detail in the Operate column to view the channel attenuation value of the single-wavelength commissioning point and the single-wavelength attenuation value of the monitoring point of each wavelength on the link. Step 12 In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning window, view the commissioning result and confirm whether the result meets the requirement.

NOTE
After the commissioning is complete, you can: l Click Save to File to save the optical power and BER before and after the commissioning of each link to an .xls file. l Click Create Commission Report to generate the OTU commissioning report and optical amplifier report of the commissioned link and save the reports in a specified path. On Windows OS, you can export a report to an .html or .xls file. On UNIX OS, you can export a report only to an .html file.
----End
Result
If the commissioning result indicates exceptions, retry the commissioning.
Troubleshooting
If an exception occurs during operations, troubleshoot by referring to 8.10.1 FAQs in the Optical Power Commissioning Window.
8.4.8 Viewing the Commissioning Result

When optical power commissioning is complete, you can check whether the commissioning result meets the requirements by viewing the commissioning report.
Prerequisite
Optical power commissioning has been completed.
Context
NOTE
When optical power commissioning is complete, pay attention to the following parameters in the commissioning result: l l BER before forward error correction (FEC) at the receive end Input and output optical power of the optical amplifier board and the OTU board
Procedure
Step 1 Generate 8.6.2 Generating a Commissioning Report of an OTU Board, and view the input optical power, out optical power, and BER before FEC of the OTU board. Check whether these parameters meet the requirements.
NOTE
The BER before FEC at the receive end must be lower than the preset value. If the BER before FEC does not meet the requirement, check whether the optical power is appropriate by performing the follow-up steps in this topic. If the optical power is appropriate, check whether the dispersion compensation module (DCM) configuration of the related links is consistent with that in the design file. The optical power of the input port of the OTU board must be 3 dB higher than the receiver sensitivity and 5 dB lower than the overload point. In the report, the board data that does not meet the requirements of the commissioning result is marked red. The optical power of the output port of the OTU board must be within the specified range of the board.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
353
Step 2 Generate 8.6.3 Generating a Commissioning Report of the Optical Amplifier Board, and view the input optical power, output optical power, and gain of the optical amplifier board. Check whether the optical power and gain of the input port of the optical amplifier board meet the requirements. Step 3 If the average input optical power of a single wavelength of the optical amplifier board is lower than the standard input optical power of a single wavelength, check whether the insertion loss and fiber attenuation of the upstream board of the optical amplifier board are appropriate. l l The insertion loss of a board must be within the specification range of the board. For the optical amplifier board, check and analyze the contents marked red in the report. The contents marked red indicate exceptions.
----End
8.5 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of an Expanded Network

When the capacity of an existing network is insufficient, you need to expand the network capacity (by expanding wavelengths) according to the service plan. On the expanded network, optical power commissioning commissions only the optical power of wavelengths without services. During the wavelength expansion, only the single-wavelength optical power of the links on which the specified wavelengths are located is commissioned. You need to set the wavelengths to be commissioned on the U2000 client.
CAUTION
The WDM network to be expanded must have some system margin and must be free from quality risks. Therefore, you need to evaluate the quality of the WDM network, optimize the WDM network according to the evaluation result, expand the WDM network, and then commission the optical power of the WDM network.
8.5.1 Preparing for the Commissioning

This topic describes how to prepare for commissioning the optical power of WDM NEs on an expanded network. The preparations include obtaining documents, checking the conditions of the WDM NEs to be commissioned, evaluating the network scenarios of the network to be commissioned, and evaluating and optimizing the quality of the network to be commissioned.
Evaluating the Network Scenarios of the Network to Be Commissioned

There are certain restrictions on the sites and network modes for automatic optical power commissioning. Before commissioning the optical power of a newly-deployed network, evaluate whether the network scenarios of the WDM network to be commissioned meet the commissioning requirements. For details about the network scenarios, see Network Models and Application Scenarios.
Preparing Documents
The documents that you need to prepare are mainly engineering documents. If there are no engineering documents at some offices, obtain relevant information from the
telecommunications design documents and contract. The contents of engineering documents include: l l l Network diagram: Used to set the NE ID, IP address, and other parameters before you commission optical power. Network configuration diagram: Used to check and confirm the network topology after WDM links are generated. Wavelength distribution diagram: Used to obtain information about channels contained in WDM links when the wavelengths that have the same source and sink are in the same WDM link. Cabinet panel diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000. Fiber connection diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000.
l l
Checking the Commissioning Conditions of WDM Equipment

Before commissioning the optical power of WDM equipment, check whether the following conditions are met: l l The WDM equipment version meets the requirementVersion Mapping. The equipment is installed properly and has passed the hardware installation check. The expected results are as follows: The optical distribution frame (ODF) of each site is installed correctly. Line fibers are connected correctly through the ODF. A fiber is connected to the dispersion compensation module (DCM) and the DCM fiber connection is checked. The WDM equipment is powered on and ECC communication is proper. 15-min performance events are enabled for the WDM equipment. The optical port on the OTU board is enabled at the transmit end of the WDM equipment.
NOTE
You need to check the installation quality of the preceding hardware before commissioning the optical power. For the check standards of other hardware, see the relevant equipment manual.
8.5.2 Commissioning Process

This topic describes the process of commissioning the optical power of WDM NEs on an expanded network. Figure 8-2 shows the flowchart for commissioning the optical power of an expanded network by using the U2000.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
355
Figure 8-2 Flowchart for commissioning the optical power of an expanded network
Start
Update board configuration data
Set subnet commissioning parameters
Create WDM links
Commission the optical power
View the commissioning report
End
NOTE
Perform the following steps in turn on the entire network after the WDM commissioning component has been installed or deployed: l 8.9 Synchronizing Data on the NMS l 8.5.3 Uploading Commissioning Data l 8.5.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters l 8.5.5 Creating a WDM Link
8.5.3 Uploading Commissioning Data

Before commissioning the optical power of a WDM subnet, you need to upload the commissioning data. The commissioning data includes code pattern of OTU boards and types of optical amplifier boards.
Prerequisite
Context
A subnet can include other subnets and optical NEs.
l l
If all subnets included in a subnet are selected, commissioning data of subnets and optical NEs will be uploaded to the U2000. If some subnets included in the subnet are selected, only commissioning data of the selected subnets is uploaded to the U2000. Commissioning data of optical NEs is not uploaded to the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Parameter Configuration from the main menu. Step 2 Click the Upload Commissioning Data tab. Step 3 Select a subnet on root, and then click Upload. A progress bar displays the uploading progress.
Step 4 After the data is loaded, a Prompt dialog box is displayed indicating that the uploading of commissioning data is successful. Click OK. ----End
8.5.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters

This topic describes how to set the commissioning parameters for a subnet. This operation must be completed before the optical power commissioning of a WDM subnet. If any parameter setting is incorrect, the commissioning result will also be incorrect. In this operation, set System Full Wavelengths, that determines the typical value of a single wavelength on an optical amplifier (OA) in the WDM subnet.
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
You are an NMS user at the network operator or above level. You have obtained the subnet parameter settings.
Context
System Full Wavelengths should be set to the actual value. You can determine the actual value based on the frequency allocation table in the telecommunications design file or the specific product configuration table. For example: l l If the WDM subnet is configured with the ITL and M40 or D40 boards, the System Full Wavelengths value is 80wave. If the WDM subnet is configured with only the M40 or D40 board, the System Full Wavelengths value is 40wave.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Parameter Configuration from the main menu. Step 2 Click the Set Subnet Parameters tab.
Step 3 Set System Full Wavelengths.

NOTE
To set System Full Wavelengths for multiple subnets at a time, hold down Ctrl to select the required subnets and click Config Batch. In the Config Batch dialog box, you can set System Full Wavelengths for multiple subnets.
Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes to save the settings of the subnet commissioning parameters. Step 6 In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK. Step 7 Click OK to close the Commissioning Parameter Configuration dialog box. ----End
8.5.5 Creating a WDM Link

The U2000 commissions optical power based on the WDM link. Therefore, WDM links (which are logical links) need to be created for a subnet before commissioning its optical power.
Prerequisite
l l l You are an NMS user at the network operator or above level. The fiber connection data is complete and correct. To successfully create a WDM link for a subnet, ensure that the following requirements are met: Optical cross-connections are correctly configured for reconfiguration optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) sites in the network. If wavelength protection, extended wavelength protection, or line protection exists in the network, protection groups are correctly configured. If automatic nesting exists, ensure that no fiber connection exists between this subnet and other subnets; otherwise, use their upper-level shared subnet to create WDM links.
Context
CAUTION
Topological resource changes such as fiber deletion or optical cross-connection deactivation will affect existing links. Therefore, recreate links before commissioning the optical power. Logical link: A link that is defined based on add and drop locations of the same wavelength in a network. A wavelength between an add location and a drop location in the network is regarded as a WDM link. Wavelengths that have the same source and sink are regarded as a logical link. Associated link: Two or more logical links that traverse the same optical amplifier (OA) board and affect each other. Logical links are classified into four types: complete logical links, broadcast logical links, sink-free logical links (no-sink), and source-free logical links (nosource). Type Complete Definition Complete indicates that, in a logical link and its associated links on a subnet, all wavelengths have source and sink NEs that are located in the same subnet. Broadcast indicates that broadcast wavelengths exist in a logical link or its associated links on a subnet. Remarks l The priority order (from lowest to highest) for displaying these four types of logical links is Complete, Broadcast, NoSink, and No-Source. For example, if a source-free link and a sink-free link coexist in some associated links, Link Status will be displayed as NoSource for each link. l You need to select subnet A and subnet B when creating links in either of the subnets for
359
Broadcast
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Type No-Sink
Definition No-Sink indicates that in a logical link or its associated links on a subnet, a wavelength is without a sink or it has a sink that is not located in this subnet (for example, the U2000 cannot detect the sink for a link because optical crossconnections are not configured). No-Source indicates that in a logical link or its associated links on a subnet, a wavelength is without a source or it has a source that is not located in this subnet (for example, the U2000 cannot detect the source for a link because of incorrect fiber connection).
Remarks wavelengths with the sink in subnet A and the source in subnet B; otherwise, a sourcefree or sink-free link will be created.
No-Source
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
360
Type
Definition
Remarks
An example is given below to illustrate a complete link, a source-free link, and a sink-free link and also how to convert a source-free or sink-free link into a complete link. As shown in the following figure, subnets A and B carry four wavelengths, 1, 2, 3, and 4. For 1, its source is not in subnet A but its sink is in subnet A. 2 traverses subnets A and B, with its source in subnet A and sink in subnet B. The sources and sinks of 3 and 4 are in subnet A.
In the following figure, select subnet A to create WDM links. As a result, Link A, Link B, and Link C are created. Link C is a complete link and is composed of 3 and 4. Link A has no source and Link B has no sink. Link A, Link B, and Link C traverse the same OA board so they are associated links. l Link Status for these associated links is Complete only when all the links are complete links. In this example, Link Status for these links is No-Source. l To convert Link A and Link B into complete links, upper-level subnets for subnet A and subnet B, namely, the subnets that contain complete 1 and 2, must be selected when WDM links are recreated.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > WDM Link Management from the main menu. Step 2 Select a subnet in the navigation tree and click subnet are displayed in the right pane. . The WDM links that traverse the
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
361

NOTE
If is displayed, network data has changed. In this case, click to refresh the Root navigation tree. If the topological resources in a subnet have changed, is displayed before the subnet and the Select all subnets with resource changes check box is available. l Select the Select all subnets with resource changes check box to select all subnets before which displayed. l Topological resource changes in a subnet may affect the links that traverse the subnet. In this case, click and a message is displayed prompting you to re-create WDM links. . A message is displayed prompting you is
If WDM links do not exist in the selected subnet, click to create WDM links.
Step 3 Click Fast Troubleshooting. Rectify the error that occurred during the link creation process according to the operation result.
NOTE
After you click Fast Troubleshooting, a temporary link is created for verifying whether the logical fiber connection is correct and whether the EVOA, MCA, OTU, and OA (with a built-in VOA) boards have idle IN/OUT ports. This link will not be saved on the U2000. After creating the temporary link, click Generate to create the formal WDM link.
Step 4 Click Generate in the right pane. A message will be displayed indicating that the original data will be deleted and WDM links will be re-created.
NOTE
If WDM links in a subnet also traverse another link, a message will be displayed after the WDM links are created asking you whether to select the associated subnet. l If you click OK, a message will be displayed indicating that the associated subnet has been selected. Click OK. All links that traverse the selected subnets will be created. l If you click Cancel, the associated subnet will not be selected and only the links whose sources and sinks are in the selected subnets will be created. If an exception occurs during the creation, troubleshoot by referring to 8.10.2 FAQs and Solutions During the Generation of WDM Links.
Step 5 Click OK. A progress bar is displayed indicating the generation progress of WDM links. Step 6 After the links are created, view newly created logical links in the Logical Link area in the upper pane.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
362
NOTE
A logical link is a group of wavelengths that are added at the same NE and are dropped at another same NE. Link creation is a process of grouping wavelengths to several types of logical links. Multiple wavelengths that traverse only one optical NE and do not traverse any optical amplifiers on the optical NE is combined into a source-free link or a sink-free link.
Step 7 Optional: Set the number of wavelengths for the boards to be commissioned. Manually enter the number of wavelengths for each board in the event that the U2000 cannot automatically calculate them due to whatever reason (for example, the network-wide fiber connection data is incomplete) 1. Select a link in the list and click Set Number of Wave. The Set Number of Wave on Board dialog box is displayed.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
363
2.
In the Number of Wave on Board field, enter the number of wavelengths for boards.
NOTE
The number of wavelengths on NG WDM equipment ranges from 1 to 80. Use the total number of wavelengths that traverse a board as the number of wavelengths. You can obtain the total number of wavelengths from the project design file.
3.
Set the maximum number of wavelengths for an OA board in the Full Wave Number field. By default, on the U2000, the maximum number of wavelengths for an OA board is the same as the maximum number of wavelengths for the optical NE where the OA board is located. When the maximum numbers of wavelengths for subnets are different, and the maximum number of wavelengths for an optical NE in a dimension is different from the maximum number of wavelengths for the target subnet, you need to adjust the maximum number of wavelengths for OA boards in this dimension. As shown in the following figure, SITE_1 and SITE_2 belong to SUBNET_1 whose maximum number of wavelengths is 40; SITE_3 belongs to SUBNET_2 whose maximum number of wavelengths is 80. Hence, you need to modify the maximum number of wavelengths for A101 and A105 OA boards in the east dimension at SITE_2 to 80 to make it consistent with the maximum number of wavelengths for SUBNET_2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
364
East
West
4. 5.
Click Save. The Prompt dialog box is displayed indicating that the data was successfully saved. Click OK.
NOTE
When a board is traversed by multiple links, you only need to set Number of Wave on Board for a link. Number of Wave on Board will be automatically updated for other links. If you create WDM links again after Full Wave Number is set, the value will be changed to the maximum number of wavelengths for the subnet. In this case, set Full Wave Number again.
----End
8.5.6 Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning

You can create an optical power commissioning report that records the before-commissioning data. The report assists you in verifying whether you have achieved the commissioning results after commissioning the optical power.
Prerequisite
l l WDM links have been created in the subnet. For details, see 8.5.5 Creating a WDM Link. Commissioning parameters have been set for the subnet. For details, see 8.5.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters.
Context
Before commissioning the optical power, record the following parameters: l l Bit error rate (BER) before forward error correction (FEC) at the receive end Input and output optical power of the optical amplifier board and the OTU board
You can directly commission optical power without generating a commissioning report.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
365
Procedure
Step 1 Export the OTU commissioning report. For details, see 8.6.2 Generating a Commissioning Report of an OTU Board. View the input optical power, output optical power, and the BER before FEC of the OTU board. Record and save the parameter values. Step 2 Export the optical amplifier commissioning report. For details, see 8.6.3 Generating a Commissioning Report of the Optical Amplifier Board. View the input optical power, output optical power, and gain of all optical amplifier boards. Check the optical power and gain of the IN port on the optical amplifier board on the line. Record and save the parameter values. ----End
8.5.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of Expanded Wavelengths

This topic describes how to commission the optical power of expanded wavelengths. The optical power commissioning in this scenario commissions only the optical power of newly expanded wavelengths to ensure that the flatness of the optical power and OSNR between these wavelengths and other wavelengths at the receive end meet the system requirements. The optical power of expanded sites is commissioned automatically. Before the commissioning, you need to set the wavelengths to be commissioned. During the commissioning, only the singlewavelength optical power of the wavelengths is optimized.
Prerequisite
l l l l You are an NMS user at the network operator or above level. BERs of the OTU boards in an expanded subnet can be queried. The links to be commissioned are complete links. The optical power of non-source or nonsink links cannot be commissioned. MCA boards are installed on the network to be commissioned. Otherwise, the commissioning cannot be performed.
Context
Optical power commissioning commissions the optical power of all optical amplifier boards in a subnet. In the commissioning process, the U2000 logs in to all NEs in the subnet. Because the commissioning may start the automatic level control (ALC) or automatic power equilibrium (APE) function for the NEs, pay attention to the following points: l For NG WDM equipment of versions earlier than V100R005, ensures that the ALC and APE functions of the NEs are in the Disable state and that the OPA function is not in the Auto state before commissioning. For NG WDM equipment of V100R005 or later versions, the U2000 will automatically disable the ALC and APE functions for the NEs before commissioning. After the commissioning, the U2000 enables the ALC and APE functions for the NEs automatically but automatic ALC adjustment is still disabled. The intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function must be disabled for the network to be commissioned before commissioning.
If the link traverses a Raman board, backward Raman commissioning is performed to set the pump optical power of the Raman board and you need to enable the laser of the link before the commissioning. If the laser is disabled, you will be prompted to enable it. The Limit OSNR, The Number of Wavelengths of the link, and Independency values are automatically generated according to fiber connection data and board data.
Before expanding a non-40G system to a 40G system, ensure that the non-40G system has been commissioned during the new deployment according to the requirements for commissioning a 40G system. Otherwise, the expansion will fail. Before adding OTU boards in the DQPSK code pattern to a 40G system with OTU boards in the ODB code pattern, ensure that the 40G system has been commissioned during the new deployment according to the requirements for the DQPSK code pattern. Otherwise, the board addition will fail. If the wavelength to be commissioned traverses a regeneration station that supports FEC autoadaptation, select links by wavelength direction in turn. Do not select all links at a time. For example, for wavelength c1 that traverses two regeneration sites, select Link11, Link12, and Link13 in turn to commission them in the forward direction, and select Link21, Link22, and Link23 in turn to commission them in the reverse direction.
During the commissioning, the client may be disconnected from the server due to communication exceptions, but the server will continue the commissioning. When the client is reconnected to the server, you can click to view commissioned subnets. For details, see 8.8 Viewing Information About Subnets Under Commissioning. To ensure successful commissioning, perform the commissioning again after the subnets are commissioned completely.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Expansion Deployment Commissioning from the main menu.
NOTE
The optical power commissioning of expanded wavelengths adjusts the optical power to the average optical power of the original wavelengths. Therefore, ensure that the optical power of the original wavelengths has been optimized before the commissioning.
Step 2 Select the required subnet in the navigation tree and click to import the WDM link data of the subnet.
above the navigation tree
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
367
NOTE
If is displayed, network data has changed. In this case, click to refresh the Root navigation tree. If the topological resources in a subnet have changed, is displayed before the subnet. Topological resource changes in a subnet may affect the links that traverse the subnet. In this case, click and a message is displayed prompting you to re-create WDM links. If no WDM link is generated in the subnet, generate WDM links by referring to 8.5.5 Creating a WDM Link before performing follow-up operations.
Step 3 In the operation list, view and set each parameter for the WDM link. Field Limit OSNR (dB) Description Indicates the minimum OSNR of a WDM system. If the value of Limit OSNR is 20.0, the OSNR of a WDM link cannot be smaller than 20.0 dB. Otherwise, the signal quality on the WDM link severely degrades. Indicates the OSNR of the optical power of the WDM system. After the U2000 commissions the WDM system, the OSNR of the WDM system cannot be smaller than this value. You can modify the value. If you do not modify the value, the U2000 commissions the WDM system according to the value of Limit OSNR (dB). If OSNR Design Value is set to 0.0 dB, the OSNR of the optical power of the WDM system is not set. In this case, the U2000 commissions the WDM system according to the value of Limit OSNR (dB). The Number of Wavelengths of The Link Indicates the number of wavelengths carried on a WDM link. For example, if the value is 2, the WDM link carries two wavelengths.
OSNR Design Value
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
368
Field Independency
Description Specifies whether any link is associated to this link. The options are as follows: l No: Indicates that no link is associated to the WDM link. When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, only the WDM link needs to be commissioned. l Yes: Indicates that the WDM link has an associated link. When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, both the WDM link and its associated link need to be commissioned.
Protect Type
Indicates the protection type of a WDM link. l No Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is not protected. When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, only the working link needs to be commissioned. l Line Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is of 1+1 protection. When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, you are advised to commission both the working and protection links. l Wave Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is of wavelength protection. When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, you are advised to commission both the working and protection links. l Expand Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is of extended wavelength protection. When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, you are advised to commission both the working and protection links.
Work State
Indicates the working status of a WDM link. The options are as follows: l Work: Indicates that the WDM link is a working link. l Backup: Indicates that the WDM link is a protection link.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
369
Field Link Status
Description Indicates the completeness of the source and sink ends of a wavelength on a link in the current subnet.
NOTE The source end refers to the OTU board that adds wavelengths and the sink end refers to the OTU board that drops wavelengths. A link refers to a group of wavelengths that are added or dropped by the OTU boards on the same site.
The links on the U2000 are classified into the following types: l Complete: Indicates that every wavelength on the links and related links in the current subnet has a source and a sink, and both the source and sink are located in the subnet. l Broadcast: Indicates that there are broadcast wavelengths on the links or the related links in the current subnet. l No-Sink: Indicates that certain wavelengths on the links or the related links have the source but do not have the sink, or the sink of certain wavelengths is not located in the subnet. One instance of No-Sink is that the system cannot locate the sink because the optical cross-connection is not configured. l No-Source: Indicates that certain wavelengths on the links or the related links have the sink but do not have the source, or the source of certain wavelengths is not located in the subnet. One instance of No-Source is that the system cannot locate the source because the fiber connection is incorrect. The preceding link types are displayed in a downward compatible order. For example, if a no-sink link and a no-source link coexist, No-Source is displayed on the U2000. Fiber Cut Point Indicates the position of a fiber cut on the working link.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
370
Field Commission Mode
Description Indicates the modulation mode according to the following rules: 1. For a 40G system, when the system generates WDM links, this parameter is displayed as 40G Mode by default and is dimmed. That is, a user cannot change the commission mode. 2. For a non-40G system, when the system generates WDM links, this parameter is displayed as Non-40G Mode. In this case, a user can change the commission mode as follows: l If the system is not to be expanded to a 40G system, the commission mode does not need to be changed. Retain the parameter setting as Non-40G Mode. l If the system is to be expanded to a 40G system, 40G Mode must be selected for commissioning. During deployment, if the incident optical power is commissioned for a 40G system, the incident optical power does not need to be adjusted when the system is expanded to a 40G system later.
NOTE If 40G Mode is selected for commissioning a non-40G system, a proper coder pattern must be selected. In this case, the incident optical power varies with the code patterns. If Non-40G Mode is selected for commissioning a non-40G system, a code pattern does not need to be selected.
Code Type
Indicates the code pattern that is used during the commissioning of a 40G board. Select a proper code pattern according to the following rules: 1. For a 40G system, the U2000 automatically starts commissioning according to the code pattern of the OTU boards along a link. In this case, this parameter is dimmed and does not need to be set.
NOTE If there are multiple OTU boards along a link and the code patterns of these OTU boards are different, the U2000 starts commissioning according to the code pattern of the OTU board with the minimum incident optical power.
2. If a non-40G system (commission mode: 40G Mode) is expanded to a 40G system, the selected code pattern must be the same as the code pattern of the expanded 40G board. 3. If a non-40G system (commission mode: Non-40G Mode) is not to be expanded, this parameter does not need to be set.
Step 4 In the operation list, right-click a link to be commissioned and choose Select Commissioning Wavelength from the shortcut menu. The Select Commissioning Wavelength dialog box is displayed.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
371
Step 5 Select the Commission or Not check box for the wavelength to be commissioned.
NOTE
If you need to commission both expanded sites and expanded wavelengths, select all wavelengths. If you need to commission multiple links, set the wavelengths to be commissioned for each link. After you select the Commission or Not check box for a wavelength, the Commission or Not value in the lower right pane of the WDM Link Management (Expansion) window is changed from no to yes.
Step 6 Click OK to close the Select Commissioning Wavelength dialog box. Step 7 Select the Commission or Not check box for the WDM link to be commissioned.
NOTE
If you select multiple WDM links to commission, set the target optical power for each link.
Step 8 Click Save to save the parameter settings. Step 9 Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 10 Click Commission. The Automatic Optical Power Commissioning (Expansion) window is displayed.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
372
NOTE
There are six states of wavelength commissioning. l Not provisioned: The wavelength is not provisioned. l Provisioning: The wavelength is being provisioned. l Provisioning completed: The wavelength is provisioned. l Optimizing: The optical power of the provisioned wavelengths is being equalized and the BER is being optimized. If an MCA board is not installed, the optical power will not be equalized. l Commissioning is successful: After a successful optimization, the BER is 10E-5 or lower. l Commissioning failed: After a failed optimization, the BER is higher than 10E-5.
Step 11 Click Advanced Option. Step 12 Optional: In the Advanced Option dialog box, set parameters based on site conditions.
NOTE
Only the NG WDM NE of V100R005 or a later version supports fast service provisioning.
Step 13 Click Start. In the Expansion Deployment Commissioning dialog box, click OK.
NOTE
If the laser on the link under commissioning is disabled, the OTU laser status dialog box will be displayed during the commissioning. In this case, set Laser status to On. Otherwise, the single-channel optical power of the link will not be optimized.
Step 14 In the Prompt dialog box that is displayed asking you whether to continue the commissioning, click OK. Step 15 When the commissioning is complete, click OK. Step 16 In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning (Expansion) window, verify the commissioning result is correct.

NOTE
When you close the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning (Expansion) window, a message will be displayed indicating that the optical power cannot be restored if you close this window. Click OK if you confirm that the optical power does not need to be restored.
----End
Result
If the commissioning result indicates exceptions, click Rollback to restore the optical power and then perform the following steps to save the commissioning data. 1. 2. Click Save to File to save commissioning information. Enter a filename in File Name and click Save. A filename must include date and time information (recommended format: Year-MonthDay-Hour-Minute). This avoids the issue of a file saved later overwriting a file with the same name saved earlier.
3.
Right-click in the All Messages area and choose Select All from the shortcut menu to copy and save the commissioning data to a text file for later queries.
4.
Contact Huawei engineers.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
374
Troubleshooting
If an exception occurs during operations, troubleshoot by referring to 8.10.1 FAQs in the Optical Power Commissioning Window.
8.5.8 Viewing the Commissioning Result

When optical power commissioning is complete, you can check whether the commissioning result meets the requirements by viewing the commissioning report.
Prerequisite
Optical power commissioning has been completed.
Context
NOTE
When optical power commissioning is complete, pay attention to the following parameters in the commissioning result: l l BER before forward error correction (FEC) at the receive end Input and output optical power of the optical amplifier board and the OTU board
Procedure
Step 1 Generate 8.6.2 Generating a Commissioning Report of an OTU Board, and view the input optical power, out optical power, and BER before FEC of the OTU board. Check whether these parameters meet the requirements.
NOTE
The BER before FEC at the receive end must be lower than the preset value. If the BER before FEC does not meet the requirement, check whether the optical power is appropriate by performing the follow-up steps in this topic. If the optical power is appropriate, check whether the dispersion compensation module (DCM) configuration of the related links is consistent with that in the design file. The optical power of the input port of the OTU board must be 3 dB higher than the receiver sensitivity and 5 dB lower than the overload point. In the report, the board data that does not meet the requirements of the commissioning result is marked red. The optical power of the output port of the OTU board must be within the specified range of the board.
Step 2 Generate 8.6.3 Generating a Commissioning Report of the Optical Amplifier Board, and view the input optical power, output optical power, and gain of the optical amplifier board. Check whether the optical power and gain of the input port of the optical amplifier board meet the requirements. Step 3 If the average input optical power of a single wavelength of the optical amplifier board is lower than the standard input optical power of a single wavelength, check whether the insertion loss and fiber attenuation of the upstream board of the optical amplifier board are appropriate. l l The insertion loss of a board must be within the specification range of the board. For the optical amplifier board, check and analyze the contents marked red in the report. The contents marked red indicate exceptions.
----End
8.6 Optical Power Commissioning Report

The U2000 supports various types of reports, helping you to commission the optical power of WDM equipment.
8.6.1 Preparing for Generating a Commissioning Report

Before generating an optical power commissioning report, you need to create WDM links and set subnet commissioning parameters. Before you generate the optical power commissioning report, ensure that the following tasks have been completed: l l The WDM links in the subnet have been created. For details, see 8.5.5 Creating a WDM Link. Commissioning parameters have been set for the subnet. For details, see 8.5.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters.
NOTE
You can generate the report only after logging in to NEs to query data. Therefore, log in to the NEs before you generate the report.
8.6.2 Generating a Commissioning Report of an OTU Board

This topic describes how to generate a commissioning report of an OTU board. By viewing the report, you can learn whether the input optical power, output optical power, and BER before forward error correction (FEC) of the OTU board meet the commissioning requirements.
Context
Before the expansion commissioning, you are advised to check the Current Value column to determine whether the network is ready for the expansion commissioning. Rules for the determination: l l l l Determine wavelength information according to the Frequency (THz) and Wave Length (nm) columns. Check information about all the wavelengths existing before the expansion. Check Current Value of each existing wavelength (1E-7=10-7=0.0000001, 1E-9=10-9=0.000000001). If Current Value is smaller than Board Requirement for a wavelength, the wavelength is ready for expansion commissioning. If Current Value is "-" or larger than Board Requirement for a wavelength, the wavelength is not ready for expansion commissioning.
For the expansion commissioning, all the existing wavelengths must be checked to ensure that they are ready for expansion commissioning. If any existing wavelength is not ready for expansion commissioning, stop and contact Huawei engineers for troubleshooting.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Report from the main menu. The Commissioning Report window is displayed.
Step 2 In the Report Options area, select Commissioning Report of the OTU. Step 3 In the Save Path area, set the path for storing the report. Step 4 In the navigation tree, select one or more subnets for which you want to generate the report. Step 5 Click . All optical NEs in the selected subnets are displayed in the Select Conditions area. Step 6 In the Select Conditions area, select the node of optical NEs for which you want to generate the report.
Step 7 Click Generate. A prompt dialog box is displayed, asking you to confirm the subnet commissioning parameters. Step 8 After confirming the parameters, click Yes to start generating the commissioning report. A progress bar is displayed. Step 9 After the commissioning report is generated, click OK in the Operation Result dialog box. View the newly generated report in the lower pane of the Commissioning Report window.
NOTE
After generating the report in the Commissioning Report window, close the window and open it again. The newly-generated report is not displayed in the Report name area but is saved in the specified path.
Step 10 Click View to view the contents in the report.

NOTE
The parameter values marked red indicate exceptions.
----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
377
Parameters in the Report

Table 8-3 lists the parameters such as input optical power, output optical power, MCA optical spectrum data, optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR), and BER before FEC in the commissioning report of the OTU board. In the report, the parameter values marked red indicate exceptions, those marked yellow indicate alarms, and - indicates that the value is blank or cannot be queried. Table 8-3 Parameters in the commissioning report of an OTU board Parameter Number Site Name Frequency (THz) Wave Length (nm) NE ID NE Name OTU Board Description Indicates the ID of a parameter in the list. Indicates the name of the site where the OTU board resides. Indicates the frequency of the wavelengths that traverse the OTU board. Indicates the wavelengths that traverse the OTU board. Indicates the ID of the NE where the OTU board resides. Indicates the name of the NE where the OTU board resides. Indicates the slot ID, board name, and port ID of the OTU board. For example, in "5-LSXR-1", 5 indicates the slot ID, LSXR indicates the board name, and 1 indicates the port ID. Indicates the output optical power of the OTU board. Indicates the input optical power of the OTU board. The input optical power of the OTU board must be within the Input Optical Power Commission Range. Otherwise, the parameter value is marked red, indicating an exception. Input Optical Power Commission Range(dBm) Optical Power(dBm) OSNR(dB) OSNR Evaluate Value(dB) OSNR Design Value(dB) Indicates the range of the allowable input optical power of the OTU board. Indicates the optical power obtained when the MCA board scans the optical amplifier board. Indicates the OSNR obtained when the MCA board scans the optical amplifier board. Indicates the theoretical OSNR of a wavelength on the optical amplifier board in the drop direction. Indicates the OSNR value set in the WDM Link Management window according to the designed OSNR value in the project file. Indicates the minimum allowable OSNR of the OTU board.
378
Output Optical Power (dBm) Input Optical Power (dBm)
OTU Board OSNR Tolerance(dB)
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Parameter OSNR Margin(dB)
Description Indicates the obtained OSNR deviation from the OSNR tolerance of the OTU board when the MCA board scans the optical amplifier board.
NOTE If no MCA board is configured, this parameter value is displayed as the deviation of the evaluated OSNR value from the OSNR tolerance of the OTU board.
Board Requirement Current Value FEC TDC Scan Value
Indicates the maximum allowable BER of the OTU board. Indicates the current BER of the live network. Indicates the FEC type of the OTU board. Indicates the dispersion compensation value of a 40G OTU board.
8.6.3 Generating a Commissioning Report of the Optical Amplifier Board

This topic describes how to generate a commissioning report for an optical amplifier board. By viewing the report, you can know the input optical power, output optical power, and gain of the optical amplifier board, and confirm whether the optical power and gain of the input port of the optical amplifier board meet the requirements.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Report from the main menu. The Commissioning Report window is displayed. Step 2 In the Report Options area, select Commissioning Report of the optical amplifier. Step 3 In the Save Path area, set the path for storing the report. Step 4 In the navigation tree, select one or more subnets for which you want to generate the report. . All links that traverse the selected subnets are displayed in the Select Step 5 Click Conditions area. Step 6 In the Select Conditions area, select the link for which you want to create the report.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
379
Step 7 Click Generate. A prompt dialog box is displayed, asking you to confirm the subnet commissioning parameters. Step 8 After confirming the parameters, click Yes to start generating the commissioning report. A progress bar is displayed. Step 9 After the commissioning report is generated, click OK in the Operation Result dialog box. View the newly generated report in the lower pane of the Commissioning Report window.
NOTE
After generating the report in the Commissioning Report window, close the window and open it again. The newly-generated report is not displayed in the Report name area but is saved in the specified path.
Step 10 Click View to view the contents in the report.

NOTE
The parameter values marked red indicate exceptions.
----End
Parameters in the Report

Table 8-4 lists the parameters such as basic information, total optical power, gain, line attenuation, pre-EVOA, and OSNR of an optical amplifier board in the commissioning report of the optical amplifier board. In the report, the parameter values marked red indicate exceptions and - indicates that the value is blank or cannot be queried.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
380
Table 8-4 Parameters in the commissioning report of an optical amplifier board Parameter Link Site Name NE ID NE Name Board Port Per-Channel Nominal Value (dBm) Description Indicates the name of a physical link. Indicates the name of the optical NE where the optical amplifier board resides. Indicates the ID of the NE where the optical amplifier board resides. Indicates the name of the NE where the optical amplifier board resides. Indicates the slot ID and name of the optical amplifier board. Indicates the port type of the optical amplifier board, that is, input port or output port. Indicates the standard input and output optical power of a single wavelength carried by the input and output ports of the optical amplifier board. Set this parameter according to the type of the optical amplifier board and the number of full wavelengths of the system. Indicates the number of wavelengths that traverse the optical amplifier board. Indicates the current input and output optical power of the optical amplifier board. Indicates the input and output optical power of the optical amplifier board that is recorded before commissioning. During the commissioning, the U2000 specifies the optical power range of the optical amplifier board according to the target commissioning value. Optical power beyond the range is considered abnormal.
NOTE For the input port, the U2000 calculates the target commissioning value and target gain value. For the output port, its target commissioning value is determined by the target commissioning value and target gain value of the input port.
Number Of Wave Traversing OA Current Commissioning Value (dBm) Value Before Commissioning (dBm) Reference Range (dBm)
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
381
Parameter Difference(dB)
Description Indicates the difference between the current optical power and reference range of the optical amplifier board. l If the current optical power is within the reference range, this parameter value is 0. l If the current optical power is smaller than the minimum value in the reference range, this parameter value is the difference between the current optical power and the minimum value in the reference range. l If the current optical power is larger than the maximum value in the reference range, this parameter value is the difference between the current optical power and the maximum value in the reference range.
Standard Gain(dB) Gain Range (dB)
Indicates the gain of the optical amplifier board. Indicates the gain range of the optical amplifier board. If the gain range can be queried from the NE, the parameter value is displayed as the queried gain range. If the gain range cannot be queried from the NE, the parameter value is displayed as the value queried from the specifications database.
NOTE If the optical amplifier board is an OAU, the gain range of the OAU is displayed. If the optical amplifier board is of any other type, this parameter value is blank.
Actual Line Attenuation (dB)
Indicates the attenuation of the line between the optical amplifier boards on two sites. Currently, this parameter value is equal to the output optical power of one optical amplifier board minus the input optical power of the following optical amplifier board. Indicates the normal attenuation of the line. The normal attenuation is equal to the normal single-wavelength output optical power of one optical amplifier board minus the nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the following optical amplifier board. Indicates the designed line attenuation, which is displayed as Designed Attenuation (dB) in the Link Attributes dialog box. This parameter can be set manually or automatically by importing a script. If you do not set this parameter, it is displayed as the value of Nominal Attenuation (dB). Indicates the ID of the NE where the EVOA board resides. Indicates the name of the NE where the EVOA board resides.
Nominal Attenuation (dB)
Designed Attenuation (dB)
NE ID NE Name
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
382
Parameter Board
Description Indicates the slot ID, board name, and port ID of the EVOA board. For example, in "8-VA1-1", 8 indicates the slot ID, VA1 indicates the board name, and 1 indicates the port ID. Indicates the current attenuation of the EVOA board. Indicates the attenuation range of the EVOA board queried from the NE. Indicates the name of the logical link matching the physical link. Indicates the name of the site where the optical amplifier board on the logical link resides. Indicates the ID of the NE where the optical amplifier board on the logical link resides. Indicates the name of the NE where the optical amplifier board on the logical link resides. Indicates the slot ID and name of the optical amplifier board on the logical link. Indicates the theoretical OSNR of the input port on the cascaded optical amplifier board. Indicates the theoretical OSNR of the output port on the cascaded optical amplifier board.
Actual Attenuation (dB) Attenuation Range (dB) Link Site Name NE ID NE Name Board OSNR(dB)(IN) OSNR(dB)(OUT)
8.7 Managing the Commissioning Index Data

The commissioning index data includes the index data of optical amplifier (OA) boards, the insertion loss index data of components, and code patterns of optical modules. Users can view, add, and delete this data, but cannot modify it.
Prerequisite
You have the required operation rights.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Index Data from the main menu. Step 2 Click the Optical Amplifier Index Data tab and view the index data in the lower pane. Step 3 In the Optical Amplifier Index Data window, click New. The New OA Index Data dialog box is displayed.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
383
Step 4 In the New OA Index Data dialog box, enter the index data of OA boards and click OK to add the data. Step 5 Click the Insertion Loss Index Data tab and view the insertion loss index data in the lower pane. Step 6 In the Insertion Loss Index Data window, click New. The New Insertion Loss Index Data dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 In the New Insertion Loss Index Data dialog box, set NE Type, Board Type, and Insertion Loss (dB) for a board.
NOTE
After you set the NE type and board type, all boards that meet the filter criteria are displayed in the New Insertion Loss Index Data dialog box. Click Select All to select all the boards.
Step 8 Click OK. Step 9 Click the Optical Module Type tab. View the types of optical module in the lower pane. Step 10 In the Optical Module Type window, click New. The New Optical Module Type dialog box is displayed. Step 11 In the New Optical Module Type dialog box, enter the index data for the new type of optical module and click OK. ----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
384
8.8 Viewing Information About Subnets Under Commissioning

The U2000 server allows a maximum of five users to commission different subnets at the same time. However, it does not allow multiple users to commission the same subnet at the same time. If multiple users commission the same subnet at the same time, conflicting operations may occur. Conflicting operations can be prevented by properly dividing a network into different subnets and ensuring that users commission different subnets at the same time.
Dividing a Network into Subnets

Commissioning is performed by subnet. A WDM network needs to be divided into different subnets. To divide a network into different subnets, include complete wavelengths/links that need to be commissioned into the same subnet. Otherwise, the information about the wavelengths/links on one subnet may be incomplete, hence affecting the commissioning effects.
Viewing Information About Subnets Under Commissioning

The U2000 allows a user to view information about a subnet under commissioning. With this function, a user is clear about which subnets are under commissioning and then selects other subnets for commissioning. to display the WDM Optical Commissioning dialog box. The On the toolbar, click the subnets under commissioning are displayed in this dialog box.
8.9 Synchronizing Data on the NMS

WDM commissioning will be affected if it is not synchronized with NMS data. For example, the system may display a message during link generation, indicating that the OTU board does not have wavelength information. In this case, synchronize the NMS data to be consistent with the WDM commissioning data.
Prerequisite
Context
NOTE
You must synchronize the NMS data network-wide after the WDM commissioning component is installed or redeployed.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Parameter Configuration from the main menu. Step 2 Click the Synchronize Data on the U2000 tab. Step 3 Choose the subnet to be synchronized from the Root navigation tree and click Start. A confirmation dialog box is displayed indicating that the commissioning data will be deleted from the subnet and needs to be uploaded again after data synchronization to regenerate WDM links.
NOTE
For synchronizing optical NE data, if the selected subnet does not contain any optical NEs, a prompt message will be displayed asking you to select an optical NE.
Step 4 Click Yes. A confirmation dialog box is displayed asking you whether to continue. Step 5 Click Yes. Data synchronization starts.
Step 6 Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed after the synchronization. The refresh icon can turn to . In this case, click to refresh the Root navigation tree. When you synchronize network-wide NMS data, a prompt message is displayed on the other clients indicating that the commissioning data has been cleared and needs to be uploaded again after data synchronization to regenerate WDM links. Click OK. ----End
Follow-up Procedure
Commissioning data will be deleted after data synchronization. Therefore, if you have performed a network-wide data synchronization, perform the following steps in turn on the entire network before commissioning. If you have not performed network-wide data synchronization, perform the following steps for only the subnets whose data has been synchronized. l l l 8.5.3 Uploading Commissioning Data 8.5.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters 8.5.5 Creating a WDM Link
8.10 FAQ
This topic describes methods of handling common problems about optical power commissioning.
8.10.1 FAQs in the Optical Power Commissioning Window

This topic describes the FAQs and solutions during optical power commissioning. The following prompt messages are displayed in the U2000 commissioning window: 1. The cause of the preceding prompt messages may be that the NE or board does not work properly. l "Failed to query the adjustable range of the EVOA" Event code: 0x4A042 l "Failed to query the output optical power of the optical amplifier board." Event code: 0x4A044 l "Failed to restore the gain of the optical amplifier board." Event code: 0x4A061 l "Failed to restore the attenuation of the EVOA." Event code: 0x4A062 l "Failed to restore the attenuation of the VMUX." Event code: 0x4A063 l "Failed to query the input optical power of the optical amplifier board." Event code: 0x4A043 l "Failed to query the attenuation of the EVOA." Event code: 0x4A064 The solution is as follows: l Check whether the board is faulty. If yes, replace the faulty board. 2. "Failed to obtain the type of the optical amplifier board." Event code: 0x4A007 The probable causes for the preceding prompt message are as follows: l The board manufacturer information is incorrect. l The board does not work properly. l The U2000 does not support the optical amplifier board type.
The solution is as follows: l Correctly configure the board manufacturer information on the U2000. l Check whether the board is faulty. If yes, replace the faulty board. l If the board manufacturer information is correct, send the board manufacturer information to Huawei R&D engineers and request them to check whether the U2000 supports the optical amplifier board type. 3. "The optical power of the IN interface of the OTU board will exceed the threshold and the commissioning cannot proceed." Event code: 0x4A105 If the preceding prompt message is displayed, the budget optical power of the IN interface on the OTU board will exceed the upper threshold. If the U2000 continues optimizing optical power, the optical power exceeds the upper threshold and components are burned out. The solution is as follows: l Check whether the attenuator before the OTU board at the receive end or transmit end is configured properly. If the attenuator is not configured properly, replace it with a fixed attenuator according to the network design diagram so that the attenuation meets the designed attenuation. l Check whether the logical fiber connections for the U2000 are consistent with the physical fiber connections on the network according to the fiber connection diagram and correct the inconsistent logical fiber connections. 4. "The IN port power is too low (-60dBm). Stop commissioning." Event code: 0x4A067 The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that there is a problem with the fiber used by the link. For example, the fiber is cut, incorrectly connected, severely aged, or excessively attenuated. The solution is as follows: l Check the line attenuation or fiber connection, and replace the aged fiber. 5. "Exceeds the lower threshold. You have commissioned the attenuator to the minimum value, which still cannot reach the target optical power" Event code: 0x4A11E The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is as follows: The actual line attenuation is inconsistent with the designed attenuation, and the line is excessively attenuated. The solution is as follows: l Reconstruct the line according to the network design so that the line attenuation meets the designed attenuation. 6. "The optical power at the transmit end is lower than the nominal output optical power of the optical amplifier board of the added wavelengths by 3 dBm. Check whether the fiber attenuation of the site that adds wavelengths is normal." Event code: 0x4B03E The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is as follows: The fiber attenuation of the optical amplifier board that adds wavelengths is abnormal. The solution is as follows: l Check whether the fiber attenuation of the optical amplifier board that adds wavelengths is normal. If the fiber attenuation is abnormal, replace the fiber. 7. "The optical power at the transmit end is higher than the nominal output optical power of the optical amplifier board of the added wavelengths by 3 dBm. Check whether the attenuation of the site that adds wavelengths is too lower." Event code: 0x4B03D
The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is as follows: The fiber attenuation of the optical amplifier board that adds wavelengths is set inappropriately. The solution is as follows: l Replace a fixed attenuator according to the network design diagram so that the attenuation meets the designed attenuation. 8. "Failed to obtain logical links because links may not exist or related subnets have been changed." The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is as follows: User A does not close the commissioning window after completing the commissioning. Therefore, link data saved by the commissioning task of user A is refreshed when another user recreates links for the links commissioned by user A. Then, when user A performs an operation, such as rollback, in the open commissioning window, this prompt message is displayed. The solution is as follows: Close the commissioning window and select links again for commissioning. Similarly, if one user does not close the report generation window while another user synchronizes or uploads data to change the basic data of links and NEs, an error message or a blank report will be displayed.
8.10.2 FAQs and Solutions During the Generation of WDM Links

This topic describes the FAQs and solutions during the generation of WDM links by using the U2000. The following prompt messages are displayed in the U2000 window: 1. Fail to get the fiber between up wave OTU board port (...) and down wave OTU board port, can not find out fiber. Event code: 0x4A031 The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that the logical fiber connection displayed on the U2000 is incorrect. The solution is as follows: (1) Check whether the logical fiber connections displayed on the U2000 are consistent with the physical fiber connections of the board (...) according to the fiber connection diagram and correct the inconsistent logical fiber connections. (2) Regenerate WDM links. 2. Failed to query optical cross-connections for the wavelength of the OTU board port. Event code: 0x4C010 The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that the optical cross-connection is not configured or configured incorrectly, or that the fiber connection is incorrect. The solution is as follows: (1) Configure the optical cross-connection correctly on the U2000. (2) Regenerate WDM links. 3. Failed to query groups of optical cross-connections. Event code: 0x4C012 The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that the optical cross-connect group is not configured or the board is faulty. The solution is as follows:
l Check the NE to remove board faults. Alternatively, configure the cross-connect group of the board on the U2000. l Regenerate WDM links. 4. Failed to query the wavelength. Event code: 0x4D104 The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that the OTU board is faulty. The solution is as follows: l Check the NE to remove board faults. l Regenerate WDM links. 5. Failed to query the working port on the protection board. Event code: 0x4A02E The probable cause for the preceding prompt message that the protection group is not configured. The solution is as follows: l Configure the protection group on the U2000. l Regenerate WDM links.
8.10.3 FAQs About Setting Subnet Parameters

This topic describes the rules for setting the maximum number of wavelengths that a system supports during the process of setting subnet parameters.
How to Set the Maximum Number of Wavelengths for a System with Multi-Level Subnets
During the commissioning process, the U2000 calculates the power of the optical amplifier based on the maximum number of wavelengths for the system. If the system contains multiple subnets, calculate the power based on the maximum number of wavelengths supported by the subnet where the optical amplifier board is located. If the subnet contains multi-level subnets, set the maximum number of wavelengths for each subnet.
8.10.4 FAQs About Link Commissioning

This topic describes the FAQs and solutions about link commissioning.
How to Quickly Complete Deployment Commissioning in Case of Many Errors on the Network
The entire commissioning process consists of network data recording, channel attenuation initialization, main channel commissioning, and BER optimization. If an error occurs during any process, the entire commissioning is stopped. All the preceding processes need to be performed to commission the entire network. If an error occurs during any process, the commissioning will take a long time. To speed up commissioning and fault identification, commission a few associated links each time. In this manner, if an error occurs on a link, the error is reported in a timely manner. After
the fault is rectified, only these links need to be commissioned instead of the entire network. When the commissioning is successful, commission other associated links.
Are There Any Restrictions on Link Commissioning

Wavelength expansion commissioning is applicable to a network that is configured with MCA boards and meets expansion requirements. The U2000 of the current versions does not support wavelength expansion commissioning of a network that is not configured with MCA boards.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
391
9 Configuring Services and System Features
Configuring Services and System Features
About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to configure various services and system features. 9.1 Configuring Boards In the NE Panel/Slot Layout, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board. 9.2 Configuring Services This section describes how to configure various services. 9.3 Configuring System Features This section describes how to configure system features.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
392
9.1 Configuring Boards

In the NE Panel/Slot Layout, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.
9.1.1 Checking Board Parameters

You can check the board parameters to know the status of board parameters. Before you configure a network, you need to check the parameters for boards, to ensure that the status of board parameters is compliant with the actual networking requirements. When you need to adjust the parameters that you set for a board, you can modify the parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose the corresponding item from the Function Tree to check and modify the relevant board parameters. 1. Check and modify the parameters for an optical transponder or Ethernet unit. Table 9-1 lists the parameters for the optical transponder and Ethernet unit. Table 9-1 List of parameters for an optical transponder Parameter Name Laser Status Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list. d. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Application Scenario You can turn on or shut down a laser by setting the laser status. Procedure See Open and Close the Laser on the WDM Board.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
393
Parameter Name Automatic Laser Shutdown
Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list. d. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Application Scenario When no light is input, a laser is automatically shut down and stops transmitting optical signals. The laser life can be prolonged by decreasing the working time of the laser. In addition, this function prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage.
Procedure See Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board.
Actual Wavelength N0./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list. d. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical port of a board.
See Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
394
Parameter Name Configure Wavelength N0./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list. d. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Application Scenario Used to set the wavelength No, wavelength and frequency of the current optical port on the WDM side of a board.
Procedure
LPT Enabled
You can add the overhead byte that supports the LPT protocol to the frame format of a WDM-side signal, to monitor the running status of the network access point or the service network.
See 15.29 Enabling and Disabling LPT.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
395
Parameter Name NULL Mapping Status
Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list. d. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Application Scenario You can set NULL Mapping Status to Enabled for a path that has no signal, and check or view OTN overhead by using an instrument, to monitor the status of paths in a network.
Procedure See 15.25 Setting the NULL Mapping Status.
OFC Enabled
The OFC function is used to control the transmit optical power of a laser when a fiber is cut, and check whether the fiber recovers by sending a short laser pulse.
See Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC).
2.
Check and modify the parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit. Table 9-2 lists the parameters for the tributary unit and the line unit.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
396
Table 9-2 List of parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit Parameter Name Laser Status Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list. Application Scenario You can turn on or shut down a laser by setting the laser status. When no light is input, a laser is automatically shut down and stops transmitting optical signals. The laser life can be prolonged by decreasing the on time of the laser. In addition, this function prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage. You can add the overhead byte that supports the LPT protocol to the frame format of a WDM-side signal, to monitor the running status of the network access point or the service network. You can set NULL Mapping Status to Enabled for a path that has no signal, and check or view OTN overhead by using an instrument, to monitor the status of paths in a network. Procedure See Open and Close the Laser on the WDM Board. See Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board.
Automatic Laser Shutdown
LPT Enabled
See 15.29 Enabling and Disabling LPT.
NULL Mapping Status
See 15.25 Setting the NULL Mapping Status.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
397
Parameter Name OFC Enabled
Navigation Path
Application Scenario The OFC function is used to control the transmit optical power of a laser when a fiber is cut, and check whether the fiber recovers by sending a short laser pulse.
Procedure See Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC).
3.
Check and modify the parameters for an Ethernet unit. Table 9-3 lists the parameters for the optical transponder and Ethernet unit. Table 9-3 List of parameters for an Ethernet unit Parameter Name Port Enabled Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. c. Select Internal Port. Application Scenario When you configure a service for the port on an Ethernet board, enable the internal port (that is, VCTRUNK port). Procedure See 15.32.1 Configuring Internal Ports.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
398
Parameter Name TAG
Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. c. Select Internal Port.
Application Scenario Set the port type of the internal port on an Ethernet board on an NE based on the tag attribute of packets that are transmitted by the user-side equipment.
Procedure
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
399
Parameter Name Network Attribute
Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. c. Select Internal Port.
Application Scenario l If the port is of the UNI type, the port processes the tag attributes specified in 802.1Q and the port has the tag, access and hybrid attributes. l If the port is of the C-Aware type, the port does not process the tag attributes in 802.1Q. The port determines that the data packet carries a C-VLAN tag and processes only the data packet that has the C-VLAN tag. l If the port is of the S-Aware type, the port does not process the tag attributes specified in 802.1Q. The port determines that the data packet carries an S-VLAN tag and processes only the data packet that has the S-VLAN tag.
Procedure
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
400
Parameter Name Port Enabled
Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. c. Select External Port.
Application Scenario When you configure a service for the port on an Ethernet board, enable the external port (that is, PORT port).
Procedure See 15.32.2 Configuring External Ports.
Working Mode
a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. c. Select External Port.
Set the transmit end and receive end to have the same setting of working mode.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
401
Parameter Name MAC/PHY LoopBack
Application Scenario MAC loopback and PHY loopback are used to locate a fault, but they can interrupt services. In addition, they are mutually exclusive. When you set MAC LoopBack to Inloop, PHY LoopBack is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When you set PHY LoopBack to Inloop, MAC LoopBack is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When the Working Mode of the port is Auto-Negotiation, select the autonegotiation flow control mode.
Procedure
a. In the NE Autonegotiation Explorer, select Flow Control Mode the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. c. Select External Port. Click the Flow Control tab.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
402
Parameter Name
Navigation Path
Application Scenario When the Working Mode of the port is not AutoNegotiation, select the nonautonegotiation flow control mode.
Procedure
Nona. In the NE Autonegotiation Explorer, select Flow Control Mode the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. c. Select External Port. Click the Flow Control tab. TAG a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. c. Select External Port. Click the TAG Attributes tab.
Set the port type of the external port on an Ethernet board on an NE based on the tag attribute of packets that are transmitted by the user-side equipment.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
403
Parameter Name Network Attribute
Application Scenario The Port Attribute (Ethernet Port) parameter specifies the position of a port in the network. Different port attributes support different packets.
Procedure
4.
Check and modify the parameters for an optical amplifying unit. Table 9-4 lists the parameters for the optical amplifying unit. Table 9-4 List of parameters for an optical amplifying unit Parameter Name Laser Status Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list. d. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Application Scenario You can turn on or shut down a laser by setting the laser status. Procedure See Open and Close the Laser on the WDM Board.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
404
5.
Check and modify the parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit. Table 9-5 lists the parameters for the spectrum analyzer unit. Table 9-5 List of parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit Parameter Name Wavelength Monitor Status Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Monitor Wavelength from the dropdown list. Application Scenario Enable wavelength monitoring. Procedure See Monitoring Wavelengths by Using the Spectrum Analyzer Board.
6.
Check and modify the parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit. Table 9-6 lists the parameters for the optical supervisory channel unit.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
405
Table 9-6 List of parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit Parameter Name Laser Status Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list. 7. Check and modify the parameters for SDH units. Table 9-7 lists the parameters for the SDH units. Table 9-7 List of parameters for SDH unit Parameter Name Laser Switch Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Port from the dropdown list. Application Scenario You can open or close a laser by setting the laser switch. Application Scenario You can turn on or shut down a laser by setting the laser status. Procedure See Open and Close the Laser on the WDM Board.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
406
Parameter Name Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback
Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Port from the dropdown list.
Application Scenario Sets loopback according to the path.
a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration from the Function Tree.
When no light is input, a laser is automatically shut down and stops transmitting optical signals. The laser life can be prolonged by decreasing the on time of the laser. In addition, this function prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage. You can query and set overhead bytes of the VC4 path, including J1 and C2.
VC4 Path Overhead
a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management from the Function Tree.
VC3 Path Overhead
a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management from the Function Tree.
You can query and set overhead bytes of the VC3 path, including J1 and C2.
PRBS Test
a. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. b. Choose Configuration from the Function Tree.
You can set PRBS test of the ports on the board, and perform the bit error test of the transmission link without attaching a meter to the equipment during the deployment.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
407

NOTE
If you select an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer board, a static optical add/drop multiplexer board, a dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board, an optical protection board, or a variable optical attenuator board, you can choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Then, you can query or set parameters.
Step 2 In the right-hand pane, modify the existing parameter settings and click Apply. ----End
9.1.2 Adding Ports

Client-side ports and line-side ports of some OTU boards support color light and colorless light. You need to add different ports on the U2000 according to the SFP optical module used on the equipment.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. There are client-side ports or line-side ports that are not added on the U2000.

Web LCT or U2000
Context
By default, each board is added with client side ports. To add ports, you need to delete the client side ports that are added by default on the U2000.
Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT

1. 2. In the NE Explorer, right-click the board and then choose Path View. Right-click a blank space on the right of the Path View window, and then choose Add Port. The Add Port dialog box is displayed.
3.
Select the Port, Type, and Level. Click OK.
9.1.3 Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board

If a board supports electrical ports, you must configure the electrical ports on the U2000 to enable the board to access electrical signals.
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher. Electrical port modules must be configured on the board.
For details on the electrical signals that a board can access, see the Hardware Description.

U2000/Web LCT
Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT

1. 2. In the NE Panel, right-click the required board and choose Path View from the shortcut menu. Right-click the port to be configured and choose Modify Port. The Modify Port dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
If you need to modify Type to Electrical Port, you must first delete the port, and then add the port. Otherwise the port cannot be modified successfully.
3.
Set Type to Electrical Port and click OK .
9.2 Configuring Services

This section describes how to configure various services.
Before configuring services, see Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This Manual in the Configuration guide to understand various services.
Configuring WDM Services

l l See Configuring WDM Services (By Trail) to configure WDM services by using trails. See Configuring WDM Services (Station By Station) to configure services station by station.
Configuring Ethernet Services

l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
See Configuring Ethernet Services to configure Ethernet services.

Configuring the TOM/THA/TOA/LOA Board

See the following sections to configure the TOM/THA/TOA/LOA board and the WDM Services (by Station Service Package): l l l l l Configuring the TN11TOM Board Configuring the TN52TOM Board Configuring the THA/TOA Board Configuring the LOA Board Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)
9.3 Configuring System Features

This section describes how to configure system features.
Before configuring system features, you can see Mapping Relationship Between Products and Features in the Feature Description to understand the features supported by the product on the live network.
Configuring Protection Schemes

l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
See Configuring Optical Line Protection to configure optical line protection. See Configuring Intra-Board 1+1 Protection to configure intra-board 1+1 protection. See Configuring Client 1+1 Protection to configure client 1+1 protection. See Configuring SW SNCP to configure SW SNCP protection. See Configuring ODUk SNCP to configure ODUk SNCP protection. See Configuring VLAN SNCP to configure VLAN SNCP protection. See Configuring Tributary SNCP Protection to configure tributary SNCP protection. See Configuring Board-Level Protection to configure board-level protection. See Configuring MS SNCP to configure MS SNCP protection. See Configuring DBPS to configure DBPS protection. See Configuring an Ethernet DLAG to configure DLAG Protection (OTN). See Configuring Protection for ODUk SPRing to configure ODUk SPRing protection. See Configuring OWSP to configure OWSP protection. See Configuring Linear MSP to configure linear MSP protection. See Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring to configure two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring protection. See Configuring the Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring to configure four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring protection. See Configuring SNCP Protection to configure SNCP protection. See Configuring a Transoceanic MSP Ring to configure transoceanic MSP ring protection. See Configuring Ethernet Ring Protection to configure Ethernet ring protection. See Configuring DLAG to configure DLAG protection (OCS).
Configuring Data Features

l l l l See Configuring LCAS to configure LCAS. See Configuring Ethernet Link Aggregation Groups to configure LAGs. See Configuring the Spanning Tree to configure STP or RSTP. See Configuring MSTP to configure MSTP.
Configuring System Features

l l l l See Configuring the IPA to configure IPA. See Configuring ALC to configure ALC. See Configuring APE to configure APE. See Configuring EAPE to configure EAPE.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
411
10 Commissioning the Network
10
About This Chapter
l l l l
Commissioning the Network
Commission the optical power for an entire network after the optical power for the equipment in the network is commissioned. This chapter describes how to commission the optical power for a network through a case study. Network commissioning serves to: Connect all the NEs in the network in line with the engineering design plan. Test the services on the entire network to verify the service configuration. Test the required functions of the network, for example, orderwire and protection switching. Test the quality of long-term communication of the network by monitoring alarms and performance events.
10.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exception on the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network. 10.2 Testing Protection Switching This section describes how to test the protection switch function. 10.3 Testing Data Characteristics This section describes how to test the data characteristics. 10.4 Testing System Features The system features includes IPA, ALC, APE, and EAPE. 10.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks This section describes how to test the clock synchronization function at the physical layer. 10.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2 This section describes the procedure for testing IEEE 1588v2 features and the testing items. 10.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels When the network transmits the Ethernet service, the availability of the Ethernet service channels must be tested. 10.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the U2000/Web LCT.
10.9 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS System This section describes how to configure the orderwire phone in an OCS system by using the U2000. 10.10 Testing Orderwire Functions Orderwire function tests consist of addressing call tests and conference call tests.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
413
10.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms

Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exception on the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.
Prerequisite
The NMS computer must communicate with the NE properly. You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
Tools, Meters, and Materials

U2000 or Web LCT. When you need to view alarms on all NEs on the network, use the U2000.
Querying Network-Wide Alarms on the U2000

1. Click the current critical alarm indicator (red) in the upper right corner of the U2000 to browse the current network-wide critical alarms.
NOTE
The figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current critical alarms. When the indicator is surrounded by a square frame acknowledged.
NOTE
, it indicates that there are critical alarms to be
Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. In the case of on-site maintenance, handle Critical and Major alarms before handling other abnormal alarms. Analyze and handle alarms one by one according to the network situations. According to network conditions, certain alarms are reported inevitably, whereas certain alarms cannot be reported. For example, in general no service is accessed on the WDM side during deployment commissioning. In this case, relevant alarms are reported inevitably. These alarms, however, are cleared automatically after real services are accessed on the client side. In the commissioning and configuration phases of deployment, you need to analyze every reported alarm. In general, focus on the following alarms: l Optical power low or high alarm l Temperature threshold-crossing alarm l Abnormal communication alarm l Bit error-related alarm l Abnormal service alarm To handle a reported alarm, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.
2.
Click the current major alarm indicator (orange) in the upper right corner of the U2000 to browse the current network-wide major alarms.
NOTE
The figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current major alarms. When the indicator is surrounded by a square frame acknowledged. , it indicates that there are major alarms to be
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
414
3.
Click the current minor alarm indicator (yellow) in the upper right corner of the U2000 to browse the current network-wide minor alarms.
NOTE
The figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current minor alarms. When the indicator is surrounded by a square frame acknowledged. , it indicates that there are minor alarms to be
Querying the Current Alarms of an NE on the Web LCT

1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Alarm > Browse Alarms from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click the Browse Current Alarms tab. Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. For details, see the description of the methods for analyzing and handling alarms by using the U2000.
10.2 Testing Protection Switching

This section describes how to test the protection switch function. OptiX OSN 8800 supports the following protection modes: l l l l l l l l Optical line protection Intra-board 1+1 protection Client 1+1 protection SW SNCP protection ODUk SNCP protection OWSP protection ODUk SPRing protection Tributary SNCP protection
OptiX OSN 6800 supports the following protection modes: l l l l l l l l l l l l l Optical line protection Intra-board 1+1 protection Client 1+1 protection SW SNCP protection ODUk SNCP protection VLAN SNCP protection OWSP protection ODUk SPRing protection Board-level protection Tributary SNCP protection Cross-subrack or cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP protection Intra-subrack DBPS protection DLAG protection
OptiX OSN 3800 supports the following protection modes:

l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Optical line protection Intra-board 1+1 protection Client 1+1 protection SW SNCP protection ODUk SNCP protection VLAN SNCP protection OWSP protection ODUk SPRing protection Board-level protection Tributary SNCP protection Cross-subrack or cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP protection Intra-subrack DBPS protection DLAG protection
For the working principle for each protection mode and the operating process, see the Feature Description. The testing methods for different types of protection switching are similar. The only difference lies in the navigation path on the U2000.
10.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection

This section describes how to test inter-subrack communication protection.
Prerequisite
Subracks must be cascaded in ring mode. Communication cables between subracks must be connected in ring mode.
Precautions
l l All network cables must be properly connected. The logical cascading mode must be consistent with the physical cascading mode. When the subracks are cascaded in ring mode, the subracks must work properly and there should be no alarm indicating that subracks form a ring or alarm indicating a fault at a cascaded port.

U2000
Set-up Diagram
Figure 10-1 shows the set-up diagram when inter-subrack communication protection is in normal state. Figure 10-2 shows the set-up diagram when inter-subrack communication protection is in protection state.
Figure 10-1 Normal State

Master Subrack 0 ETH1 ETH2
Slave Subrack 1
ETH1 ETH2
Normal State
ETH2 ETH1
Slave Subrack 3
ETH1 Slave Subrack 2
ETH2
Figure 10-2 Protection State

Master Subrack 0 ETH1 ETH2
Slave Subrack 1
ETH1 ETH2
Protection State
ETH2 ETH1
Slave Subrack 3
ETH1 Slave Subrack 2
ETH2
Procedure
1. 2. Remove the network cable connecting the slave subrack 1 to master subrack 0 from the ETH1 port on master subrack 0. See Figure 10-2. On the U2000, check whether all slave subracks are unreachable to the NMS. Check for the NE_COMMU_BREAK, NE_NOT_LOGIN, and GNE_CONNECT_FAIL alarms. Observe the color of NE icons of slave subracks 1, 2, and 3. If no preceding alarm is reported and the color of NE icons of all slave subracks does not change, inter-subrack communication is normal and protection switching is successful. Then you can reconnect the network cable to the ETH1 port. After the network cable is reconnected, inter-subrack communication protection automatically switches communication from the protection channel to the working channel. See Figure 10-1.
3.
4.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
417
10.2.2 Testing the 1+1 Protection of the Cross-Connect Board and Clock Board for OptiX OSN 8800
1+1 protection is configured by using the cross-connect board and clock board. This section describes how to test the 1+1 protection switching of the cross-connect board and clock board, thus ensuring that the protection switching is normal.
Prerequisite
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, slots 9 and 10 must house the high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board. For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, slots 9 and 10 must house the cross-connect board. For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, slots 9 and 43 (or slots 10 and 44) must house the cross-connect board. For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, slots 42 and 44 must house the clock board. For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, slots 75 and 86 must house the clock board. The NE commissioning data must be configured.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map, and the NE Panel tab is displayed. Step 2 Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer. Step 3 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Configuration. Click Query. The queried Active Board should be the same as the Working Board.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, Working Board is the cross-connection, system control and clock processing board in slot 9, and Protection Board is the cross-connection, system control and clock processing board in slot 10. Active Board is the cross-connection, system control and clock processing board that is actually working. For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, Working Board is the cross-connect board in slot 9, and Protection Board is the cross-connect board in slot 10.Active Board is the cross-connect board that is actually working. For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, Working Board is the cross-connect board in slot 9 or 10, and Protection Board is the cross-connect board in slot 43 or 44. Active Board is the cross-connect board that is actually working. For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, Working Board is the clock board in slot 42, and Protection Board is the clock board in slot 44. Active Board is the clock board that is actually working. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64, Working Board is the clock board in slot 75, and Protection Board is the clock board in slot 86. Active Board is the clock board that is actually working.
Step 4 Select Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection or Clock 1+1 Protection, and then click Working/Protection Switching. In the Microsoft Internet Explorer dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.

NOTE
When you select the cross-connect board or the clock board for switching, the cross-connect board and the clock board perform switching at the same time.
Step 5 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as the Protection Board. Step 6 Select Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection or Clock 1+1 Protection, and then click Restore Working/Protection. In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
NOTE
When you select the cross-connect board or the clock board for switching, the cross-connect board and the clock board perform switching at the same time.
NOTE
The 1+1 protection switching on the cross-connect boards and clock boards is non-revertive. When Protection Board becomes Active Board, restore the cross-connect boards and clock boards to the original working/ protection state by removing the protection board, or by clicking Restore Working/Protection on the U2000.
Step 7 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as Working Board. ----End
10.2.3 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching of the Cross-Connect Board for OptiX OSN 6800
1+1 protection is configured by using the cross-connect boards. This section describes how to test the 1+1 protection switching of the cross-connect boards, thus ensuring that the protection switching is normal.
Prerequisite
Slots 9 and 10 must house the cross-connect boards. The NE commissioning data must be configured.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map and the NE Panel tab is displayed. Step 2 Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer. Step 3 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Configuration. Click Query, In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close. The queried Active Board should be the same as the Working Board.
NOTE
Working Board is the cross-connect board in slot 9, and Protection Board is the cross-connect board in slot 10. Active Board is the cross-connect board that is actually working.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
419
Step 4 Select Cross-connect 1+1 Protection, and then click Working/Protection Switching. In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close. Step 5 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as the Protection Board. Step 6 Select Cross-connect 1+1 Protection, and then click Restore Working/Protection. In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
NOTE
The 1+1 protection switching on the cross-connect boards is non-revertive. When Protection Board becomes Active Board, restore the cross-connect boards to the original working/protection state by removing the protection board, or by clicking Restore Working/Protection on the U2000.
Step 7 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as the Working Board. ----End
10.2.4 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the SCC Boards

1+1 protection is configured to protect the SCC boards. This topic describes how to test the 1 +1 protection switching of the SCC boards, thus ensuring that the protection switching is normal.
Prerequisite
The equipment must be configured with two SCC boards. The NE commissioning data must be configured.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map, and the NE Panel tab is displayed. Step 2 Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer. Step 3 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Configuration. Click Query. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close. The queried Active Board should be the same as the Working Board.
NOTE
l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, Working Board is the SCC board in slot 9, and Protection Board is the SCC board in slot 10. Active Board is the SCC board that is actually working. l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, Working Board is the SCC board in slot 28, and Protection Board is the SCC board in slot 11. Active Board is the SCC board that is actually working. l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, Working Board is the SCC board in slot 74, and Protection Board is the SCC board in slot 85. Active Board is the SCC board that is actually working. l For the OptiX OSN 6800, Working Board is the SCC board in slot 18, and Protection Board is the SCC board in slot 17. Active Board is the SCC board that is actually working.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
420
Step 4 Select SCC Board 1+1 Protection, and then click Working/Protection Switching. In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close. Step 5 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as the Protection Board. Step 6 Select SCC Board 1+1 Protection, and then click Restore Working/Protection. In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
NOTE
The 1+1 SCC board protection switching is non-revertive. When Protection Board is Current Working Board, you need to remove the protection board, or click Restore Working/Protection on theU2000 to switch services back to the working board.
Step 7 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as the Working Board. ----End
10.2.5 Testing Optical Line Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the test procedure for the optical line protection switching.
Prerequisite
The optical line protection must be configured. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established. The equipment must be running normally.

U2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, optical attenuator
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the optical line protection switching is shown in Figure 10-3.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
421
Figure 10-3 Testing the optical line protection switching

Signal analyzer
Rx TI TO1 RI1 RI1 TO1 RO
OTU1
Tx
OTUn
O A D M
FIU
RO
OLP
TO2 RI2 RI2 TO2
OLP
TI
FIU
O A D M
OTU1
OTUn
Station A
Station B
: Fixed optical attenuator
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments 1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to the RX input optical port and to the TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU respectively with a fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-3.
2.
Querying the normal channel status of station A The related parameters of the OLP are configured on the U2000. For the configuration procedures, see Creating Optical Line Protection in the Feature Description. 1. 2. 3. 4. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon of station A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the ONE is displayed. Right-click the NE icon where the OLP board is located and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list in the right-hand pane. Check the channel status of the optical line protection. If the NE name is A, the Working Channel is AShelf1(subrack)10512OLP1(RI1/TO1) and the Protection Channel is AShelf1(subrack)10512OLP2(RI2/TO2). The Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel Status are Normal. The optical line protection switching test can be performed using the following two methods: Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the RI1 port of the OLP board at Station A to perform the switching.
5.
Testing the protection switching for the equipment 1.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
422
Method 2: Forced switching. On the U2000, log in to station A. Right-click the desired protection group, and choose Force to Protection Channel to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box. Click Close in the operation result dialog box. 2. Query the channel states of the optical line protection after the switching at station A. Choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In the fiber removing mode, Working Channel is AShelf1(subrack)105 12OLP1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is AShelf1(subrack)105 12OLP2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF, and Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching Status is SF Switched. In the forced switching mode, Working Channel is AShelf1(subrack)105 12OLP1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is AShelf1(subrack)105 12OLP2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching Status is Force to Protection Channel. 3. 4. 5. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the OLP board and choose Browse Current Alarms. The OLP_PS alarm must be reported. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in step 1, the following two modes can be used respectively: Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber. Forced switching mode: Right-click the desired protection group in the Protection Group, and choose Clear. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protection group and then choose Manual to Working Channel from the shortcut menu. Then, right-click the protection group again, and choose Clear from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
6.
After the time set in WTR Time(mm:ss) field elapses, click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Switching Status of the protection group should be Idle.
----End
10.2.6 Testing Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Switching

This section uses a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the test procedure for the intra-board 1+1 protection switching that is achieved by using the OLP.
Prerequisite
The intra-board 1+1 protection must be configured. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be established correctly. The equipment must be running normally.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the intra-board 1+1 protection switching is shown in Figure 10-4. Figure 10-4 Testing the intra-board 1+1 protection switching
TO1 RI1
Rx
Signal analyzer
Tx
O T RO OLP TO2 U
RI2
TI
O A D M O A D M
FIU
FIU
O A D M O A D M
RI1 TO1 RO RI2 TO2
OLP
O TI T U
Tx
Rx
FIU
FIU
Station A
Station B
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments 1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports for the signal analyzer to the RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU respectively with a fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-4. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the ONE is displayed. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE from the function tree and choose Configuration > Port Protection. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating the operation is successful. Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane. The switching status of intra-board protection and channel status should be Normal. Check the channel status of the intra-board 1+1 protection. If the NE name is A, the Working Channel is AShelf1(subrack)10512OLP1(RI1/TO1) and the Protection Channel is AShelf1(subrack)10512OLP2(RI2/TO2). The Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel Status are Normal. The switching test of the intra-board protection can be performed using the following two methods. Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber for the RI1 port of the OLP board at Station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-4.
2.
3. l 1. 2. 3. 4.
Querying the normal channel status of station A.
5.
Testing the protection switching of the equipment 1.
Method 2: Forced switching. In the protection group window for station A, rightclick the desired protection group, and choose Force to Protection Channel to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
CAUTION
In method 1, you must disconnect the fiber in the direction that the signals are sent to the signal analyzer. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice or no protection switching is performed. 2. Query the channel states of the intra-board 1+1 protection at station A. Choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In the fiber removing mode, Working Channel is AShelf1(subrack)105 12OLP1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is AShelf1(subrack)105 12OLP2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF, and Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching Status is SF Switched. In the forced switching mode, Working Channel is AShelf1(subrack)105 12OLP1 (RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is AShelf1(subrack)105 12OLP2 (RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching Status is Force to Protection Channel. 3. 4. 5. In the NE panel for the station A, right-click the OLP board, and choose Browse Current Alarms. The INTRA_OTU_PS alarm must be reported. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available with zero bit error generated. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use the following two methods: Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber. Forced switching mode: Right-click the desired protection group in the Protection Group, and select Clear. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protection group, and choose Manual to Working Channel from the shortcut menu. Then, right-click the same protection group again, and choose Clear from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
6. ----End
Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating the operation is successful. Click Close. Switching Status of the protection group should be Idle.
10.2.7 Testing Client 1+1 Protection Switching

This section uses a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the test procedure for the client 1+1 protection switching that is achieved by using the OLP.
Prerequisite
The client 1+1 protection must be configured.
The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established. The equipment must be running normally.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the client 1+1 protection switching is shown in Figure 10-5. Figure 10-5 Testing the client 1+1 protection switching
O A D M O A D M
TO1 RI1
Signal TI OLP analyzer
OTU1
F I U
F I U
O A D M O A D M
RI1
OTU3
TO1
OLP
RO
RO
TO2 RI2
OTU2
F I U
F I U
RI2
OTU4
TI
TO2
Station A
Station B
Procedure
l Connecting Test instruments 1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to the TI and RO ports on the client side of the OLP board with a fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RO port to the TI port on the client side of the OLP board with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-5. Test the channel using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon of the station A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the ONE is displayed. Right-click the NE icon where the OLP board is located and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree.
2.
3. l 1. 2. 3.
Querying the normal channel status of station A.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
4. 5. l
Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane. Check the channel status of the client 1+1 protection. Working Channel Status and Protection Channel Status are Normal. The switching test for the client 1+1 protection can be performed using the following two methods. Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the IN optical port for the working OTU1 board at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-5. Method 2: Forced switching. On the U2000, log in to the protection group of station A. Right-click the desired protection group, and choose Force to Protection Channel to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
CAUTION
In Method 1, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the OTU1 board at station A. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice or no protection switching is performed. 2. Query the channel status of the client 1+1 protection at station A. Choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. If the NE name is A. In the fiber removing mode, Working Channel is AShelf1(subrack)105 12OLP1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is AShelf1(subrack)105 12OLP2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF and Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching Status is SF Switched. In the forced switching mode, Working Channel is AShelf1(subrack)105 12OLP1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is AShelf1(subrack)105 12OLP2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching Status is Force to Protection Channel. 3. 4. 5. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the OLP board and choose Browse Current Alarms. The CLIENT_PORT_PS alarm must be reported. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, no bit error is generated. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use the following two methods: Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber. Forced switching mode: Right-click the desired protection group in the Protection Group, and select Clear. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protection group, and choose Manual to Working Channel from the shortcut menu. Then, right-click the same protection group again, and choose Clear from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
427
6.
After the time set in WTR Time (mm:ss) field elapses, click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Switching Status for the protection group should be Idle.
----End
10.2.8 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two stations as an example to describe the test procedure for the SW SNCP protection switching.
Prerequisite
The SW SNCP protection must be configured. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established. The equipment must be running normally.

Set-up Diagram
l l l For OptiX OSN 8800, the diagram for testing the SW SNCP switching is shown in Figure 10-6. For OptiX OSN 6800, the diagram for testing the SW SNCP switching is shown in Figure 10-7. For OptiX OSN 3800, the diagram for testing the SW SNCP switching is shown in Figure 10-7.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
428
Figure 10-6 Testing the SW SNCP
Singal analyzer
6 F I U OA OADM 1 7 OA 2 8 OA OADM OA F I U
TOM
West
East
6 F I U OA OADM 3 7 OA 4 8 OA OADM OA F I U
TOM
East
West
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
429
Figure 10-7 Testing the SW SNCP protection switching
Signal analyzer
F I U
OA
OADM
OADM
OA
F I U
OA
OA
West
East
F I U
OA
OADM
OADM
OA
F I U
OA
OA
East
West
1, 2, 3, 4: OTU Board
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments 1. As shown in Figure 10-6, at station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to the RX6 input optical port and TX6 output optical port of the TOM with a fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RX6 input optical port and the TX6 output optical port of the TOM with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side. As shown in Figure 10-7, at station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to the RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side. Test the channel using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.
2.
3.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Querying the normal channel status of the station A 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon of station A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the ONE is displayed. Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box. Select the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control. Click Query. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane. Status of SW SNCP should be Normal State. Check the channel status of the SW SNCP. Channel Status of Working crossconnection is Idle, and Channel Status of Protection cross-connection is Idle. The SW SNCP protection switching test can be performed using the following two methods. Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the RX8 optical port for the TOM at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-6. Remove the fiber of the IN optical port for the second working OTU at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-7. Method 2: Forced switching. In the SNCP Service Control window for station A, select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, select Force to Protection to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
CAUTION
In method 1, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the signal analyzer at station A. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice, or no protection switching is performed. By doing this, the detected switching time is more scientific 2. Query the channel status of the SW SNCP protection at station A. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control, and click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating the operation is successful. Click Close. In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection is SF, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Idle. Status of the protection group is SF Switching. In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection is Forced switch, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is also Forced switch. Status of the protection group is Forced (from working to protection) switching state. 3. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the board and choose Browse Current Alarms. The SW_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
431

NOTE
For details about the board that reports the SW_SNCP_PS alarm, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.
4. 5.
Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, no bit error is generated. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use the following two methods: Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber. Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, select Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working crossconnection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working. Then, right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
6. ----End
Click Query. Status of the protection group should be Normal State.
10.2.9 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two stations in which the tributary board and the line board are jointly used as an example to describe the test procedure for the ODUk SNCP protection switching.
Prerequisite
The ODUk SNCP protection must be configured. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established. The equipment must be running normally.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the ODUk SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 10-8.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
432
Figure 10-8 Testing the ODUk SNCP protection switching
Signal analyzer 1 OADM 2 3 OADM
F I U
OA
OA
F I U
OA
OA
West
East
F I U
OA
4 OADM 5 6 OADM
OA
F I U
OA
OA
East
West
1, 4: Tributary Unit
2, 3, 5, 6: Line Unit
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments 1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to the RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the tributary board with a fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on the client side of the tributary board with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-8. Test the channel using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.
2.
3.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Querying the normal channel status of station A 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE A is displayed. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control tab. Click Query. Then, all ODUk SNCP protection groups are listed. Status of the ODUk SNCP protection is Normal State. Query the channel status of the ODUk SNCP protection. Channel Status of the working cross-connection is Idle, and Channel Status of the protection crossconnection is Idle. The ODUk SNCP protection switching test can be performed using the following two methods. Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber between the D1 optical port on the OADM board and the IN optical port on working line board 3 at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-8. Method 2: Forced switching. In the SNCP Service Control window for station A, select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, select Force to Protection to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
CAUTION
In method 1, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the working line board 3 at station A. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice or no protection switching is performed. By doing this, the detected switching time is more scientific. 2. Check the channel status for ODUk SNCP protection of station A Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control, and click Query. In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection is SF, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Idle. Status of the protection group is SF Switching. In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection is Forced switch, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is also Forced switch. Status of the protection group is Forced (from working to protection) switching state. 3. In the NE panel of the station A, right-click the board and choose Browse Current Alarms. The ODU_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.
NOTE
For details about the board that reports the ODU_SNCP_PS alarm, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.
4.
Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, no bit error is generated.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
5.
To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use the following two methods: Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working crossconnection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working. Then, select the same working cross-connection again, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
6. ----End
After the WTR Time(mm:ss) elapses, click Query. Status of the protection group should be Normal State.
10.2.10 Testing VLAN SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two stations which use the LEM24 board as an example to describe the test procedure for the VLAN SNCP protection switching.
Prerequisite
The VLAN SNCP protection must be configured. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established. The equipment must be running normally.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the VLAN SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 10-9.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
435
Figure 10-9 Testing the VLAN SNCP protection switching
Signal analyzer
F I U
OA
OADM
OADM
OA
F I U
OA
OA
West
East
F I U
OA
OADM
OADM
OA
F I U
OA
OA
East
West
1, 2, 3, 4: LEM24 Board
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments 1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to the RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with a fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-9. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE A is displayed.
2.
3. l 1.
Querying the normal channel status of station A
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
2. 3. 4.
Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the desired Ethernet board in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the VLAN SNCP Service Management tab. Select one service. Click Set/ Query Switching and select Query Switching Status, and all the current protection groups are displayed. Current Status of VLAN SNCP should be Normal State. Query the channel status of the VLAN SNCP protection. Link Status of the working service is Normal, and Link Status of the protection service is also Normal. The switching test for the VLAN SNCP protection can be performed using the following two methods. Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber in the IN optical port of the working OTU 2 at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-9. Method 2: Forced switching. On the U2000, log in to station A. In the VLAN SNCP Service Management, select working service, and click Set/Query Switching. Select Force to Protection in the displayed menu to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
5. l
2.
Query the channel states of the VLAN SNCP protection at station A. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the VLAN SNCP Service Management tab. Select one service. Click Set/Query Switching, and select Query Switching Status, all the current protection groups are displayed. In the fiber removing mode, Link Status of the working service is SF, Link Status of protection service is Normal, and Current Status of the protection group is SF Switching. In the forced switching mode, Link Status of the working service is Normal, Link Status of the protection service is Normal, and Current Status of the protection group is Forced (from Working to Protection) Switching State.
3. 4. 5.
In the NE panel of station A, right-click the LEM24 board and choose Browse Current Alarms. The VLAN_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported by the LEM24. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, and no bit error is generated. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use the following two methods: Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber. Forced switching mode: Select the working service, and click Set/Query Switching. In the displayed menu, select Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working crossconnection, and click Set/Query Switching. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working. Then right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click Set/Query Switching. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
6.
Click Set/Query Switching, and select Query Switching Status. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Current Status of the protection group should be Normal State.
----End
10.2.11 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network as an example to describe the test procedure for the tributary SNCP protection switching. The ring network consists of two stations in which the tributary board and the line board are jointly used
Prerequisite
The tributary SNCP protection must be configured. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established. The equipment must be running normally.

U2000, optical fiber, fiber adapter, signal analyzer, optical attenuator
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the tributary SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 10-10. Figure 10-10 Testing the tributary SNCP protection switching
Station A
TOM1
Station B
TOM1
OM Signal analyzer
TOM2
OD F I U F I U OM
TOM2
TOM1
N D 2 OD
N D 2
TOM2
TOM1
TOM2
: Fixed Optical Attenuator
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments 1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to the RX and TX ports on the client side of the TOM boards with a fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on the client side of the TOM boards with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-10.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
3. l 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Test the channel using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE A is displayed. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control. Click Query. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Status of the tributary SNCP protection is Normal State. Query the channel status of the tributary SNCP protection. Channel Status of the working cross-connection is Idle, and Channel Status of the protection crossconnection is Idle. The tributary SNCP protection switching test can be performed using the following two methods: Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber in the TXn optical port on the working line board TOM1 at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-10. Method 2: Forced switching. In the SNCP Service Control window for station A, select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, select Force to Protection to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
2.
Check the channel status for tributary SNCP protection of station A Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree, and click SNCP Service Control. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection is SF, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Idle. Status of the protection group is SF Switching. In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection is Forced switch, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is also Forced switch. Status of the protection group is Forced (from working to protection) switching state.
3.
In the NE panel of station A, right-click the board and choose Browse Current Alarms. The ODU_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.
NOTE
For more information, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.
4. 5.
Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, no bit error is generated. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in step 1, use the following two methods: Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber. Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
439

NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working crossconnection and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working. Then, right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
6. ----End
Click Query. Status of the protection group should be Normal State.
10.2.12 Testing Board-Level Protection Switching

The board-level protection is classified into two modes: the general mode and the extended mode. In the extended mode, the SCS board is required. This section uses the extended boardlevel protection with two OTM stations as an example to describe the test procedure for the board-level protection switching.
Prerequisite
The board-level protection must be configured. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established. The equipment must be running normally.

Set-up Diagram
Figure 10-11 shows the connection for testing the board-level protection switching. Figure 10-11 Testing the board-level protection switching
TX1 TI1
TBE1 TBE1
Signal analyzer
S C S
RO1
TBE2
TBE1
L 4 G
O A D M
F I U
F I U
O A D M
L 4 G
TBE2
TBE1
RX1
TBE2 TBE2
Station A
Station B
Procedure
l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Connecting test instruments

1.
At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to the RO1 input optical port and T11 output optical port on the client side of the SCS with a fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the TX1 output optical port and the RX1 input optical port on the client side of the TBE with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-11. Test the channel using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE A is displayed. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE and choose Configuration > Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list in the right-hand pane. The switching status for board-level protection should be Idle. Check the board status for board-level protection. If the TBE1 is in slot IU7 and the TBE2 is in slot IU8, then Working Board is 107-11TBE, Working Board Status is Usable, Protection Board is 108-11TBE, Protection Board Status is Usable, and Active Board is Working Board. The board-level protection switching test can be performed using the following two methods. Method 1: Fiber removing. At station A, remove the fiber for the RX1 port of the TBE1, as shown in Figure 10-11. Method 2: Forced switching. In the board-level protection window for station A, right-click the desired protection group on the U2000. Select Forced Switching to Protection to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
2.
3. l 1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
2.
Check the board status of station A Choose Configuration > Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In the fiber removing mode, Working Board is 107-11TBE, Working Board Status is Unusable, Protection Board is 108-11TBE; Protection Board Status is Usable, Switching Status is Auto Switching, and Active Board is Protection Board. In the forced switching mode, Working Board is 107-11TBE, Working Board Status is Usable; Protection Board is 108-11TBE; Protection Board Status is Usable; Switching Status is Forced Switching to Protection; and Active Board is Protection Board.
3. 4.
Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, no bit error is generated. If all the previous items meet the requirements, the following two methods can be used to restore the switching status to normal. Reconnect the fiber.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
441
Right-click the desired protection group in the Protection Group, and select Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box. 5. ----End Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. The switching status should be restored to Idle.
10.2.13 Testing Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP Protection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the DBPS and MS SNCP protection switching. In this section, the service between station A and station C on a ring that consists of three stations is used as an example.
Prerequisite
An MS SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station A (or subrack m). An MS SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station B (or subrack n). An SW SNCP protection group must be configured at station C. A service path is configured between the (TX2/RX2) port of the L4G board at station C and the (TX1/RX1) port of the TBE board at station A for observation. See Figure 10-12.
NOTE
The signal flow of the service path is as follows: The DSLAM forwards the service data from the BRAS to another RX2 port of the L4G. The service data is output through the OUT port for transmission over the line after the electrical cross-connection is performed. Then, the IN port of the L4G at station A receives the service data. The service data is output through the TX1 port of the TBE1 board after the electrical cross-connection is performed. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see the Configuration Guide.
The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established. The equipment must be running normally.

U2000, SmartBits (SMB), optical fiber, fiber adapter
For the MS SNCP protection switching that is triggered by the fault on the OTN side, see 10.2.8 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching.
Set-up Diagram
Figure 10-12 and Figure 10-13 show the DBPS protection and MS SNCP protection in the normal and switching states. In Figure 10-12 and Figure 10-13, the L4G boards numbered 1, 4 and 5 are the working OTU boards. The L4G boards numbered 2, 3 and 6 are the protection OTU boards.
Figure 10-12 DBPS and MS SNCP protection (normal)

SMB
TX
P1
RX
TX
P2
RX
TX
P3
RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
Bras 1
Master
RX1 TX1 RX2 TX2
Bras 2
Slave
RX2 RX3 TX3 TX1 RX1 TX2
TBE
Master
TBE 2 Slave
L4G 1 OUT IN
L4G 2
RX1 TX1
TX1 RX1
L4G 3
L4G 4
IN OUT
Station A
Station B
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
L4G 5
TX2 RX2 TX1 RX1 RX1 TX1
L4G 6
DSLAM
TX2 RX2
Station C
Service signals Observed service signals
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
443
Figure 10-13 DBPS and MS SNCP protection (switching)

SMB
TX
P1
RX TX
P2
RX TX
P3
RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
Bras 1
Slave
RX1 TX1 RX2 TX2 RX3 TX3 TX1 RX1
Bras 2
Master
RX2 TX2
TBE 1 Slave
TBE 2 Master
L4G 1
OUT IN
L4G 2 Station
RX1 TX1
TX1 RX1
L4G 3
IN
L4G 4
OUT
Station
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
L4G 5
TX2 RX2 TX1 RX1 TX2 RX1 TX1
L4G 6
DSLAM
RX2
Station C Service signals Observed service signals
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments 1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of stations A and B. See Figure 10-12. Bind P2 and P3 ports as a group to send the same packets at the same time. Make P1 receive the service signals (data packets from P2 or P3) forwarded by the DSLAM.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
444
2.
Create the electrical cross-connection from the IN port of the L4G to the TX1 port of the TBE1 at station A. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see the Configuration Guide. Use fibers to connect the output optical port of the DSLAM to the RX2 port of the L4G at station C so that a loopback is enabled. Then create the electrical crossconnection from the RX2 port of the L4G to the OUT port of the L4G. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see the Configuration Guide. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE A is displayed. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Working board is TBE1, Protection Board Status is Master. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management. Select WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, the uplink dual fed cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is, the TBE1 board duplicates the cross-connection and sends the cross-connections to the west and east L4G boards. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE B is displayed. Right-click an NE, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Working board is TBE2, and Protection Board Status is Slave. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management. Select WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, the passthrough cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is, the crossconnection passes through the west and east L4G boards.
3.
Querying the normal channel status of station A, as shown in Figure 10-12. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
Querying the normal channel status of station B, as shown in Figure 10-12. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
Querying the protection switching channel status of station A 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the fiber in the RX2 optical port of TBE1 board at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-13. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE A is displayed. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and chooseConfiguration > Distributed Board-Level Protectionfrom the Function Tree.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
445
5.
Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Working board is TBE1, and Protection Board Status is Slave. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Select WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, the passthrough cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is, the crossconnection passes through the west and east L4G boards. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE B is displayed. Right-click an NE, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Working board is TBE2, and Working Board Status is Master. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Select WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, the uplink dual fed cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is, the TBE2 board duplicates the cross-connection and sends the cross-connections to the west and east L4G boards. Reconnect the fiber into the RX2 optical port of the TBE1 board at station A.
6. 7.
Querying the protection switching channel status of station B, as shown in Figure 10-13. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
7. l
Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 or P3 - Packets received at P1) / Packet sending speed.
----End
10.2.14 Testing DBPS and ERPS Protection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the DBPS and ERPS protection switching.
Prerequisite
The fiber connections between NE A, NE B, NE C, NE D and NE E must be established. The equipment must be running normally. A pass-through service must be configured on the ring network consisting of NEs A, B, C, and E. DBPS protection is configured for NEs A and B. ERPS ring protection is configured between NEs A, B, C, D, and E. You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Set-up Diagram
As shown in Figure 10-14, the DBPS protection is configured for NEs A and B. The ERPS ring protection is configured between NEs A, B, C, D, and E. Figure 10-14 Application of protection (DBPS+ERPS)
P1 Master R1 P2 LEM24 OADM A OADM E
SMB
Slave R2 P3 LEM24 OADM B
OADM D LEM24 DSLAM
OADM C
LEM24
LEM24
LEM24
LEM24
LEM24
ERPS block
ERPS block
LEM24
D
LEM24
C
LEM24
D
LEM24
C
B A B
LEM24
LEM24
LEM24
LEM24
LEM24
D
LEM24
C
LEM24
D
LEM24
C
: Working path : DBPS protection path : ERPS protection path : Observed service path
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
447
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments. 1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of NEs A and B. See Figure 10-14. Configure the P2 and P3 ports as a group to send the same packets at the same time, and configure the P1 port as a mirrored port for monitoring. In addition, enable the P1 port to receive the service signals (data packets from the P2 or P3 port) forwarded by the DSLAM. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status window of NE A is displayed. Right-click NE A and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. At NE A, Working board is LEM24, and Protection Board Status is Master. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running Status window of NE B is displayed. Right-click NE B and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. At NE B, Working board is LEM24, and Protection Board Status is Slave. At NE A, disconnect the client-side optical port on the LEM24 board and the R1 port to trigger protection switching. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status window of NE A is displayed. Right-click NE A, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. At NE A, Working board is LEM24, and Protection Board Status is Slave. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running Status window of NE B is displayed. Right-click NE B, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. At NE B, Working board is LEM24, and Working Board Status is Master.
Querying the DBPS protection group status when NE A works normally. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Querying the DBPS protection group status when NE B works normally. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Querying the DBPS protection group status on NE A after protection switching occurs. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Querying the DBPS protection group status on NE B after protection switching occurs. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
5. l 1. 2. 3. 4. l
At NE A, reconnect the client-side optical port on the LEM24 board to the R1 port. Log in to the U2000 and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status window of NE A is displayed. Right-click NE A, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the desired LEM24 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management. Click Query. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status of State Machine is displayed as Idle. At NE A, disconnect the IN optical port and OUT optical port on the LEM24 in the direction to NE E to trigger protection switching. On the NMS select the LEM24 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management. Click Query. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status of State Machine is displayed as Protection. At NE A, restore the fiber connection to the WDM-side optical port on the LEM24. Click Query 5 to 12 minutes later. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status of State Machine is displayed as Idle.
NOTE
Querying the ERPS protection group status when NE A works normally.
Querying the ERPS protection group status on NE A after protection switching occurs. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Do not remove fibers on the protection path before services are restored to the original working path. Otherwise, services will be interrupted.
Calculate the switching time by using the following formula: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 or P3 - Packets received at P1) / Packet sending speed.
----End
10.2.15 Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the intra-subrack DBPS protection switching. In this section, the service between station A and station C is used as an example.
Prerequisite
An SW SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station A. An SW SNCP protection group must be configured at station C. A service path is configured between the (TX2/RX2) port of the L4G board at station C and the (TX1/RX1) port of the TBE board at station A for observation. See Figure 10-15.
NOTE
The signal flow of the service path is as follows: The DSLAM forwards the service data from the BRAS to another RX2 port of the L4G. The service data is output through the OUT port for transmission over the line after the electrical cross-connection is performed. Then the IN port of the L4G at station A receives the service data. The service data is output through the TX1 port of the TBE1 board after the electrical cross-connection is performed. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see the Configuration Guide.
The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established.
The equipment must be running normally.

Intra-subrack DBPS protection must work with SW SNCP protection.
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the intra-subrack DBPS protection switching is shown in Figure 10-15. Figure 10-15 and Figure 10-16 show DBPS protection and SW SNCP protection in the normal and switching states.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
450
Figure 10-15 DBPS and SW SNCP protection (normal)

SMB
TX
P1
RX TX
P2
RX
P3
TX RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
Bras 1
Master
Bras 2
RX2 TX2
Slave
RX1
TX1 RX2
TX2 RX3 TX1 RX1
TBE 1
Master
TX3
TBE 2
Slave
L4G
OUT IN IN
L4G
OUT
Station A
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
L4G
TX2 RX2 TX1 RX2 RX1 TX2
L4G Service signals Observed service signals
DSLAM
TX1 RX1
Station C
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
451
Figure 10-16 DBPS and SW SNCP protection (switching)

SMB
TX
P1
RX TX
P2
P3
RX TX RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
Bras 1
Slave
Bras 2
RX2 TX2
Master
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2 RX3 TX1 RX1
TBE 1 Slave
TX3
Master
TBE 2
L4G
OUT IN
L4G Station A
IN OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
TX2
L4G
RX2 TX1 RX2
L4G
RX1 TX2
Service signals Observed service signals Station C
DSLAM
TX1 RX1
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments 1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point for stations A. See Figure 10-15. Bind P2 and P3 ports as a group to send packets at the same time. Make P1 receive the packets (from P2 or P3) forwarded by the DSLAM. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE A is displayed. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
Querying the Normal Channel Status of Station A, as shown in Figure 10-15. 1. 2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
3. 4.
Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Working board is TBE1, and Protection Board is TBE2;Working board Status is Master, and Protection Board Status is Slave. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Choose WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. Then, the related cross-connections are displayed. In this case, the working and protection L4G boards in the SW SNCP protection group have cross-connections only with the working TBE1 in the DBPS protection. Remove the fiber in the RX2 optical port of the TBE1 board at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-16. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Working board is TBE1 and Protection Board is TBE2. Working board Status is Slave, and Protection Board Status is Master. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree, click WDM Cross-Connection Configuration. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Then, the related cross-connections are displayed. In this case, the working and protection L4G boards in the SW SNCP protection group have cross-connections only with the working TBE2 in the DBPS protection. Reconnect the fiber into the RX2 optical port of the TBE1 board at station A.
5. 6.
Querying the Protection Switching Channel Status of Station A 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
6. l
Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 or P3 - Packets received at P1) / Packet sending speed.
----End
10.2.16 Testing DLAG Protection (OTN) Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the DLAG protection switching that is triggered by the line failure after the fiber is removed.
Prerequisite
A DLAG protection group must be configured at station A. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established. The equipment must be running normally.

Set-up Diagram
Figure 10-17 and Figure 10-18 show DLAG protection in the normal and switching states. Figure 10-17 DLAG protection (normal)
SMB
TX
P1
RX TX
P2
RX
RX1 TX1 Port1/1
DSLAM
Port2/1
TX
Port2/2 RX TX RX
RX1
TX1
RX1
TX1
Master
TBE 1
Slave TBE 2
L4G
OUT IN
Station A
Figure 10-18 DLAG protection (switching)

SMB
TX
P1
RX TX
P2
RX
RX1
DSLAM
Port2/1
TX2 Port1/1 Port2/2 RX TX RX
TX
RX1
TX1
RX1
TX1
Slave TBE 1
Master
TBE 2
L4G
OUT IN
Station A
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
454
Procedure
l Connecting Test Instruments. 1. l Connect the SmartBits (SMB). See Figure 10-17. Ensure that P2 sends data packets and P1 receives the data packets. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE A is displayed. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. If the TBE1 is in slot IU11 and the TBE2 is in slot IU12, Main Board is 111 11TBE, and Slave Board is 11211TBE. Remove the fiber in the RX1/TX1 optical port on the TBE1 board at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-18. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, Main Board is 11211TBE, and Slave Board is 11111TBE. Reconnect the fiber into the RX1/TX1 optical port of TBE1 board at station A.
Query the normal channel status of station A, as shown in Figure 10-17 1. 2. 3. 4.
Query the protection switching channel status of station A. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 - Packets received at P1) / Packet sending speed.
----End
10.2.17 Testing ODUk SPRing Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by four stations, two adjacent stations which bear services, as an example to describe the test procedure for the ODUk SPRing protection switching. The ODUk SPRing protection switching mainly involves the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800.
Prerequisite
The ODUk SPRing protection must be configured. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established. The equipment must be running normally.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the ODUk SPRing protection switching is shown in Figure 10-19. Figure 10-19 Testing the ODUk SPRing protection switching
Signal analyzer
Tx
Rx Line
Tributary
ODU1-2 OADM (West) ODU1-1
FIU
FIU
ODU1-2 OADM (East) ODU1-1
Line
Tributary
Line OADM ODU1-2 (East) ODU1-1 FIU A D
Line OADM ODU1-1 (West) ODU1-2 FIU
FIU ODU1-2 OADM ODU1-1 (West) Line ODU1-1 Tributary Rx Tx Line OADM (East) ODU1-2
FIU ODU1-1 OADM ODU1-2 (East) Line
ODU1-1 FIU FIU OADM (West) ODU1-2 Line Tributary
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments 1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to the RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with a fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-19. Test the channel using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.
2.
3. l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

1. 2. 3. 4.
Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE A is displayed. Right-click the desired NE icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE and choose Configuration > ODUk SPRing from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. All ODUk SPRing protection groups are listed in the protection group list in the right-hand pane. The switching status of ODUk SPRing protection should be Idle. Check the channel status of the ODUk SPRing protection. Channel Status of the east working board is Normal, Channel Status of the east protection board is Normal.Channel Status of the west working board is Normal, and Channel Status of the west protection board is Normal. The ODUk SPRing protection switching test can be performed using the following two methods. Method 1: Fiber removing. At station A, remove the fiber of the main optical channel from the D1 port of the east OADM board to the IN port of the working line board, as shown in Figure 10-19. Method 2: Forced switching. In the ODUk SPRing protection window for station A, right-click the desired East Working Unit on the U2000, and choose Forced Switching-Ring to perform the switching. Click OK in the dialog box displayed.
5.
2.
Check the channel status of the ODUk SPRing protection of station A. Choose Configuration > ODUk SPRing from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of East Working Unit is SF, Channel Status of East Protection Unit is Normal, and Switching Status is East Switching. In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of East Working Unit is Normal, Channel Status of East Protection Unit is also Normal, and Switching Status is East Switching.
3.
In the NE panel of station A, right-click the board and choose Browse Current Alarms. The ODUKSP_PS alarm must be reported.
NOTE
For details about the board that reports the ODUKSP_PS alarm, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.
4. 5.
Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, no bit error is generated. If all the previous items meet the requirements, the following two methods can be used to restore the switching status to normal. Reconnect the fiber. In the ODUk SPRing protection window for station A, right-click the desired protection group in the East Protection Unit, and choose Clear. Click OK in the dialog displayed box.
6. ----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. The switching status should be restored to Idle.
457
10.2.18 Testing Optical Wavelength Shared Protection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for OWSP protection. In this section, two adjacent stations with services on a ring that consists of four stations are used as an example for illustration.
Prerequisite
OWSP protection must be configured The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established. The equipment must be running normally.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the optical wavelength shared protection switching is shown in Figure 10-20.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
458
Figure 10-20 Testing the optical wavelength shared protection switching

Signal analyzer
Tx
Rx Tx
Rx OTU1 2 1 OADM (West) 1 2 2 1 OADM (East) 1 2 OTU2
OTU1
OTU2
2/1
1/2 2 x DCP
2/1 2 x DCP
1/2
FIU
FIU
OADM 2/1 (East) 1/2 FIU
OADM 2/1 (West) 1/2 FIU
FIU OADM 1/2 (West) 2/1 2 x DCP 2/1 1/2
FIU 2/1 OADM 1/2 (East) 2 x DCP
2 1 OADM (East) 1 2
FIU
FIU
2 1 OADM (West) 1 2
OTU2 Rx Tx Rx
OTU1 Tx
OTU2
2/1 1/2 OTU1
: Working signal
: Protection signal
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments 1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to the RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU1 with a fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU2 with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-20. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon of station A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the ONE is displayed.
2.
3. l 1.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
2. 3. 4.
Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Optical Wavelength Shared Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list in the right-hand pane. The switching status of the OWSP protection should be Idle. Check the channel status of the OWSP protection. East Working Channel is 4DCP-1(RI11), Channel Status is Normal. East Protection Channel is 2-DCP-2 (RI12), Channel Status is Normal. West Working Channel is 2-DCP-1(RI11), Channel Status is Normal. West Protection Channel is 4-DCP-2(RI12), Channel Status is Normal.
NOTE
5.
"4" in 4-DCP-2(RI12) is the slot number.
Testing the protection switching of the equipment 1. The OWSP protection switching test can be performed using the following two methods: Remove the fiber of the main optical channel from the D1 port of the east OADM to the RI11 port of the DCP, as shown in Figure 10-20. Right-click the East Working Channel on the U2000, and choose Forced Switching-Ring to perform the switching. Click OK in the dialog box displayed. 2. Check the channel status of the OWSP protection of station A, which should be consistent with the actual situation. Choose Configuration > Optical Wavelength Shared Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. After the fiber of the main optical channel is removed, the status of East Working Channel is displayed as 4-DCP-1(RI11). The value of Channel Status is SF. The status of East Protection Channel is displayed as 2-DCP-2(RI12). The value of Channel Status is Normal, and the value of Switching Status is East Switching. After the Forced Switching-Ring is selected, the status of East Working Channel is displayed as 4-DCP-1(RI11). The value of Channel Status is Normal. The status of East Protection Channel is displayed as 2-DCP-2 (RI12). The value of Channel Status is Normal, and the value of Switching Status is East Switching. 3. 4. 5. Query the alarms on the U2000. The OWSP_PS alarm must be reported by DCP. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, no bit error is generated. If all the previous items meet the requirements, the following two methods can be used to restore the switching status to normal. Reconnect the fiber. Right-click East Working Channel, and choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box. 6. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. The switching status should be restored to Idle.
----End
10.2.19 Testing Linear MS Protection Switching

The linear MSP is configured to the network to protect services that are carried by the linear MS working paths. This section describes how to test 1+1 or 1:1 linear MS protection switching.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NMS user with "NE and NMS operator" authority or higher. The linear MSP must have been created and configured on the U2000. See Configuration Example: Configuring the 1+1 Linear MSP Services and Configuration Example: Configuring the 1:N Linear MSP Services in the Feature Description. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established.

U2000, SDH analyzer
Set-up Diagram
Figure 10-21 shows the diagram for testing the 1+1 or 1:1 linear MS protection switching. Figure 10-21 Testing the 1+1 or 1:1 linear MS protection switching
VC4:VC4-1 1 1 x STM-1 1 VC4:VC4-1
SDH analyzer
19 NE2:
1 x STM-1
19 NE1:
Optical attenuator
Line board Line board Line board 20-SLO16 1-SLQ64 19-SLQ64
Line board Line board Line board 20-SLO16 1-SLQ64 19-SLQ64 Traffic flow of the working path Traffic flow of the protection path STM-16 line board STM-64 line board
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to an NE2 service port as in the previous connection diagram. Loopback the service port of NE1 at the ODF side. The meter reads that services are normal. Step 2 Log in to the U2000. Right-click the NE1 icon and choose NE Explorer. Step 3 Select the optical interface board in slot 1, and choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Check the By Function radio button, and select Laser Switch from the dropdown list.
Step 4 Select the port whose laser is to be shut down. Set Laser Switch to Off. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Step 5 Observe the SDH analyzer. No alarms related to services arise. It indicates that services are normal after switching. Step 6 Query the NE alarms. The ESC board should report the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms. l If the switching scheme is set to Dual-Ended Switching, both NE1 and NE2 report these two alarms. l If the switching scheme is set to Single-Ended Switching, only NE2 reports these two alarms.
NOTE
Dual-Ended Switching and Single-Ended Switching are only available for 1+1 linear MSP. For 1:1 linear MSP, no optional switching scheme is available and the protections switching scheme is Dual-End Switching.
Step 7 Follow the previous steps 2 through 4 to switch on the laser. Step 8 Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer. l Revertive Mode: Revertive. Query NE alarms. The MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms ends. l Revertive Mode: Non-Revertive. The meter reads that services are normal and the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms persists. Log in to the U2000. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection Subnet. Select the linear MS protection subnet. Select Start/Stop Protocol > Stop the Protocol Networkwide. Then choose Start/Stop Protocol > Start the Protocol Networkwide. Click Query. Observe the state of the working channel. The state must be Idle (Near End).
NOTE
Revertive and Non-Revertive are available only for 1+1 linear MSP. For 1:1 linear MSP, no optional restore modes is available and the restore mode is Revertive.
Step 9 Remove the loopback set up in step 1. ----End
10.2.20 Testing Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection Switching

If the network is configured as a bidirectional MSP ring, services carried by the MSs working paths are protected. This section describes how to test the two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection switching.
Prerequisite
l l
The authority of "NE and NMS operator" or higher is required.
The two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection or four-fiber bidirectional MSP protection must have been created and configured on the U2000. See Configuration Example: Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring in the Feature Description. l The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established.

U2000, SDH analyzer
Set-up Diagram
When the switching is complete, the service is restored after the restoration time. The restoration time consists of the transmission time for the service to pass through the optical fiber and through the equipment. Figure 10-22 shows the diagram for testing the two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection switching. If the MSP is formed through the SLQ64 board and the STM-1 service running from NE1 to NE3 is configured, the service flows in the NE1-NE2-NE3 direction. Figure 10-22 Testing the two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection switching
Optical attenuator 1STM-1 VC4:VC4-1 NE2: Line board 19-SLQ64 Line board 1-SLQ64 VC4:VC4-1 Service pass-through 1 NE1 19 NE2 1 NE3 MSP ring NE4 Line board NE1: 20-SLO16 Line board Line board 1-SLQ64 19-SLQ64 19
19
STM-16 line board STM-64 line board Traffic flow
NE3: Line boardLine board 19-SLQ64 1-SLQ64 Line board 20-SLO16 SDH analyzer
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
463
NOTE
Select the set-up diagram and test method based on the actual networking conditions.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to the service port of NE3 as in the previous set-up diagram. At the ODF side, loopback the service port of NE1. The meter reads that services are normal. Step 2 Run the U2000. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection Subnet from the Main Menu to check the active/standby status of the resources before the switching. Step 3 Run the U2000. Right-click the NE1 icon and choose NE Explorer. Step 4 Select the optical interface board in slot 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click the By Function radio button, and select Laser Switch from the dropdown list. Step 5 Select the port whose laser is to be shut down. Set Laser Switch to Off. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Step 6 Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarms related to services are generated, it indicates that services are normal after switching. Step 7 Query the NE alarms. If NE1 and NE2 report the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms, it indicates that MSP switching occurs between NE1 and NE2. Step 8 Open the laser on the board in slot 1. Step 9 Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is generated, it indicates that services are normal after switching. Step 10 Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms are reported on NE1 and NE2, it indicates that the MSP switching between NE1 and NE2 is complete. Step 11 Remove the loopback set up in step 1. Step 12 Repeat the preceding steps to perform the test in the remaining spans one by one. ----End
10.2.21 Testing Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection Switching

If the network is configured as a bidirectional MSP ring, services carried by the MSs working paths are protected. This section describes how to test the four-fiber bidirectional MSP protection switching.
Prerequisite
l l The authority of "NE and NM operator" or higher is required. The two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection or four-fiber bidirectional MSP protection must have been created and configured on the U2000. See Configuration Example: Configuring the Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring of the Feature Description.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

U2000, SDH analyzer
Set-up Diagram
When the switching is complete, the service is restored after the restoration time. The restoration time consists of the transmission time for the service to pass through the optical fiber and through the equipment. Figure 10-23 shows the diagram for testing the four-fiber bidirectional MSP protection switching. If the MSP is formed through the SLQ64 board and the STM-1 service running from NE1 to NE3 is configured, the service flows in the NE1-NE2-NE3 direction. Figure 10-23 Testing the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring protection switching
Optical attenuator VC4:VC4-1 NE2: Line board Line board Line board 19-SLQ64 18-SLQ64 Line board Line board 1-SLQ64 2-SLQ64 VC4:VC4-1 Service pass-through Traffic flow of the forward working path Traffic flow of the backward working path Traffic flow of the forward protection path Traffic flow of the backward protection path STM-16 line board STM-64 line board VC4:VC4-1 SDH analyzer Line board 20-SLO16 NE1: Line board Line board 1-SLQ64 19-SLQ64 Line board Line board 2-SLQ64 18-SLQ64
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Line board Line board 18-SLQ64 2-SLQ64 Line board Line board 19-SLQ64 1-SLQ64 NE3: Line board 20-SLO16
NOTE
Select the test connection diagram and test method according to the actual networking conditions.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
465
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to the service port of NE3 as in the set-up diagram. At the ODF side, loopback the service port of NE1. The meter reads that services are normal. Step 2 Run the U2000. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection Subnet from the Main Menu to check the active/standby status of the resources before the switching. Step 3 Test the span switching on a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.
NOTE
The working ring and protection ring in the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring are defined according to the actual service configured. In this example, the optical port of the board in slot 1 on NE1 works as the service optical port. Therefore, the outer ring in the test connection diagram is the working ring and the inner ring is the protection ring.
1. 2.
Run the U2000. Right-click the NE1 icon and choose NE Explorer. Select the optical interface board in slot 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click the By Function radio button and select Laser Switch from the drop-down list. Select the port whose laser is to be shut down. Set Laser Switch to Off. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarms related to services is generated, it indicates that services are restored after switching. Query the NE alarms. If the NE1 and NE2 reports the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms, it indicates that MSP switching occurs between NE1 and NE2. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection Subnet. Select the subnet to be viewed. Check the switching state of the four-fiber MSP ring. If one direction of NE1 and NE2 is Signal Fail-Span(local end), it indicates that section switching occurs. Open the laser on the board in slot 1. Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is generated, it indicates that services are restored after switching.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8. 9.
10. Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms are reported on NE1 and NE2, it indicates that the MSP switching between NE1 and NE2 is complete. Step 4 Test the ring switching on a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Follow step 3 to step 5 in the "Testing the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection Switching" to shut down the laser of the interface board in slot 1 and slot 2 of NE1. Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is generated, it indicates that services are restored after switching. Query the NE alarms. The NE1 and NE2 should report the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > SDH Maintain Protection Subnet from the Main Menu. Select the four-fiber MSP ring protection subnet and query the switching state. If one direction of NE1 and NE2 is Signal Fail-Ring(local end), it indicates that MSP ring switching occurs. Open the laser on the interface board in slot 1 and slot 2 of NE1.
6.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
7.
Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms are reported on NE1 and NE2, it indicates that the MSP switching between NE1 and NE2 is complete. Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms reported from NE1 and NE2 ends, it indicates that the MSP switching for NE1 and NE2 concludes. Remove the loopback set up in step 1.
8. 9.
Step 5 Repeat the preceding steps to perform the test in the remaining spans one by one. ----End
10.2.22 Testing SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a network consisting of two OADM stations as an example to describe the test procedure for the SNCP protection switching.
Prerequisite
SNCP must be created. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established. The equipment must be running normally.

U2000, SDH analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, fixed optical attenuator
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 10-24. Figure 10-24 Testing the SNCP protection switching
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
467
Procedure
l Assume that the board in slot 12 is a working board, and the board in slot 14 is a protection board. According to Figure 6-22, connect the SDH analyzer to a service port on NE C and configure a loopback on NE A on the DDF side. The SDH analyzer should display that the services are normal. Querying the channel status of NE C. Configure relevant parameters for the SDH board. For more information, see Creating SNCP in the Feature Description. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The NE running status window is displayed. Right-click the target NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list in the window. Check the channel status of the SNCP protection. For Working Service, the value of Current Status is Normal. For Protection Service, the value of Current Status is also Normal. For NE A, in the NE Explorer, select the SDH board in slot 12. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click the By Function option button, and select Laser Switch from the drop-down list. Select the port whose the laser is to be shut down, and set Laser Switch to Off. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click OK. Query the channel status of the SNCP protection group for NE C after a protection switching is performed.
NOTE
Testing the protection switching on the equipment. 1.
2. 3.
The SNCP protection switching occurs only on the NE that fails to receive services. In this example, although the laser of NE A is shut down in Step 2, the SNCP protection switching occurs on NE C that fails to receive the service from the working channel. That is why you need to perform the preceding step.
In the function tree, choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. For Working Service, the value of Current Status is SF. For Protection Service, the value of Current Status is Normal. The value of Switching Status is SF Switching. 4. 5. Test the services by using an SDH analyzer. The test result indicates that services are normal after a switching is performed. See Step 1 and Step 2 for information on how to turn on the laser. Then wait for ten minutes.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
468
If the value of Revertive Mode for the SNCP protection is set to Revertive, observe the data on the SDH analyzer. In this case, the SDH analyzer indicates that a transient service interruption has occurred, and the service has later recovered. If the value of Revertive Mode for the SNCP protection group is set to NonRevertive, do as follows: Log in to the U2000, right-click the NE icon, and choose NE Explorer. In the function tree, choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control. In the working service list, select all the services, and choose Function > Forced Switching to Working. A dialog box is displayed. Click OK, and click Close in the displayed dialog box. Choose Function > Clear. Click Close in the displayed dialog box. Choose Function > Query Switching Status. A dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The value of Current Status should be Normal. 6. ----End Release the loopback on NE A.
10.2.23 Testing SNCTP Protection Switching

This section uses a network consisting of two OADM stations as an example to describe the test procedure for the SNCTP protection switching.
Prerequisite
SNCTP must be created. The fiber connections between station A and station B must be established. The equipment must be running normally. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established.

U2000, SDH analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, fixed optical attenuator
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the SNCTP protection switching is shown in Figure 10-25.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
469
Figure 10-25 Testing the SNCTP protection switching
Procedure
l Assume that the board in slot 12 is a working board, and the board in slot 14 is a protection board. According to Figure 6-23, connect the SDH analyzer to a service port on NE C and configure a loopback on NE A on the DDF side. The SDH analyzer should display that the services are normal. Querying the channel status of NE C. Configure relevant parameters for the SDH board. For more information, see Creating SNCTP in the Feature Description. 1. 2. 3. 4. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the ONE is displayed. Right-click the target NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > SNCTP. Click Query Protection Group. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list on the right of the window. Check the channel status of the SNCTP protection. The value of Current Status should be Normal.
5.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Test protection switching on the equipment. 1. In the NE Explorer of NE A, select the SDH board in slot 12, and then choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click the By Function option button and select Laser Switch from the drop-down list. Select the port whose laser is to be shut down, and set Laser Switch to Off. Click Apply. Click OK in the dialog box displayed. Query the channel status of the SNCTP protection group for NE C after a protection switching is performed.
NOTE
2. 3.
The SNCTP protection switching occurs only on the NE that fails to receive services. In this example, although the laser of NE A is shut down in Step 2, the SNCTP protection switching occurs on NE C that fails to receive the service from the working channel. That is why you need to perform the preceding step.
In the function tree, choose Configuration > SNCTP. Click Query Protection Group. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Query the channel status of the SNCTP protection group. The value of Current Status should be Normal, and the Switching Status should be SF. 4. 5. Test the services by using an SDH analyzer. The test result indicates that services are normal after a protection switching is performed, See Step 1 and Step 2 for information on how to turn on the laser. Then wait ten minutes. If the value of Revertive Mode of the SNCTP protection is set to Revertive, observe the data on the SDH analyzer. In this case, the SDH analyzer indicates that a transient service interruption has occurred, and the service has later recovered. If the value of Revertive Mode of the SNCTP protection group is set to NonRevertive, do as follows: Log in to the U2000. Right-click the NE icon, and choose NE Explorer. In the function tree, choose Configuration > SNCTP. Then in Slot Mapping Settings, right-click the protection channel on which a switching occurred. Then select Forced Switching to Working. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. Click OK, and click Close in the displayed dialog box. Right-click the channel, and then choose Clear. Click Close in the displayed dialog box. Right-click the channel, and then choose Query. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. Click Close. The value of Current Status should be Normal. 6. ----End Release the loopback on NE A.
10.2.24 Testing Transoceanic MSP Ring Protection Switching

A network is configured with the transoceanic MSP ring protection, which protects the services in the working path. This section describes how to test the transoceanic MSP ring protection switching.
Prerequisite
l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
The authority of "NE and NMS operator" or higher is required

The transoceanic MSP ring protection must have been created and configured on the U2000. See Configuration Example: Configuring the Transoceanic MSP Ring in the Feature Description. The MSP protocols used on the entire ring must be all transoceanic protocols. If another protocol is used on the ring, the protection switching cannot function normally. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established.
l l

U2000, SDH analyzer
Set-up Diagram
Currently, the transoceanic MSP does not support lower order services. When the transoceanic MSP is in the protection state, the extra services in the protection channel that is not preempted by the working services can be restored one minute after the protection switching. Figure 10-26 shows the diagram for testing the transoceanic MSP ring protection switching. If the STM-1 service running from NE1 to NE3 is configured, the service flows in the NE1-NE2NE3 direction.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
472
Figure 10-26 Testing the transoceanic MSP ring protection switching
Optical attenuator 1STM-1 VC4:VC4-1 NE2: Line board

19-SLQ64 Line board 1-SLQ64
NE1: 20-SLO16
Line board
Line board Line board 1-SLQ64 19-SLQ64
1 NE1 19 NE2 1 NE3
19
VC4:VC4-1 Service pass-through
Transoceanic MSP ring
NE4
19
1 Line board NE3: Line board Line board
STM-16 line board STM-64 line board Traffic flow
19-SLQ64 1-SLQ64 Line board 20-SLO16
SDH analyzer
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to the service port of NE3 as in the previous set-up diagram. At the ODF side, loopback the service port of NE1. The meter reads that services are normal. Step 2 Run the U2000. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection Subnet from the Main Menu to check the active/standby status of the resources before the switching. Step 3 Right-click the NE1 icon and choose NE Explorer. Step 4 Select the optical interface board in slot 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click the By Function option button, and select Laser Switch from the dropdown list. Step 5 Select the port whose laser is to be shut down. Set Laser Switch to Off. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
Step 6 Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is generated, it indicates that services are normal after switching. Step 7 Query the NE alarms. If the NE1 and NE3 report the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms, it indicates that the transoceanic MSP ring protection switching occurs between NE1 and NE3. Step 8 Wait one minute. Then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 9 Click Query to query the services on the NE. Check whether the extra services on the protection channel that is not preempted by the working services are restored. Step 10 Follow steps 2 through 4 to switch on the laser. Step 11 Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is generated, it indicates that services are normal after switching. Step 12 Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms are reported on NE1 and NE3, it indicates that the transoceanic MSP ring protection switching for NE1 and NE3 is complete. Step 13 Release the loopback performed in step 1. Step 14 Repeat the preceding steps to perform the test in the remaining sections one by one. ----End
10.2.25 Testing ERPS Protection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the ERPS protection switching.
Prerequisite
The fiber connections between NE A, NE B, NE C, and NE D must be established. The equipment must be running normally. ERPS ring protection is configured between NEs A, B, C, and D. You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Set-up Diagram
As shown in Figure 10-27, the ERPS ring protection is configured between NEs A, B, C, and D.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
474
Figure 10-27 Application of ERPS protection

SMB
LEM24
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
West Port
East port
East port LEM24 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 B A C D
West Port VCTRUNK2 LEM24 VCTRUNK1
West Port
East port
VCTRUNK1
East port
VCTRUNK2
West Port : ERPS working signal flow : ERPS protection signal flow
LEM24
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments. 1. l Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of NE A, see Figure 10-27. In addition, configure a client-side loopback at NE D. Log in to the U2000 and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status window of NE A is displayed. Right-click NE A, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. Select the desired LEM24 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management. Click Query. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status of State Machine is displayed as Idle. At NE A, disconnect the IN optical port and OUT optical port on the LEM24 in the direction to NE D to trigger protection switching. On the NMS select the LEM24 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management. Click Query. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status of State Machine is displayed as Protection. At NE A, restore the fiber connection to the WDM-side optical port on the LEM24. Click Query 5 to 12 minutes later. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status of State Machine is displayed as Idle.
Querying the ERPS protection group status when NE A works normally. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Querying the ERPS protection group status on NE A after protection switching occurs. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

NOTE
Do not remove fibers on the protection path before services are restored to the original working path. Otherwise, services will be interrupted.
----End
10.2.26 Testing the DLAG(OCS)

By simulating the fault on the active board and checking the service switching status and alarms on the ring network, you can verify whether the DLAG is successfully configured.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The DLAG must be configured. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established.

U2000
Set-up Diagram
The N1EGSH board is used as an example to show the process for verifying the DLAG. Figure 10-28 shows the set-up diagram. Figure 10-28 Testing the DLAG
Working board:N1EGSH Working port: Port 1-4 Standby board: N1EGSH Standby port: Port 1-4 NE2 U2000 NE1 Working board:N1EGSH Working port: Port 1-4 Standby board: N1EGSH Standby port: Port 1-4 NE3
DLAG NE4
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
476
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer of NE1, select NE1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query to check the active board, main port, standby board, main port, working board, and working port.
NOTE
Normally, the active board is the working board and the main port is the working port.
Step 3 Remove the active N1EGSH board on the NE1. Step 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to query the current service. The current service is not interrupted. The working board is changed to the standby board, and the working port is changed to the standby port, which indicates that the DLAG is configured successfully. ----End
10.3 Testing Data Characteristics

This section describes how to test the data characteristics.
10.3.1 Testing the LCAS

By dynamically adding and deleting members, masking failed members, and restoring failed members, you can determine whether the LCAS is successfully configured.
Prerequisite
The LCAS must be configured.
During adjustment of the services with the LCAS function enabled, the corresponding alarm is reported on the U2000. This alarm can be used to verify whether the operation is successful. l During adjustment of the services, the LCAS protocol checks whether the configured members are the same as the actual negotiated members. When the actual bound members at the source or sink end are less than the configured members, the opposite end reports an alarm indicating the partial loss of bandwidth, such as LCAS_PLCR or LCAS_PLCT. When all members are deleted, the local end reports the LCAS_TLCR and LCAS_TLCT alarms. Normally, when the LCAS negotiation is unavailable, the performance events are deleted forcibly due to the timeout. If the LCAS state at one end is switched from Enabled to Disabled, the LCAS_FOPR alarm indicating the failure of the LCAS protocol (the LCAS protocol fails in the receive direction) is reported at the other end.
Procedure
Step 1 Verifying the LCAS by dynamically deleting members at one end:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
In the Main Topology, select the NE at one end. Right-click this NE, and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. Select the corresponding board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port, and the internal port configuration window is displayed. In the internal port page, select the Bound Path tab. A list of the bound paths is displayed. Click Configuration. In the Bound Path Configuration dialog box, select Display in Combination. Select any bound path to be deleted from Selected Bound Paths and click .
Right-click the Ethernet board on the NE at the opposite end, and choose Browse Current Alarms from the shortcut menu. In the Browse Current Alarms dialog box, the LCAS-related minor alarms LCAS_PLCR and LCAS_PLCT reported by the system are displayed.
NOTE
If all members of the bound paths are deleted, the major alarm LCAS_TLCR is reported at the local end, which indicates the complete loss of bandwidth in the receive direction.
Step 2 Verifying the LCAS by dynamically adding members at one end: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. In the Main Topology, select the NE at one end. Right-click this NE and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. Select the corresponding board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port. The internal port configuration window is displayed. In the internal port page, select the Bound Path tab. A list of the bound paths is displayed. Click Configuration, and add bound paths as required. Click OK. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box. Then the new members are added to the local end. In the Board Tree in the left pane, select the Ethernet board configured with the LCAS function. Right-click this board, and select Browse Current Alarms from the shortcut menu. In the Browse Current Alarms dialog box, the LCAS-related minor alarms LCAS_PLCR and LCAS_PLCT reported by the system are displayed.
NOTE
9.
Because new members are dynamically added to only one end, the total traffic does not change. In the Bound Path tab, query the actual used paths and check whether they are the same as those before the new members are added. The Ethernet board at the local end reports the LCAS_PLCR alarm, but no packets are lost. If the equivalent number of new members is added to the other end, after the WTR time for the LCAS, the previous LCAS_PLCR alarm clears.
Step 3 Verifying the LCAS by masking the failed members: 1. 2. 3.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
In the Main Topology, select the NE at one end. Right-click this NE and select NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > SDH Service configuration. The list of members configured with SDH services is displayed in the cross-connection window pane. Select one or more members to be masked.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Click the Deactivate button in the right pane. The Confirm dialog box is displayed to query whether to deactivate all the selected services. Click OK. Masking the selected members is complete. In the Board Tree in the left pane, select the Ethernet board configured with the LCAS function. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface. Select Internal Port, and the internal port configuration window is displayed. In the Internal Port page, select the Bound Path tab.
10. Click the Query button. 11. Query the The Used Channel column. The paths that correspond to the deactivated members are masked and not displayed. 12. In the board list, select the board configured with the LCAS function. Right-click this board, and choose Browse Current Alarms from the shortcut menu. 13. In the Browse Current Alarms dialog box, the LCAS-related minor alarms LCAS_PLCR and LCAS_PLCT reported by the system are displayed. 14. Query the current alarms of the Ethernet board configured with the LCAS function on the opposite NE, and the same alarms are displayed.
NOTE
The LCAS_PLCT and LCAS_PLCR alarms indicate that the actual number of paths in the transmit (receive) VCTRUNK with the LCAS enabled is smaller than the configured number of paths. After the cross-connections are deactivated, paths that correspond to the originally used paths become invisible. This indicates that the failed members are successfully masked.
Step 4 Verifying the LCAS by restoring the failed members: 1. 2. 3. Based on Step 3, select the previously deactivated members. Click the Deactivate button in the lower area of the window. The failed cross-connections are restored. The Confirm dialog box displays to query whether to activate the selected services. Click OK to restore the failed members. Perform substeps Step 3.7 to Step 3.10 in step 3. Then, in the The Used Channel column, the paths that correspond to the masked members are displayed.
NOTE
After the WTR time (300s by default) of the LCAS, the previously reported LCAS_PLCR and LCAS_PLCT alarms clear. This indicates that the failed members are successfully restored.
CAUTION
During the process of dynamically deleting members or masking failed members, packet loss occurs. The packet loss time equals the number of lost packets divided by the packet transmitting rate. The WTR time can be lengthy and is 300s by default. If the preceding verification operations are successfully complete and the query results are the same as those mentioned, it indicates that the LCAS function is successfully configured. ----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
479
10.3.2 Testing the LAG

By simulating the fault at the main port and checking the service switching status and alarms on the ring network, you can verify whether the LAG is successfully configured.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The LAG must be configured. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established.

U2000
Set-up Diagram
The EGSH board is used as an example to show the process of verifying the LAG. Figure 10-29 shows the set-up diagram. Figure 10-29 Testing the LAG
Data board:N1EGSH Working port: Port1 NE2 U2000 Data board:N1EGSH Working port: Port1 standby port: Port2 NE1 standby port: Port2 NE3
LAG NE4
Procedure
Step 1 The process for verifying the LAG in non-load-sharing mode is as follows. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
In NE Explorer for NE1, select the EGSH board. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation from the Function Tree. Click Query. Ensure that the state of the main port Port 1 is working, and the state of the standby port Port 2 is non-working. Choose Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree, and select External Port in the right pane. In the Basic Attributes tab, change the state of Port 1 from Enabled to Disabled.
5. 6.
Right-click the EGSH board in the board list and choose Browse Alarms from the shortcut menu. Query whether the LAG_PORT_FAIL alarm is reported among the current alarms. Repeat steps Step 1.1 to Step 1.2, and query the states of the ports. The state of Port 1 is non-working, and the state of Port 2 is working.
NOTE
The preceding operations indicate that the system successfully switches the service transmitted through the main port to the standby port within 4s when the main port is unavailable.
Step 2 The process for verifying the LAG in load-sharing mode is as follows.
NOTE
In load-sharing mode, more than one standby port is available. Generally, traffic exists in the main and standby links. When the main port is unavailable, traffic that originally exists in the main link is loaded by the standby links. That is, all the standby links share the load of the main link.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
In the NE Explorer for NE1, select the EGSH board. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation from the Function Tree. Click Query. Ensure that the state of the main port is working, and the states for the standby ports are working. Choose Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree, and select External Port in the right pane. In the Basic Attributes tab, change the state of the main port from Enabled to Disabled. Right-click the EGSH board in the board list and choose Browse Alarms from the shortcut menu. Query whether the LAG_PORT_FAIL alarm is reported among the current alarms. Repeat steps Step 2.1 to Step 2.2, and query the states of the ports. The state of the main port is non-working, and the states of the standby ports are working.
----End
10.3.3 Testing the LPT

By simulating the link fault at the access point and querying the alarms reported on the NE, you can verify whether the LPT is configured successfully.
Prerequisite
l l l The Ethernet service must be configured on the specified port. The LPT function must be enabled for the transmission equipment at the local and opposite ends. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding Ethernet board. Select Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query in the lower right corner, and ensure that the LPT state of the specified port is enabled. Step 3 Select Ethernet Interface from Ethernet Interface Management at left hand pane, and select External Port in the right pane. Step 4 Click the Basic Attributes tab, and select Disabled from the Enabled/Disabled drop-down list. This causes the corresponding laser on the local board to shut down so that the access link becomes unavailable. Step 5 In the Main Topology, right-click the opposite NE and choose Browse Current Alarms from the shortcut menu to query the alarms on the opposite NE. In the query results, the ETH_LOS and LPT_RFI alarms are displayed. Step 6 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to open the laser that was previously shut down, and query the alarms on the opposite NE. Step 7 The ETH_LOS and LPT_RFI alarms on the opposite NE are cleared, indicating that the LPT is successfully configured. ----End
10.3.4 Testing the STP/RSTP

By checking the packet transmission when the STP/RSTP function is enabled and disabled, you can verify whether the STP/RSTP is successfully configured.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet LAN services must be configured. The STP/RSTP must be configured. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established.

U2000, SMB meters
Set-up Diagram
The EGSH board is used as an example to show the process for verifying the STP/RSTP. Figure 10-30 shows the set-up diagram.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
482
Figure 10-30 Testing the STP/RSTP

Data board:N1EGSH Data board:N1EGSH NE2 U2000 NE1 Data board:N1EGSH NE3
STP/RSTP NE4
SMB A Data board:N1EGSH
SMB B
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer of NE1-NE4, select the EGSH board. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Protocol Enabled tab, and select the corresponding EGSH board in the board list. Click Fast Config in the lower right corner. Step 3 In the Fast Config window, double-click the Protocol Enabled drop-down list, select Disabled, and click OK. This causes the STP/RSTP protocol that was previously enabled to be disabled. Step 4 Connect SMB A to NE1, and connect SMB B to NE3. Step 5 Use the packet transmitting function of the SMB meter to create and transmit data packets to the ring network. Step 6 Then SMB B receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, and SMB A also receives the packets transmitted by itself.
NOTE
On a ring network, if an NE receives the data packets transmitted by itself, it indicates that the packets are cycled; or in other words, a broadcast storm occurs.
Step 7 Repeat steps 1 through 3. In the Fast Config window, enable the STP/RSTP protocol on the EGSH boards of NE1-NE4. Step 8 Use SMB A on NE1 again to transmit data packets to the ring network. Step 9 Then, SMB B then receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, but SMB A does not receive the packets transmitted by itself.
NOTE
The data packets are not cycled on the ring network. That is, the broadcast storm is effectively avoided after the STP/RSTP protocol is enabled, and the STP/RSTP is successfully configured.
----End
10.3.5 Testing the MSTP

By checking the packet transmission when the MSTP function is enabled and disabled, you can verify whether the MSTP is successfully configured.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The MSTP must be configured. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be correctly established.

U2000, SMB meters
Set-up Diagram
The N1EGSH board is used as an example to show the process for verifying the MSTP, and Figure 10-31 shows the setup diagram. Figure 10-31 Testing the MSTP
Data board:N1EGSH
Data board:N1EGSH NE2 U2000 NE1 Data board:N1EGSH
MSTP NE4
NE3
SMB A Data board:N1EGSH
SMB B
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Multiple Spanning Tree from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Protocol Parameters tab, and set Enable Protocol to Disabled. Click Apply. This causes the MSTP protocol that is previously enabled to be disabled. Step 3 Connect SMB A to NE1, and connect SMB B to NE3.
Step 4 Use the packet transmitting function of the SMB meter to create and transmit data packets to the ring network. Step 5 The SMB B then receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, and SMB A also receives the packets transmitted by itself.
NOTE
On a ring network, if an NE receives the data packets transmitted by itself, it indicates that the packets are cycled; or in other words, a broadcast storm occurs.
Step 6 Repeat steps 1 through 3. Set Enable Protocol to Enabled for the MSTP protocol on the N1EGSH boards of NE-NE4. Step 7 Use SMB A on NE1 again to transmit data packets to the ring network. Step 8 The SMB B then receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, but SMB A does not receive the packets transmitted by itself.
NOTE
The data packets are not cycled on the ring network. That is, the broadcast storm is effectively avoided after the MSTP protocol is enabled, and the MSTP is successfully configured.
----End
10.4 Testing System Features

The system features includes IPA, ALC, APE, and EAPE.
10.4.1 Testing IPA

This section describes how to test the IPA function.
Prerequisite
Optical power commissioning must be complete. The IPA must be configured.

U2000
The IPA can be rebooted by using three methods: automatic reboot, manual reboot, testing reboot. This section uses the manual reboot as an example to describe the procedure for testing IPA.
IPA Verification Diagram

For the IPA verification diagram, see Figure 10-32, Figure 10-33, Figure 10-34, or Figure 10-35.
Figure 10-32 IPA verification diagram

Station A
Optical amplifier unit 1
Station B
fiber break
Figure 10-33 IPA verification diagram (Backward Raman)

Site A 1 Raman Amplifier 4 Raman Amplifier 3 fiber break Site B 2
Figure 10-34 IPA verification diagram (Forward Raman+Backward Raman)

Site A 1 Raman Amplifier 4 Raman Amplifier Raman Amplifier fiber break Raman Amplifier 3 Site B 2
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
486
Figure 10-35 IPA verification diagram (Forward Raman+ROP+Backward Raman)

Site A 1 Raman Amplifier 4 Raman Amplifier ROP Raman Amplifier fiber break ROP Raman Amplifier 3 Site B 2
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the ONE is displayed. Step 2 Right-click the NE A icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box. Step 3 Select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the Function Tree. Step 4 In IPA Protection in the right-hand pane, set the Enable/Disable to Enabled. Step 5 Select NE B. See steps 2 through 4 to configure the IPA function. Step 6 Remove the fiber of the output port on the OAU1.
NOTE
For the IPA function, if the Raman amplifier is configured and the optical supervisory channel (OSC) board functions as the auxiliary detection board, you need to remove the fiber from the OUT port of the amplifier board 1 and the fiber from the output port of the OSC board.
Step 7 Log in NE A and NE B separately. In the function tree in the left-hand pane, choose Configuration > IPA Management. Step 8 In IPA Protection, select the desired IPA protection pair. Right-click the Status column, and select Query State. The state Power off should display. Step 9 Insert the fiber of the output port of the OAU1. Step 10 In IPA Protection, click Manual Reboot. A message indicating a successful operation is displayed in the prompt dialog box.
NOTE
Click Manual Reboot. The disabled laser will then be enabled again after the specified off period for the laser.
Step 11 Click Close. Step 12 In IPA Protection, select Status. Right-click Query State. Restart should display. After the Off Period, the board state is displayed as Power on. ----End
Related Information
For details on the function, principle, and how to configure IPA protection groups, see the Feature Description.
10.4.2 Testing ALC

This section describes how to test the ALC function.
Prerequisite
The ALC Link must be created. The parameters must be configured according to Parameters in the Feature Description.

U2000, optical power meter
ALC Verification Diagram

For the ALC verification diagram, see Figure 10-36. Figure 10-36 ALC verification diagram
Station A Station B DCM-D OAU1 From M40 OAU DCM-D OTM (NE51) OAU2 StationC DCM-D OAU3
To D40
To D40
OAU DCM-D OLA (NE53) : VOA
OAU V40 M40 OTM (NE54)
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to U2000. Choose Configuration > WDM ALC Management from the Main Topology. Step 2 In WDM ALC Management, click the NG Complete Link tab. In the list of links, select a link whose Status is Idle. Step 3 On the U2000, query and record the line attenuation and node gain for stations A, B, and C, also record the input and output optical power of OAU1, OAU2, and OAU3.
Step 4 On the ALC link, adjust the variable optical attenuator (VOA) between stations A and B to increase the attenuation between the two stations by 3 dB. Step 5 Query the input and output optical power of OAU2 on the U2000. Compare the test value with the input optical power value obtained before adjusting the VOA to ensure that the test value is 3 dB lower. At the same time, check whether the difference between the line attenuation value and node gain value of station B is not less than 3 dB. Also check whether an event that indicates an ALC optical power anomaly exists.
NOTE
For the method for querying optical power, see the Supporting Tasks.
Step 6 When the icon of the downstream NE turns red, in the Link ID list, select the link. Click Start Automatic Link Adjustment to start the ALC adjustment. Also check whether the ALC adjustment event occurs.
NOTE
For the NG link that is configured with the VOA board, when sign occurs at the downstream node, the system gives precedence to adjusting the VOA board after the ALC adjustment function is enabled. In addition, check whether the ALC adjustment event and the VOA adjustment event exist.
Step 7 After the ALC adjustment is complete, the icon for the NE restores to the original color, and an event that indicates the end of the ALC adjustment occurs.
NOTE
For the NG link that is configured with the VOA board, after the ALC adjustment is complete, the disappears, and an event that indicates the end of the ALC adjustment occurs.
sign
Step 8 Query the input and output optical power for OAU2/OAU3 on the U2000. Compare the test value with the value obtained before the adjustment is performed to check whether they are the same. At the same time, check whether the line attenuation value and the node gain value for station B are consistent. If that is the case, it indicates that the ALC has been enabled.
NOTE
If OAU1 is the adjustment board, use the following formula: Adjustment range of OAU1 with DCM = Adjustment range of OAU1 without DCM - DCM insertion loss - 1 dBm
----End
Related Information
For details on the function, principle, and how to configure ALC links, see the Feature Description.
10.4.3 Testing APE

The APE function ensures the optical power flatness at the receive end, which ensures the signalto-noise ratio. The APE test is performed to determine if the APE function is started.
Prerequisite
The system optical power commissioning must be completed.

U2000, VOA
When the flatness of the optical power for each channel at the receive end differs significantly from that configured in deployment commissioning, the APE function can automatically adjust the optical power of each channel at the transmit end. This ensures that the flatness of the optical power at the receive end is closer to that configured in deployment commissioning. For a detailed description of the APE, see the Feature Description. For details on how to configure the APE function and how to start the APE function on the U2000, see the Feature Description. Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexer boards and optical multiplexer boards supporting APE function are the M40V, WSM9, WSMD2, WSMD4, WSMD9, ROAM and RMU9 boards. This section describes the APE commissioning on the M40V board. This section uses the M40V as an example to describe the APE function. The following descriptions provide the details for commissioning the APE from west to east. The commissioning of the APE from east to west is the same as the commissioning from west to east. The APE function testing configuration is shown in Figure 10-37. Figure 10-37 APE function test configuration diagram
OTU OTU West OTU OTU D 4 0 M 4 0 V D 4 0 SC1 M 4 0 V OTU OTU East OTU OTU
OA F I U OA F I U
OA MCA
SC1
OA
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to U2000. Configure the APE function on the U2000. Set the standard optical power curve and the wavelength to be checked. Save the configuration data.
NOTE
It is recommended to set the power unbalance threshold to 1.5 dB.
Step 2 Add more VOAs at any OTU WDM-side output port, and adjust the attenuation to a minimum. Step 3 Step up the attenuation of the VOA until the MCA detects that the optical power of the channel has decreased by 3 dB.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
490

NOTE
l The attenuation of a channel is configurable. The attenuation of a channel must be higher than the power unbalance threshold. It is recommended that the attenuation for a channel be set to 3 dB. l The ALC function may be enabled after the optical power decreases. l After the MCA scan cycle, the APE event report dialog window is displayed indicating that the power is unbalanced.
Step 4 On the U2000, select the desired NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Optical Power Equilibrium from the Function Tree. Step 5 Click Query to review information about the created APE pair. Step 6 Select the desired APE pair from the APE Pair list. Step 7 On the U2000, click Start Regulation on the bottom to start the APE function. After the APE adjusts the power, the difference between the system optical power curve flatness at the receive end and the standard optical power curve flatness should be less than the power unbalance threshold.
NOTE
The APE completes adjusting the optical power within five minutes. After the adjustment, the APE event report dialog window is displayed indicating that the adjustment is successful.
Step 8 Remove the VOAs at the OTU WDM-side output port added in step 2. Step 9 On the U2000, start the APE function by referring to step 7. After the APE adjusts the power, the difference between the system optical power curve flatness at the receive end and the standard optical power curve flatness should be less than the power unbalance threshold.
NOTE
The APE completes adjusting the power within five minutes. After the adjustment, the APE event report dialog window is displayed indicating that the adjustment is successful.
----End
10.4.4 Testing EAPE

EAPE adjustment can be enabled to ensure that the receive-end signal quality for each channel meets the preset requirement and that the services are available. This section describes how to test the EAPE function.
Prerequisite
The system optical power commissioning must be complete. There is no optical power alarm or bit error alarm in the system. The EAPE functions for the related trails are enabled.

U2000, Optical power meter, VOA
When the receive performance for each channel at the receive end of the system changes greatly, the EAPE function adjusts the optical power of each channel at the transmit end. In this way, it
is ensured that the performance of the optical signals at the receive end is close to that in the deployment commissioning. l For the OptiX OSN 8800, the Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing (ROADM) boards and optical multiplexer board supporting the EAPE function are the ROAM, M40V, D40V, WSM9, WSD9, WSMD4, WSMD2, WSMD9, VA1, and VA4 boards. For the OptiX OSN 6800, the ROADM boards and optical multiplexer board supporting the EAPE function are the ROAM, M40V, D40V, WSM9, WSD9, WSMD4, WSMD2, WSMD9, VA1, and VA4 boards. For the OptiX OSN 3800, the ROADM boards supporting the EAPE function are the VA1, and VA4 boards. This section uses the west-to-east signal flow and the LOG board for OptiX OSN 8800 as an example to describe the EAPE commissioning, and the EAPE function is configured on the OCh trail where the LOG is located. This section uses the west-to-east signal flow and the LOG board and the VA4 for OptiX OSN 6800/3800/6800A/3800A as an example to describe the EAPE commissioning, and the EAPE function is configured on the OCh trail where the LOG is located.
l l
EAPE Verification Diagram

l l For the EAPE verification diagram, see Figure 10-38 for OptiX OSN 8800. For the EAPE verification diagram, see Figure 10-39 for OptiX OSN 6800/3800.
Figure 10-38 EAPE verification diagram

LOG LSX M R 8 V M R 8 V SC1 M R 8 V LOG LSX LOG LSX
OA F I U OA F I U
OA
West
LOG LSX M R 8 V
SC1
East
OA
: variable optical attenuator
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
492
Figure 10-39 EAPE verification diagram

LOG LSX West LOG LSX M R 4 V A 4 M R 4 M R 4 SC1 M R 4 V A 4 LOG LSX East LOG LSX
OA F I U OA F I U
OA
SC1
OA
: variable optical attenuator
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to U2000. Step 2 Add a variable optical attenuator at the output port on the WDM side of the west LOG board. Adjust the attenuation to the minimum value. Step 3 Choose Fault > Browse Events from the Main Menu. Step 4 In the Filter dialog box, set filter criteria and click OK. The event viewing window is displayed.
NOTE
l All abnormal events are selected in the default event browsing template. l If you set the startup template for viewing abnormal events, the Filter dialog box is not displayed. Alarms that meet the startup template condition are displayed instead.
Step 5 Increase the attenuation of the VOA section by section and click Refresh. Stop the adjustment until EAPE abnormal event notification is displayed in the abnormal event list. When this occurs, the EAPE adjustment needs to be started. The adjustment steps are as follows. Step 6 On the U2000, choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail. Step 7 In the Basic Setting tab of the Set Trail Browse Filter Conditions dialog box, select a proper filtering condition and click Filter All. Step 8 Select the OCh trail where the LOG board is located. Click Maintenance, and select EAPE Management from the drop-down list. Step 9 If Current Status is Can Be Adjusted, click Start Adjustment to start EAPE adjustment. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the verification is successful. After the adjustment completes, Current Status is Adjustment Not Required. Step 10 Repeat step 3 through step 5. Check the event list. EAPE adjustment result event notification should be reported indicating the adjustment is successful. ----End
Related Information
For details on the description and how to configure the EAPE function, see the Feature Description. The recommended commissioning environment is that there are more than three amplifier boards, and long fibers are used in the line.
10.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks

This section describes how to test the clock synchronization function at the physical layer.
Prerequisite
Fiber connections or clock cable connections between NEs must be established. Clocks at the physical must be configured.

ANT-20 (or MP1550A, MP1552B, MP1570A, HP37718A) clock analyzer, frequency meterU2000
Testing Items
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. External clock source input/output and tracing test. This test checks whether an external clock source is properly traced. Clock source selection and tracing test. This test checks whether clock synchronization is achieved between two NEs that are interconnected by using fibers. Line clock source and external clock source selection test. This test checks whether a line clock source and an external clock source function normally. Synchronous clock active/standby switching test. This test checks whether the active/ standby clock protection functions properly. Master/slave subrack cascading test. This test checks whether a synchronous clock can function properly when multiple subracks are cascaded.
Test Diagram
Figure 10-40 shows the diagram for the external clock source input/output and tracing test. Figure 10-40 Test Diagram
BITS
Clock analyzer A
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
494

NOTE
NE A is configured with clock and cross-connect boards.
Figure 10-41 shows the diagram for the clock source selection and tracing test. Figure 10-41 Test Diagram
BITS
Clock analyzer
A
NOTE
NEs A and B are configured with clock, cross-connect, and line boards.
Figure 10-42 shows the diagram for the line clock source and external clock source selection test. Figure 10-42 Test Diagram
BITS
Fiber 1
A
NOTE
NE A is configured with clock, cross-connect, and line boards.
Testing Item 1: External Clock Source Input/Output and Tracing Test

Step 1 Configure NE A to trace an external clock source.
Step 2 Attach a clock analyzer to NE A and the external clock source to check whether NE A properly traces the external clock source. ----End
Testing Item 2: Clock Source Selection and Tracing Test

Step 1 Configure NE A to trace an external clock source. Step 2 Configure NE B to trace a line clock. See Configuring Clock Attributes. Step 3 Attach a clock analyzer to NE B to check whether NE B properly traces the line clock source. ----End
Testing Item 3: Line Clock Source and External Clock Source Selection Test
Step 1 Configure NE A to trace an external clock source. Step 2 Configure the clock source priority table of NE A and assign the highest priority to the external clock source. See Configuring Clock Attributes. Step 3 Configuring Switching Conditions for Clock Sources. Step 4 Disconnect the external clock source from NE A. Check whether NE A can switch the clock to the line clock source by querying clock synchronization status. Step 5 Reconnect the external clock source to NE A to enable NE A to trace the line clock source. Then check whether NE A can switch the clock to the external clock source by querying clock synchronization status. ----End
Testing Item 4: Synchronous Clock Active/Standby Switching Test

Step 1 Perform an active/standby switching when an NE properly traces a clock source. Then check whether the NE properly traces a clock source by observing the data on the clock analyzer. ----End
Testing Item 5: Master/Slave Subrack Cascading Test

Step 1 Connect the master subrack or the last slave subrack to an external clock source. Set the external clock as the clock source for tracing. Step 2 Attach a clock analyzer to the master subrack or the last slave subrack to check whether the NE properly traces the external clock source. Step 3 Disconnect the master subrack or the last slave subrack from the external clock source. Configure the NE to trace a line clock for any subrack on the NE. Then check whether the NE traces this line clock by observing the data on the clock analyzer. ----End
10.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2

This section describes the procedure for testing IEEE 1588v2 features and the testing items.
10.6.1 Testing Process

This section describes the general process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features. Figure 10-43 shows the process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features. Figure 10-43 Process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features
Start
Check configurations
Formulate a commissioning plan
Start commissioning on site
Perform short-term performance tests on site
Examine the pretest results
End
Precaution
l Before Starting Deployment: Examine the IEEE 1588v2 Networking Diagram for xxx Office carefully and verify that the actual network configurations are the same as the planned network configurations. Prepare required versions according to the version mapping requirements. Prepare and verify the Clock Configuration List for xxx Office. Make plans properly and obtain the necessary permits for on-site operations in advance. l Test Point Selection: perform the acceptance test using the TimeAcc-007 or an IEEE 1588v2 time tester. Try to perform the test at the end of an IEEE 1588v2 link (a point
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
farthest from a BITS device). Supply GPS signals to the TimeAcc-007 or IEEE 1588v2 time tester. Calibrate the test instrument before performing the test.
Procedure
1. Check configurations. l After completing IEEE 1588v2-related configurations according to the network design diagrams, check the configurations based on parameters specified in the Clock Configuration List for xxx Office. 2. Formulate a commissioning plan. Determine a proper commissioning sequence according to connections of OTN equipment to BITS devices and OptiX PTN equipment. l First commission BITS devices. l Configure delay compensation along the BITS link and ensure that the source of delay compensation ports is BITS. l For a ring network, disable ports to trigger clock source switching and record the switching. After delay compensation at the standby clock tracing link is completed, restore configurations. l For OptiX PTN equipment where IEEE 1588v2 has been provided, configure delay compensation on all OTN boards before connecting OTN equipment to OptiX PTN equipment. 3. Start commissioning on site. Start commissioning from BITS and determine a proper commissioning sequence according to site conditions. Commissioning at a site must cover all time/clock tracing links. l Calibrate the instrument according to the instructions. l Test time precision of BITS: To ensure time precision of OTN equipment, observe performance of the BITS device and ensure that the clock source satisfies requirements. After completing compensation for test cable delay and antenna feeder delay, measure output at the 1PPS+TOD port on the BITS device. If the maximum difference between measurement values does not exceed 50 ns, delay compensation for the BITS device is not required; otherwise, delay compensation for the BITS device is required (in this case, contact BITS maintenance personnel).
NOTE
After completing delay compensation for BITS input signals, restart the BITS device. It takes the BITS device over two hours to become stable after the restart.
l Measure and compensate for asymmetry delay site by site. For details, see 10.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation. 4. Perform short-term performance tests on site. l To test short-term performance after asymmetry delay compensation is completed at a site, boards can be reset (cold) after ensuring that services will not be affected. For shortterm performance specifications at each site, see 10.6.3 Testing Items. 5. Examine the pre-test results and record the testing data.
10.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation

Prerequisites
All fibers or clock cables between NEs must be properly connected. Clocks at the physical must be configured and commissioned.
The IEEE 1588v2 must be configured.

Time tester and U2000
Testing Diagram
Figure 10-44 shows the diagram for testing delay compensation. Figure 10-44 Testing Diagram
Convergence layer 1PPS+TOD 2M Slave BITS 2M B Master 1PPS+TOD BITS C
Station Direction East West Board 18-11ST2-1 18-11ST2-2 AB CD
Access layer
2M E 1PPS+TOD D Node B
OTN network
Node B
:Special cables :Straight cables
:Optical cable :Physical synchronization protection route :1588 phase synchronization protection route :Physical synchronization route :1588 phase synchronization route :Crossover cables :BITS :OSN series WDM equipment :PTN equipment :Node B
Testing Delay Compensation for the Source Node (NE A, B)

The source OTN node is generally connected to the BITS device. They can be interconnected in either of the following modes: l l Connected through a 2M clock port and a 1PPS+TOD port on a clock interface board. Connected through a GE port on the STG board.
Delay compensation is configured in a similar way in both modes. The detailed procedure is as follows: 1. Determine clock synchronization status of the source node. (1) In NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Synchronization Attribute from the Function Tree. (2) Click Query. Check the query result to see whether the NE is tracing the clock provided by the BITS device. 2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Measure delay.
(1) After ensuring that the source node is tracing the clock provided by the BITS device, verify time precision of the source node. (2) Set the port to be tested to a 1PPS+TOD output port. (3) When the test instrument is stably tracing the GPS, connect the test cable to the TOD port on the OTN equipment. Considering the delay caused by the antenna feeder and test cable, check the time displayed on the test instrument 10 minutes later. When the maximum time difference does not exceed 50 ns, record the time offset of the OTN equipment. Then, configure asymmetry delay compensation using the U2000. 3. Compensate for delay. On the OTN equipment, delay may be caused by a cable or service board. (1) Compensate for delay caused by a cable connecting the BITS device's 1PPS+TOD port to the OTN equipment. For the compensation modes, see Setting Cable Transmission Distance Permitted by an External Time Port. (2) Compensate for delay caused by a service board. For the compensation modes, see Configuring the Cable Transmission Deviation for the Clock Port. 4. Calibrate delay. After delay compensation is completed, check the time difference on the OTN equipment after 10 minutes. If the maximum time difference does not exceed 100 ns, the delay compensation satisfies requirements. Otherwise, configure delay compensation again.
Testing Delay Compensation for the Intermediate Nodes (NE A, B, C, D)

The method of measuring asymmetry delay at an intermediate node varies according to the configuration. l ST2+SFIU boards. This configuration simplifies asymmetry delay compensation (no siteby-site compensation) during deployment. That is, you only need to select sites for delay compensation and the maintenance engineers will configure delay compensation at the selected sites. Adhere to the following principles when configuring delay compensation during deployment: Time will be transmitted to the downstream nodes and time must be received over two or more paths. Delay compensation must be configured for OTN equipment connected to OptiX PTN equipment and the OTN equipment must satisfy time precision requirements. At a node, compensating for a time offset caused by path switching must be completed. This ensures that the time reaching downstream nodes satisfies requirements after time source switching. As shown in Figure 10-44, each of sites A, B, and D provides one port for transferring time sources to the downstream nodes and two or more ports for receiving time sources. At these sites, delay compensation is required for path switching. After the delay compensation, no more delay compensation is required during maintenance. l OTU service boards or ST2+FIU boards. This configuration requires site-by-site asymmetry delay compensation and the compensation must cover all paths at a site. For example, site D in Figure 10-44 has two time tracing paths: B-C and D-C. Compensate for delay on path B-C (for details, see Testing Delay Compensation for the Source Node), switch the time source (by disabling a port on path B-C), and then compensate for delay on path D-C. Finally, enable the port on path B-C. Test the time precision at the time output port on the intermediate node for 10 minutes. The time offset between the intermediate node and the GPS is within 1 us.
Configuring Delay Compensation for the Sink Node and OptiX PTN Equipment (NE E, F)
OTN equipment may be connected to OptiX PTN equipment in either of the following modes: l l Connected through a 2M clock port and a 1PPS+TOD port on a clock interface board used with the STG board. Connected through a GE port on the TN52TOG board.
Delay compensation is configured in a similar way in both modes. The detailed procedure is as follows: 1. Measure time precision of the OTN equipment. (1) Measure time offsets between adjacent NEs using the time tester. Then, compensate for the delay generated at the input port of the ST2 board on each downstream OTN NE based on the time offset as well as the delay generated at the output port of the ST2 on each upstream OTN NE with the same number with reversed polarity. For details, see Testing Delay Compensation for the Source Node. (2) Test the time precision at the time output port on the sink node for 10 minutes. The time offset between the sink node and the GPS is within 1 us. 2. Measure time precision of the OptiX PTN equipment. (1) On the OptiX PTN side, test the time offset between the OptiX PTN equipments and the BITS device using the time tester. Then, compensate for the delay generated at the TOD port on the OptiX PTN equipments based on the time offset. (2) Test the time precision at the time output port on the OptiX PTN equipments for 10 minutes. The time offset between the OptiX PTN equipments and the GPS is within 1 us.
10.6.3 Testing Items

This section describes the items to be tested in the testing of IEEE 1588v2 features.
Prerequisites
All fibers or clock cables between NEs must be properly connected. Clocks at the physical must be configured and commissioned. The IEEE 1588v2 must be configured.

Time tester and U2000
Testing Items
1. Time precision of interconnected OTN devices using ST2+SFIU boards test: To verify that OTN devices with ST2+SFIU boards can ensure time precision by overcoming asymmetry issues. Long-term jitter in a physical clock synchronization mode test: To test long-term stability when NEs work in physical clock synchronization mode.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
3. 4. 5.
Long-term jitter in PTP clock synchronization mode: To test long-term stability when NEs work in PTP clock synchronization mode. Time precision in case of fiber fault recovery test: To test the function of restoring clock or time in case of an exception such as a fiber cut. Active/standby clock board switching test. This test verifies that the active/standby IEEE 1588v2 switching performs properly.
NOTE
Select a testing item based on the actual network topology.
Test Diagram
Figure 10-44 shows the diagram for the testing items.
Testing Item 1: Time Precision of Interconnected OTN Devices Using TN11ST2 +SFIU Boards Test
Test Purpose Test Configura tion Test Instrumen t Test Procedure To verify that OTN devices with TN11ST2+SFIU boards can ensure time precision by overcoming asymmetry issues. All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode.
Time tester with a GPS receiver
1. Test the time offset between two adjacent sites using the time tester. 2. Test the time precision for 10 minutes. 3. Extend the fiber that transmits IEEE 1588v2 messages between the two sites by more than 10 m (connect the fiber a new fiber longer than 10 m using a fiber adapter).
Expected Result
The time offset is within 100 ns before and after the fiber is extended.
Testing Item 2: Long-Term Jitter in a Physical Clock Synchronization Mode Test

Test Purpose Test Configura tion Test Instrumen t To test long-term stability when NEs work in physical clock synchronization mode All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
502
Test Procedure Expected Result
1. Test the precision of the base station time for more than 8 hours using the time tester. The time offset is within 1 us.
Testing Item 3: Long-Term Jitter in a PTP Clock Synchronization Mode Test

Test Purpose Test Configura tion Test Instrumen t Test Procedure Expected Result To test long-term stability when NEs work in PTP clock synchronization mode. All NEs work in PTP synchronization mode.
1. Test the precision of the base station time for more than 8 hours using the time tester. The time offset is within 1 us.
Testing Item 4: Time Precision in Case of Fiber Fault Recovery Test

Test Purpose Test Configura tion Test Instrumen t Test Procedure To test the function of restoring clock or time in case of an exception such as a fiber cut. All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode or PTP synchronization mode. Time tester with a GPS receiver
1. On the sink site, test the time offset using the time tester. 2. On the sink site, remove the WDM-side fibers that transmit IEEE 1588v2. Check for clock/time source switching alarms and performance events generated on OTN and OptiX PTN devices before and after the fibers are reinserted. 3. Use the time tester to test the base station time precision and record it. 4. Recover the fiber connections.
Expected Result
When time source protection is configured on the ring network, the time offset is within 240 ns before a single-point fault occurs and after the fault is rectified.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
503
Testing Item 5: Active/Standby Clock Board Switching Test

Step 1 When the NE under test properly traces the clock source for another NE, perform a switching between the active and standby clock boards on this NE.
NOTE
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, STG active/standby status is independent of the XCS active/standby status. Therefore, the active/standby STG switching can be tested without affecting the active/standby XCS status. l For the OptiX OSN 8800, the active/standby clock board status is associated with the active/standby crossconnect board status. Therefore, it is recommended to test only the active/standby clock board switching or active/standby cross-connect board switching.
Step 2 Check whether the traced clock source is switched from one NE to another. (Clock source switching is not triggered in normal cases.) Use a test instrument to measure the time synchronization performance for the NE. Determine whether the time synchronization performance meets the clock source switching requirements (The time offset is within 240 ns before and after the switching). ----End
10.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels

When the network transmits the Ethernet service, the availability of the Ethernet service channels must be tested.
10.7.1 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using Laptops

You can perform the test by connecting laptops to both ends of the Ethernet service. By doing this, you can test the availability of the Ethernet service channel.
Prerequisite
l l You must be a U2000 user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. The EPL services must be configured and the port attribute is set to "Access". For configuration details, see "Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board" in the Configuration Guide.

Two laptops on which the Windows operating system is installed, two straight-through cables
Set-up Diagram
Figure 10-45 shows the diagram for testing the Ethernet service channels.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
504
Figure 10-45 Testing the Ethernet service channels

Laptop A
NE4 NE5 NE1 NE3 NE2
Laptop B
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network port of the laptop to the Ethernet service port of the equipment according to Figure 10-45. Step 2 Set the IP addresses for laptop A and laptop B. The two IP addresses must be set in the same network section. l Set the IP address for laptop A. IP address: 192.168.0.100 Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0 l Set the IP address for laptop B. IP address: 192.168.0.101 Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0 Step 3 Choose Start > Run on laptop A to display a dialog box. Enter the ping command: ping 192.168.0.101 -n 20000 -l 64 -t.
NOTE
Parameters for the Ping command: l -n Num: transit Num packets to the laptop at the opposite end l -l Num: transmit buffer capacity is Num bytes l -t: continuously transmit ping packets
Step 4 Click OK to run the ping command. l A window is displayed to provide the feedback "Reply from 192.168.0.101: bytes=64 time=1ms TTL=255". This information indicates the Ethernet channel is normal. l If the displayed window provides the feedback Request timed out, it indicates that the Ethernet channel is abnormal. Check the network cable connection and the configuration of the Ethernet service. Correct the fault, and then continue the test.
NOTE
The value of time and TTL is determined by the actual test environment. The value discrepancy is normal.
----End
10.7.2 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using the Ethernet OAM Function
If the Ethernet board supports the OAM function, the OAM function can also be used to test the availability of Ethernet service channels.
Prerequisite
l The Ethernet service must be configured between sites.

U2000
Context
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the following boards support the OAM function. l l l EGSH LEM24 LEX4
For the OptiX OSN 6800, the following boards support the OAM function. l l LEM24 LEX4
For the OptiX OSN 3800, the following boards support the OAM function. l l LEM24 LEX4
Before testing the availability of the Ethernet service channels by using the OAM function, you must configure the OAM maintenance points on the two sites.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click an NE icon in the Main Topology, and select NE Explorer. Step 2 Select the Ethernet board in the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree. Step 3 Click New. The Create MP dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters. Step 4 In Ethernet Service OAM, right-click the created Ethernet service maintenance point, and choose Performance Detect. Step 5 The Performance Detect dialog box is displayed. In Send Mode, select the specific mode, and designate the Destination MP ID in the Maintenance Point and Source MP ID. Step 6 Click Start Detect. The statistics of the performance are displayed in the Details. View the results of the statistics. Then determine the performance of the service between the local equipment and the opposite equipment through Loss Ratio and Delay.
Step 7 Change the length of the packet in Send Mode. Then test the performance of the packets with the length of 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280, and 1518 bytes. ----End
10.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System

You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the U2000/Web LCT.
Availability
l l l l l OptiX OSN 8800 T16 support Orderwire of OTN System. OptiX OSN 8800 T32 support Orderwire of OTN System. OptiX OSN 8800 T64 support Orderwire of OTN System. OptiX OSN 6800 support Orderwire of OTN System. OptiX OSN 3800 support Orderwire of OTN System.
10.8.1 Setting the Orderwire Board

Before you configure the orderwire functions, you need to set the orderwire board first.
Prerequisite
l l l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The optical supervisory channel boards must be created. For an OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800, only the optical supervisory channel boards on the main subrack supports the orderwire function.

U2000/Web LCT
The orderwire can be used only when the orderwire board is configured with the NE.

1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the Orderwire Board Settings tab. Click Query to query the NE-side information. Select a board from the Available Boards pane and click .
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
507
4. 5.
Click Apply. Click Query. The values of the parameters are the same as the values that are set.
10.8.2 Configuring Orderwire

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can configure orderwire for NEs.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. SC1 or SC2 board has been configured.

U2000/Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the General tab.
2. 3.
Click Query to query information from the NE. Set Call Waiting Time(s), Telephone No. and orderwire ports.
NOTE
l Call Waiting Time(s) should be set to the same value for all NEs with orderwire communication. When the number of NEs is smaller than 30, set the value to 5 seconds. Otherwise, set it to 9 seconds. l The telephone number cannot repeat in the same orderwire subnet. l Set the length of the telephone number according to the actual requirements. The maximum length is eight digits and the minimum length is three digits. In the same orderwire subnet, the number length must be the same. For the settings of the orderwire subnet, refer to 10.8.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets. l The length of the telephone number must be the same as that of the conference call number.
4.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Click Apply.
10.8.3 Configuring Conference Calls

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows concurrent voice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls for NEs.
Prerequisite

U2000/Web LCT

1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the Conference Call tab. Click Query to query the conference call configuration of the NE. In the Available Conference Call Ports pane, select the port where you want to configure a conference call, and click
NOTE
If the optical ports that support conference call form a loop, howler tone is generated. Hence, "releasing loop" is a must, that is, only one optical port can be set for the conference call in a certain node.
4. 5.
Click Apply. Click the General tab, and set Conference Call number.
NOTE
The conference call number for all NEs must be the same, and must have the same length as the orderwire phone number. If the orderwire phone number has four digits, the conference call number is recommended to be 9999.
6.
In the Available Orderwire Ports pane, select the port where you want to configure a conference call, and click .
7.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Click Apply.
10.8.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets

When there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of the conversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls are configured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the conference calls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Conference calls must be configured.

U2000/Web LCT
Set the length of the subnet number before dividing the orderwire subnet, which can be of one or two digits. Then configure the subnet number. You can obtain the subnet conference call number by overlaying the preceding digits of the conference call number by subnet number. For example, if the conference call number is 999 and the subnet number is 1, the subnet conference call number of the subnet 1 is 199. The optical ports with the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet. Different optical ports on each NE can belong to different orderwire subnets. Hence, an NE can belong to several orderwire subnet at the same time.

1. 2. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Optional: Click the Auxiliary tab and set Subnet No. Length.
NOTE
When the Subnet No. Length is set to 1, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is in the range of 0 to 9. When the Subnet No. Length is set to 2, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is in the range of 0 and 10 to 99.
3. 4. 5.
Click the Optical Interface Subnet No. tab. Click Query to query information from the NE. Select an optical port where conference calls are configured, and click the subnet field and enter a subnet number.
NOTE
The optical ports that have the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.
6. 7.
Click Apply. Click Query, and the operation result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The parameter values of Subnet displayed in the window are the same as the ones set previously.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
510
10.9 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS System

This section describes how to configure the orderwire phone in an OCS system by using the U2000. Availability l l OptiX OSN 8800 T32 support Orderwire of OTN System. OptiX OSN 8800 T64 support Orderwire of OTN System.
10.9.1 Configuring Orderwire

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can configure orderwire for NEs.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. TN1LSTI board has been configured.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the General tab.
Step 2 Click Query to query information from the NE. Step 3 Set Call Waiting Time(s), Telephone No. and orderwire ports.

NOTE
l Call Waiting Time(s) should be set to the same value for all NEs with orderwire communication. When the number of NEs is smaller than 30, set the value to 5 seconds. Otherwise, set it to 9 seconds. l The telephone number cannot repeat in the same orderwire subnet. l Set the length of the telephone number according to the actual requirements. The maximum length is eight digits and the minimum length is three digits. In the same orderwire subnet, the number length must be the same. For the settings of the orderwire subnet, refer to Dividing Orderwire Subnets. l The length of the telephone number must be the same as that of the conference call number. l A piece of NG WDM equipment supports a maximum of two channels of orderwire. l A piece of NG WDM equipment supports a maximum of two channels of orderwire. l If the length of the subnet number is 1, the first digit of the two orderwire numbers must be the same. If the length of the subnet number is 2, the first two digits of the two orderwire numbers must be the same.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click Query to confirm that the parameter values are the same as the ones set previously. ----End
10.9.2 Configuring Conference Calls

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows concurrent voice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls for NEs.
Prerequisite


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the Conference Call tab.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
512
Step 2 Click Query to query the conference call configuration of the NE. Step 3 In the Available Conference Call Ports pane, select the port where you want to configure a conference call, and click
NOTE
If the optical ports that support conference call form a loop, howler tone is generated. Hence, "releasing loop" is a must, that is, only one optical port can be set for the conference call in a certain node.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click the General tab, and set Conference Call number.
NOTE
The conference call number for all NEs must be the same, and must have the same length as the orderwire phone number. If the orderwire phone number has four digits, the conference call number is recommended to be 9999.
Step 6 Click Apply. Step 7 Click Query. The values of the parameters are the same as the values that are set. ----End
10.9.3 Dividing Orderwire Subnets

When there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of the conversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls are configured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the conference calls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Conference calls must be configured.

Set the length of the subnet number before dividing the orderwire subnet, which can be of one or two digits. Then configure the subnet number. You can obtain the subnet conference call number by overlaying the preceding digits of the conference call number by subnet number. For example, if the conference call number is 999 and the subnet number is 1, the subnet conference call number of the subnet 1 is 199. The optical ports with the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet. Different optical ports on each NE can belong to different orderwire subnets. Hence, an NE can belong to several orderwire subnet at the same time.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Click the Auxiliary tab and set Subnet No. Length.
NOTE
When the Subnet No. Length is set to 1, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is in the range of 0 to 9. When the Subnet No. Length is set to 2, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is in the range of 0 and 10 to 99.
Step 3 Click the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface tab.
Step 4 Click Query to query information from the NE. Step 5 Select an optical port where conference calls are configured, and click the subnet field and enter a subnet number.
NOTE
The optical ports that have the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.
Step 6 Click Apply. Step 7 Click Query, and the operation result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The parameter values of Subnet displayed in the window are the same as the ones set previously. ----End
10.10 Testing Orderwire Functions

Orderwire function tests consist of addressing call tests and conference call tests.
Prerequisite
l l l The orderwire is connected to the EOW port of the SC1/SC2/HSC1/TNL1STI Orderwire on each NE must be configured. The orderwire phone set must be installed correctly at related stations.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Testing the addressing call. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. At a station, use the orderwire phone to dial the orderwire of other NEs. Check whether the orderwire phone rings at the called station. Check the voice quality during the conversation. The voice must be clear and without noise. See the previous steps to test addressing calls at other stations. At a station, use the orderwire phone to dial the subnet conference call number. Check whether the orderwire phone rings at the other station. Check the voice quality during the conversation. The voice must be clear and without noise. See the previous steps to test subnet conference calls at other stations.
NOTE
Step 2 Testing the subnet conference call.
l The subnet conference call covers only the optical ports that have the same subnet No. on the network. The subnet No. for the optical port can be set on the U2000. The subnet conference call number consists of the subnet No., which replaces the first one or two digits of the network-wide call number. For example, if the subnet No. is 1, the subnet conference call number is 199.
----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
515
11 Testing Bit Errors
11
About This Chapter
Figure 11-1 Network diagram for Project G
Testing Bit Errors
The network-wide bit error test must cover all the service channels in the network. You can perform the bit error tests to the concatenated service channels or to the service segments. There must be no bit error for 24 consecutive hours. This section uses Project G as an example to illustrate the test for network-wide bit errors. For the network diagram for Project G, see Figure 11-1.
: OTM
: OLA
: OADM
Each of the stations A, C and E have four LSX boards.
CAUTION
Before the test, make sure that the input and output optical power for each board is in the optimal range, and that there is no abnormal alarm or performance event. 11.1 Testing 10-Minute Bit Errors for Each Optical Channel To ensure that the 24-hour network-wide bit error test is successfully complete, perform a 10minute bit error test for each channel in advance. 11.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors
The all-channel bit error test is performed to ensure that all functional boards and channels on a transmission link are normal.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
517
11.1 Testing 10-Minute Bit Errors for Each Optical Channel

To ensure that the 24-hour network-wide bit error test is successfully complete, perform a 10minute bit error test for each channel in advance.
Prerequisite
There must be no abnormal alarm or performance event in the entire network.
Tools, Equipments and Materials

Signal analyzer, fiber jumper, optical attenuator, fiber adapter
Set-up Diagram
For the bit error test for one channel, see Figure 11-2, Figure 11-3, and Figure 11-4. Figure 11-2 Testing bit errors for one channel from station A to station E
IN
Signal analyzer
OUT
Tx
Rx
OTU
Rx
OTU
Tx
Station A
Station E
IN
Signal analyzer
Tx
Tributary board Line board Line board Tributary board
Rx
OUT Rx
Tx
Station A
Station E
Figure 11-3 Testing bit errors for one channel from station A to station C
IN
Signal analyzer
OUT
Tx
Rx
LSX
Rx
LSX
Tx
Station A
Station C
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
518
IN
Signal analyzer
Tx
Tributary board Line board Line board Tributary board
Rx
OUT Rx
Tx
Station A
Station C
Figure 11-4 Testing bit errors for one channel from station C to station E
IN
Signal analyzer
OUT
Tx
Rx
LSX
Rx
LSX
Tx
Station C
IN Tx
Tributary board Line board
Station E
Rx
Line board Tributary board
Signal analyzer
OUT Rx
Tx
Station C
Station E
Procedure
Step 1 See Figure 11-2, for station A, connect the receive and transmit optical ports of a signal analyzer to the TX output optical port and RX input optical port with a fixed optical attenuator in between. Step 2 At station E, connect the TX output optical port to the RX input optical port with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side. Step 3 Use the signal analyzer to perform a 10-minute bit error test for the service channel. Step 4 If there are bit errors, clear the fault and perform a 10-minute bit error test again until there is no bit error. Step 5 See steps 1 through 4 and Figure 11-3 to perform 10-minute bit error tests to all the channels between station A and station C. Step 6 See steps 1 through 4 and Figure 11-4 to perform 10-minute bit error tests to all the channels between station C and station E. ----End
11.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors

The all-channel bit error test is performed to ensure that all functional boards and channels on a transmission link are normal.
Prerequisite
No abnormal alarm or performance event exists on the entire network.
Tools, Equipments and Materials

Signal analyzer, fiber jumper, optical attenuator, fiber adapter
Fiber Connection
At the local end, connect the output port on the signal analyzer to the RX port on the first OTU or tributary board. After the signals are looped back from the remote end, the signals are output from the TX port on the first OTU or tributary board. This establishes the connection of a single channel. Connect the TX port on the first OTU or tributary board to the RX port on the second OTU or tributary board with a fixed optical attenuator in between. Then connect the second OTU or tributary board to the third OTU or tributary board in the same way until OTU or tributary board (N-1) is connected to OTU or tributary board N. Finally, connect the TX port on the OTU or tributary board N to the IN port on the signal analyzer.
Precautions
CAUTION
l The number of cascaded OTUs or tributary boards should be less than or equal to 13. l There are five types of LC connector-shaped fixed optical attenuators: 15 dB, 10 dB, 7dB, 5 dB and 2 dB. According to the requirements for the optical power, use the correct fixed optical attenuators when you perform the network commissioning.
Set-up Diagram
This section uses Project G as an example to describe how to test bit errors on all channels in cascading order. Figure 11-5 shows the testing diagram. The testing diagram does not show the OLA and repeater stations because no signal is inserted into or extracted from an OLA station or a repeater station.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
520
Figure 11-5 Fiber connections for the all-channel bit error test
OUT Rx
Station A
OTU OTU OTU OTU
Station E
OTU OTU OTU OTU
Signal analyzer
IN
Tx
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
Station C
Station A
OUT Rx
Station E
Tx
L L L L
L L L L
T T T T
Rx
Signal analyzer
T T T
IN Tx
Rx
Tx
Station C
: Fixed optical attenuator T: Tributary board L: Line board
Procedure
Step 1 Use Figure 11-5 to connect the fibers according to the information inFiber Connection. Step 2 Use the signal analyzer to perform the 24-hour bit error test.
Step 3 If there are bit errors, clear the fault and perform a 24-hour test again until there is no bit error. ----End
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
522
12 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment
12
N o. 1
Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment
Correct setting and commissioning of each system parameter is the precondition for ensuring normal network operation. Check the configurations of NEs and boards according to Table 12-1 and rectify inappropriate configurations, for example incorrect parameter settings and incomplete parameter settings. Table 12-1 Checklist for commissioning during deployment Item Communication between NEs on the network is normal and login to an NE is successful. Related Operation Creating NEs in Batches Creating Optical NEs Uploading the NE Data 2 3 NE ID and IP are changed properly according to the customer planning requirements. All NEs are synchronized with the NMS time and NE performance monitoring can be enabled normally. Setting NE ID and IP Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE 4 When the network uses the HWECC communication protocol, a proper extended ECC communication mode is selected when the number of NEs that adopt the extended ECC communication exceeds eight. When the network uses IP over DCC communication protocol, the IP over DCC protocol is configured properly. Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication
Configuring IP over DCC
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
523
12 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment
N o.
Item When the network uses OSI over DCC communication protocol, the OSI over DCC protocol is configured properly.
Related Operation Configuring OSI over DCC
Logical fiber connections are created on the entire network and they are consistent with actual fiber connections. OCh trails are complete and no discrete service exists. Optical cross-connections at an ROADM station are complete. Acceptance items such as bit errors and OSNR satisfy the requirements and optical power on the entire network is commissioned correctly.
Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection Testing Bit Errors l Commissioning Optical Power on Site l Remotely Commissioning Optical Power l Automatic Commissioning
6 7 8
9 10 11
Attributes of every WDM optical port on a board are set properly. Various services are configured correctly. Protection schemes and system features are configured correctly.
Configuring Boards Configuring Services Configuring System Features Testing Protection Switching Testing Data Features Testing System Features Testing Ethernet Service Channels
TIP
In the actual commissioning and configuration process, you are recommended to check the configurations of an NE after configuring the NE.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
524
13 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board
13
Prerequisite
Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board

You need to back up the NE database during daily maintenance, to ensure that the SCC board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after a data loss or equipment power failure. When you back up the NE database to the SCC board, you actually back up the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to the Flash database. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration from the FLASH and issues the configuration to the boards.
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.

U2000 or Web LCT
Precautions
NOTE
By default, the NMS automatically backs up the NE database into the flash memory every 30 minutes.

1. 2. 3. In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management. Select the NE from the Function Tree, and then click .
In NE Configuration, select an NE or multiple NEs of which the database you want to back up. Click Back Up NE Data and select Back Up Database to SCC. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
4.

1.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Select one or more NEs in the NE list. Click Back Up NE Database > Back Up to SCC.

NOTE
13 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board
The NMS takes a few minutes to back up the NE database. Do not perform any operation in the process of backup.
2. 3.
Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
Category (Optional) Related Operation Item Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data Description This section describes several NE data backup and restoration methods. You can select the method as required.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
526
14 Analyzing and Handling Common Deployment Problems
14
Analyzing and Handling Common Deployment Problems
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the methods for analyzing and handling the common problems that may happen during the deployment process. You need to analyze and handle problems according to actual situations. 14.1 OSC/ESC Conflict This section describes workarounds and solutions to the problem associated with frequent switching between OSC and ESC channels during the deployment commissioning phase. 14.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports This section describes how to disable the unused auxiliary ports.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
527
14.1 OSC/ESC Conflict

This section describes workarounds and solutions to the problem associated with frequent switching between OSC and ESC channels during the deployment commissioning phase.
Prerequisite

U2000
During the deployment commissioning phase, the commissioning of optical power for an OTU board or a line board is not complete. When this occurs, the ECC link is unstable and the OSC and ESC channels may be frequently switched. The symptoms are as follows: l As shown on the NMS, the NE is occasionally unreachable. A query of the WDM-side alarms for the corresponding OTU or line boards shows that the power_high or power_low alarm is reported. Switching between different channels on the ECC link frequently occurs.
Procedure
1. On the U2000, check the value of Communication Status. Then determine which port fails in ESC communication after a check of the value of Port. (1) Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the NE is displayed. (2) Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. (3) Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. (4) Select the DCC Rate Configuration tab, and click Query. (5) On the DCC Rate Configuration tab page, check whether Communication Status for a channel whose Channel is GCC0, GCC12_18, GCC12_9, or RES_ODU is displayed as Receiving Failed. If yes, this Port fails in ESC communication. 2. On the U2000, disable all the failed ESC channels on all the NEs on the network. (1) On the DCC Rate Configuration tab page, change the value of Enabled/Disabled for all channels for the failed Port identified in step 1 to Disabled. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
NOTE
If Communication Status for all channels on the specified Port is Normal, skip the preceding substep.
(2) Click Apply. Then, click OK in the displayed Confirm dialog box. Then click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box. 3. After the entire system is commissioned and the optical power on the entire line becomes stable, set the enable status of the ESC channels to Enabled. For details, see step 2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)

NOTE
After the enable status of the ESC channels is set to Enabled, the supervisory channel on the ECC route is automatically switched to the ESC channel.
14.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports

This section describes how to disable the unused auxiliary ports.
Prerequisite
The commissioning of the entire system must be complete.

U2000
The auxiliary ports that are not currently used must be disabled. If they are required in a subsequent phase, enable these auxiliary ports.
CAUTION
Disabling the unused auxiliary ports may make NEs go offline.
Procedure
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, choose Communication > Access Control from the left-hand Function Tree. Optional: Set the unused serial port to disabled. (1) Deselect the Enable Serial Port Access check box. (2) Click Apply. (3) A dialog is displayed indicating a This operation will reset the communication between NEs. Are you sure to continue? message. Click OK. (4) A dialog is displayed indicating a Disabling access will disable the serial port communication. Are you sure to continue? message. Click OK. 3. Optional: Set the unused ETH/NMETH port to Disabled. (1) Set Enabled/Disabled of the unused port to Disabled. (2) Click Apply. 4. Optional: Set the two NMETH ports to disabled. (1) Deselect the Enable Ethernet Access check box. (2) Click Apply. (3) A dialog is displayed indicating a This operation will reset the communication between NEs. Are you sure to continue? message. Click OK.
(4) A dialog is displayed indicating a Disabling access will disable the network interface communication. Are you sure to continue? message. Click OK.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
530
15 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
15
About This Chapter
Reference Operations for the
Commissioning and Configuration
This chapter lists the reference operations for the commissioning and configuration. You can perform proper operations according to the network condition. 15.1 Configuring the NE Data Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first so that the U2000 can manage and operate the NE. 15.2 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack The OptiX OSN 6800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multiple shelves are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for centralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the U2000/Web LCT.The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multiple shelves are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for centralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the U2000/ Web LCT. 15.3 Configuring Wavelength Grooming This chapter describes the configuration of optical cross-connections. Flexible service grooming at the optical layer is implemented through optical cross-connections. 15.4 Configuring the NE Time Time consistency between the U2000/Web LCT and NEs is very important for troubleshooting and network monitoring. You should set the U2000/Web LCT time and NE time before service configuration. 15.5 Performance Management To ensure normal functioning of a network, the network management and maintenance personnel should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance management measures. 15.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEs After an NE is configured, you can modify the attributes of the NE based on the following task sets. 15.7 Modifying the Boards Configuration
After a board is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the board based on the following task sets. 15.8 Modifying the Fibers Configuration After a fiber is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the fiber based on the following task sets. 15.9 Creating a Single NE After the NE is created, you can use the U2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a single NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless of whether the data is configured on the NE or not. Creating NEs one by one is applicable no matter what way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to communicate do not support the NE search function and you must create them one by one. 15.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User During a new deployment, after the root/lct NE user creates the NE, this user can create another NE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name. 15.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and inside NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in the list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a few fiber connections only. 15.12 Configuring the Edge Port An edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting an edge port is to set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this NE and another NE. 15.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board (WSD9/WSM9/ROAM) that performs grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through the creation of single-board optical cross-connection. 15.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes Port attributes of WDM boards need to be set to meet the engineering requirements. Every board has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All port parameters can be queried. 15.15 Configuring Board SDH Port Attributes Configure the port attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every board has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All port parameters can be queried. 15.16 Opening/Closing Lasers This section describes the basic method of opening and closing lasers during the detection of faults and the commissioning. 15.17 Setting the Rated Optical Power of the OA Board You can manually change the rated input and output optical power of an optical amplifier (OA) board to trigger a change in the attenuation of the power adjustment board. 15.18 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards 15.19 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters In a 40G system, you must accurately configure the fixed dispersion compensator. You also need to use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust dispersion precisely. In addition, you need to use TDC dispersion real-time adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of transmission fibers caused by changes in factors such as ambient temperature.
15.20 Configuring the Service Mode If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the board. 15.21 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC) The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury. 15.22 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board Automatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there is no input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interface board does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost, the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the service life of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage. 15.23 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board Automatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there is no input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interface board does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost, the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the service life of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage. 15.24 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering Protection Switching You can configure signal degrade (SD) conditions for triggering automatic protection switching of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800. 15.25 Setting the NULL Mapping Status Some OTU boards in the NG WDM equipment support the OTN NULL mapping detection. For the channel where no signals are input, the U2000 can be used to set the NULL mapping status to Enabled. By checking OTN overheads, the channel status in the network can be monitored. 15.26 Configuring Path Binding By configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side signals to multiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several channels of lower order signals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical port decreases. 15.27 Configuring Centralized Wavelength Monitoring The WMU board is connected to the MON ports of the optical amplifier boards or optical multiplexer boards in the two transmit directions. The board monitors the wavelengths and reports information such as optical power of the wavelengths to the SCC. To achieve the function, the OTU board and NE where the monitored wavelength is located must be configured on the U2000, and the intra-subrack and inter-subrack communication must be normal. 15.28 Configuring the FEC Function When configuring the forward error correction (FEC) function of a board, you need to enable the function and set the FEC type of the current optical port. 15.29 Enabling and Disabling LPT When the overhead byte supporting the LPT protocol is added in the frame format of the WDMside signals, the running status of the network access point or the service network can be monitored. 15.30 Setting the Speed Level of Fans
This section describes how to set the speed level of fans. 15.31 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm Signals Using the RS232 Serial Port This section describes how to use an RS232 serial port to transparently transmit one channel of alarm signals of an external device. 15.32 Configuring Ethernet Boards During the service configuration or test on an Ethernet board, the Ethernet board attributes must be configured. 15.33 Verifying Ethernet Services After configuring Ethernet services, you need to verify whether the service communication is normal. 15.34 Configuring the PRBS Test Some OTUs of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 provide the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS) error detection function. On the U2000, enable the meter board to send PRBS signals, and the client side and WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently transmit the PRBS signals. In this way, you can perform the bit error test of the transmission link without connecting a meter to the equipment during the deployment. 15.35 Managing NE Power Consumption You can configure power consumption monitoring and energy conservation for an NE, to ensure that energy conservation and environment protection can be achieved when the NE runs in the normal state. 15.36 Configuring NE Clock Sources The time source for a WDM NE is determined by the clock used by the SCC board. To synchronize networkwide clocks, you need to modify the clock used by the SCC board according to the specific network configuration. The selection of clock sources determines the directions and termination points for networkwide clock synchronization. 15.37 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data To ensure security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
534
15.1 Configuring the NE Data

Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first so that the U2000 can manage and operate the NE.
15.1.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually

By configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of an NE.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The NE must be created successfully.

U2000

1. Double-click the optical NE with unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. Then, doubleclick the unconfigured NE in the left-hand pane and the NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed. Select Manual Configuration and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that manual configuration clears the data on the NE side. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that manual configuration interrupts the service on the NE. Click OK. The Set NE Attribute dialog box is displayed. Optional: If you need to modify the NE Attribute, set NE Name, Equipment Type, CrossConnect Type of Master Shelf, Cross-Connect Capacity of Master Shelf, NE Remarks, Shelf Type, and and so on.
NOTE
2. 3. 4. 5.
For OptiX OSN 8800, Cross-Connect Type of Master Shelf and Cross-Connect Capacity of Master Shelf must be set based on the current license requirements; otherwise, the NE cannot be used.
6. 7. 8. 9.
Click Next, and the NE slot window is displayed. Optional: Click Query Logical Information to query the logical boards of the NE. Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical boards of the NE. Optional: Right-click on the slot to add a board.
10. Click Next to display the Send Configuration window. 11. Select Verify and Run as required and click Finish.
NOTE
Verification involves running the verification command. Click Finish to deliver the configuration to the NE and complete the basic configurations for the NE. After the verification is successful, the NE starts to work normally.
12. On the Main Topology, double-click the optical NE where the NE configured previously is located. select the NE in the left pane of the window to view the board information of
the NE. If the configured board information of the NE is displayed in the right pane, it indicates that the NE is configured successfully.
15.1.2 Replicating the NE Data

You can replicate the data of an existing NE to a new NE, if the existing NE is already configured and if the existing NE is of the same NE type and the same NE version as the new NE.
Prerequisite
l l l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The NE must be created successfully. The type and NE software version of the source NE must be consistent with the type and software version of the replicated NE.

U2000/Web LCT

1. Double-click the unconfigured NE on the main topology. Then, double-click the unconfigured NE in the left-hand pane and the NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed. Select Copy NE Data and click Next. The NE Replication dialog box is displayed. Select the NE from the drop-down list and click Start. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the replication operation copies all the data of the source NE.
2. 3.
NOTE
After the NE data is replicated, only the data on the U2000 side is changed, but the data on the equipment side is not changed.
4. 5. 6.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the replication operation results in the loss of the original data of the NE to which the data is copied. Click OK to start the replication. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed after a few seconds. Click Close.
15.2 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack

The OptiX OSN 6800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multiple shelves are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for centralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the U2000/Web LCT.The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multiple shelves are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for centralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the U2000/ Web LCT. This section describes how to configure master and slave subracks for new NEs.
15.2.1 Master/Slave Subrack Configuration

In the master/slave subrack mode, the master subrack and its multiple slave shelves are displayed as one NE in the network management system. They share the same NE ID and IP address. Generally, the subrack where the optical amplifier board, optical supervisory channel (OSC) board, and fiber interface unit (FIU) exist is selected as the master subrack.
15.2.2 Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of an NE

To ensure proper functioning of the subracks and normal communication between subracks on an NE, set Shelf Link Mode to be consistent with the actual physical cascading mode of the subracks on the U2000.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Cables for communication between subracks must be installed.

U2000 or Web LCT
Precautions
NOTE
The cables for communication between subracks are properly installed and no alarm indicating a cascading fault is reported.

1. 2. 3.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Shelf Link Management from the Function Tree. Click the Shelf Link Management tab in the right-hand interface. Double click Shelf Link Mode and select Tree or Ring based on the actual physical cascading mode of the subracks. Click Apply.
Category (Optional) Related Operation Item Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection Description This section describes how to test inter-subrack communication protection.
15.2.3 Changing a Subrack Attribute

You can set the attributes of the master or slave subrack to change the name of the master or slave subrack.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The master or slave subrack has been created.

U2000/Web LCT

1. 2. Double click the NE being required to Change the subrack attribute. Choose the desire subrack from the upper side of the NE Panel. Right-click the subrack and then choose Modify Shelf Attribute from the shortcut menu to display the Modify Shelf Attribute dialog box.
3.
Change the Shelf name and click OK.

NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800, Cross-Connect Type of Master Shelf and Cross-Connect Capacity of Master Shelf must be set based on the current license requirements; otherwise, the NE cannot be used.
15.2.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack

This section describes how to query the status of a slave subrack. The status includes Physical Installed, Logical Installed, and Not Installed.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The master or slave subrack has been created.

U2000/Web LCT

1. 2. Choose the NE from the left pane of the NE Panel. Click to refresh the state of the NE Panel. On the NE Panel, you can query the status of the slave subrack and compare the status with the legends.
3.
Optional: Click
to view the legend and learn the running status of the subrack.

1. Click to refresh the state of the Slot Layout. On the Slot Layout, you can query the status of the slave subrack and compare the status with the legends.
2.
Optional: Click
to view the legend and learn the running status of the subrack.
15.2.5 Deleting a Slave Subrack

The slave subrack that does not need to be managed by the U2000 can be deleted.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. All boards that are manually created on the slave subrack are deleted.

U2000/Web LCT

1. 2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Double click the NE being required to Change the subrack attribute. Choose the desire subrack from the upper side of the NE Panel. Right-click the subrack and then choose Delete the Shelf from the shortcut menu.
3.
Click OK in the displayed Confirm dialog box.

NOTE
When the slave subrack is deleted, the system automatically deletes the system boards, such as the AUX, PIU, EFI, and FAN.
15.3 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

This chapter describes the configuration of optical cross-connections. Flexible service grooming at the optical layer is implemented through optical cross-connections.
15.3.1 Basic Concepts

The equipment provide reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) function. The U2000 and Web LCT are used to configure the add/drop and the pass-through state of channels, and thus the remote dynamic adjustment of channels is enabled. Optical power equalization can be performed on pass-through and adding wavelengths. There are two schemes supported by the WDM equipment for wavelength allocation: l l Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM) Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)
FOADM cannot reconfigure the wavelength allocation based on the requirements of service development. The ROADM realizes the reconfiguration of wavelengths by blocking or crossconnecting wavelengths, changing the static wavelength allocation to a flexible and dynamic operation. Making use of the ROADM technology, the U2000 and Web LCT software adjusts the status of wavelengths (add, drop or pass-through) to realize remote and dynamic adjustment of wavelength status. The adjustment of a maximum of 80 wavelengths is supported. Optical grooming is the configuration of logical wavelength routes, realized by optical crossconnection. This function meets the user's requirement of managing the services at the optical layer. Products provide flexible optical grooming. When there are changes in the services, users need only to make configuration accordingly on the U2000 and Web LCT. Different nodes adopt different methods of optical grooming. The three main methods are listed as follows: l l l WSD9 + RMU9 (WSM9): Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for multidimensional grooming. It supports the grooming of at most eight dimensions. WSMD4+WSMD4: Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for the grooming in no more than four dimensions. ROAM (WSMD2): Applied to common nodes and suitable for two-dimensional grooming.
NOTE
Dimension refers to transmission direction. Two-dimensional grooming refers to wavelength grooming in two transmission directions. Multidimensional grooming refers to wavelength grooming in multiple transmission directions.
For more details of optical grooming, see the Product Description.

15.3.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow

This section describes the configuration process related to wavelength grooming. Before configuring wavelength grooming based on the configuration flow, complete the basic configuration of NEs according to the configuration flow of creating a network. Figure 15-1 Wavelength grooming configuration flow
Start
Creating firbers Creating the board optical cross-connections Creating the Single-Station optical cross-connections
End
Task Name Creating Fibers on the U2000 Creating Fiber Connections by Using the Web LCT Creating Single-Station Optical CrossConnection
Task Description Required If the single-station cross-connection is configured, you can create the logic fiber connection between NEs and between boards that are inside the NEs on the U2000. Or create the logic fiber connection between NEs on the U2000 and the logic fiber connection between boards that are inside the NEs on the Web LCT. The inter-board service route can be established by creating the singlestation optical cross-connection.
NOTE The intra-board service route can be established by creating the board optical cross-connection.
15.3.3 Configuring the ROADM

This section uses project R as an example to describe how to configure the reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) on the U2000 and Web LCT when the WSS board is used.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
541
Networking Diagram
Tangent rings are taken as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at the optical layer. Project R adopts a tangent ring networking that comprises seven ONEs: A, B, C, D, E, F and G. All of the ONEs are OADM stations. Figure 15-2 shows the networking diagram of Project R. Figure 15-2 Networking diagram of Project R
C
D A
: OADM
In project R, the uni-directional services are allocated as shown in Figure 15-3. There are two services between station B and station C. Between station A and station B, station B and station D, station C and station D, station D and station E, station D and station G there is one service respectively. All of the services are STM-64 services.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
542
Figure 15-3 Service allocation of Project R

E C W
D W A E
S E
N G
Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation

This section describes the planning of network data, wavelength allocation and board configuration of the project.
Service Signal Flow

Take station A and station C as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at the optical layer in the WSD9+RMU9 mode and the ROAM mode. The wavelength route at station A is shown in Figure 15-4. The wavelength route at station C is shown in Figure 15-5.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
543
Figure 15-4 Services at station A of Project R

W
IN DM1 DM1
E
IN
OA
IN
WSD9
DM7 DM8 EXPO EXPI AM1
WSD9
OA
OUT ROA TOA
OUT ROA
RMU9
AM7 AM8 AM7 AM8 DM1
RMU9
OA OA
TOA
OA
S IN WSD9
DM1
N WSD9
OA
IN
DM7 DM8 EXPO
IN
OA
OUT ROA TOA
EXPI AM1
OUT ROA
RMU9
AM7 AM8 AM7 AM8
RMU9
OA
TOA
OA
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
544
Figure 15-5 Services at station C of Project R

W OD
DM
OA
IN
EXPO
ROAM OA
OUT M01 M02 EXPI M40
OD
IN DM EXPO
OA
ROAM OA
OUT M01 M02 EXPI
M40

Figure 15-6 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project R. Figure 15-6 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project R
No./Wavelength(nm) B /Frequency(THz) E 8/1531.90/195.70 10/1532.68/195.60 12/1533.47/195.50 No./Wavelength(nm) D /Frequency(THz) E 10/1532.68/195.60 No./Wavelength(nm) D /Frequency(THz) E 12/1533.47 /195.50 A W N F W C W E D W No./Wavelength(nm) A /Frequency(THz) 18/1535.82 /195.20 B E W
A W S
E W
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
545
Configuration Process
This section describes the process of configuration between station A and station C. For the configuration of other stations, see the description for station C.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The related boards are configured.


Step 1 Station A configuration process 1. Click the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand pane. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed. Select the corresponding source port and sink port of the optical cross-connect service.
NOTE
2.
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click Create. The Create Optical CrossConnection window is displayed.
3.
button on Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Open the Select Source Wavelength No. or Select Sink Wavelength No. window. Select the wavelengths from to add the wavelengths to Selected the Available Wavelengths list. Click Wavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west to north at station A for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station D to station F.
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Open the Select Wavelength window. Select the wavelengths from the Available to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the passWavelengths list. Click through service from west to north at station A for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station D to station F.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
546
4.
Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Optical CrossConnection window is displayed.
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
5. 6.
Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Repeat steps Step 1.2 to Step 1.5 to create the pass-through service from west to south at station A for the service 10/1532.68/195.60 from station D to station E.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
547
7.
Repeat Step 1.2 to Step 1.5 to create the service added from the east at station A for the service 18/1535.82/195.20 from station A to station B.
8. 9.
The created optical cross-connection is displayed in the window. After all optical cross-connections are created, click Query in the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box displayed. All single-station optical cross-connections configured are displayed in the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window. Click a single-station optical cross-connection, the physical connections of the single-station optical cross-connection are displayed in the Detailed Physical Route window.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Step 2 Station C configuration process 1. Click the NE182 in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical CrossConnection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical CrossConnection tab in the right-hand pane. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
NOTE
2.
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click New. The Create Optical CrossConnection window is displayed.
3.
Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Open the Select Source Wavelength No. or Select Sink Wavelength No. window. Select the wavelengths from to add the wavelengths to Selected the Available Wavelengths list. Click Wavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west to east at station C for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station B to station D.
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Open the Select Wavelength window. Select the wavelengths from the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the passthrough service from west to east at station C for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station B to station D.
4.
Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Optical CrossConnection window is displayed.
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
549
5. 6.
Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Repeat Step 2.2 to Step 2.5 to create two services dropped from the west at station C for the services 10/1532.68/195.60 and 8/1531.90/195.70 from station B to station C.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
550
7.
Repeat Step 2.2 to Step 2.5 to create the service added from the east at station C for the service 8/1531.90/195.70 from station C to station D.
8.
After all optical cross-connections are created, click Query in the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box displayed. All single-station optical cross-connections configured are displayed in the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window. Click a single-station optical cross-connection, the physical connections of the single-station optical cross-connection are displayed in the Detailed Physical Route window.
----End
Enabling the Port Blocking Function

After the port blocking function is enabled, the VOA is set to the default value (greater than 45 dB) and the port is blocked when no OCh trail is found at the optical port that services traverse.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" authority. The TN11RMU9 board must be installed.
After the port blocking function is disabled, the attenuation remains the same. When the port blocking function is enabled: l If no optical cross-connection in automatic mode is configured at the port, the port is in blocking state. In this case, the blocking function can be disabled after the attenuation is adjusted manually. If optical cross-connections in automatic mode are configured at the port, the OPA function automatically computes the attenuation according to the first optical cross-connection that traverse the port. Then, the blocking function is disabled at the port. After all optical cross-connections at the port are deleted, the port is in blocking state.
When the port blocking function is disabled: l l The port is enabled with the port blocking function by default after being powered on. However, the port blocking function is disabled after attenuation is set. Attenuation at the port remains the same after optical cross-connections are configured.

U2000/Web LCT

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Select By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list. In the Basic Attributes tab, select the desired optical port. Double-click the Block Port field and select Enable. Click Apply.
15.4 Configuring the NE Time

Time consistency between the U2000/Web LCT and NEs is very important for troubleshooting and network monitoring. You should set the U2000/Web LCT time and NE time before service configuration.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
552
15.4.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the U2000/Web LCT and NEs
With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and the U2000/Web LCT server time. In this way, the U2000/Web LCT is able to record the correct time at which alarms occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are reported by NEs. When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the U2000, the time at which such alarms and events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the U2000. This may cause trouble in fault location. In addition, the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of abnormal events is recorded in the NE security logs. To ensure the NE time accuracy, the U2000 provides two time synchronization schemes: synchronizing with the U2000 server and synchronizing with the standard NTP server.
NOTE
The Web LCT improves the accuracy of NE time by synchronizing the NE time with the NMS time.
If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the U2000 server, all NEs use the U2000 server time as the standard time. The NE time can be synchronized with the U2000 server time manually or automatically. The U2000 server time refers to the system time of the workstation or computer where the U2000 server resides. This scheme features easy operation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with regard to time. If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the standard NTP server, all NEs and the U2000 are synchronized with the standard NTP server automatically. The NTP server can be the U2000 server or a special time server. This scheme is applicable in networks that require a high accuracy with regard to time.
When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the Web LCT, the time at which such alarms and events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the Web LCT. This may cause trouble in fault location. In addition, the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of abnormal events is recorded in the NE security logs. To ensure the NE time accuracy, the Web LCT provides one time synchronization scheme: synchronizing with the Web LCT server. In this scheme, all NEs use the Web LCT server time as the standard time. The NE time can be synchronized with the Web LCT server time manually or automatically. The Web LCT server time refers to the time of the computer system where the Web LCT server resides. This scheme features easy operation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with regard to time.
15.4.2 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with the NMS Time
This section describes how to set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS time. After you set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS time, the NE time is automatically synchronized with the NMS time at specified intervals.
Prerequisite
l l l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
You must have logged in to an NE. You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The NTP service must not be configured for the U2000 and NEs.

Web LCT or U2000

1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Function Tree. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Set Synchronous Mode to NM, and click Apply. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Set Start Time and Period (days), and then click Apply. The Auto-Synchronization Settings dialog box is displayed. Click Yes.
NOTE
Start Time cannot be earlier than the current time.
4.
The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close

1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Function Tree. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply. Set Start Time and Period (days), and then click Apply.
NOTE
Start Time cannot be earlier than the current time.
15.4.3 Configuring the Standard NTP Key

On the U2000, you can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically synchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time. To ensure that a reliable server is accessed, the NTP authentication function must be started. In this case, you need to set the key and password, which are authenticated together to check whether the server is reliable.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The NE must support the standard NTP synchronization mode.

U2000
Context
The NTP authentication of the NE must be the same as the standard NTP server. If the standard NTP server is configured with a key for authentication, the key of the NE must be the same as the key of the server.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
554
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the main menu. Click Standard NTP Key Management tab. In the Object Tree, select one or more NEs and click Click Close on the Result dialog box. Click Add and the Add Key and Password dialog box is displayed. Select the NE in the NE List pane, set Key ID and Password, and set Trusted to Yes. Then, click Apply. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close. .
15.4.4 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server Time
You can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically synchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time.
Prerequisite
l l l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The key and password of an NE must be set by using the standard NTP key management function. The NE must support the standard NTP synchronization mode.

U2000
Context
After you change the value of Synchronous Mode from NULL to Standard NTP, when the modification is delivered to the NE, the time synchronization may be successful though the encryption key is incorrect.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the main menu. In the Object Tree, select an NE and click the Set the Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP. Set the Standard NTP Authentication to Enabled. Click Apply. In the displayed Result dialog box, click Close. In the pane at the bottom of the window, right-click, and then choose New from the shortcut menu to create a standard NTP server. l If the Standard NTP Server Identifier is set to NE ID, enter the NE ID of the standard NTP server and Standard NTP Server Key.
l If the Standard NTP Server Identifier is set to IP, enter the IP address of the standard NTP server and the Standard NTP Server Key. 8. 9. Click Apply to synchronize the NE time. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close.
10. Click Query. Make sure that the parameter values of the NTP server are the same as the ones set previously.
15.5 Performance Management

To ensure normal functioning of a network, the network management and maintenance personnel should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance management measures.
15.5.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold

The NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the specified threshold. According to the requirement, you can set different performance thresholds for a board. On the U2000, if you have already created a performance threshold template, you can set performance thresholds for one or more boards at the same time.
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT

1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select a related board and choose Performance > Performance Threshold. In the Monitor Object pane, select the desired board, port, or channel. Set performance thresholds according to the requirement.
NOTE
On the U2000, if you have already created a performance threshold template for the boards, click Use Template and select the desired template. Click Open.
4. 5. 6.
Optional: Click Default to restore the default settings. Click Apply. Click Query. Confirm that the value of Threshold value is the same as the value that is set.
15.5.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters

By setting performance monitoring parameters of a specified NE or board properly, and starting the performance monitoring for this NE or board, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of the NE or board. This facilitates the performance status monitoring of services and NEs.
Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board

You can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of monitored objects. The U2000/Web LCT monitors all the performance of board, but the automatic reporting feature is disabled by default. You can modify the value of the attribute according to the requirement.
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Performance Monitor Status from the Function Tree. Select a condition from the Monitored Object Filter Criteria drop-down list. Set the Monitor Status, 15-Minute Auto-Report and 24-Hour Auto-Report. Click Apply. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close. Click Query. The displayed results are the same as the values that are set.
Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by maintenance personnel.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The NE time must be synchronized with the U2000/Web LCT server time.

U2000 or Web LCT

1. 2. 3. In the Main Topology view, choose Performance > Set NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Main Menu. Select NEs from the NE list. Click .
Select one or more NEs, and set 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitor parameters according to the requirement. (1) Select Enabled. (2) Set the start time and date.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
557
(3) Optional: Select To: check box, set the end time and date.
NOTE
l The start time must be later than the current time of the network management system and the end time must be later than the start time. l If the end time is not set, this indicates that the performance monitoring starts from the start time and does not stop.
4.
Click Apply and then click Close in the Result dialog box.

1. 2. 3. 4. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor Time from the Function Tree. Set 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitor parameters as required. Click Apply. Click Query. The displayed results are the same as the values that are set. When the NE time is later than the monitoring time that is set, you can query the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring of an NE normally.
Viewing Statistics Group Performance of an Ethernet Port

To know the real-time statistics, you can view the statistic group performance data of an Ethernet port.
Prerequisite
l l l You are an NMS user with " Monitor Group" authority or higher. The Ethernet service must be configured. The performance monitoring parameters must be set.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
558

U2000/Web LCT

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the NE Explorer, select a desired board and choose Performance > RMON Performance. Click the Statistics Group tab. Select a port from the Object drop down list. Select the performance events. Set the Query Conditions. Click Start and the result is shown.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the NE Explorer, select a desired board and choose Performance > RMON Performance. Click the Statistics Group tab. Select a port from the Select port drop down list. Select the performance events. Set the Query Conditions. Click Start.
15.5.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers

After a network test or fault recovery but before the official operation, you need to reset the performance register so that the system enters a new performance monitoring period.
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT

1. 2. 3. 4. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board Performance Register from the Function Tree. Select the ports and registers that you want to reset and click Reset. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

1. 2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board Performance Register from the Function Tree. Select the registers that you want to reset.
3.
Click Reset and the confirmation dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
All registers supported by the NE are provided as options for setting the register.
4.
Click OK.
15.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEs

After an NE is configured, you can modify the attributes of the NE based on the following task sets.
15.6.1 Modifying the NE Name

You can change the NE name as required. This operation does not affect the running of the NE.
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT

1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Enter Name of the NE according to the customer planning, and then click Apply.
NOTE
You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols, and numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :, *, ?, ", <, and >.
3.
A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed. Click Close.

1. 2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Enter Name of the NE according to the customer planning, and then click Apply.

NOTE
You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols, and numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :, *, ?, ", <, and >.
15.6.2 Modifying the Optical NE Name

You can change the optical NE name at any time as required with no effect on the running of the NE.
Prerequisite

U2000
Procedure
1. 2. 3. Right-click an NE on the Main Topology and choose Object Attributes from the shortcut menu. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. In the Attribute > NE Attribute tab, enter the new optical NE name and click OK. After the optical NE name is changed successfully, the optical NE is displayed by the new name on the Main Topology.
NOTE
An NE name can contain a maximum of 64 letters, symbols, and numerals, but cannot contain the following special characters: | : * ? " < >.
15.6.3 Modifying GNE Parameters

During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or the communication address.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher.

U2000
Precautions
CAUTION
This is a potential service affecting operation. Specifically, it may interrupt the communication between a GNE and the U2000, and the communication between the GNE and the non-gateway NEs that are managed by the GNE.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
561

NOTE
l It is not recommended to change the Port No.. l In the case of IP GNE, make sure that the IP address of the GNE is in the same network segment as the IP address of the U2000. When the U2000 server and the GNE are in different network segments, you need to set the network port attributes of the router through which the U2000 server and the GNE are connected. In this way, the U2000 can log in to the GNE.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the Main Menu. Close the displayed Filter NE dialog box. Click the GNE tab. Select the GNE to be modified in the displayed Filter GNE dialog box. The NE is shown in list of GNE tab. Select the NE in the list, right-click and choose Modify GNE from the shortcut menu. In the Modify GNE dialog box displayed, set the parameters. Click OK. In the Warning dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
15.6.4 Changing the GNE for NEs

When the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain number (the number is usually 50 and varies depending on different types of equipment), change the GNE for certain NEs so that the communication between the U2000 and the NEs is not affected.
Prerequisite

U2000
Precautions
CAUTION
This operation may interrupt the NE communication.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the Main Menu. Select an NE to be modified in the displayed Filter NE dialog box. The NE is shown in the list of the NE tab. Select the NE in the list. Double-click the Primary GNE1 field and select a GNE from the drop-down list. Click Apply. Click Close in the Result dialog box.
5.
Click Refresh.
15.6.5 Changing a GNE to a Normal NE

When you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change the GNE to a normal NE.
Prerequisite

U2000
Precaution
CAUTION
This operation may interrupt the service.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Close the displayed Filter NE dialog box. Click the GNE tab. Select the GNE to be modified in the displayed Filter NE dialog box. The NE is shown in list of GNE tab. Right-click the GNE that you want to change in the list, and choose Delete GNE from the shortcut menu. Click OK in the Confirm and Reconfirm dialog box. Click Close in the Result dialog box.
Follow-up Procedure
After changing the GNE to a normal NE, modify the attributes of the NE that uses the GNE and select another GNE.
15.6.6 Changing a Normal NE to a GNE

When you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change a normal NE to a GNE.
Prerequisite

U2000
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Select an NE to be modified in the displayed Filter NE dialog box. The NE is shown in the list of the NE tab. Select the NE in the list, Right-click a normal NE under the NE Name field and choose Change to GNE from the shortcut menu. In the Change to GNE dialog box, select the Gateway Type, and enter the IP Address or NSAP Address. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box. Click Close in the Result dialog box.
NOTE
The NE is now changed to a GNE and appears in the GNE tab.
15.6.7 Deleting NEs

If you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the U2000. Deleting an NE removes all information of the NE from the U2000 but does not affect the running of the equipment.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher. Fibers and cables connected to the NE must be deleted. On the Web LCT, you have already logged out the NE.

U2000 or Web LCT
When the NE is not logged in, you can delete the NE on the U2000.

1. Delete a single WDM NE. (1) Choose an optical NE in the Main Topology. Right-click the NE in the left pane and then choose Delete from the shortcut menu. (2) In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click Yes. 2. Delete NEs in batches. (1) Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu. The NE Configuration Data Management window is displayed. . The Configuration Data (2) In the left-hand pane, select multiple NEs and click Management List pane displays the configuration data of all the selected NEs. (3) Select the NEs to be deleted, right-click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. The Delete the NE dialog box is displayed. (4) Click OK.

1. 2. In the NE List, select the NE you wish to delete, and click Delete NE. Click OK.
15.7 Modifying the Boards Configuration

After a board is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the board based on the following task sets.
15.7.1 Deleting Boards

To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boards from the NE Panel or Slot Layout.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher. The services and protection groups must be deleted.

U2000 or Web LCT

1. 2. Double-click the icon of the NE to open the NE Panel and choose the desire subrack. Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
When you delete the board, the inactive single-station optical cross-connections are also deleted.
3. 4.
Click OK in the Delete Board dialog box. Click OK to delete the board.

1. 2. In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout. Click required subrack on which board you want to delete is present. Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
When you delete the board, the inactive single-station optical cross-connections are also deleted.
15.7.2 Adding Boards

When manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel/Slot Layout.
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
For U2000, You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The NE must be created.
There must be idle slot on the NE Panel Slot Layout.

U2000 or Web LCT
The physical boards are the actual boards inserted in the shelf. A logical board refers to a board that is created on the U2000 or Web LCT. After a logical board is created, you can configure the relevant services. If the corresponding physical board is online, the configured services can be available.

1. 2. 3. In the Main topology, double-click the icon of the NE to open the NE Panel. Select the NE to be added in the left pane on the NE Panel after performing the preceding operation and choose the desire shelf. Right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the list.

1. 2. In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout. Select the shelf, right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the list.
NOTE
For Web LCT, click Add Physical Boards. All the slots in which physical boards are configured, and the system automatically creates corresponding logical boards.
15.8 Modifying the Fibers Configuration

After a fiber is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the fiber based on the following task sets.
15.8.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information

You can modify the name, attenuation, length, and medium type of a fiber/cable according to its connection status and physical features.
Prerequisite

U2000
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
566
Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable Management from the main menu. The information of all fiber/cable is displayed in the pane on the right. Modifying the fiber/cable information. l In the Name column, right-click the value for a fiber/cable and choose Modify Fiber/ Cable from the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, enter a proper name for the fiber/cable and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. l In the Length(km) column, right-click the value for a fiber/cable and choose Modify Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, enter the actual length for the fiber/cable and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. l Modify the attenuation of a fiber. (1) In the Attenuation column, right-click the value for a fiber and choose Modify Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu. (2) In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the actual loss and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. l Modify the medium type of the fiber. (1) In the Medium Type column, right-click the value for a fiber and choose Modify Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu. (2) In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, select the actual medium type of the fiber from the drop-down list and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
2.
15.8.2 Deleting Fibers

When adjusting the network if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between NEs, you need to delete the fiber connections between the NEs.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher. There are no services on the fiber to be deleted.

U2000/Web LCT

1. 2. In the Main Topology view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable Management from the main menu. To delete a fiber or cable from both the NMS database and the NE database, right-click this fiber or cable and then choose Delete Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu. The Warning dialog box is displayed. Click OK to delete the fiber/cable.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
CAUTION
The deletion of the fiber/cable will delete the related protection subnets, trails and userdefined information. Exercise caution before you delete the fiber/cable. You can export the script of the entire network first to avoid deletion by mistake. 3. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Fiber Management from the Function Tree. Select the fiber you wish to delete, and click Delete. Click OK.
15.9 Creating a Single NE

After the NE is created, you can use the U2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a single NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless of whether the data is configured on the NE or not. Creating NEs one by one is applicable no matter what way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to communicate do not support the NE search function and you must create them one by one.
Prerequisite
l l l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. For OptiX OSN 8800, the license must be installed and the license must support creating the NE of the type. The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.

U2000 or Web LCT
For U2000: l l First create a GNE, and then create a non-gateway NE. If the NE is not created properly or the communication between the NE and the U2000 is abnormal, the NE is displayed in gray color.

1. 2. 3. 4.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > NE... from the shortcut menu. The Create NE dialog box is displayed. Select required NE from tree structure at left hand pane. Complete the following information: ID, Extended ID, Name and Remarks. To create a GNE, proceed to 5. To create a non-gateway NE, proceed to 6.
5. 6. 7.
Select Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list and set the IP address. Select Non-Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list. Select the GNE to which this NE is associated, from the Gateway drop-down list. Select the optical NE in Associated ONE to which the WDM NE is associated.
NOTE
When creating the OptiX OSN 8800/6800 NE, you need not to choose the optical NE that is NE belongs to and this NE is directly created on the Main Topology.
8.
Enter the NE User and Password.

NOTE
The default NE user is root, and the default password is password.
9.
Click OK, the cursor is displayed as "+", click on the blank space of the physical view and the NE is created.
Result
After an NE is successfully created, the system automatically saves the information, such as the IP address, subnet mask, and NE ID to the U2000 database.

1. 2. 3. Click Add NE > Europe in the NE list. The Add NE dialog box is displayed. Enter an NE ID and an Extended ID. Select Gateway Type and set related parameters. l If the gateway type is IP Gateway, set IP Address and Port. l If the gateway type is Serial Port, set Port and Baud Rate. 4. Enter the User Name and the Password.
NOTE
The default user name is lct and the default password is password.
5.
Click OK. One entry is added in the NE list. Usually the NE communicates normally and is in the Logged In state.
Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows: l l l The communication between the U2000 and the NE is abnormal. Check the settings of communication parameters, such as the IP address of the NE and NE ID. The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user. The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.
15.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User

During a new deployment, after the root/lct NE user creates the NE, this user can create another NE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" authority. The NE user must be created.
An NE user cannot log in to or manage an NE at the same time. After you use an NE user to log in to an NE through a U2000/Web LCT server, if you use the same NE user to log in to the same NE through another U2000/Web LCT server, the NE user is forced to log out from the first U2000/Web LCT server.

U2000 or Web LCT

1. 2. Choose Administration > NE Security Management > NE Login Management from the Main Menu, click the NE Login Management tab. Select the required NE from the NE list, and click
NOTE
When this button is used for the first time, or the configuration data is changed, or the selected object on the Object Tree on the left is changed, this button becomes red.
3. 4.
Click Query to query the current NE user. In the NE Login Management Table, select the NE and click Switch NE User. In the Switch Current NE User dialog box, enter User and Password, and set Offline Switching.
NOTE
If Offline Switching is selected, the system does not check the user name and password, and thus later login of the NE may fail, which causes the NE unreachable by the NMS. Therefore, it is recommended not to select Offline Switching.
5.
Click OK.

1. 2. 3. 4. In the NE List, select one or more NEs that are logged in and click NE Logout. The NE status becomes Not Logged In. Click NE Login. The NE Login dialog box is displayed. Enter the User Name and the Password. Click OK. In the NE List, the Login Status changes to Logged In.
15.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode

In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and inside NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in the list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a few fiber connections only.
Prerequisite
l l l l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The board on relevant NEs must be created. The boards to be connected with the fiber or cable have been created. Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Configure Wavelength No./ Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the tunable OTU as the designed wavelength.

U2000
After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might exist on the NE. You can synchronize on the U2000 the internal fiber connection data of the NE with the U2000 side. Conflicting fibers see the different fibers configured on the NE and U2000 sides. Click Synchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, and then the conflicting fibers are displayed in the Uncreated Fiber in NMS and Uncreated Fiber in NE user interfaces. The conflicting fibers cannot be synchronized between the U2000 and the NE. In this case, based on the networking design, delete the incorrect fibers. After that, click Create Fiber/Cable and re-create the remaining fibers.
NOTE
The U2000 supports the ability to synchronize WDM fibers in batches. To do so: In the Main Topology view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > WDM Fiber/Cable Synchronization from the Main Menu.

Step 1 Optional: Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Fiber/Cable Synchronization from the Function Tree. Click Synchronize, and the data of the internal fiber connections on the U2000 side and that on the NE side are displayed.
NOTE
Synchronized Fiber: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the U2000 and NE sides. U2000 is the same as the fiber data on NEs. Fiber/Cable on the NE Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side. Fiber/Cable on the NMS Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the U2000 side.
3.
Handle different situations as follows: l If uncreated fiber in U2000 or uncreated fiber in NE exists, select all the fibers. Click Create Fiber/Cable, and the dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The synchronized fibers are displayed in the list of Synchronized Fiber/Cable. l If conflicting fibers exist, fibers cannot be created. You can click Delete Fiber/Cable to delete the uncreated fibers in U2000 or uncreated fibers in NEs, and then click Create Fiber/Cable to re-create the remaining fibers.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
571
Step 2 Creating fiber connections in list mode. 1. 2. Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu. Click Create, and the Bulk Create Fibers/Cables dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot be edge ports.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Click Select Object, select all the NEs you need to create fiber/cable in the dialog box. Click OK. Click New in the Bulk Create Fibers/Cables dialog box. Double-click the setting area of each attributes. Set Direction, Source NE, Source Port, Sink NE and Sink Port. Click Apply.
TIP
You can create multiple fibers/cables and set parameters in step 5, click Apply.
8. 9.
Click Close on the Operation Result dialog box. Repeat Step 6-8 to create another fiber connection. Click Apply to complete the settings. The created fiber connections are displayed in the Fiber/Cable Information list.
10. Move the cursor to the fiber that is created and then information about the fiber is displayed. Read the information to check whether the fiber is created correctly. ----End
Postrequisite
After you create fiber connections, you need to scan wavelengths to ensure that the fiber connections are correct and the line communication is available.
15.12 Configuring the Edge Port

An edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting an edge port is to set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this NE and another NE.
Prerequisite

U2000/Web LCT
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
572
NOTE
l The line-side ports of the FIU and the OTU do not need this configuration. By default, such a port is a Fixed Edge Ports. l If fiber connection between NEs has been added to a port, the port automatically becomes the edge port of NEs. l If fiber connection between boards that are inside the NEs has been added to a port, the port cannot be configured as the edge port of NEs.

1. Click the NE on the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree. Select the Edge Port tab. Select the desired port in the Available Edge Ports field. Click to Selected Edge Ports. to add the port
2.
3.
Click Apply. The displayed dialog box prompts that the operation succeeded. Click Close.
NOTE
When the operation is performed on the U2000, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. If you want to change the selected edge port, select the corresponding port from the Selected Edge Ports, and then click to add the port to Available Edge Ports.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
573
15.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection

The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board (WSD9/WSM9/ROAM) that performs grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through the creation of single-board optical cross-connection.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. When creating an optical cross-connection of a board, make sure that the optical crossconnection of the single station where this board resides does not occupy the wavelength that the optical cross-connection of the board uses.

U2000/Web LCT
Single-board optical cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection are independent from each other. The user can create single-board optical cross-connection and configure services based on the planning to realize grooming at the optical layer. However, as for the single-station optical cross-connection, grooming is realized after automatic computation of the equipment. The configuration of single-board optical cross-connection and that of singlestation optical cross-connection are mutually exclusive in terms of resources. When the user configures an optical-layer grooming board with the single-board optical cross-connection of one wavelength, this wavelength can no longer be configured for single-station optical crossconnection.

1. Click the NE icon in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical CrossConnection Management from the Function Tree. Click Board-Level Optical CrossConnection tab in the right-hand pane. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed. button on the Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the wavelengths from the Available Wavelengths list. Click Wavelengths. 4. to add the wavelengths to Selected
2. 3.
Click OK. The displayed dialog box prompts that the operation succeeded. Click Close. The created single-board optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.

1. Click the NE icon in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical CrossConnection Management from the Function Tree. Click Board-Level Optical CrossConnection tab in the right-hand pane. Click Create. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
3.
Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the wavelengths from the Available Wavelengths list. Click Wavelengths. to add the wavelengths to Selected
4.
Click OK. The Create Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
5.
Click OK. The created single-board optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.
15.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes

Port attributes of WDM boards need to be set to meet the engineering requirements. Every board has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All port parameters can be queried.
Prerequisite

U2000/Web LCT

1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel from the drop-down list. Click Query. The parameter list of each optical port or channel is listed in the window.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
575

NOTE
When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be queried and set from the perspective of function.
3. 4. 5.
Select Basic Attributes, Advanced Attributes tabs. Double-click corresponding parameter fields to enter or select parameters. Click Apply. Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The attributes values of the board are the same as the ones set previously.
15.15 Configuring Board SDH Port Attributes

Configure the port attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every board has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All port parameters can be queried.
Prerequisite

U2000/Web LCT

1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Port from the drop-down list. Click Query. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. The parameter list of each optical port or channel is listed in the window.
NOTE
When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be queried and set from the perspective of function.
3. 4. 5.
Double-click corresponding parameter fields to enter or select parameters. Click Apply. In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Prompt dialog box, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
15.16 Opening/Closing Lasers

This section describes the basic method of opening and closing lasers during the detection of faults and the commissioning.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. To forcibly turn on the laser, you must first disable the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. For details of procedure, see Enabling/Disabling the ALS Function.
Impact on System
Closing the laser of the local board interrupts the services of the downstream board.

U2000
Opening/Closing Lasers In the case of the WDM board

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel from the drop-down list. In the Basic Attributes tab, double-click the desired optical port. In the Laser Status field, choose On or Off to change the laser state. Click Apply. The Modifying the following attribute(s) may cause service interruption or NE login failure. Are you sure to apply the modification to the attribute(s): Laser Status? dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The This operation may interrupt services or the NE cannot be logged in to as a result. Please confirm again that you need to apply the modification to the attribute(s): Laser Status? dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Click Query.
6.
7.
Opening/Closing Lasers In the case of the SDH board

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Double-click the desired ONE icon on main topology to display the NE Panel of the ONE. Right-click the desired board and choose WDM Configuration from the shortcut menu. Then, the NE Explorer window is displayed. Select Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Select By Board/Port(Channel), and then select Port from the drop-down list. Double-click the Laser Switch field of the required port, and then select On or Off from the drop-down list to change the laser state. Click Apply. The Modifying the following attribute(s) may cause service interruption or NE login failure. Are you sure to apply the modification to the attribute(s): Laser Status? dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The This operation may interrupt services or the NE cannot be logged in to as a result. Please confirm again that you need to apply the modification to the attribute(s): Laser Status? dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
8.
15.17 Setting the Rated Optical Power of the OA Board

You can manually change the rated input and output optical power of an optical amplifier (OA) board to trigger a change in the attenuation of the power adjustment board.
Prerequisite
The OA board must be created.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an OAU board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The rated optical power value of the receive port is displayed. Step 2 Double-click the Rated Optical Power (dBm) fields of the input and output ports, and enter values. Step 3 Click Apply. Step 4 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. ----End
15.18 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards

Prerequisite

U2000/Web LCT
The TDC, LSXL, LSXLR, LSQ, and NS3 board supports the configuration of receive wavelengths.

1. 2. 3. 4. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click Receive Band Type and select C. Double-click Receive Wavelength and make required settings.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
578
5.
Click Apply.
15.19 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters

In a 40G system, you must accurately configure the fixed dispersion compensator. You also need to use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust dispersion precisely. In addition, you need to use TDC dispersion real-time adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of transmission fibers caused by changes in factors such as ambient temperature.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Applicable to the LSXL, LSQ, LSXLR, TDC, NS3 boards of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be established correctly.
Precaution
CAUTION
This operation may interrupt services.
Procedure
l Search the best dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration to the board. 1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Dispersion Compensation Management from the Function Tree.
2. 3.
Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion compensation parameter. Select the port, click Start Search. Click OK in the dialog box displayed. The search status changes to Searching. After successful search, the search status changes to The search is successful.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
579

NOTE
l After successful search, only the search status automatically changes. Other parameters do not change until you query them. l If you start searching the best value, you cannot set the dispersion compensation value.
4. 5.
Click Query. After confirmation, you can query the best dispersion compensation value. Optional: Set Fine Tune Switch to Enabled.
NOTE
After you enable the fine tune switch, the board may be fine tuned and the query result of the dispersion compensation value may change.
6. l 1. 2. 3.
Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Dispersion Compensation Management from the Function Tree. Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion compensation parameter. Set Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm) and Fine Tune Switch.
NOTE
Manually set the dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration to the board.
l The dispersion compensation value must be in the range of the dispersion compensation range. l The dispersion compensation value and the best dispersion compensation value can be fine tuned only if they are in the fine tune range.
4. ----End
Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration.
15.20 Configuring the Service Mode

If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the board.
Prerequisite

Precautions
CAUTION
Modifying the service mode interrupts the existing services.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
580

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), and then choose Channel from the drop-down list. Step 3 Select the Basic Attributes tab, and then select the desired optical port. Double-click the Service Mode field, and then choose the desired service mode from the drop-down list. For details, see Service Mode (WDM Interface). Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. ----End
15.21 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)

The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Service Type of the board on the client side must be set to ISC1G, ISC2G, InfiniBand 2.5G or InfiniBand 5G. Applies to TN12TQM, TN12LQMS, TN12LQMD, TN11LOM and TN13LQM board.

U2000/Web LCT
Precautions
CAUTION
l Set the LPT Enabled and Automatic Laser Shutdown functions to Disabled before the OFC function is enabled. l The OFC function cannot coexist with protection.

1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-down list.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
3. 4. 5.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Double-click the OFC Enabled field, and select Enabled. Click Apply. Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.
15.22 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board

Automatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there is no input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interface board does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost, the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the service life of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The OTU board must be created.

U2000/Web LCT

1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Select the By Function option button. Select Automatic Laser Shutdown from the drop-down list. Click Query and the attribute of Automatic Laser Shutdown for the port or channel are shown in the window. Select an optical port and set Automatic Laser Shutdown to Enabled.
NOTE
This operation may cause service interruption or NE login failure. You can confirm the settings according to actual service requirement.
4. 5.
Click Apply. Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The value of Automatic Laser Shutdown is the same as the one set previously. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the relevant laser on the client side of the board is shut down automatically when an R_LOS alarm is reported from the WDM side of the board.
15.23 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board

Automatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there is no input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interface board does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost, the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the service life of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The optical interface board must be created.

U2000/Web LCT (U2000is recommended)

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set Automatic Shutdown to Enabled. Set the On Period (ms), Off Period (ms) and Continuously On-test Period (ms). Step 3 When you click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End
15.24 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering Protection Switching

You can configure signal degrade (SD) conditions for triggering automatic protection switching of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The OTU board must be applicable to the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800. For the boards for which you configure SD conditions, see the parameter description of each OTU board in the Hardware Description.

The following protection trigger conditions are supported: B1_SD, OTUk_DEG and ODUk_PM_DEG.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired OTU board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel) and select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 4 Double-click the SD Trigger Condition cell that you want to set. In the SD Trigger Condition dialog box, select one or more options and then click OK.
NOTE
After the configuration of the parameters for the SD trigger condition of automatic protection switching, the switching will enable when a selected alarm happens. l The B1_SD is an alarm indicating that regenerator section B1 signals in the received signals are degraded. This alarm occurs, when the processing board detects the B1 byte, indicating that the bit error rate of the regenerator section signals exceeds the specified threshold value. l The OTUk_DEG is an alarm indicating that OTUk signal degraded. This alarm occurs when bit errors are of burst distribution and the signal degradation or bit error count crosses the threshold. When bit errors are of Poisson distribution, if signals degrade this alarm occurs; if the bit error count crosses the threshold, an OTUk_EXC alarm occurs. l The ODUk_PM_DEG is an alarm indicating that ODUk PM signal degraded. This alarm occurs when the BIP8 detection mode is bursty mode and the signal degradation or bit error count crosses the threshold.
Step 5 Click Apply in the lower right corner. Step 6 Click Query. Confirm that the value of SD Trigger Condition is the same as the value that is set. ----End
15.25 Setting the NULL Mapping Status

Some OTU boards in the NG WDM equipment support the OTN NULL mapping detection. For the channel where no signals are input, the U2000 can be used to set the NULL mapping status to Enabled. By checking OTN overheads, the channel status in the network can be monitored.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The OTU boards or tributary boards and line boards must be configured. For details, see Hardware Description.

Figure 15-7 shows the common networking mode for NULL mapping detection. Figure 15-7 Networking diagram for NULL mapping test
Precaution
CAUTION
The PRBS test and the NULL mapping test cannot be performed at the same time.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-down list. Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click the NULL Mapping Status and select Enabled. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Start the NE Explorer of the opposite NE. Select a board and choose Configuration > OTN Overhead Management > OPU Overhead. Step 6 Check if the value of PT Received is the same as the PT to be received. ----End
15.26 Configuring Path Binding

By configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side signals to multiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several channels of lower order signals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical port decreases.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Applies to the TN11TDX board.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Path Binding from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Configure, and the Configure Path Binding dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Configure relevant information of the path binding service, including the Slot ID, Port ID, and Direction. For details, see 16.1.11 Path Binding.Configure relevant information of the path binding service, including the Slot ID, Port ID, and Direction.
NOTE
For the bound path, ODU1-1 is required. If you want to select other paths as the bound path, you must select paths in the order from ODU1-2 to ODU1-4 according to the actual service situation.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. ----End
15.27 Configuring Centralized Wavelength Monitoring

The WMU board is connected to the MON ports of the optical amplifier boards or optical multiplexer boards in the two transmit directions. The board monitors the wavelengths and reports information such as optical power of the wavelengths to the SCC. To achieve the function, the OTU board and NE where the monitored wavelength is located must be configured on the U2000, and the intra-subrack and inter-subrack communication must be normal.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Ensure the normal DCN communication between NEs. The WMU board must be created after the physical WMU board is installed.

l The wavelength locking function is achieved after the WMU board is configured with the centralized wavelength monitoring function.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
When configuring wavelength monitoring, check the transmit directions of each OTU board and the fiber connections. In addition, check which optical port on the WMU board is connected. Based on the check result, configure the optical ports on the WMU board and wavelength monitoring of the OTU board. There are three types that the wavelengths be locked: Scenario I: The OTU, WMU, and optical-layer boards are on the same NE, and logical fiber connections are configured. In this case, the wavelengths can be locked automatically without any operation performed by the user. Scenario II: The OTU and WMU boards are on the same NE, but the optical-layer boards are on another NE. In this case, you need to configure the mapping between the OTU board and WMU board. Scenario III: The OTU board and the WMU board are on different NEs. Ensure that the NEs be allocated to the same optical NE and that the DCN communication between the NEs is normal. You need to configure the mapping between the OTU board and the WMU board.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the WMU board and choose Configuration > Wavelength Monitoring Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Wavelength Monitoring Unit field, and choose an optical port of the WMU board from the drop-down list. Step 3 Click Query. The information about the wavelength monitoring that has been configured is displayed.
NOTE
See 16.1.2 Wavelength Monitoring Management to query and enter the parameters.
Step 4 Click New. The New Monitored Object dialog box is displayed. Select the NE and the OTU board where the wavelengths to be detected are located.
NOTE
Click New. The system displays all the OTU boards that are not configured with wavelength monitoring but support wavelength monitoring.
Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 A message is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close. The wavelength monitoring that has been created is displayed in the user interface.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
587

NOTE
l If the logical fiber connections are configured, click Calculate OTU. The system calculates all the OTU boards that have been logically connected based on the fiber connection relationship. Click Apply so that the wavelength monitoring configuration of the OTU boards is delivered. l After you click Calculate OTU, if some of the displayed boards do not need wavelength monitoring, click Delete to remove them one by one.
----End
15.28 Configuring the FEC Function

When configuring the forward error correction (FEC) function of a board, you need to enable the function and set the FEC type of the current optical port.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The corresponding OTU units must be created.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button and select Channel from the drop-down list. Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click FEC Working State and FEC Type fields, and select an appropriate value.
NOTE
After changing the service type on the board, you need to check whether FEC Type is correct on the U2000.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The values of FEC Working State and FEC Type are the same as the ones set previously. ----End
15.29 Enabling and Disabling LPT

When the overhead byte supporting the LPT protocol is added in the frame format of the WDMside signals, the running status of the network access point or the service network can be monitored.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The corresponding OTU units must be created. The services on the boards must be normal and must be of no protection.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-down list. Step 3 Click the Basic Attributes tab. Enable or disable the LPT. l l To enable the LPT, select the desired Optical Interface/Channel, double-click LPT Enabled, and choose Enabled from the drop-down list. Click Apply. To disable the LPT, select the desired Optical Interface/Channel, double-click LPT Enabled, and choose Disabled from the drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The value of LPT Enabled is the same as the one set previously. ----End
15.30 Setting the Speed Level of Fans

This section describes how to set the speed level of fans.
Prerequisite
Fan Speed Mode must be Adjustable Speed Mode.

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
589

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Fan Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a shelf for which you want to change the fan speed from the Subrack drop-down list. Step 3 Select Adjustable Speed Mode in the Fan Speed Mode pane. Step 4 Set Fan Speed Level.
NOTE
The values of Fan Speed Level are as follows: l For the OptiX OSN 3800/6800: Stop, Low, Medium, and High. l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32/OptiX OSN 8800 T64: Stop, Low, Medium-Low, Medium, MediumHigh, and High. l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16: Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-High, and High.
Step 5 Click OK in the dialog box displayed. Click Apply. ----End
15.31 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm Signals Using the RS232 Serial Port
This section describes how to use an RS232 serial port to transparently transmit one channel of alarm signals of an external device.
Prerequisite
The TNK2SCC, TN22SCC, TN52SCC, or TN16AUX board is installed on the NE. The TN12SC1, TN12SC2, or TN11ST2 board is installed on the NE. The SCC board and the SC1, SC2 or ST2 board are installed in the same subrack.

U2000
Context
A WDM device can transparently transmit one channel of alarm signals of an external device using its RS232 serial port. In this manner, the WDM device can centrally manage alarms of the external device. When the WDM device uses its RS232 serial port to transparently transmit one channel of alarm signals of an external device, the data source and sinks must be specified. Broadcast communication is required from the source to the sinks. The source can broadcast a command to all the sinks. The sinks can send data to the source but only one sink is allowed to do so at a time. The source and sinks can be specified randomly. Table 15-1 lists the interface boards that support transparent transmission of external alarm signals using their RS232 serial ports.
Table 15-1 Interface boards that support transparent transmission of external alarm signals Device Type OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Interface Board EFI1 EFI1 EFI EFI AUX Port Serial Serial Serial Serial EXT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the SCC/AUX board and choose Configuration > RS232 Transparently Transmit from the Function Tree. Step 2 From the RS232 Data Source drop-down list, select Shelf11(subrack)-17-52SCC-1. Step 3 In the Available RS232 Data Sink area, select Shelf11(subrack)-12-12SC21, and click to add the selected board to the Selected RS232 Data Sink area.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration. ----End
15.32 Configuring Ethernet Boards

During the service configuration or test on an Ethernet board, the Ethernet board attributes must be configured.
Context
Follow the process given below to configure an Ethernet board:
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
591
15.32.1 Configuring Internal Ports

The attributes of Ethernet ports need to be configured when Ethernet boards are configured with services or used for tests. You can configure the internal ports (VCTRUNK ports) for an Ethernet board.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The Ethernet boards must be created.

CAUTION
To ensure the availability of an end-to-end Ethernet service, make sure that the port attributes of the Ethernet boards at the two ends of the services are the same.
NOTE
The configuration items are different according to different boards.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and select Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface in the Function Tree. Select the Internal Port option button. Step 2 Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the TAG. Click Apply. For the configuration of related parameters, see TAG Attributes. Step 3 Optional: Click Encapsulation/Mapping tab and set the port encapsulation and mapping. Click Apply.
NOTE
This tab is just for the EGSH board setting. The GFP is the most widely applied general encapsulation and mapping protocol. It provides a general mechanism to adapt higher-layer client signal flows into the transport network and can map the variable-length payload into the byte-synchronized transport path. The client signals can be protocol data units (PDU-oriented, such as IP/PPP and Ethernet), block code data (block-code oriented, such as Fiber Channel and ESCON), or common bit data streams. The GFP protocol complies with ITU-T G.7041.
Step 4 Click the Network Attributes tab and set the Port Type of the internal port. Click Apply.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
592

NOTE
l In the case of UNI, the port processes the TAG attribute of 802.1Q and the port is with the Tag Aware/ Access/Hybrid attribute. l In the case of C-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the data packet carries C-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the C-VLAN tag. l In the case of S-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the data packet carries S-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the S-VLAN tag. l When the working mode of a port is NNI mode, that is, when the port functions as a network-to-network interface, it is used for connecting to another network node. l For the configuration of related parameters, see Network Attributes.
Step 5 Optional: Click LCAS tab and set the port LCAS. Click Apply. For relevant information, see LCAS of Feature Description .
NOTE
This tab is just for the EGSH board setting.
Step 6 Optional: Click Bound Path tab, click Query to browse the bound paths.
NOTE
This tab is just for the EGSH board setting.
Step 7 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the port attribute. Click Apply.
NOTE
l Broadcast packet suppression is based on the proportion between the broadcast packet and all packets. The value ranges from 10% to 100%, with an increment of 10%. l For the configuration of related parameters, see Advanced Attributes (Internal Port).
Step 8 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. ----End
15.32.2 Configuring External Ports

The attributes of Ethernet ports need to be configured when Ethernet boards are configured with services or used for tests. You can configure the external ports for an Ethernet board.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The Ethernet board must be created.

Precaution
CAUTION
To ensure the availability of an end-to-end Ethernet service, make sure that the port attributes of the Ethernet boards at the two ends of the services are the same.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
593

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the appropriate Ethernet board and then select Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select the External Port option button. Step 2 Click the Basic Attributes tab and set the basic attributes of the external port.
NOTE
l Working mode: If Working Mode at one end is set to Auto-Negotiation, Working Mode at the other end also must be set to Auto-Negotiation. Otherwise, the services are interrupted. l MAC loopback and PHY loopback: They are used for locating faults and are service-affecting. The two are mutually exclusive. When the value of MAC loopback is set to Inloop, the value of PHY loopback is set to Non-Loopback automatically. The same applies to the reverse case. l For the configuration of related parameters, see Basic Attributes (External Port).
Step 3 Click Apply. Step 4 Click Flow Control tab, set the Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode and Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode of the external port.
NOTE
l Autonegotiation flow control mode: Select this mode when the working mode of the port is AutoNegotiation. Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control means the port only transmits and does not receive flow control frames. Enable Symmetric Flow Control means that the port is able to transmit and receive only PAUSE frames. Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control means that the symmetric or dissymmetric flow control mode is selected according to the auto-negotiation. l Non-Autonegotiation flow control mode: Select this mode when the working mode of the port is not Auto-Negotiation. Enable Symmetric Flow Control means that the port is able to transmit and receive PAUSE frames. Send Only means that the port is able to transmit PAUSE frames only. Receive Only means the port is able to receive PAUSE frames only. l For the configuration of related parameters, see Flow Control (External Port).
Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the TAG of the port. Click Apply. For the configuration of related parameters, see TAG Attributes. Step 7 Click Network Attributes tab, set the port attributes of the external port.
NOTE
l In the case of UNI/NNI, the port processes the TAG attribute of 802.1Q and the port is with the Tag Aware/Access/Hybrid attribute. l In the case of C-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the data packet carries C-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the C-VLAN tag. l In the case of S-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the data packet carries S-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the S-VLAN tag. l For the configuration of related parameters, see Network Attributes.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
594
Step 8 Click Apply. Step 9 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold, Loop Detection, Loop Port Shutdown etc. parameters of the port.
NOTE
l Broadcast packet suppression threshold is based on the proportion between the broadcast packet and all packets. The value ranges from 10% to 100%, with an increment of 10%. l For the configuration of related parameters, see Advanced Attributes (External Port).
Step 10 Click Apply. Step 11 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set. ----End
15.33 Verifying Ethernet Services

After configuring Ethernet services, you need to verify whether the service communication is normal.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Ethernet services must be created.

NOTE
You can select different steps to verify Ethernet services based on the networking and application requirements.

Step 1 Optional: Test Ethernet services. For details, see Testing Ethernet Services of Feature Description.
NOTE
The board supports the test of Ethernet services refer to Hardware Description.
Step 2 Optional: Test the connectivity of Ethernet services. For details, see Configuring the IEEE 802.1ag OAM of Feature Description. Step 3 Optional: Test the connectivity of Ethernet ports. For details, see Configuring the IEEE 802.3ah OAM of Feature Description. ----End
15.34 Configuring the PRBS Test

Some OTUs of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 provide the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS) error detection function. On the U2000, enable the meter board to send PRBS signals, and the
client side and WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently transmit the PRBS signals. In this way, you can perform the bit error test of the transmission link without connecting a meter to the equipment during the deployment.
15.34.1 PRBS Application Scenarios

Specific application scenarios are provided to meet different requirements of the PRBS test. In the PRBS test, OTU boards are used as the meter board and the auxiliary board. There are two common networking modes for the PRBS test. In the first mode, the PRBS test is started on the client side of the OTU board. In the second mode, the PRBS test is started on the WDM side of an OTU board. The details on the two modes are provided as follows. l Starting the PRBS test on the client side See Figure 15-8. One OTU board is used as a meter board. The meter board generates PRBS signals and sends the signals to the client side of the local auxiliary board. The signals are then looped back on the WDM or client side or the auxiliary board at the opposite end by using fibers. Figure 15-8 Schematic diagram of the PRBS test on the client side
TX Meter board RX TX RX Near end auxiliary board IN OUT IN Far end auxiliary board
WDM network
OUT
1: Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback 2: Loopback on the client side/fiber loopback
Starting the PRBS test on the WDM side See Figure 15-9. One OTU board is used as a meter board. The meter board generates PRBS signals and sends the signals to the WDM side of the auxiliary board at the opposite end. The signals are looped back on the WDM side of the auxiliary board at the opposite end. Figure 15-9 Schematic diagram of the PRBS test on the WDM side
OUT Meter board IN WDM network OUT 1: Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback IN 1 Far end auxiliary board
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
596

NOTE
The LEM24 and LEX4 boards are applicable to this scenario (PRBS test on the WDM side) and function only as meter boards. When the LEM24 and LEX4 boards are used in this scenario, other OTU boards must be used as auxiliary boards at the far end.
15.34.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary Board

Before you configure a PRBS test on the meter board, set PRBS Test Status of the auxiliary boards at the local and remote ends.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The corresponding OTU must be configured. The service type must be set according to the board type. The WDM-side outloop, client-side inloop, or fiber loopback is configured on the remote auxiliary board based on the networking requirements.

Precautions
CAUTION
l Create cross-connections between the IP port and the ClientLP port before enabling the PRBS on the client side. Otherwise, the PRBS test will fail to be enabled. Do not delete the created cross-connections after the PRBS is enabled. l After the PRBS Test Status is enabled, do not perform any other operations, such as modifying the service type, opening or closing a laser, or configuring a loopback. l After the PRBS test is complete, stop the test. Then, configure the PRBS Test Status of the board to Disabled.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the OTU board which is used as an auxiliary board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-down list. Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click PRBS Test Status field, and select Enabled.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
597
Step 4 Click Apply. A message is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close.
NOTE
Set the service type of the auxiliary board before configuring the PRBS test status.
----End
15.34.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board

In the PRBS test, the OTU sends out the PRBS code and monitors the PRBS code that is looped back from the remote board. After comparing the PRBS code that is sent with the code that is received, you can determine that the current link or equipment is normal or not.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. The corresponding OTU must be configured. The service type must be set according to the board type. Before enabling the PRBS test on the client side, ensure that the client-side lasers of all OTU boards are turned on. When enabling the PRBS test, you need to enable PRBS Test Status of the port on the OTU board which is used as auxiliary board.

Precautions
CAUTION
When the PRBS test is performed, it is not allowed to access services. A PRBS test is used only in deployment. After the deployment, set PRBS Test Status to Disabled. Before starting the PRBS function on the client side, create a cross-connection between the IP and clientLP ports; otherwise, starting the PRBS function fails. After the PRBS function is started, the cross-connection cannot be deleted.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
598

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the OTU board which is used as meter board and choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function tree. Step 2 Select a channel or a port in the right pane, and set Duration and Measured in Time.
NOTE
Measured in Time: The unit is second, 10 minute, or hour. Select a proper unit based on the actual situation.
Step 3 Optional: Choose Accumulating Mode. The test result is displayed in the coordinates pane in an accumulative manner.
NOTE
In a cumulative mode, the bit error value in the n second is the sum of the bit errors in the previous n seconds.
Step 4 Click Start to Test. A dialog box indicating that this operation may interrupt the service is displayed. Step 5 Click OK to start the PRBS test. Step 6 After the test is complete, view the test result in the coordinates pane.
NOTE
l If the green histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the equipment is normally working. l If the red histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, bit errors exist on the line. l If the yellow histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the line might be interrupted or have loud noise.
----End
15.35 Managing NE Power Consumption

You can configure power consumption monitoring and energy conservation for an NE, to ensure that energy conservation and environment protection can be achieved when the NE runs in the normal state.
15.35.1 Monitoring NE Power Consumption

You can monitor the power consumption of an NE, to ensure that the actual NE configuration does not exceed the maximum power consumption.
Querying the Power Consumption of an NE

After you query the power consumption of an NE, if the power consumption exceeds the threshold, you need to configure energy conservation for the NE in a timely manner.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. It applies to the OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800.

You can use this function to query the power consumption threshold, and the nominal and current power consumption of an NE. You can query the power consumption of an NE on a per-subrack basis. The power consumption of an NE is displayed in the NE/Shelf Name format. You can query the NE threshold of the OptiX OSN 8800 on a per-partition basis. The nominal power consumption of an NE is the sum of the nominal power consumption of all boards on the NE. The current power consumption of an NE is the actual power consumption of a running NE and is calculated based on the actual voltage and current.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Power Management from the Main Menu. Click the NE Power tab. Step 2 In the left-hand Physical Root, select one or more NEs. After the double-right-arrow button turns red, click the button. Step 3 Click Query and the result is displayed.
----End
Querying the Power Consumption of a Board

You can query the power consumption of a board to learn the board that has abnormally high power consumption, which causes high NE power consumption or threshold crossing.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. It applies to the OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800.

U2000
l You can use this function to query the logical board status, board nominal power consumption, physical board type, board current power consumption, and other information.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
l l
The nominal power consumption of a board is a fixed value and is coded in the software. The current power consumption of a board is the actual power consumption of a running board and is calculated based on the actual voltage and current.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Power Management from the Main Menu. Click the Board Power tab. Step 2 In the left-hand Physical Root, select one or more boards, and click Step 3 Click Query and the result is displayed. .
----End
15.35.2 Configuring Energy Conservation for an NE

You can configure energy conservation for an NE to dynamically adjust the power consumption of the NE. In this way, environment protection and energy conservation are achieved.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. It applies to the OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800.

U2000
There are five power saving modes of an NE: Idle Boards, Idle Low Order Cross-Connect Board, Idle Ports, Standby Cross-Connect Board, and Idle Cross-Connect Bus. The default value for Idle Cross-Connect Bus is Enable Power Saving, and cannot be changed. The modes Idle Boards, Idle Low Order Cross-Connect Board, and Idle Ports can be set to Enable Power Saving or Disable Power Saving. The item Standby Cross-Connect Board can be set to Hot Standby or Warm Standby (the power saving state). Idle Low Order Cross-Connect Board is applicable only to the XCM and SXM boards (when the SXM board is used with the XCT board) intended for the OptiX OSN 8800, but not applicable to the XCH boards.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Power Management from the Main Menu. Click the Power Saving Configuration tab. Step 2 In the left-hand Physical Root, select one or more NEs, and click .
CAUTION
If you enable energy conservation for idle ports, the lasers of the unused optical ports are completely turned off. If the optical ports carry services or DCN channels even if the ports are not used, after you enable energy conservation, services may be interrupted or communication faults may occur at the optical ports. l If you enable energy conservation for an NE, you need to set the optical ports to Unused. To achieve this, do as follows: In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Set Channel Use Status to Unused. l You can set the optical ports to Unused regardless of whether the optical ports carry services. When enabling energy conservation for idle ports, ensure that the optical ports do not carry services or DCN channels before setting them to Unused. If you delete logical boards from an NE with energy conservation enabled or disable all DCN channels, ESC communication and services will be affected. Step 3 Set one or all of Idle Boards, Idle Low Order Cross-Connect Board, and Idle Ports to Enable Power Saving.
NOTE
l If you enable energy conservation for idle boards, energy conservation is enabled for the standby boards which are not added with logical boards and not configured with services on the subrack. l If you enable energy conservation for a lower order cross-connect board that is not used, when you configure a lower order cross-connection for the board, the lower-order cross-connection is available after a delay of 1 or 2 seconds.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the set values. ----End
15.35.3 Viewing the Network-wide NE Power Consumption Report

By viewing the network-wide power consumption report, you can learn the network-wide power consumption statistics, annually-conserved energy, and other information.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with " Monitor Group" authority or higher. It applies to the OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800.

U2000
Querying the network-wide NE power consumption is time-consuming. If the number of NEs queried exceeds 100, a dialog box is displayed asking you whether to continue. The network-wide NE power consumption report is based on NEs instead of subracks.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Power Management from the Main Menu. Click the Power Consumption Stat. Report tab. Step 2 In the left-hand Physical Root, select one or more NEs, and click
NOTE
It is recommended that you do not select more than 100 NEs at a time. Otherwise, the operation may take a long time.
Step 3 Click Query and the result is displayed.
NOTE
l During the query process, you can learn the query status according to the progress bar. l Click Cancel to stop the query.
Step 4 Optional: Click Print to print the NE power consumption report. Step 5 Optional: Click Save As to save the report to any directory. ----End
15.36 Configuring NE Clock Sources

The time source for a WDM NE is determined by the clock used by the SCC board. To synchronize networkwide clocks, you need to modify the clock used by the SCC board according to the specific network configuration. The selection of clock sources determines the directions and termination points for networkwide clock synchronization.
15.36.1 Adding Clock Sources

When configuring the clock used by the SCC board, you can add clock sources to provide different reference clocks. You can select different clock sources to decide the direction of clock synchronization in the network.
Prerequisite
Applies to the SCC board. The NE must be configured with the OSC board.

The equipment does not allows you to set the clock source priority of an NE.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the SCC board and choose Configuration > Clock Priority from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query to query clock source priorities.
NOTE
Clock sources are arranged in a descending order according to their priorities.
Step 3 In the clock source list, right-click and choose Add Clock Source from the shortcut menu. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 In the Add Clock Source dialog box, select a clock source and click OK. The selected clock source appears in the clock source list. Step 5 Click Apply. ----End
15.36.2 Setting the Clock Source Priority Table for an NE

When configuring the clock used by the SCC board, clock sources are arranged in a descending order according to their priorities. The clock source with the highest priority is chosen for synchronization. You can set clock source priorities to adjust the direction of clock synchronization in the network.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher. Applies to the SCC board. The NE must be configured with the OSC board.

The equipment does not allows you to set the clock source priority of an NE.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the SCC board and choose Configuration > Clock Priority from the Function Tree.
NOTE
The clock sources are arranged in a descending order according to their priorities.
Step 2 Click Query to query clock source priorities. Step 3 On the U2000, select a clock source, and click
NOTE
or
to adjust the clock source priority.
On the Web LCT, select a clock source, and click

NOTE
or
to adjust the clock source priority.
The priority of the internal clock source is the lowest and cannot be adjusted.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click Query to display the current clock source priority of the NE. ----End
15.37 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data

To ensure security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.
15.37.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods

You need to back up important NE data during daily maintenance. This ensures that the SCC board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board is lost or a power failure occurs on the equipment. This section describes several NE data backup and restoration methods. You can select the method as required.
Comparison of Backup and Restoration Methods

The locations for backing up and restoring the NE database include the SCC board, CF card, local server, and remote server. The data backup and restoration methods vary according to storage locations. See Table 15-2. Table 15-2 Data backup and restoration methods and application scenarios Backup and Restoration Method Back up/Restore the NE database to/from an SCC board Application Scenario Backs up the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to the flash database, when the SCC board does not have a CF card. l After a warm reset on the SCC board, the MDB reads the configuration from the DRDB database. l After a cold reset on the SCC board, the MDB reads the configuration from the FLASH database. Back up/Restore the NE database to/from a CF card Backs up the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to the CF card, when the SCC board has a CF card. During the restoration, the database is restored from the CF card to the DRDB database of the SCC board. l After a warm reset on the SCC board, the MDB reads the configuration from the DRDB database. l After a cold reset on the SCC board, the MDB reads the configuration from the FLASH database. Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMS server Stores the data in the computer where the NMS server resides. During restoration, select the backup file in the directory where the NE data is saved. Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMS client Stores the data in the computer where the NMS client resides. During restoration, select the backup file in the directory where the NE data is saved.
NOTE
After the warm resets on other boards, the NE memory data is issued to the boards. When the actual configuration of a board is consistent with the configuration saved in the database for restoration, the process of delivering configuration data to the board does not interrupt services.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
606

NOTE
The SCC boards of the OptiX OSN 8800 support CF cards. The SCC boards of the OptiX OSN 6800 support CF cards. The SCC board of the OptiX OSN 3800 does not support CF cards.
NE Database
The NE configuration data is saved in the NE database. There are three types of NE databases: l MDB: Memory database. The data in an MDB database is changed when the configuration information is changed. The data will be lost when the SCC board is reset or a power failure occurs. DRDB: Dynamic random database. The data that is verified is automatically saved in the DRDB database. The data will be lost when a power failure occurs but will not be lost after a warm reset is performed. FDB: Flash database. There are FDB0 and FDB1 databases. The data can be saved permanently.
When the NE configuration data is issued to the SCC board, it is saved in the MDB database. If the verification is successful, the SCC board automatically copies the contents in the MDB database to the DRDB database and issues the verified configuration data to the boards. The DRDB database is copied from the DRDB database to the FDB database, as a backup of the DRDB database. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the SCC board checks whether there is configuration data in the DRDB database. If there is configuration data, the data is restored from the DRDB database. If the data in the DRDB database is damaged, the data is restored from the FDB0 and FDB1 databases.
NE Configuration Data
The NE configuration data refers to the information in the DRDB database of the NE, such as the board configuration, clock configuration and protection relationships of the NE. It is the instruction file of the NE and the key for the NE to operate normally on the entire network.
NE Database Package
The NE database package is a package that contains all database files on an NE and a file list that defines and manages those files. The NE database package and NE configuration data are the same data on the NE of different software versions.
15.37.2 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card

You need to back up the NE database during daily maintenance. You can back up the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to a CF card manually, to ensure the automatic restoration of the operation after the data in the DRDB database is lost on the SCC board or a power failure occurs on the equipment.
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher. A CF card must be installed on the SCC board.


Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu. The NE Configuration Data Management interface is displayed. Step 2 In the Object Tree, select one or more NEs and click .
Step 3 Select one or more NEs in the Configuration Data Management List. Step 4 Click Back Up NE Data and then choose Manually Back Up Database to CF Card. Step 5 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. Step 6 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
The NMS takes a few minutes to back up the NE database. Do not perform any operation during the backup process.
----End

Step 1 Select one or more NEs in the NE list. Choose Back Up NE Database > Manually Back Up to CF Card.
NOTE
The NMS takes a few minutes to back up the NE database. Do not perform any operation during the backup process.
Step 2 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. Step 3 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. ----End
15.37.3 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client
This section describes how to back up device data manually for multiple devices of the same device type. You can back up device data to the NMS server or the NMS client.
Prerequisite
The FTP, TFTP, or SFTP server must be configured and the FTP, TFTP, or SFTP service must be started.

U2000
l l l The backup operation can be performed only for multiple devices of the same device type. When you select the device type in the device tree, all the devices and the device type versions related to the device type are displayed in the NE View table. The files backed up from the server can be viewed on the Backup Information tab.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. Step 2 Right click the device(s) that you want to back up in the NE View table.
NOTE
The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected.
Step 3 Select Backup... to open the Backup dialog.
Step 4 Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to back up the selected device information.
NOTE
By default, NMS Server is selected and the NMS Server is selected, the selected device information is saved on the NMS server.
Step 5 Optional: If NMS Client is selected, click has to be backed up.
to select the location where the device data
Step 6 Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s). On the NE View tab, the backup progress is displayed. ----End
15.37.4 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board

When the database file is lost during the NE maintenance or because of an NE fault, you can restore the DRDB database file that is backed up to the Flash database on the SCC board.
Prerequisite
l l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher. The NE data must have been backed up from the DRDB database to the Flash database on the SCC board.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the active SCC board in the NE panel, choose Warm Reset or Cold Reset. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box.
NOTE
The reset modes for different SCC board are different. Select the reset mode as required.
Step 2 Click OK. ----End
15.37.5 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card

When the database file is lost during the NE maintenance or because of an NE fault, you can restore the NE data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up on the CF card.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher. The SCC board must be with a CF card and the NE data from DRDB database must be backed up to the CF card.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu. The NE Configuration Data Management interface is displayed. Step 2 In the Object Tree on the left, select one or more NEs and click .
Step 3 In Configuration Data Management List, select an NE or multiple NEs. Step 4 Click Restore NE Database. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the restoration of the NE database may lead to service interruption. Step 5 Click OK to start to restore the NE database.
NOTE
The NMS takes a few minutes for operation. Do not perform any operation during the process.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
610
Step 6 Click Close. ----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the NE database is restored, the database on the CF card is restored to the DRDB database of the SCC board, but not issued to the boards. If you want to restore the configuration data of the boards, perform a warm reset on the SCC board. Then, perform warm resets on other boards. During the reset process of these boards, the NE issues the configuration data to the boards again.
15.37.6 Restoring Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client
This section describes how to restore the device data from the NMS server or the NMS client.
Prerequisite
l l The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server must be configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service must be started. To perform the Recover operation from client, the SFTP server must be configured, and the SFTP service must be started.

U2000
l l You cannot perform the restoration operation for multiple devices of different device types. When you select the device type in the device tree, all the device information related to the device type is displayed in the NE View table.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu. Step 2 Right-click the device(s) whose data you want to restore in the NE View table. Step 3 Select Recover... to open the Recover dialog. Step 4 In the File Name drop-down list, select the file to be restored. If the backup file is not listed in the File Name drop-down list, click Browse... to select the backup file in the Select File dialog box.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
611
NOTE
In the Recover dialog box, you can select the Deliver To Board Activate to apply the configuration to the board.
Step 5 Select NMS Server or NMS Client to restore the backup file for the selected device(s). By default NMS Server is selected. l If NMS Server is selected, select the appropriate backup file from the NMS server. The selected backup file path is displayed in the File To Be Recovered field. to select the backup file from the NMS Client. The l If NMS Client is selected, click selected backup file path is displayed in the File To Be Recovered field. Step 6 Click OK. The selected backup file path from the NMS Server or NMS Client is displayed in the File Name drop-down list. Step 7 Click Start, the Operation Confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click Yes to start the restoration operation. ----End
Result
After the device data is restored, right-click the device in the NE View table. Select Activation Database... to open the Activation Database dialog box, and then click Start to activate the device database.
NOTE
In the Activation Database dialog box, you can select the Deliver To Board Activate to apply the activation to the board. If you do not activate the software within five minutes after the restoration is successfully complete, the U2000 automatically rolls back the software and cancels the restoration operation.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
612
16 Parameters Reference
16
About This Chapter
Parameters Reference
Describes the parameter-related information that needs to be configured for boards in different types and WDM system functions on the U2000. 16.1 Parameters (Creating a Network) Describes the parameters involved in the network configuration. 16.2 Parameters: WDM Interface This section describes how to configure ports on WDM boards. 16.3 Parameters (Configuring Wavelength Grooming) Describes the parameters involved in the wavelength grooming configuration.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
613
16.1 Parameters (Creating a Network)

Describes the parameters involved in the network configuration.
16.1.1 Laser Spectrum Analysis

The laser spectrum analysis is used to analyze an optical signal and to obtain parameters such as optical power, central wavelengths and optical signal noise ratios (OSNRs) of the optical paths. You can use this function to determine the transmission quality of the current optical signal. In this user interface, you can query and print the spectrum analysis result of the optical signal.
Parameters
Field Port Number Value l On the U2000, for example: NE185-10MCA-2(R02) l On the Web LCT, for example: 1(IN1) Compensation Power (dBm) Range: -10 to +30. For example: 20 Description Displays the port number of each path of the spectrum analysis board. For MCA4, there are four ports. For MCA8, there are eight ports. Due to the factors such as the coupling ratio and optical board attenuation of the spectrum analysis board, the optical power value of each path after analysis has a fixed deviation from the actual value. You can set this field to keep consistency between the analysis value and the actual one.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
614
Field Spectrum Data
Value Wavelength No, Standard Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz), Central Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz), Wavelength Deviation (nm), Optical Power (dBm), OSNR (dB)
Description Displays the result of the optical performance data after spectrum analysis. Wavelength No: indicates the wavelength No. of each optical path. Standard Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz): indicates the standard central wavelength of the optical path. Central Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz): indicates the actual central wavelength of the optical path. Wavelength Deviation (nm): deviation between the standard wavelength and the actual wavelength. Optical Power (dBm): the optical power of the optical path. OSNR (dB): the optical signal noise ratio of the optical path.
Spectrum Waveform Profile X-Axis Frequency
None None Checked, Unchecked
Displays spectrum data in graphics. Displays the spectrum profile of the optical signal. Specifies that the X-axis for the Spectrum Data, Spectrum Waveform, and Profile represents the frequency. Specifies that the X-axis for the Spectrum Data, Spectrum Waveform, and Profile represents the wavelength. Sets whether to automatically query when the window is displayed.
X-Axis Wavelength
Checked, Unchecked
Automatically query when this window is displayed
Checked, Unchecked
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
615
16.1.2 Wavelength Monitoring Management

Wavelength monitoring boards such as the WMU can monitor wavelengths transmitted from the optical ports at the WDM side of the OTU boards (including service convergence units). This section describes how to query and set the wavelength monitoring.
Parameters
Field Wavelength Monitoring Unit Wavelength Monitoring Object Wavelength Value For example: OTM1NE183-5-WMU-1(IN1) For example: OTM1NE183-2-TMX-1(IN/OUT) For example: C/ 1/1529.16/196.050 Description Selects a wavelength monitoring unit. Displays the wavelength monitored object. Displays the wavelength of the monitored object.
16.1.3 Orderwire Board Settings

This section describes how to set the orderwire board before running the equipment. The setting options contain orderwire board settings and settings for the first orderwire phone.
Parameters
Field Orderwire Board Settings Available Boards Selected Board Settings for the First Orderwire Phone Available Boards Selected Board Value For example: SC1 For example: SC1 For example: SC1 For example: SC1 Description The boards that can be set as the orderwire board. The board that is selected as the orderwire board. The boards that can be set as the first orderwire board. The board that is selected as the first orderwire board.
16.1.4 General
This section describes how to set orderwire phone before running the equipment. You can set call waiting time, dialing mode, conference call number, one to three orderwire phone number, and orderwire phone port.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
616
Parameters
Field Call Waiting Time(s) Value 1-9 Default: 9 Description The Call Waiting Time(s) parameter specifies the timeout period of searching an orderwire route. If the period of searching an orderwire route exceeds the specified value, the orderwire phone changes to the busy tone status. On the U2000, click Call Waiting Time(s) for more information. Displays the orderwire dialing mode.
Dialing Mode
Pulse, Dual-Tone Frequency Default: Dual-Tone Frequency
Conference Call
100-99999999 Default: 999
The Conference Call parameter specifies the phone numbers of networkwide orderwire calls. On the U2000, click Conference Call for more information. The Phone parameter specifies the phone numbers of orderwire addressing calls. An addressing call refers to a point-to-point call. The overhead supports a maximum of 3-channel orderwire phone number. As some of the equipments support Phone1 only, Phone2 and Phone3 are not available. When the value is null, after the configuration is delivered, the corresponding data on NEs remains unchanged instead of being cleared. On the U2000, click Phone for more information.
Phone 1, Phone 2, Phone 3
100-99999999
Selected Orderwire Port
For example: 12-SC2-1
Selects the line board port for orderwire transmission.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
617
Field Available Orderwire Port
Value Available Orderwire Port Default: Bid-BidType-PortID
Description The Available Orderwire Port parameter specifies whether the optical interface is used to make orderwire calls. On the U2000, click Available Orderwire Port for more information.
16.1.5 Conference Call

This section describes how to query and set the use mode of conference call at an NE, query and set conference call attributes, and select a conference call port.
Parameters
Field Conference Call Authorities Value Able to Listen and Speak, Able to Listen but not Speak Default: Able to Listen and Speak Description Displays or sets the conference call authorities.
NOTE l Able to Listen and Speak: The user of the conference call can either hear the voices from other phones in the networkwide conference call or let other phone users hear his own voice. l Able to Listen but not Speak: The user of the conference call can only hear the voices from other phones in the networkwide conference call but cannot let other phone users hear his own voice.
Selected Conference Call Port Available Conference Call Port
For example: 12-SC2-1 Available Orderwire Port Default: Bid-BidTypePortID
The optical ports in this list are used for conference call. The Available Conference Call Port parameter specifies whether the optical interface is used to make conference calls. On the U2000, click Available Conference Call Port for more information.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
618
16.1.6 Auxiliary
This section describes how to query and set auxiliary parameters.
Parameters
Field Subnet No. Length Value 1, 2 Default: 1 Description The Subnet No. Length parameter specifies the length of the subnet number of the orderwire subnets if the entire network is divided into multiple orderwire subnets. On the U2000, click Subnet No. Length for more information. Selects the first data communication port for SDH NNI connection to achieve the communication with the opposite end of the SDH NNI orderwire. Selects the first phone port for the SDH NNI orderwire.
First Communication Port
l On the U2000: S1, S2, RS232, RS422 l On the Web LCT: RS232, RS422
First Phone Port
F1 port, Phone2, Phone3
16.1.7 NE Attributes
This section describes how to view and set NE attributes, including NE ID, subrack type, and IP address.
Parameters
Field l On the U2000: ID l On the Web LCT: NE ID Value For example: 1 Description Displays the unique ID of an NE on the NMS for identifying an NE, which is the basis of communication between the NMS and an NE. For NE ID extension. On the U2000, click Extended ID for more information. Displays the NE name, for the convenience of searching for the NE.
619
Extended ID
1 to 254 Default: 9
Name
For example: NE70
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Field Remarks Gateway Type
Value l On the U2000: Nongateway, Gateway l On the Web LCT: IP Gateway, Serial Port
Description Enters extra notes of the NE if desired. The gateway type of an NE decides the mode of communication between the NE and the NMS. Selects the affiliated ONE. When you are creating a Non-Gateway NE, you can select a created gateway NE as its affiliated GNE here. Displays the protocol used for communication between the affiliated Gateway NE and the NMS. The NE name is used when logging in to the NE. Before the NE is configured, use the internally reserved user name root for login. Corresponds to the above NE user password. The corresponding password for the reserved user root is password.
Affiliated ONE Affiliated Gateway
For example: ONE A For example: NE181
Affiliated Gateway Protocol
IP
l On the U2000: NE User l On the Web LCT: User Name
For example: root
Password
For example: password
16.1.8 NE User Management

This section describes how to manage NE users for the specific NE. You can query, add, delete and modify an NE user, and set password for the NE user.
Parameters (U2000)
Table 16-1 NE user parameters Field NE Value For example: NE70 Description The operation object selected.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
620
Field NE user
Value Up to 8 characters can be supported.
Description The name of NE user. Click NE User (NE User Management) for more information. The operations carried out by the NE user are classified into five levels, namely monitor level, operation level, maintenance level, system level and debug level from the lowest level to the highest. Each user of higher level can perform all the functions that a lower level user can do. For example, an operation level user has all the rights processed by a monitor level user. The detailed right settings for each level are: l Monitor level: all query commands, log in/out, and modification of its own password l Operation level: all settings for fault and performance, partial security settings, and partial configuration l Maintenance level: partial security settings, partial configuration, communication settings, and log management l System level: all security settings, all configuration. l Debug level: all security settings, all configuration, and all debug commands Click User Level (NE User Management) for more information.
User Level
Monitor level, Operation level, Maintenance level, System level, Debug level
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
621
Field NE User Flag
Value LCT NE user, EMS NE user, CMD NE user, General NE user
Description Different NE users are used for logging in to NEs through different network management systems. LCT NE user: NE user used when NEs are managed by LCT. EMS NE user: NE user used when NEs are managed by EMS. CMD NE user: NE user used when NEs are managed by CMD. General NE user: NE user used when NEs are managed by the network management system of any type. Click NE User Flag (NE User Management) for more information.
User Group Belonged
Administrator User Group, Super Administrator User Group, Operator User Group, Monitor User Group, Maintainer User Group Up to 32 characters can be supported. Yes, No
Displays the user group of NE user.
Detailed Description Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately
Displays the user description. Sets whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately. This setting is supported only for release 5.0 NEs. Specifies the time that will elapse before the NE user automatically logs out. Specifies the number of the days that the NE user will be valid for. Specifies the number of the days that the NE user password will be valid for. Specifies whether the NE user is online.
Time of Canceling User Automatically(m) User Valid Till(days)
5-60, Disable
1-999, Not overdue
Password Valid Till(days)
1-999, Not overdue
Isonline
Yes, No
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
622
Parameters (Web LCT)

Table 16-2 NE user parameters Field NE NE User Value For example: NE70 For example: USER Description The operation object selected. The name of the NE user. The name consists of 4-16 characters. It can be a combination of letters, digits, spaces and underlines. Note that at least one letter must be included. The operations carried out by the NE user are classified into five levels, namely monitor level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, debug level from the lowest level to the highest. Each user of higher level can perform all the functions that a lower level user can do. The detailed right settings for each level are: l Monitor level: all query commands, log in/out, and modification of its own password. l Operation level: all settings for fault and performance, partial security settings, and partial configuration. l Maintenance level: partial security settings, partial configuration, communication settings, and log management. l System level: all security settings, all configuration. l Debug level: all security settings, all configuration, and all debug commands. Debug level is the highest level.
User Level
Monitor level, Operation level, Maintenance level, System level, Debug level.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
623
Field NE User Flag
Value LCT NE User, EMS NE User, CMD NE User, General NE User
Description Different NMSs log in to the NE using different NE users. LCT NE User: The LCT is the local craft terminal of the Web LCT. This user is the one that the LCT uses for managing the NE. EMS NE User: The EMS is the Web LCT. This user is the one that the Web LCT uses for managing the NE. CMD NE User: CMD is the command line NMS. This user is the one that is used for managing the NE by command line. General NE User: NE user without partition NM.
New Password
The new password must contain at least eight characters in three formats (letters, digits, and special characters). The new password cannot be the same as the user name or reverse of the user name, or the same as one of the most recent five passwords. In addition, the new password must contain different characters in at least two character positions. The new password of the user that you need to enter again. Displays the belonged user group name. Sets whether the NE user is allowed to log in. Sets whether the NE user is permanently valid or not. The start time of user validity. The expiration time of user validity.
Confirm Password User Group Belonged Login Allowed Permanently Valid or not Valid From Valid Till
For example: Administrator User Group Yes, No Yes, No For example: 2005-05-07 10:18:07 For example: 2005-05-07 10:18:07
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
624
Field Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately Records of all Logins Allowable Login Start Date
Value Yes, No
Description Sets whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately. Sets whether the NE user is valid permanently. Sets the allowable login start date. The parameter is valid when Records of all Logins is set to No. Time format is hour: min: second. Sets the allowable login start time. The parameter is valid when Records of all Logins is set to No.
Yes, No For example: Sunday
Allowable Login Start Time
For example: 00:00:00
Allowable Login End Date
For example: Saturday
Sets the allowable login end time. The parameter is valid when Records of all Logins is set to No. Time format is hour: min: second. Sets the allowable login end time. The parameter is valid when Records of all Logins is set to No.
Allowable Login End Time
For example: 23:59:59
Time to Lock User for No Activities (Day) Maximum Password Validity (Day) Password Modification Time Last Login Time
0-255 25-999 For example: 2007-01-23 10:28:26 For example: 2007-01-23 10:28:00
Sets the time to lock the NE user for no activities. Sets the maximum password validity. Displays the password modification time. Displays the last login time of the NE user.
16.1.9 NE Time Synchronization

This section describes how to set NE time, to keep it synchronized with the U2000 server time.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
625
Parameters
Field NMS Time Value l On the U2000, format: mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss l On the Web LCT, for example: 2006-11-04 20:30:00 NE Name NE ID Synchronous Mode For example: NE1 Format: Extended ID-ID l On the U2000: Standard NTP, NMS, NULL l On the Web LCT: NMS, NULL Displays the name of the NE. Displays the ID of the NE. Displays the synchronization mode of NE Time. On the U2000, click Synchronous Mode (NE Time Synchronization) for more information. Displays or sets whether the standard NTP authentication is enabled. On the U2000, click Standard NTP Authentication for more information. Description Displays the time of the U2000 server in real time.
Standard NTP Authentication
Enabled, Disabled
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
626
Field Server Enabled
Value ECC Server, Disabled
Description Displays or sets whether to set it to the NTP server and the type of the NTP server. When the ECC protocol is used for communication between NEs, the gateway NE is an ECC server. So, the Server Enabled parameter is set to ECC Server. While nongateway NEs are ECC clients and the Server Enabled parameter is set to Disabled. When the IP protocol is used for communication between NEs, all NEs are IP clients and the Server Enabled parameter is set to Disabled.
Client Enabled
ECC Client, IP Client, Disabled
Displays or sets whether to set it to the NTP client and the type of the NTP client. When the IP protocol is used for communication between the NE and the NTP server, the NE is an IP client and the Client Enabled parameter are set to IP Client.
Synchronous Server
NE ID, IP address
Displays or sets the IP address or NE ID of the NTP synchronous server. If the client type is ECC Client, set it to the NE ID of the synchronous server. If the client type is IP Client, set it to the IP address of the synchronous server.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
627
Field Polling Period (min)
Value 2 to 1440 Minutes
Description Displays the period of synchronizing the NE time with the NTP server time. It indicates how many times the NTP server time will be sampled in a querying cycle. The NTP server time is the average of that sampled. Displays the current time of the NE.
The Number of Sampling
1 to 8
NE Current Time
l On the U2000, format: mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss l On the Web LCT, for example: 2006-11-04 20:30:00
Daylight Saving Time
Yes, No
Displays whether to save the time in the daytime or not. The latest time when the NE was synchronized. If the difference between the current NE time and the latest time when the NE was synchronized is within two querying cycles, it indicates the NTP server is running normally. Otherwise, it indicates the NTP server is not running normally, and the color of the parameter box will change to the one that is for "Major Alarm". Sets the start time of synchronizing the NE time with the NMS time. Applied only when the NE time is synchronized with the NMS time.
Recent NE Synchronization Time
l Set Auto Synchronization Parameter (U2000) l Synchronization Starting Time (Web LCT)
Synchronizati on Starting Time
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
628
Field Synchronizati on Period (days)
Value 1 to 300 Default: 1
Description Sets the cycle of automatically synchronizing the NE time with the NMS time. Applied only when the NE time is synchronized with the NMS time. On the U2000, click Synchronization Period (days) (NE Time Synchronization) for more information.
Standard NTP Server Identifier
NE ID, IP
Sets the identifier of the NE. On the U2000, click Standard NTP Server Identifier for more information.
Standard NTP Server
For example: 1-1 or 129.9.0.1 0 to 1024
Sets the ID or IP address of the standard NTP server. Sets the key of the standard NTP server.
Standard NTP Server Key
16.1.10 Standard NTP Key Management

This section describes how to manage standard NTP keys.
Parameters
Field NE Name NE ID Key Value For example: oadm1NE112 For example: 9-112 1 to 1024 Description Displays the name of an NE. Displays the NE ID. Sets the key number. When you create keys in batches, you can enter the key numbers in the a-b format or use a comma to separate the numbers. For example, if you create four keys whose numbers are 1, 2, 3, 4, you can enter the key number as 1-4, or "1,2,3,4".
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
629
Field Password Trusted
Value 6 to 16 characters Yes, No
Description Specifies the password that contains at least a numeral and a letter. If you select No, when NEs synchronize clocks, the NEs verify the key and the key is untrusted. Hence, the clock of the NE cannot be synchronized with the standard NTP server.
16.1.11 Path Binding

This section describes how to configure or query the path binding.
Parameters
Field Port Direction Path Binding Binding Path Count Slot ID Port ID Available Bound Path Selected Bound Path Value For example, NE832-12TDX-151(IMP1/IMP1) Uplink, Downlink ODU1 (1, 2, 3, 4) 1, 2, 3, 4 For example, 12-TDX For example, 151(IMP1/ IMP1) For example, ODU1-1 For example, ODU1-1 Description Displays available optical ports. Displays the sink of Ethernet services. Displays the bound paths. Displays the number of bound paths. Displays the board that realizes path binding. Displays ports available for the board. Displays available paths. Displays the selected paths.
NOTE The bound path ODU1-1 is required.
16.2 Parameters: WDM Interface

This section describes how to configure ports on WDM boards. On the right side of the window, there are four domains from the top down: l The first field provides two option buttons (By Board/Port (Channel) and By Function) that are used to select the attribute classification mode.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
l l
The second field specifies the object that needs to be set after the classification, which varies with the first field. The third field specifies attributes, which vary with the second field. Double-click or select to set attributes (for attribute description, refer to the parameter descriptions of different boards). The last field provides two buttons at the bottom: Query and Apply. Before setting, you can click Query to query the board attribute from the NE and after setting you need to click Apply to send the configurations.
16.2.1 Optical Transponder Board

This section describes how to set parameters for optical transponder boards. The parameters are laser status, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path use status.
Parameters (U2000)
Field Optical Interface/Channel Value For example: NE name- Slot No.- Board name- Optical port number (Optical port name) For example: IN/OUT Open, Close Default: Open Description Displays the position of this optical port. Displays the default names. Do not modify this field. Sets the status of a laser. Click Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets whether to shut down the laser automatically or not. If auto-shutdown is set, when the received signal is lost, the laser shuts down automatically, so that the laser service life is extended and body injury is avoided. Click Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. Port Mapping Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Encapsulated to FEC5G, Encapsulated to OTU5G Displays the flow control mode of a trail to which that services at this port are mapped. Click Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.
631
Optical Interface Name Laser Status
Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Field Client Service Bearer Rate (M)
Value The transmission rate of the client-side service varies according to different OTU boards as follows: l 100 to 2500 (applicable to the LDMS, LDMD, 12LDM, 12LQMS, 12LQMD, 13LQM, and TOM boards) l 100 to 5000 (applicable to the 12LOM board) l 16 to 2500 (applicable to other OTU boards) Default: 2500
Description Displays the rate range of client services that the equipment can bear. Click Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Service Type
For example: GE
Queries or sets the service type of the client side. Click Service Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
Service Mode
SDH, OTN Default: OTN
Sets the service mode for a port. Click Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Client Rate (bit/s)
155M, 622M, 2.5G Default: 155M
Sets the rate of accessing services at the optical port on the client side of a board. Click Client Rate (bit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Current Bearer Rate (M)
0 to 65535
Queries the rate of services accessed at the optical port on the client side for such OTUs at any rate Click Current Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled
Enables or disables the LPT function of the service. Click LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
632
Field FC Internal Working Mode Timeslot Allocation Mode Channel Use Status
Value Normal Mode, Special Mode Manual, Automatic Used, Unused Default: Used
Description Sets the FC internal working mode. Sets the timeslot allocation mode. Sets whether to use the channel or not. Click Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Loopback LCK Insertion in the ODU Layer
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled
Sets loopback according to the port of the OTU board. Sets whether to insert LCK or not. Click LCK Insertion in the ODU Layer (WDM Interface) for more information.
Max. Bearer Ratio (M)
34 to 2700
Displays the maximum traffic that can be processed. Click Max. Bearer Ratio (M) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Min. Bearer Ratio (M)
34 to 2700
Displays the minimum traffic that can be processed. Click Min. Bearer Ratio (M) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Rate band (M)
34 to 2700
Sets the rate of transmission for this optical port. Click Ratio band (M) (WDM Interface) for more information.
VOA Supported
Support, Not Support Default: Not Support
Sets whether to support VOA or not. Click VOA Supported (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
633
Field FEC Working State
Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Enable
Description Sets whether the board performs FEC processing on data. Click FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC Default: AFEC
Sets the type of FEC. Click FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Click PAUSE Frame Flow Control (WDM Interface) for more information. Displays the working wavelength of the optical port. Sets whether to perform port auto-negotiation. Click Auto-Negotiation (WDM Interface) for more information.
PAUSE Frame Flow Control
Enable, Disable Default: Enable
Wavelength No./ Optical Interface Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Auto-Negotiation
For example: C/ 1/1560.61/192.10 Disabled, Enabled Default: Disabled
Max. Packet Length
1518 to 9600
Sets the maximum packet length of the data, and any packet exceeding this length is discarded. Click Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.
Band Type
Displays the band type of the optical port. Click Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
Board Receiving/ Transmitting Attributes
Single fed and single receiving, dual fed and selective receiving
Displays the receiving/ transmitting attributes of board. Click Board Receiving/ Transmitting Attributes (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
634
Field Board Tracing Clock Source
Value Local Clock Source, Line Clock Source Default: Local Clock Source
Description Sets the tracing clock source of the board. Click Board Tracing Clock Source (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets status of the ESC auxiliary switch. Click ESC Auxiliary Switch (WDM Interface) for more information.
ESC Auxiliary Switch
Disable, Enable Default: Enable
Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
For example: 1/1529.16/196.05
Displays the working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port that you configure. Click Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Planned Band Type
L, RAMAN_C, C Plus, CWDM, C, C (320G), C192, SMC, RAMAN_L, C+L
Sets the band of the working wavelength. If the board supports the band that you configure, the actual band type is the same as the configured band type. Click Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
Actual Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (Thz) Actual Band Type
For example: 1/1529.16/196.05
Displays the actual working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port. Displays the band of the current working wavelength. Displays the working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port that you configure.
C, CWDM
Configure Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
For example: 1/1529.16/196.05
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
635
Field Configure Band Type
Value C, CWDM
Description Sets the band of the working wavelength. If the board supports the band that you configure, the actual band type is the same as the configured band type. Displays the working modes of the Ethernet port. Auto-Negotiation can automatically determine the optimized working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain and is recommended. During configuration, make sure that working modes of the connected ports are consistent. If the working modes are different, the services are down. Click Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation, 10M HalfDuplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M HalfDuplex, 1000M Full-Duplex Default: 1000M Full-Duplex
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled Default: Disable
Sets the PRBS status of the tributary board. Click PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Remarks SD Trigger Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG, ODUk_TCM1_DEG, ODUk_TCM2_DEG, ODUk_TCM3_DEG, ODUk_TCM4_DEG, ODUk_TCM5_DEG, ODUk_TCM6_DEG Enabled, Disabled
Sets the SD switching condition. Values of parameters vary with different boards and products.
FC Distance Extension
Displays whether the FC distance extension is enabled.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
636
Field Cross-Connect Loopback
Value Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. For details, click the links in the Description column.
Description In the boards, broadcasts optical signals received by the client side to optical transmission modules of the client side and WDM side, or broadcasts optical signals received by the WDM side to optical transmission modules of the WDM side and client side. Click Cross-Connect Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.
Ingress Rate (kbps) Egress Rate (kbps) Port Work Mode
64 to 1250 64 to 1250 For example: OSC Mode
Displays the ingress rate. Displays the egress rate. Displays the working mode of the optical port of a board. Working mode of the optical port varies with the board mode. Sets the non-intrusive monitoring status. Specifies the time between the point when the system detects an interruption of the services and the point when the ALS is started when the ALS function is enabled. A board-level attribute of general configuration. You can manage boards by switching the mode. Sets whether to combine ESC monitoring signals. Sets the protocol type of the channel. Normal indicates lower transmission rate. Enhanced indicates higher transmission rate and supports transmitting E1 services.
Non-Intrusive Monitoring Status Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled 0s to 2s, the increments is 100 ms. Default: 0s
Board Mode
For example: Eight OSCs Convergence
ESC Supervisory Channel Protocol Type
Enabled, Disabled Normal, Enhanced
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
637
Field Band Type/Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Value For example: C/ 1/1529.16/196.050
Description Displays the information of the optical port, including band type, wavelength number, wavelength and frequency. Click Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength(nm)/ Frequency(THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Field Optical Interface/Channel Value For example: NE name- Slot No.- Board name- Optical port number (Optical port name) For example: RX1/TX1 Used, Unused Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Description Displays the position of this optical port.
Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Optical Interface Loopback
Displays the default names. Do not modify this field. Sets whether to use the path or not. Sets loopback according to the port of the OTU board. Loopback may interrupt services and can be used only for testing or troubleshooting.
Service Type OFC Enabled
For example: GE Enabled, Disabled
Sets the service type of the client side. Sets whether to enable the OFC function. This parameter can be edited only when you set Service Type of 13LQM or 12LOM board to ISC 1G or ISC 2G.
Port Mapping
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
Displays the flow control mode of the mapped trail of the service that passes the port.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
638
Field Client Service Bearer Rate (M)
Value The transmission rate of the client-side service varies according to different OTU boards as follows: l 100 to 2500 (applicable to the LDMS, LDMD, 12LDM, 12LQMS, 12LQMD, 13LQM, and TOM boards) l 100 to 5000 (applicable to the 12LOM board) l 16 to 2500 (applicable to other OTU boards)
Description Displays the range of client service rates that the equipment can bear.
Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown
Open, Close Enabled, Disabled
Sets the status of a laser. Sets whether to shut down the laser automatically or not. If auto-shutdown is set, when the received signal is lost, the laser shuts down automatically, so that the laser service life is extended and body injury is avoided. Selects the service mode of the port. A board-level attribute of general configuration. You can manage boards by switching the mode. Enables or disables the LPT pass-through function of the service. Sets the FC internal working mode. Displays the rate of the client service that is currently accessed. Sets whether the board performs FEC processing on data. Sets the FEC type. Sets the non-intrusive monitoring status.
Service Mode Board Mode
For example: OTN For example: ITL Mode
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
FC Internal Working Mode Current Bearer Rate (M)
Normal Mode, Special Mode For example: 50
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
FEC Type Non-Intrusive Monitoring Status
FEC, AFEC Enabled, Disabled
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
639
Field Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
Value 0s to 2s, the increments is 100ms Default: 0s
Description Specifies the time between the point when the system detects an interruption of the services and the point when the ALS is started when the ALS function is enabled. Displays the actual working wavelength of the optical port. An actual wavelength is the optical wavelength emitted by a laser.
Actual Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
For example: 1/1529.16/196.05
Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
C, CWDM For example: 1/1529.16/196.05
Displays the band of the actual working wavelength. Displays the working wavelength configured for the optical port. An configuration wavelength is a logical wavelength. During the optical crossconnection configuration, if temporarily no required actual wavelength is available, you can use the logical wavelength to configure the optical crossconnection.
Configure Band Type Maximum Packet Length
C, CWDM 1518-9600
Configures the band for the working wavelength. Sets the maximum packet length of the data. Packets that exceed this length are discarded.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
640
Field Ethernet Working Mode
Value Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half-Duplex, 10M FullDuplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M Half-Duplex, 1000M FullDuplex,
Description Displays the working modes of the Ethernet port. AutoNegotiation can automatically detect the optimized combination of working modes of the opposite port. This mode is easy to maintain and is recommended. Make sure that the working modes of this port and the opposite port are consistent. If the port modes are different, services are down.
OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission SD Trigger Condition
Disabled, Enabled
Enables or disables the function of OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission. Sets the SD switching condition.
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG, ODUk_TCM1_DEG, ODUk_TCM2_DEG, ODUk_TCM3_DEG, ODUk_TCM4_DEG, ODUk_TCM5_DEG, ODUk_TCM6_DEG Enabled, Disabled
FC Distance Extension
Displays whether the FC distance extension is enabled.
NOTE
In the case of different boards on different equipment, different WDM interfaces are supported. According to the corresponding user interface of the NMS, the parameter description table lists the whole set of parameters in this user interface of the NMS. For detailed parameters supported by each board, see the Hardware Description for each type of equipment.
16.2.2 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board

This section describes how to set and query the attenuation rate of a port, the fixed band, and the parity of the working band.
Parameters (U2000)
Field Optical Interface/Channel Value For example: NE613-1M40-1 (OUT) Description Displays the position of this optical port.
641
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Field Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Value For example: OUT Values of parameters vary with different boards and products.
Description Displays default names. Do not modify this field. Sets the actual attenuation ratio of the optical port. On the U2000, click Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. The maximum attenuation rate allowed. When this rate is exceeded, the output optical power is too low, causing the signal-to-noise ratio of the receive end to fall. On the U2000, click Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface-Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit) for more information.
Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
0 to 40
Min. Attenuation Rate (dB)
0 to 40
The minimum attenuation rate allowed. When this rate is exceeded, the output optical power is too high, causing the signal-to-noise ratio of the receive end to decrease. On the U2000, click Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Fixed Band
Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. Odd, Even, FULL Default: FULL
On the U2000, click Fixed Band (WDM Interface) for more information. Displays the parity of the working band. On the U2000, click Parity of the Working Band (WDM Interface) for more information.
Parity of the Working band
Actual Band
Displays the actual working band of the multiplexer and demultiplexer board.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
642
Field Configure Band Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Value C For example: -50
Description Displays the working band that you configure. The power that is smaller than this value cannot be determined. On the U2000, click Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface-Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit) for more information.
Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT (km)) Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient (ps/(nm*km)) Channel Number Mode
Even, Odd Even, Odd 0.00 to 1.00 -15.00 to 30.00 C40 Mode, C80 Mode, CWDM Mode
Sets the parity of the working band for a port. Sets the parity of the working band for a port. Sets PMD coefficient. Sets chromatic dispersion coefficient. Sets and queried the channel number mode for the calculation of the resource utilization. Set DCM dispersion compensation direction. Set DCM dispersion compensation value.
DCM Dispersion Compensation Direction DCM Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/ nm)
Send, Receive 1.0 to 6500.0

Field Optical Interface/Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Rate (dB) Value For example: NE613-1M40-1 (OUT) For example: OUT For example: 20 Description Displays the position of this optical port. Displays default names. Do not modify this field. Sets the actual attenuation ratio of the optical port.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
643
Field Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Value For example: 40
Description Displays the maximum attenuation ratio allowed. When this ratio is exceeded, the output optical power is too low, causing the signalto-noise ratio of the receive end to fall. Displays the minimum attenuation ratio allowed. When this ratio is exceeded, the output optical power is too high, causing the signalto-noise ratio of the receive end to fall. Displays the actual working band of the multiplexer or demultiplexer board. Displays the working band that you configure. Input power that is smaller than this value cannot be determined. Displays the parity of the current working band of the port. Currently only even band is supported. Configures the parity of the current working band of the port. Currently only even band is supported. Sets PMD coefficient. Sets chromatic dispersion coefficient. Sets and queries the channel number mode for the calculation of the resource utilization. Set DCM dispersion compensation direction. Set DCM dispersion compensation value.
For example: 0
Actual Band
Configure Band Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Actual Working Band Parity
C -35.0 to -10.0
Even, Odd
Configure Working Band Parity
Even, Odd
PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT (km)) Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient (ps/ (nm*km)) Channel Number Mode
0.00 to 1.00 -15.00 to 30.00 C40 Mode, C80 Mode, CWDM Mode
DCM Dispersion Compensation Direction DCM Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/ nm)
Send, Receive 1.0 to 6500.0
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
644
NOTE
16.2.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplex Board

This section describes how to set and query the added/dropped wavelengths for optical add and drop multiplex boards.
Parameters (U2000)
Field Optical Interface/Channel Optical Interface Name Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value For example: NE711-15MR2-1 (A1/D1) For example: A1/D1 0 to 40 Description Displays the position of this optical port. Displays default names. Do not modify this field. Sets the attenuation ratio of the optical port. Click Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the maximum attenuation rate. When this rate is exceeded, the output optical power is too low, causing the signal-to-noise ratio of the receive end to fall. Click Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the minimum attenuation rate. When this rate is exceeded, the output optical power is too high, causing the signal-to-noise ratio of the receive end to fall. Click Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
645
Field Channel Use Status
Value Unused, Used Default: Used
Description Sets whether to use the channel or not. Click Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Block Port
Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled
Sets whether to prevent optical signals from traversing the optical port. When Block Port is set to Enabled, the optical attenuation rate of the optical port is so high that optical signals cannot traverse the optical port. When Block Port is set to Disabled, the optical attenuation rate of the optical port is within the normal range and thus optical signals can traverse the optical port.
Fixed Band
Values of parameters vary with different boards and products.
Displays the fixed band. Click Fixed Band (WDM Interface) for more information. The power that is smaller than this value cannot be determined. Click Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Synthesized Input Optical Power Loss Threshold (dBm)
For example: -50
Band Type/Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THZ)
C: 1529.16/196.05 to 1560.61/192.10 L: 1570.42/190.90 to 1603.57/186.95 C (320G): 1535.82/195.20 to 1560.61/192.10 CWDM: 1471 to 1611
Queries the added/dropped wavelength of the board. It is applicable to MR2. Click Band Type/ Wavelength NO./Add-Drop Wavelength(nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the waveband type. Click Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
Band Type
C+L, C, L, C (320G), CWDM Default: C
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
646
Field Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Add/Drop Wave Band
Value For example: 1/1529.56/196.00
Description Queries the added/dropped wavelength of the board. It is applicable to CMR2 and CMR4. Queries the actual waveband type. Sets the add and drop wavelength for a board. Sets the band type. Displays the add/drop wave band. Click Actual Add/Drop Wave Band (WDM Interface) for more information.
C, CWDM For example: 1/1529.56/196.00 C, CWDM 1 to 40
Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity
Odd, Even, All Odd, Even, All
Displays the parity of the actual working band. Sets the parity of the working band.

Field Optical Interface/Channel Optical Interface Name Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type Value For example: NE711-15CMR2-1 (A1/D1) For example: A1/D1 For example: 1/1529.56/196.00 Description Displays the position of this optical port. Displays default names. Do not modify this field. Queries the added/dropped wavelength of the board. It is applicable to CMR2 and CMR4. Queries the actual waveband type. Configures the added/ dropped wavelength of the board. Configures the waveband type of the board.
C, CWDM For example: 1/1529.56/196.00 C, CWDM
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
647
Field Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity
Value Odd, Even, All Odd, Even, All
Description Displays the parity of the actual working band. Sets the parity of the working band.
NOTE
16.2.4 Tributary and Line Boards

This section describes how to set parameters for tributary and line board boards, such as laser status, automatic laser shutdown and path use status.
Parameters
Field Optical Interface/Channel Optical Interface Name Laser Status Automatic Laser Shutdown Value For example: NE125-3NS2-1 (IN/OUT)-2 For example: IN/OUT On, Off Enabled, Disabled Description Displays the position of this optical port. Displays the default names. Do not modify this field. Sets the status of a laser. Sets whether to shut down the laser automatically or not. If auto-shutdown is set, when the received signal is lost, the laser will shut down automatically, so that the laser service life is extended and body injury is avoided. Sets the service type of the client side. Enables or disables the LPT function for an EPL service. On the U2000, click LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. Path Use Status Used, Unused Sets whether to use the path or not.
Service Type LPT Enabled
For example: STM-64 Enabled, Disabled
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
648
Field Optical Interface Loopback FEC Working State
Value Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Enabled, Disabled
Description Sets loopback according to the port of the board. Sets whether the board performs FEC processing on data. On the U2000, click FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
FEC Type Wavelength No./Optical Interface Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Max. Packet Length
FEC, AFEC For example: 1/1560.61/192.10 1518 to 65535
Sets the FEC type. Working wavelength of the optical port. Sets the maximum packet length of the data, and any packet exceeding this length will be discarded. Sets loopback according to the path. Displays the status of this optical port.
Loopback Optical Interface Status
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop IS-NR, OOS-AU, OOSMA, OOS-AUMA, IS-NR, LPBK, OOS-AU, LPBK, OOS-MA, LPBK, OOSAUMA, LPBK For example: 1/1529.16/196.05
Actual Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (Thz) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Configure Band Type
Displays the actual working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port. Displays the band of the current working wavelength. Displays the working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port that you configure. Set the band of the working wavelength. If the board supports the band that you configure, the actual band type is the same as the configured band type.
C, CWDM For example: 1/1529.16/196.05
C, CWDM
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
649
Field OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Working Mode
Value Enabled, Disabled
Description Sets whether performs OTN overhead transparent transmission for the board. Working modes of the Ethernet port. The autosensing mode is recommended, because it can automatically find out the best working mode to combine a port and its interconnected port and thus is convenient for maintenance, and thus is convenient for maintenance. The port and its interconnected port must have the same settings of working mode. Otherwise, this results in the failure of services.
Autosensing, 10 Mbit/s halfduplex, 10 Mbit/s fullduplex, 100 Mbit/s halfduplex, 100 Mbit/s fullduplex,1000 Mbit/s halfduplex, 1000 Mbit/s fullduplex0
Line Rate SD Trigger Condition PMD Threshold (ps) OFC Enabled
Standard Mode, Speedup Mode B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG For example: 50 Enabled, Disabled
Sets the rate of the line-side port on the board. Sets SD trigger condition. Displays the PMD threshold of the board. Sets whether to enable the OFC function. This parameter can be edited only when you set Service Type to ISC 1G or ISC 2G, and set Automatic Laser Shutdown and LPT Enabled to Disabled.
16.2.5 Optical Amplifier Board

This section describes how to set or query parameters of optical amplifier boards.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
650
Parameters (U2000)
Field Optical Interface/Channel Value For example: NE name- Slot No.- Board name- Optical port number (Optical port name) For example: IN1 20 to 40 Description Displays the position of this optical port.
Optical Interface Name Optical Amplifier Gain (dB)
Displays default names. Do not modify this field. The gain of the optical booster amplifier is the ratio of output power to input power. Set the attenuation ratio of the optical port. Sets the on/off status of a laser. Click Laser Status (WDM Interface-Optical Amplifying Unit) for more information. The actual attenuation ratio of the optical port, which can be obtained through query. Click Attenuation Ratio (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Laser Status
0 to 20 Values of parameters vary with different boards and products.
Attenuation Ratio (dB)
0 to 30 Default: 0
Gain (dB)
20 to 40
Displays the actual gain for an optical amplifier board. The actual gain is the ratio of the output power to the input power. Click Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Gain Slope (dB)
For example: 2.5
Displays the actual gain slope of the optical booster amplifier.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
651
Field Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Value For example: 15.0
Description The maximum attenuation rate of the optical port. If this value is exceeded, the quality of optical signals or signals of the next station degrades due to low power. Click Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
For example: 0.5
The minimum attenuation rate of the optical port. If this value is exceeded, the quality of optical signals or signals of the next station degrades due to high power. Click Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Fixed Band
The default value is usually used. Click Fixed Band (WDM Interface) for more information. Query the nominal gain of this optical amplifier. Click Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets the threshold of the synthesized input optical power loss. When the synthesized input optical power is below this value, the loss of input signals occurs. Click Synthesized Input Optical Power Loss Threshold(dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Nominal Gain
Synthesized Input Optical Power Loss Threshold (dBm)
-35.0 to -10.0
Board Work Type
C, L, C+L
Queries and sets the board work type. Click Board Working Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
652
Field Actual Band Configure Band Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)
Value For example: C For example: C For example: 35
Description Displays the actual working band. Displays the working band that you configure. Displays the upper threshold of the gain of the optical amplifier board. Click Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
For example: 10
Displays the lower threshold of the gain of the optical amplifier board. Click Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Actual Working Band Parity
Even, Odd, All
Displays the parity of the actual working band. Click Parity of the Working Band (WDM Interface) for more information.
Parity of the Working Band Rated Optical Power (dBm)
ODD, EVEN, FULL -30.0 to 30.0 Default: l Input port: -19 l Output port: 4
Sets the parity of the working band. Sets the rated optical power of the input or output port of an optical amplifier board. Click Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets the forced launched optical power. Displays the fixed pump optical power. The value is in the range of Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power and Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power. Displays the minimum fixed pump optical power that is queried from the NE.
Forced Emitting Power (dBm) Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)
For example: 20.0 5.0 to 30.0
Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)
For example: 6.0
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
653
Field Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) Pump Optical Amplification Card Status Pump Optical Amplification Card Working Status
Value For example: 28.0
Description Displays the maximum fixed pump optical power that is queried from the NE. Displays whether the pump optical amplification board is online. Sets the working status of the pump optical amplification board.
Online, Offline
Disabled, Enabled

Field Optical Interface/Channel Value For example: NE name- Slot No.- Board name- Optical port number (Optical port name) For example: IN1 20 to 40 Description Displays the position of this optical port.
Optical Interface Name Optical Amplifier Gain (dB)
Displays default names. Do not modify this field. The gain of the optical booster amplifier is the ratio of output power to input power. Sets the on/off status of a laser. Set the attenuation ratio of the optical port. Displays the actual gain of the optical booster amplifier. It is the ratio of output power to input power. The default is usually used. Sets the nominal gain of this optical amplifier. Sets the threshold of the input optical power loss. When the input optical power is below this value, loss of input signal is considered to occur.
Laser Status Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Gain (dB)
Open, Close 0 to 20 For example: 20
Fixed Band Nominal Gain Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
C, CWDM For example: 25 -35.0 to -10.0
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
654
Field Board Work Type Actual Band Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Upper Threshold of Actual Gain (dB) Lower Threshold of Actual Gain (dB) Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity Rated Optical Power (dBm)
Value C, L, C+L For example: C For example: 35
Description Queries and sets the board work type. Displays the actual working band. Displays the upper threshold of the nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit. Displays the lower threshold of the nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit. Displays the upper threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit. Displays the lower threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit. Displays the parity of the actual working band. Sets the parity of the working band. Sets the rated optical power of the input or output port of an optical amplifier board.
For example: 10
For example: 35
For example: 10
Even Even -30.0 to 30.0 Default: l Input port: -19 l Output port: 4
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)
5.0 to 30.0
Displays the fixed pump optical power. The value is in the range of Minimum Fixed Pump Optical Power and Maximum Fixed Pump Optical Power. Displays the minimum fixed pump optical power that is queried from the NE. Displays the maximum fixed pump optical power that is queried from the NE.
Minimum Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) Maximum Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)
For example: 6.0
For example: 28.0
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
655

NOTE
16.2.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Board

This section describes how to set laser status and loopback, and query the wavelengths of an optical port.
Parameters (U2000)
Field Optical Interface/Channel Optical Interface Name Laser Status Value For example: NE711-6SC2-1 (RM1/TM1) For example: RM1/TM1 Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. Description Displays the position of this optical port. Displays default names. Do not modify this field. Sets whether the laser is enabled. Applicable to the boards such as HSC1, SC1, or SC2. Click Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Port Enabled Return Clock Enable, Disable West clock, East clock Enables or disables the use of this optical port. Set the return clock source. In the case of the optical supervisory channel board with dual optical interfaces, such as SC2, you set the optical port that returns the clock to the SCC board. In the case of the west clock, the optical port 1 is used. In the case of the east clock, the optical port 2 is used. FE Transparent Transmission Enable, Disable Enables or disables the FE transparent transmission function.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
656
Field Loopback
Value Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: Non-Loopback
Description Performs corresponding loopback settings for debugging or fault localization. Click Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused Default: Used
Sets whether to use the channel or not. Click Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Band Type/Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (Thz)
For example: SMC/ 240/1510.00/198.54
Displays the band type, working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port. Click Band Type/ Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency(THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Actual Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (Thz) Actual Band Type
For example: 240/1510.00/198.54
Displays the actual working wavelength, wavelength number and frequency of a port. Displays the band of the current working wavelength.
C, CWDM

Field Optical Interface/Channel Optical Interface Name Loopback Value For example: NE107-16SC1-1 (RM/TM)-1 For example: RM/TM Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: Non-Loopback Laser Status Open, Close Description Displays current optical port/ channel number. Sets/displays the optical port name. You can set optical port loopback for troubleshooting or testing. Sets the laser status. Applicable boards: HSC1, SC1 and SC2.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
657
Field Actual Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type
Value For example: 1/1510.00/198.54 C, CWDM
Description Displays the working wavelength of the optical port. Displays the band of the current working wavelength.
NOTE
16.2.7 Protection Board

This section describes how to set parameters for protection boards. The parameters are laser status, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path use status.
Parameters
Field Optical Interface/Channel Optical Interface Name Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Value For example: NE185-6OLP-2 (RI1/TO1) For example: RI1/TO1 Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. Description Displays the position of this optical port. Displays the default names. Do not modify this field. Sets the threshold of the optical power loss. When the input optical power is below this value, the loss of input signals occurs. On the U2000, click Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) -10.0 to 10.0 Sets the initial variance value between primary and secondary input power. On the U2000, click Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
658
Field Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
Value 3.0 to 8.0
Description Sets the variance threshold between primary and secondary input power. On the U2000, click Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
NOTE
16.2.8 Spectrum Analysis Board

This section describes how to set working wavelengths for spectrum analysis boards. For example, you can set parity of working band and fixed band.
Parameters (U2000)
Field Optical Interface/Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Monitoring Value For example: NE613-10MCA-1 (RO1) For example: RO1 Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled Description Displays the position of this optical port. Displays default names. Do not modify this field. Used to set the optical port monitoring state. When the monitoring of an optical port is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not analyze the wavelength at this port. Usually use default value. Click Fixed Band (WDM Interface) for more information. Displays the parity of the working band. Click Parity of the Working Band (WDM Interface) for more information.
Fixed Band
Parity of the Working band
FULL, Odd, Even Default: FULL
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
659
Field Wavelength Monitor Status
Value Monitored, Unmonitored Default: Unmonitored
Description Sets whether to monitor this port. Click Wavelength Monitor Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
WDM System Mode
NRZ Or DRZ System, CRZ System (100GHz Alternation), CRZ System (50GHz Alternation), 40Gbps System (100GHz Alternation), 40Gbps System (50GHz Alternation) C C Even, Odd Even, Odd 1 to 8
Sets the WDM system mode.
Actual Band Configure Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity Optical Switch No.
Displays the current working band of a channel. Sets the working band for a port. Displays the parity of the working band for a port. Sets the parity of the working band for a port. The MCA board can access eight optical signals. To select one optical port to perform spectrum analysis, you need to know the analyzed optical port No. of the board, that is, the optical switch status or the optical switch number. Click Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface) for more information.
Monitor Interval (min)
5 to 49995 Default: 10
Sets the time interval of performance monitoring on the board. Click Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
660

Field Optical Interface/Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Monitoring Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Band Configure Working Band Parity Value For example: NE107-12MCA8-1 (IN1) For example: RO1 Enabled, Disabled C Even, Odd C Even, Odd Description Displays the current optical port/path location. Do not modify this field. Use the default value. Enables or disables the spectrum analysis of the path. Displays the optical band that the path is monitoring. Currently only even band is supported. Configures the optical band that the path monitors. Displays the parity of the current working band of the port. Currently only parity band is supported. The MCA board can access eight optical signals. To select one optical port to perform spectrum analysis, you need to know the analyzed optical port No. of the board, that is, the optical switch status or the optical switch number. Sets the time interval of performance monitoring on the board. Sets whether to monitor the port. Displays the band. Sets the WDM type.
Optical Switch No
1 to 8
Monitor Interval (min)
5 to 49995 Default: 10
Wavelength Monitor Status
Monitor, No Monitor Default: Unmonitored
Band WDM Type
For example: C NRZ or DRZ, 100-GHz Spacing with CRZ, 50-GHz Spacing with CRZ
NOTE
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
661
16.2.9 Variable Optical Attenuation Board

This section describes how to set the maximum or minimum attenuation rate for optical ports and path use status. You can set or query parameters related to working wavelengths, including fixed band and the parity of working band.
Parameters (U2000)
Field Optical Interface/Channel Optical Interface Name Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value For example: NE613-1VA4-1 (IN1/OUT1) For example: IN1/OUT1 0 to 40 Description Displays the position of this optical port. Displays default names. Do not modify this field. Sets the attenuation ratio of the optical port. Click Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the maximum attenuation rate. When this rate is exceeded, the output optical power is too low, causing the signal-to-noise ratio of the receive end to fall. Click Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the minimum attenuation rate. When this rate is exceeded, the output optical power is too high, causing the signal-to-noise ratio of the receive end to fall. Click Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Channel Use Status Unused, Used Default: Used Sets whether to use the channel or not. Click Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Fixed Band Values of parameters vary with different boards and products. Displays the fixed band. Click Fixed Band (WDM Interface) for more information.
662
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Field Parity of the Working band
Value FULL, Odd, Even Default: FULL
Description Displays the parity of the working band. Click Parity of the Working Band (WDM Interface) for more information.
Actual Band Configure Band Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
C C For example: -50
Displays the working band of a channel. Configures the working band of the port. The power that is smaller than this value cannot be determined. Click Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Remarks Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity
Even, Odd Even, Odd
Sets the remarks of the optical port. Sets the parity of the working band for a port. Sets the parity of the working band for a port.

Field Optical Interface/Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Max. Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value For example: NE107-113VA1-1 (IN/OUT)-1 For example: IN1/OUT1 0-40 For example: 40 Description Displays the position of this optical port. Displays default names. Do not modify this field. Sets the attenuation ratio of the optical port. Displays the maximum attenuation ratio. If the actual attenuation ratio is greater than this value, the output power is so small that it may cause decrease of the optical signal noise ratio (OSNR) at the receive end.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
663
Field Min. Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Value For example: 5
Description Displays the minimum attenuation ratio. If the actual attenuation ratio is smaller than this value, the output power is so large that it may cause decrease of the optical signal noise ratio (OSNR) at the receive end. Sets whether the path is being used. Displays the current working band of the path. Currently only C band is supported. Configures the working band of the port. Input power that is smaller than this value cannot be determined. Displays the parity of the current working band of the port. Currently only even band is supported. Configures the parity of the working band of the port. Currently only even band is supported.
Path Use Status
Used, Unused Default: Used
Actual Band
Configure Band Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Actual Working Band Parity
C For example: -50
Even, Odd
Configure Working Band Parity
Even, Odd
NOTE
16.2.10 Dispersion Compensation Board

This section describes how to query parameters for dispersion compensation boards.
Parameters
Field Optical Interface/Channel Value For example: NE183-35TDC-1 (IN1/OUT1) Description Displays the position of this optical port.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
664
Field Optical Interface Name
Value For example: IN/OUT
Description Displays the default names. Do not modify this field.
NOTE
16.3 Parameters (Configuring Wavelength Grooming)

Describes the parameters involved in the wavelength grooming configuration.
16.3.1 Parameters: Edge Port

Before creating an optical cross-connection, you need to configure the corresponding port of the board as an edge port.
Parameters
Field Fixed Edge Port Value Slot-Board Name-Port No. (port name) Description Displays the fixed edge port of the NE. By default, the port of the FIU and the port at the OTU line side are fixed edge port. Click Fixed Edge Port (Optical Cross-Connection Management) for more information. Available Edge Port Slot-Board Name-Port No. (port name) Displays available edge port of the NE. Click Available Edge Port (Optical Cross-Connection Management) for more information. Selected Edge Port Slot-Board Name-Port No. (port name) Displays the selected edge port of the NE. Click Selected Edge Port (Optical Cross-Connection Management) for more information.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
665
16.3.2 Parameters: Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection

You can configure optical cross-connections on a single NE. An optical cross-connection refers to the cross-connection at the OCh level that can be dynamically created. An optical crossconnection can realize wavelength grooming. The optical cross-connection is classified into board optical cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection. A single-station optical cross-connection refers to the end-to-end optical cross-connection within an NE.
Parameters
Table 16-3 Optical cross-connection parameters Field Source Slot Source Port Source Band Source Wavelength No. Value Slot-Board Name Port No.(port name) C For example: 1 Description Displays the source slot of the optical cross-connection. Displays the source port of the optical cross-connection. Currently the Metro equipment supports C band. The Source Wavelength No. parameter indicates the number of the wavelength to which the source port of the single-station optical crossconnect service corresponds. Displays the sink slot of the optical cross-connection. Displays the sink port of the optical cross-connection. Currently the Metro equipment supports C band. The Sink Wavelength No. parameter indicates the number of the wavelength to which the sink port of the single-station optical crossconnect service corresponds. The Activation Status parameter indicates the status of the selected optical crossconnect service on the U2000. Displays the mode of creating optical crossconnections.
666
Sink Slot Sink Port Sink Band Sink Wavelength No.
Slot-Board Name Port No.(port name) C For example: 1
Activation Status
Active, Inactive Default: Active
Service Origin
Create Manually, Intelligently Generate
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
Field OPA Mode
Value Manual, Auto
Description Optical cross-connection power adjustment mode. If you select Auto, the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board automatically adjusts the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the board. If you select Manual, you need to manually adjust the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board. The Auto option is available for the following types of optical cross-connection trails: l Transparently transmitted service, such as FIU>OAU1>WSM9>O AU1>FIU, OAU1>WSM9>OAU1, FIU>OAU1>WSM9>O AU1 and OAU1>WSM9>OAU1> FIU. l Add service, such as OTU>WSM9>OAU1>FI U, OTU>WSM9>OAU1 and OTU>RUM9>OAU1. l Drop service, such as FIU>OAU1>WSD9>OT U, OAU1>ROAM>D40>O TU and OAU1>WSD9>OTU. For all the optical crossconnections other than the three types described above, you can only select the Manual mode.
16.3.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection

This section describes how to configure optical cross-connections on a board. Optical crossconnection is the cross-connection at OCh level that can be dynamically created. It can implement wavelength grooming. Optical cross-connection contains board optical crossIssue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 667
connection and single-station optical cross-connection. Board optical cross-connection is the optical cross-connection operations on one board.
Parameters
NOTE
Descriptions of the parameters on the U2000 are the same as that on the Web LCT.
Field Source Slot Source Port Source Band Source Wavelength
Value Slot-Board Name Port No.(port name) C For example: 2/1529.56/196.00
Description Displays the source slot of the optical cross-connection. Displays the source port of the optical cross-connection. Currently the Metro equipment supports C band. Numbers wavelengths sequentially. The value is expressed in the order of "wavelength number/central wavelength (nm)/frequency (THz)" Currently 80 wavelengths in C band are supported.
Sink Slot Sink Port Sink Band Sink Wavelength
Slot-Board Name Port No.(port name) C For example: 2/1529.56/196.00
Displays the sink slot of the optical cross-connection. Displays the sink port of the optical cross-connection. Currently the Metro equipment supports C band. Numbers wavelengths sequentially. The value is expressed in the order of "wavelength number/central wavelength (nm)/frequency (THz)" Currently 80 wavelengths in C band are supported.
16.3.4 Parameters: Enabling the Port Blocking Function

During network capacity expansion, if a port that is not configured with services is connected to an OTU board, the new wavelength may be conflict with the existing wavelength on the network. Wavelength conflict interrupts the existing services. This problem is resolved after the port is enabled with the port blocking function.
Parameters
Field Block Port Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Description Sets whether to prevent optical signals from traversing the optical port. When Block Port is set to Enabled, the optical attenuation rate of the optical port is so high that optical signals cannot traverse the optical port. When Block Port is set to Disabled, the optical attenuation rate of the optical port is within the normal range and thus optical signals can traverse the optical port.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
669
A Glossary
A
A
AC access control list ACK acknowledgement See alternating current See acknowledgement
Glossary
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource. A response sent by a receiver to indicate successful reception of information. Acknowledgements may be implemented at any level including the physical level (using voltage on one or more wires to coordinate transfer), at the link level (to indicate successful transmission across a single hardware link), or at higher levels. See access control list Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/ or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM. Add/drop wavelength refers to the wavelength that carries the add/drop services in the OADM equipment. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address. See add/drop multiplexer The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start. A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities. See asymmetric digital subscriber line See automatic gain control
ACL add/drop multiplexer
Add/drop wavelength Address Resolution Protocol
ADM administrative unit
Administrator ADSL AGC
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
670
A Glossary
AID AIS alarm
access identifier See alarm indication signal A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes to cleared. The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms. The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets. A single disturbance or fault may lead to the detection of multiple defects. A fault cause is the result of a correlation process which is intended to identify the defect that is representative of the disturbance or fault that is causing the problem. On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When the orange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellow indicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.
alarm cable alarm cascading alarm cause
alarm indication
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. alarm mask On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions for the system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meeting the conditions. The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-T recommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major, Minor, Warning. A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board. Classification of alarms with different attributes. There are six alarm types as following: Communication: alarm indication related with information transfer. Processing: alarm indication related with software or information processing Equipment: alarm indication related with equipment fault Service: alarm indication related with QoS of the equipment Environment: alarm related with the environment where the equipment resides, usually generated by a sensor Security: alarm indication related with security See automatic level control A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (single station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfils optical power control on the line that contains the link. The ALC functional unit. It corresponds to the NE in a network. The power detect unit, variable optical attenuator unit, and supervisory channel unit at the ALC node work together to achieve the ALC function. See automatic laser shutdown Electric current that reverses its direction of flow (polarity) periodically according to a frequency measured in hertz, or cycles per second.
alarm severity
alarm suppression
alarm type
ALC ALC link
ALC node
ALS alternating current
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
671
A Glossary
American National Standard Institute American Standard Code for Information Interchange ANSI antistatic floor APD APE APID application-specific integrated circuit
An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) participates in defining network protocol standards. American Standard Code for Information Interchange - the standard system for representing letters and symbols. Each letter or symbol is assigned a unique number between 0 and 127. See American National Standard Institute A floor that can quickly release the static electricity of the object contacting it to prevent accumulated static electricity See avalanche photodiode automatic power equilibrium access point identifier A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function. By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable for many needs. See automatic protection switching See Address Resolution Protocol A device, built with silicon planar lightwave circuits (PLC), that allows multiple wavelengths to be combined and separated in a dense wavelength-division multiplexing (DWDM) system. See American Standard Code for Information Interchange amplified spontaneous emission See application-specific integrated circuit See automatically switched optical network A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phone lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL provides continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses most of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receive information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice) information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from 512 Kbps to about 6 Mbps. A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode. autonomously generated correlation tag See Asynchronous Transfer Mode See administrative unit An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices to automatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities.
APS ARP arrayed waveguide grating ASCII ASE ASIC ASON asymmetric digital subscriber line
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATAG ATM AU auto-negotiation
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
672
A Glossary
automatic gain control A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level. automatic laser shutdown A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic level control A well-known application in communication systems with a given input signal conditioned to produce an output signal as possible, while supporting a wide gain range and controlled gain-reduction and gain recovery characteristics. automatic protection switching Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatically switched A network which is based on technology enabling the automatic delivery of transport optical network services. Specifically, an ASON can deliver not only leased-line connections but also other transport services such as soft-permanent and switched optical connections. avalanche photodiode A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages than other semiconductor electronics. See arrayed waveguide grating
AWG
B
background block error ratio backup The ratio of background block errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs. A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data synchronization between active and standby boards. A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate. See broadband access server A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer. A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables. background block error See background block error ratio See boundary clock Backward Defect Indication backward error indication See bit error rate backward incoming alignment error
bandwidth
BAS basic input/output system bayonet-neillconcelman BBE BBER BC BDI BEI BER BIAE
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
673
A Glossary
bill of material
Listing of all the subassemblies, parts and raw materials that go into the parent assembly. It shows the quantity of each raw material required to make the assembly. There are a variety of display formats for BOMS, including single level, indented, modular/ planning, transient, matrix and costed BOMs [APICs, CMSG]. See basic input/output system See bit-interleaved parity See bit interleaved parity order 8 An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network. A frame is divided into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)in a parity unit. Then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0. A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X. See building integrated timing supply best master clock See bayonet-neill-concelman See bill of material A clock with a clock port for each of two or more distinct PTP communication paths. See bridge protocol data unit board-level protection switching The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state. The action of transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection channels simultaneously. A server providing features as user access, connection management, address allocation and authentication, authorization and accounting. It also works as a router featuring effective route management, high forwarding performance and abundant services. A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address.
BIOS BIP BIP-8 bit error bit error rate bit interleaved parity order 8 bit-interleaved parity
BITS BMC BNC BOM boundary clock BPDU BPS bridge protocol data unit
bridging broadband access server broadcast
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
674
A Glossary
broadcast service building integrated timing supply
The unidirectional services from one service source to multiple service sinks. In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called BITS. Backbone WDM System
BWS
C
cable tie capex capital expenditure The tape used to bind the cables. See capital expenditure Capital expenditures (CAPEX or capex) are expenditures creating future benefits. A capital expenditure is incurred when a business spends money either to buy fixed assets or to add to the value of an existing fixed asset with a useful life that extends beyond the taxable year. Capex are used by a company to acquire or upgrade physical assets such as equipment, property, or industrial buildings. See committed access rate See committed burst size See connectivity check connection control interface See continuity check message chromatic dispersion See Code Division Multiple Access See customer edge See European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
CAR CBS CC CCI CCM CD CDMA CE CENELEC
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path, the bus. centralized alarm system CF CGMP channel The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console. See compact flash Cisco Group Management Protocol A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s (1012 bit/s). The center-to-center difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channels in a WDM device. See committed information rate
channel spacing CIR
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
675
A Glossary
CIST CLEI CLNP CLNS clock synchronization
Common and Internal Spanning Tree common language equipment identification connectionless network protocol connectionless network service Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signal frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.
clock synchronization A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588 compliant with V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control precision time protocol system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds. clock tracing CM CMEP CMI coarse wavelength division multiplexing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network. See configuration management connection monitoring end point coded mark inversion A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
Code Division Multiple A communication scheme that forms different code sequences by using the frequency Access expansion technology. In this case, subscribers of different addresses can use different code sequences for multi-address connection. committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined. committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
committed burst size
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket. Common Object Request Broker Architecture A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or ORB, and thus does not need to know the structure of the program from which the object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. See also IIOP, object (definition 2), Object Management Group, object-oriented. Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure. A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
compact flash
concatenation
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
676
A Glossary
Configuration Data
A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can collaborate with other Nes in an entire network. Thus, configuration data is the key factor for normal running of an entire network. 1. A network management function defined by the International Standards Organization (ISO). It involves installing, reinitializing & modifying hardware & software. 2. Configuration Management (CM) is a system for collecting the configuration information of all nodes in the network.
configuration management
configure congestion connecting plate connection point
To set the basic parameters of an operation object. An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service efficiency. A metallic plate which is used to combine two cabinets. A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair. Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically. CCM is used to detect the link status. 1. A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or several channels of required signals. 2. It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.
connectivity check continuity check message convergence
convergence service CORBA corrugated pipe CPLD CPU CRC CSA CSES CSMA CST current alarm current performance data
A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide for the specific requirements of the convergence service user. See Common Object Request Broker Architecture Used to protect optical fibers. Complex Programmable Logical Device See central processing unit See cyclic redundancy check Canadian Standards Association consecutive severely errored second carrier sense multiple access Common Spanning Tree An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled. Performance data stored currently in a register. An NE provides two types of registers, namely, 15-minute register and 24-hour register, to store performance parameters of a performance monitoring entity. The two types of registers stores performance data only in the specified monitoring period.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
677
A Glossary
customer edge CWDM cyclic redundancy check
A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host. See coarse wavelength division multiplexing A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
DAPI Data backup data communication network data communications channel destination access point identifiers A method that is used to copy key data to the standby storage area, to prevent data loss in the case of the damage or failure in the original storage area. A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF). The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. distribute board protect system See data communications channel See dispersion compensation fiber See dispersion compensation module A frame which is used to hold the DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module). See data communication network See digital distribution frame See digital data network A device that separates signals that have been combined by a multiplexer for transmission over a communications channel as a single signal. Technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber. A collection of multiple managed devices. By dividing managed devices into different device sets, users can manage the devices by using the U2000 in an easier way. If an operation authority over one device set is assigned to a user (user group), the authority over all the devices in the device set is assigned to the user (user group), thus making it unnecessary to set the operation authority over all the devices in a device set separately. It is recommended to configure device set by geographical region, network level, device type, or another criterion. See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DBPS DCC DCF DCM DCM frame DCN DDF DDN demultiplexer dense wavelength division multiplexing device set
DHCP
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
A Glossary
diamond-shaped nut digital data network
A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet. A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology. A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals. A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques. A kind of fiber which uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse. A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the dispersion of transmitting fiber. An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors. The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end. In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the services can automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports. See distributed link aggregation group See demultiplexer Dual Node Interconnection A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled. differential quadrature phase shift keying dynamic random database differential phase return to zero Differentiated Services Code Point dispersion slope compensation rate See digital subscriber line access multiplexer Digital Signal Processing Data Terminal Equipment See dual tone multiple frequency data terminal ready In telephone systems, multifrequency signaling in which standard set combinations of two specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four higher frequencies, are used. A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protected entity (e.g. "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure.
digital distribution frame digital subscriber line access multiplexer dispersion compensation fiber dispersion compensation module Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol distributed link aggregation group
DLAG DMUX; DEMUX DNI domain DQPSK DRDB DRZ DSCP DSCR DSLAM DSP DTE DTMF DTR dual tone multiple frequency dual-ended switching
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
679
A Glossary
DVB DVMRP DWDM
Digital Video Broadcasting See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol See dense wavelength division multiplexing
Dynamic Host Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. Configuration Protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.
E
E2E EAPE EBS ECC EDFA eDQPSK EFM ejector lever electric supervisory channel electromagnetic compatibility End to End enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium See excess burst size See embedded control channel See erbium doped fiber amplifier enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying See Ethernet in the first mile A lever for removing circuit boards from an electronic chassis. A technology realizes the communication among all the nodes and transmits the monitoring data in the optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals. Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. An element management system (EMS) manages one or more of a specific type of network elements (NEs). An EMS allows the user to manage all the features of each NE individually, but not the communication between NEs - this is done by the network management system (NMS). A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs. See electromagnetic compatibility See electromagnetic interference See element management system A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s. See Ethernet private line
electromagnetic interference electrostatic discharge element management system
embedded control channel EMC EMI EMS enterprise system connection EPL
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
A Glossary
EPLAN erbium doped fiber amplifier
See Ethernet private LAN service An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump of Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range. See electric supervisory channel See enterprise system connection See electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap. enhanced small form-factor pluggable A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.. Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes the advantages of the SHDSL.b is technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFM provides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. In addition, it meets the users' requirements on high definition television system (HDTV) and Video On Demand (VOD). An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. European Telecommunication Standards European Telecommunications Standards Institute A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standards of the ETSI. The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization was established in 1976 in Brussels. It is the result of the incorporation of two former organizations. It aims to reduce internal frontiers and trade barriers for electrotechnical products, systems and services. electrical variable optical attenuator See Ethernet virtual private line See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
ESC ESCON ESD ESD jack eSFP Ethernet
Ethernet in the first mile
Ethernet private LAN service Ethernet private line Ethernet virtual private LAN service Ethernet virtual private line ETS ETSI ETSI 300mm cabinet European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization EVOA EVPL EVPLAN
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
681
A Glossary
excess burst size
A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE. The cables and optical fibers which are used for connecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces of one cabinet to interfaces of other cabinets or peripherals. An oscilloscope display of synchronized pseudo-random digital data (signal amplitude versus time), showing the superposition of accumulated output waveforms.
Extended ID External cable eye pattern
F
F1 byte The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for network providers. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path for special maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte. Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers). A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A fault does not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of external resources and intentional settings. fiber Bragg grating See fiber channel flash database See fiber distributed data interface See fast Ethernet See forward error correction A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiber channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used for transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted pair copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented and connectionless services. A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for highspeed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on the token ring network.
fast Ethernet
fault
FBG FC FDB FDDI FE FEC fiber channel
fiber distributed data interface
fiber management tray A device used to coil up extra optical fibers.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
682
A Glossary
fiber patch cord fiber spool Fiber trough fiber/cable
A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack. A device used in coiling up an extra length of optical fibers. The trough that is used for routing fibers. Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user information and network management information) and perform transmission function in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs represents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical fiber type. A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays. See First in First out A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server. A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked. An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the network management system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port. See fiber management tray fixed optical add/drop multiplexer fixed optical attenuator For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal. A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end. Four-Wave Mixing (FWM), also called four-photon mixing, occurs when the interaction of two or three optical waves at different wavelengths generates new optical waves, called mixing products or sidebands, at other wavelengths. See field programmable gate array
field programmable gate array
FIFO File Transfer Protocol
First in First out Flow
FMT FOADM FOAs Forced switch
forward error correction four-wave mixing
FPGA
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
683
A Glossary
frame
A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties.
frame alignment signal A distinctive signal inserted in every frame or once in every n frames, always occupying the same relative position within the frame, and used to establish and maintain frame alignment. FTP full-duplex See File Transfer Protocol A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.
G
gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB. Gain Flattening Filter (GFFs), also known as gain equalizing filters, are used to flatten or smooth out unequal signal intensities over a specified wavelength range. This unequal signal intensity usually occurs after an amplification stage (for example, EDFA and/or Raman). Typically, GFFs are used in conjunction with gain amplifiers to ensure that the amplified channels all have the same gain. A static spectral device that flattens the output spectrum of an erbium-doped fiber amplifier. When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the network and one IP address of the Ethernet port. A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer See gigabit general communication channel See GMPLS control plan See gigabit Ethernet The technology can optimize GE service transport over WDM for Metro network. It owns the capability of GE service convergence and grooming and benefits to use the network resource more effectively. A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15. See gain flattening filter See generic framing procedure
gain flattening filter
Gateway IP
gateway network element Gb GCC GCP GE GE ADM
generic framing procedure GFF GFP

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
A Glossary
gigabit
In data communications, a gigabit is one billion bits, or 1,000,000,000 (that is, 10^9) bits. It's commonly used for measuring the amount of data that is transferred in a second between two telecommunication points. GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus. A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users. generalized multiprotocol label switching The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei. The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, the traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product series support the ASON features. See gateway network element See Global Positioning System
gigabit Ethernet
Global Positioning System GMPLS GMPLS control plan
GNE GPS
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. grounding GSSP GUI The connection of sections of an electrical circuit to a common conductor, called the ground, which serves as the reference for the other voltages in the circuit. General Snooping and Selection Protocol See graphical user interface
H
Hardware loopback HCS HDB HDLC hierarchical cell structure high level data link control History alarm History Performance Data A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback. See hierarchical cell structure high density bipolar code See high level data link control This is a term typically used to describe the priority of cells within a mixed environment. That is when Macro, Micro, and Pico cells may be viewed as candidates for cell reselection the priority described by the HCS will be used in the associated calculations. The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by adding a trailer and a header. The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories. The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reported and stored in the NMS.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
685
A Glossary
I
IAE IC ICC ICMP ID identity Idle resource optical NE incoming alignment error See integrated circuit ITU carrier code See Internet Control Message Protocol See identity The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively recognizable or known. When the U2000 is started successfully, an NE icon called "Idle ONE" will be displayed on the topological view. In this NE, the subracks and boards that are not divided to other optical NEs (such as OTM, OADM and other NEs) are retained. In this NE, idle DWDM subracks and boards are reserved, which can be distributed to other ONEs. Double-click the NE icon to view all the currently idle DWDM subracks or boards in the network. See Internet Explorer See International Electrotechnical Commission See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers See Internet Engineering Task Force See Internet Group Management Protocol The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30 second measurement intervals. A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters. A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function. A network defined in CCITT, providing comprehensive transmission service for the voice, video, and data. The ISDN enables the voice, video, and data transmission on a small number of data channels simultaneously, thus implementing a comprehensive transmission service. A technology that the system reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals may due to the fiber is broken, the performance of equipments trend to be inferior or the connector is not plugged well. Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser being sent out from the slice of broken fiber. The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces within the cabinet. A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
IE IEC IEEE IETF IGMP Input jitter tolerance
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers integrated circuit integrated services digital network
intelligent power adjustment
Internal cable internal spanning tree
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
686
A Glossary
International Electrotechnical Commission International Organization for Standardization International Telecommunication Union International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication Standardization Sector Internet Control Message Protocol
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards. An international association that works to establish global standards for communications and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers connected by communications networks. A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and radio networks (ITU-R). An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks. A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1). A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard. Microsoft's Web browsing software. Introduced in October 1995, the latest versions of Internet Explorer include many features that allow you to customize your experience on the Web. Internet Explorer is also available for the Macintosh and UNIX platforms. The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791. See Internet Protocol A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identify the host itself. The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication. See intelligent power adjustment
Internet Engineering Task Force
Internet Explorer
Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Protocol
IP IP address
IP over DCC
IPA
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
A Glossary
IPG ISDN ISO IST ITU ITU-T
inter-packet gap See integrated services digital network See International Organization for Standardization See internal spanning tree See International Telecommunication Union See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
J
Jitter Jitter transfer Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability. The physical relationship between jitter applied at the input port and the jitter appearing at the output port.
L
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration. See Link Aggregation Control Protocol See link aggregation group See local area network link access procedure on the D channel link access protocol-SDH A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information. See loopback See link capacity adjustment scheme See liquid crystal display local communication network local craft terminal See light emitting diode long hop
LACP LAG LAN LAPD LAPS Laser
layer
LB LCAS LCD LCN LCT LED LHP
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
688
A Glossary
light emitting diode
A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product on the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights and perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical mice and laser-class printers. A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems. In the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the Link Control Protocol (LCP) establishes, configures, and tests data-link Internet connections. The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is the condition of the link. The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP is called Linktrace Message(LTM). LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2. For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is called Linktrace Reply (LTR). LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM minus 1. A type of display that uses a liquid compound having a polar molecular structure, sandwiched between two transparent electrodes. See logical link control link management protocol loss of clock A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel. According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN). A logical port is a logical number assigned to every application.
Link Control Protocol link state advertisement linktrace message
linktrace reply
liquid crystal display LLC LMP LOC local area network
Locked switching
logical link control
logical port
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
689
A Glossary
loopback LOP LOS loss of pointer
A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. See loss of pointer See Loss Of Signal Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal. The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. See logical port link-state pass through See link state advertisement See label switched path linktrace See linktrace message See linktrace reply
Loss Of Signal Lower subrack LP LPT LSA LSP LT LTM LTR
M
MA MAC MADM main distribution frame main path interface at the transmitter main topology Maintenance Associations See media access control multiple add/drop multiplexer A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated. A reference point on the optical fiber just after the OM/OA output optical connector. A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here. The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP. Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP. See metropolitan area network The management view of a resource within the telecommunication environment that may be managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objects are: equipment, receive port, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container, multiplex section, and regenerator section.
maintenance domain maintenance point MAN managed object
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
690
A Glossary
Management information management information base manual switch
The information that is used for network management in a transport network. A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network. Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal. A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of an SDH network. A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation holes for the cabinet. See maintenance domain Memory Database See main distribution frame message dispatch process message distribution service software maintenance entities The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fiber by the transmitter. The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system. A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. maintenance end point A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN). The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network. See multiframe alignment signal See management information base maintenance intermediate point See multicast listener discovery
Mapping marking-off template MD MDB MDF MDP MDS ME mean launched power Mean Time Between Failures media access control
MEP metropolitan area network
MFAS MIB MIP MLD
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
691
A Glossary
MLM laser MO mother board mounting ear MP MPI MPI-R MPI-S MPLS MS MSA MSI MSOH MSP MSPP MST MSTI MSTP MTA MTBF MTU multi-longitudinal mode laser multicast listener discovery
See multi-longitudinal mode laser See managed object A printed board assembly that is used for interconnecting arrays of plug-in electronic modules. A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components. See maintenance point main path interface main path interface at the receiver See main path interface at the transmitter See Multiprotocol Label Switching Multiplex Section Multiplex Section Adaptation multi-frame structure identifier See multiplex section overhead See multiplex section protection multi-service provisioning platform See multiplex section termination See multiple spanning tree instance See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Mail Transfer Agent See Mean Time Between Failures Maximum Transmission Unit An injection laser diode which has a number of longitudinal modes. The MLD is used by the IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly connected network segments, and set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network. A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiframe alignment signal
multiple spanning tree Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTP instance within an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
692
A Glossary
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH definition. A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel. The function performed to generate the MSOH in the process of forming an SDH frame signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction. Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed. A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section. A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing. See multiplexer mechanical variable optical attenuator
multiplex section overhead multiplex section protection multiplex section termination multiplexer
Multiplexing
Multiprotocol Label Switching
MUX MVOA
N
NA NCP NE NE database No Acknowledgment See Network Control Protocol See network element There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following: (1) DRDB: a dynamic database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery; (2) SDB: a static database in a power-down RAM; (3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM. In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the same time. Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDB to FDB0 and FDB1. When an NE is restarted after power-down, the NE database is restored in the following procedures: As the SDB data is lost due to power-down, the main control restores the data first from DRDB. If the data in DRDB is also lost due to the exhaustion of the battery, the data is restored from FDB0 or FDB1.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
693
A Glossary
NE Explorer
The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis. An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a unique NE ID. A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks, boards, and ports on an NE. In the NE Panel, the user can complete most of the configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE. The NE configuration data that is stored on the SCC board of the equipment. The NEside data can be uploaded to the network management system(NMS) and thus is stored on the NMS side. Network Equipment Building System See network element function This is the program that switches the virtual circuit connections into place, implements path control, and operates the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) link. A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC board. A function block which represents the telecommunication functions and communicates with the TMN OSF function block for the purpose of being monitored and/or controlled. The process of controlling a network so as to maximize its efficiency and productivity. ISO's model divides network management into five categories: fault management, accounting management, configuration management, security management and performance management.
NE ID NE Panel
NE-side data
NEBS NEF Network Control Protocol network element
network element function network management
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network. System network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node. network segment A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can point access OSI network services. Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. It synchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client. NM NMS NNI NOC Noise figure NSAP NTP See network management See Network Management System See network node interface network operation center An index that represents the degrade extent of optical signals after the signals passing a system. See network service access point See Network Time Protocol
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
694
A Glossary
O
OA OADM OADM frame OAM OC OCI OCP OD ODB ODF ODUk OEQ OFC OLA OLP OM OMS ONE Online Help OOF OPA See optical amplifier See optical add/drop multiplexer A frame which is used to hold the OADM boards. See operation, administration and maintenance See optical coupler open connection indication See optical channel protection optical demultiplexing optical duobinary See optical distribution frame optical channel data unit-k optical equalizer open fiber control See optical line amplifier See optical line protection optical multiplexing optical multiplexing section See optical network element The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions for using their features when so requested by the user. See out of frame optical power adjust
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area. Open Systems Interconnection A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions. A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers. operation expenditure optical physical section
operation, administration and maintenance
OpEx; OPEX OPS

Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
A Glossary
optic fiber connector
A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source (or a detector).+ A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel. Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium. A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator. A signal transmitted at one wavelength in a fiber-optic system. In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the optical channel protection is configured. A coupler for coupling light in an optical system. Multiple discrete layers of alternating optical materials have respective first and second indexes of refraction. The thickness of each layer is a fraction of the light wavelength. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers. A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the input optical signals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the key component of the OLA is the EDFA amplifier. A protection mechanism that adopts dual fed and selective receiving principle and singleended switching mode. In this protection, two pairs of fibers are used. One pair of fibers forms the working route. The working route transmits line signals when the line is normal. The other pair of fibers forms the protection route. The protection route carries line signals when the line is broken or the signal attenuation is extremely large. A transport entity that implements the NE functions (terminal multiplexing, add/drop multiplexing, cross-connection and regeneration) in a DWDM layer network. The types of ONEs include OTM, OADM, OLA, REG and OXC. The locating of an ONE is equivalent to that of a common NE. In a view, an ONE is displayed with an icon, like a common NE and its alarm status can be displayed with colors. Logically, an ONE consists of different subracks. Like a common NE, an ONE cannot be expanded or entered like a sub-network. Similar to a common NE, an ONE provides a list of the subracks that form the NE to display the board layout. The most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. The ratio of signal power and noise power in a transmission link. That is, OSNR = signal power/ noise power. A device that allows the details of a region of an optical spectrum to be resolved. Commonly used to diagnose DWDM systems. A technology that realizes communication among nodes in optical transmission network and transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the working channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is 1625 nm). A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits, redirects, or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.
optical add/drop multiplexer optical amplifier optical attenuator
optical channel optical channel protection optical coupler
optical distribution frame optical line amplifier
optical line protection
optical network element
optical signal-to-noise ratio optical spectrum analyzer optical supervisory channel Optical switch
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
A Glossary
optical time domain reflectometer optical transmission section optical transponder unit optical transport network optical wavelength shared protection
A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the light loss and locate the fiber fault. Optical transmission section allows the network operator to perform monitoring and maintenance tasks between NEs. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2compliant WDM wavelength. A network that uses the optical signal to transmit data In the optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP), the service protection between different stations can be achieved by using the same wavelength, realizing wavelength sharing. This saves the wavelength resources and lowers the cost. The optical wavelength shared protection is mainly applied to the ring network which is configured with distributed services. It is achieved by using the OWSP board. In a ring network where services are distributed at adjacent stations, each station requires one OWSP board. Then, two wavelengths are enough for configuring the shared protection to protect one service among stations. optical channel payload unit optical channel payload unit-k A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. An original equipment manufacturer, or OEM is typically a company that uses a component made by a second company in its own product, or sells the product of the second company under its own brand. See optical spectrum analyzer See optical supervisory channel See Open Systems Interconnection optical switch node See optical signal-to-noise ratio See open shortest path first See optical time domain reflectometer optical terminal multiplexer See optical transport network See optical transmission section See optical transponder unit optical channel transport unit-k An NE transmits an OOF downstream when it receives framing errors in a specified number of consecutive frame bit positions. The ranger of optical energy level of output signals. Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet. See optical wavelength shared protection
OPU OPUk orderwire original equipment manufacturer OSA OSC OSI OSN OSNR OSPF OTDR OTM OTN OTS OTU OTUk out of frame Output optical power overhead cabling OWSP
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
697
A Glossary
P
PA packet over SDH/ SONET packet switched network Packing case Paired slots pass-through PBS PCB PCC PCC PCS PDH PDL PDU PE peak burst size pre-amplifier A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN. A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode. A case which is used for packing the board or subrack. Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the backplane. The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any given direction of transmission. See peak burst size See printed circuit board protection communication channel See policy and charging control See physical coding sublayer See plesiochronous digital hierarchy See polarization dependent loss Protocol Data Unit Provider Edge A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. Peak Information Rate. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate. Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics. protection ground A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or referencefrequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the incoming or reference frequency. See physical sublayer & physical layer
peak information rate Performance register
PGND phase-locked loop
PHY
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
698
A Glossary
physical coding sublayer physical sublayer & physical layer PID PIM-DM PIM-SM PIN PIR plesiochronous digital hierarchy PLL PMD PMI POH point to multipoint
The PCS further helps to define physical layer specifications for 10 gigabit Ethernet after having been broken down into their Physical Media Dependent Sublayer or PMD. Each sublayer places the 10GBASE standards into either LAN or WAN specifications. 1. physical sublayer: One of two sublayers of the FDDI physical layer. 2. physical layer: In ATM, the physical layer provides the transmission of cells over a physical medium that connects two ATM devices. The PHY is comprised of two sublayers: PMD and TC photonics integrated device protocol independent multicast-dense mode See protocol independent multicast sparse mode See Positive Intrinsic Negative See peak information rate A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates. See phase-locked loop polarization mode dispersion payload missing indication path overhead A communications network that provides a path from one location to multiple locations (from one to many).
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. Point-to-Point Protocol PPPoE, point-to-point protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulating over Ethernet PPP frames in Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with DSL services. It offers standard PPP features such as authentication, encryption, and compression. Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.
polarization dependent The maximum, peak-to-peak insertion loss (or gain) variation caused by a component loss when stimulated by all possible polarization states. It is specified in dB units. policy and charging control POS Positive Intrinsic Negative Power box Short for Policy and Charging Control, the PCC is defined in 3GPP R7. The PCC provides the QoS control and service-based charging functions in the wireless bearer network. See packet over SDH/SONET Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- and n-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers. A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.
power distribution box A power box through which the power enters the cabinet and is re-distributed to various components, at the mean time, the Power Distribution Box protects the electric devices from current overload. PPP PPPoE See Point-to-Point Protocol See Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
699
A Glossary
PRBS PRC PRI primary rate interface printed circuit board
See pseudo random binary sequence primary reference clock See primary rate interface An interface consisting of 23 channel Bs and a 64 kbit/s channel D that uses the T1 line, or consisting of 30 channel Bs and a channel D that uses the E1 line. A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate. A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. In case the service route provides multiple service protections, different protection policies can be selected as required. Protection policy refers to the protection mode given the priority in use for the trail: protection, no protection, and extra traffic. Of the above, the protection preference is divided into trail protection and subnet connection protection. A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. It is applicable to large-scale multicast networks with scattered members.
protection ground cable Protection path Protection policy
Protection service protocol independent multicast sparse mode
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. PSI PSN PSTN PT PTMP PTN PTP public switched telephone network payload structure identifier See packet switched network See public switched telephone network payload type See point to multipoint packet transport network Point-To-Point A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public subscribers. Sometimes called POTS.
Q
QA QoS quality of service Q adaptation See quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
700
A Glossary
R
radio network controller RAI RAM An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources. remote alarm indication See random access memory
random access memory Semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written by the central processing unit (CPU) or other hardware devices. The storage locations can be accessed in any order. Note that the various types of ROM memory are capable of random access but cannot be written to. The term RAM, however, is generally understood to refer to volatile memory that can be written to as well as read. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Receiver Sensitivity An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 10-12 (The FEC is open).
reconfiguration optical The WDM equipment supports the ROADM. It flexibly and dynamically adjusts add/ add/drop multiplexer drop wavelengths of sites on the network by adjusting the pass-through or block status of any wavelength without affecting the service transmission in the main optical channel. This implements wavelength allocation among sites on the network. After the ROADM is used, the existing services are not affected during upgrade. The wavelength can be modified quickly and efficiently during network maintenance, which reduces maintenance cost. In addition, the ROADM supports the equalization for optical power, which equalizes the optical power at the channel level. Reed Solomon Code reference clock Reflectance REG Regeneration REI Resource Reservation Protocol A type of forward error correcting codes invented in 1960 by Irving Reed and Gustave Solomon, which has become commonplace in modern digital communications. A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks for reference. The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power. A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals. The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits. Remote Error Indication The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). Radio Frequency Requirement for Comments remote failure indication A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals. See Routing Information Protocol
RF RFC RFI ring network RIP
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
701
A Glossary
RMON RNC ROADM route Routing Information Protocol
remote network monitoring See radio network controller See reconfiguration optical add/drop multiplexer A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically. A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth. See Reed Solomon Code In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s. See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See Resource Reservation Protocol return to zero code
RS Code RS232
RSTP RSVP RZ
S
S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol. The IPA safe switch is set in consideration of the long-span networking requirement, which cannot allow too low output optical power. If the safe control switch is turned off, IPA restarting optical power is the specified output power of the OAU. Otherwise, the IPA restarting optical power is restricted to less than 10 dBm. See storage area network service access point source access point identifiers stimulated Brillouin scattering See square connector See signal degrade SD stands for signal degrade. The SD trigger flag determines whether to perform a switching when SD occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the network management system. See synchronous digital hierarchy
Safe control switch
SAN SAP SAPI SBS SC SD SD trigger flag
SDH
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
A Glossary
SDI SDP Search domain
See Serial Digital Interface serious disturbance period Search field refers to the range of IP addresses being searched. In the TCP/IP, the IP addresses include: Category A address (1.0.0.0---126.255.255.255). For example, 10.*.*.*, whose search field is 10.255.255.255, all 10.*.*.* to be searched. Category B address (128.0.0.0---191. 255. 255. 255). For example, 129.9.*.*, whose search field is 129.9.255.255, all 129.9.*.* to be searched. Category C address (192.0.0.0---223. 255. 255. 255). For example, 192.224.9.*, whose search field is 192.224.9.255, all 192.224.9.* to be searched. Category D address (224.0.0.0---230.255.255.255), which is reserved. Category E address (240.0.0.0---247.255.255.255), which is reserved. Netid 127.*.*.*, in which .*.*.* can be any number. This net-ID is a local address. A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH. Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without the NMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that time. Serial Line Interface Protocol, defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnection function with a known IP address.
Secure File Transfer Protocol Self-healing
Serial Digital Interface An interface for transmitting digital signals. Serial Line Interface Protocol
service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization (source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole or partially. Service protection SES SETS settings A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end. See severely errored second See synchronous equipment timing source Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio >= 10-3 or at least one defect. Time interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio greater than 10-3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction) . SF SFP SFTP shock-proof reinforce shortcut menu side door See signal fail See small form-factor pluggable See Secure File Transfer Protocol A process by which the cabinet is fastened to the wiring frame or the top of the equipment room so that the cabinet stands stably. A menu that is displayed when right-clicking an object's name or icon. This is also referred to a context menu. The side door of a cabinet is used to protect the equipment inside the cabinet against unexpected touch and environment impact.
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
703
A Glossary
side mode suppression The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total ratio source spectrum to the second largest peak. side trough signal cable signal degrade signal fail signal to noise ratio The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the cabinet. Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable. A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect (e.g., dDEG) condition is active. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active. The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel). A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Simple Network Management Protocol
single-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action only at the affected end of the protected entity (e.g. "trail", "subnetwork connection"), in the case of a unidirectional failure. single-mode fiber A type of fiber optic cable through which only one type of light signal with a fixed wave length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10 microns. This type of fiber is used to transmit data in long distance. See service level agreement See Serial Line Interface Protocol single longitudinal mode section monitoring A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. See single-mode fiber See side mode suppression ratio See subnetwork connection protection See subnetwork connection tunnel protection See Simple Network Management Protocol See signal to noise ratio An ASON connection which features flexible and dynamic adjustment of routes. SPC includes different classes of services (CoS). See synchronous optical network
SLA SLIP SLM SM small form-factor pluggable SMF SMSR SNCP SNCTP SNMP SNR soft permanent connections SONET
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
704
A Glossary
span
The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spans determines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and varies according to transmission system type.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SPC SPM SQL square connector SRLG SRS SSM SSMB SSU STM STM-1 STM-4 storage area network See soft permanent connections self phase modulation See structured query language Cables may use two styles of connectors: "square" and "D-style". Shared Risk Link Group stimulated Raman scattering See Synchronization Status Message synchronization status message byte synchronization supply unit Synchronous Transfer Mode See synchronous transport mode 1 Synchronous Transport Module of order 4 An architecture to attach remote computer storage devices such as disk array controllers, tape libraries and CD arrays to servers in such a way that to the operating system the devices appear as locally attached devices. See Spanning Tree Protocol A database query and programming language widely used for accessing, querying, updating, and managing data in relational database systems. Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipments under their management. A number used to differentiate network sections in a sub-network conference. A subnetwork ID consists of the first several digits (one or two) of a user phone number. An oderwire phone number consists of the sub-network ID and the user number. The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address.
STP structured query language sub-network
sub-network number
subnet mask
subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
A Glossary
subnetwork connection SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty, tunnel protection the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel. support A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor, it is made of welded steel plates and is used to block the cabinets up, thus facilitating floor paving and cabling. Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed under the supports, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to satisfy the insulation requirements. An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not occur even when the alarm conditions are met. There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributary board switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set the same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higher priority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.
Suppression state
Switching priority
Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. synchronize NE time synchronous digital hierarchy To send the system time of the server of the network management system to NEs so as to synchronize all NEs with the server. A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure. The SETS function provides timing reference to the relevant component parts of multiplexing equipment and represents the SDH network clement clock. A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to connect networks based on fiberoptic cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbps, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbps (gigabits per second).
synchronous equipment timing source synchronous optical network
synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s. mode 1
T
TCM TCP TDM TE Tandem Connection Monitoring See Transmission Control Protocol See time division multiplexing See traffic engineering
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
706
A Glossary
Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services. terminal multiplexer A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals. See Trivial File Transfer Protocol trace identifier mismatch A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3 and so on), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel. Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able to interconnect. Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals keeps consistent with the UTC time. A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero. See Transaction Language 1 Type/Length/Value See terminal multiplexer See Telecommunication Management Network traffic Policing A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads.
TFTP TIM time division multiplexing
Time Slot Time Synchronization
time to live
TL1 TLV TM TMN TP traffic engineering
Transaction Language Transaction Language One is a widely used telecommunications management protocol. 1 TL1 is a vendor-independent and technology-independent man-machine language. TL1 facilities can be provided as part of an OSS for interacting with either underlying management systems or NEs. One popular application is for a management system (or NE) to package its trap/notification data in TL1 format and forward it to an OSS component. ...(from authors.phptr.com/morris/glossary.html) Transaction Language 1 (TL1) is a widely used, "legacy", management protocol in telecommunications. It is a cross-vendor, cross-technology man-machine language, and is widely used to manage optical (SONET) and broadband access infrastructure in North America. It is defined in GR-831 by Bellcore (now Telcordia). (from en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TL1)
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
707
A Glossary
Transmission Control Protocol
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model. A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices. One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VCn payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed to increase flexibility of the transport network A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP is small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines. Two Rate Three Color Marker trail trace identifier See time to live tributary unit See tributary unit group
tray tributary unit group
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
trTCM TTI TTL TU TUG
U
UAS UAT UDP unavailable second See unavailable time event See User Datagram Protocol
unavailable time event A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than within 10 consecutive seconds. UNI universal time coordinated Unprotected See user network interface The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintained atomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide. Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannot be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured. An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side. The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operation rights of a user in the NMS.
upload
Upper subrack User
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
708
A Glossary
User Datagram Protocol
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches). UTC See universal time coordinated
V
VB VC VCG VCI virtual channel identifier virtual concatenation group virtual container virtual bridge See virtual container See virtual concatenation group See virtual channel identifier A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination. A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 s or 500 s. A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet. The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to which VP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.
virtual local area network virtual path identifier
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities. VLAN VOA voice over IP See virtual local area network Variable Optical Attenuator An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN). See voice over IP See virtual path identifier See virtual private network Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
VoIP VPI VPN VRRP
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
709
A Glossary
W
WAN wavelength division multiplexing See wide area network A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.
Wavelength protection The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protection group structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. The wavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of the wavelength protection group. WDM WEEE wide area network See wavelength division multiplexing waste electrical and electronic equipment A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country. The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic. A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working. weighted round Robin wavelength selective switching Wait To Restore wavelength cross-connection protection The WXCP service is also called the GE ADM protection service. The WXCP is a type of channel protection based on ring network. It adopts the dual fed and selective receiving principle and uses the cross-connection function to achieve service switching between working and protection channels.
Working path Working service WRR WSS WTR WXCP WXCP service
X
XFP XPM 10Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable cross-phase modulation
Issue 02 (2011-10-31)
710

Commissioning Guide (V100R006C01 02)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Commissioning Guide (V100R006C01 02)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

About This Document

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

About This Document

Update 2 Quick Guide 15.35 Managing NE Power Consumption All

Description Quick Guide is added. Managing NE Power Consumption is added.

Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C00

5.10.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD9 +WSMD9) is added.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

About This Document

Description 5.12.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9 +WSMD9) is added.

15 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration 16 Parameters Reference

The section "Parameter Description" is added.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-20) Based on Product Version V100R005C00

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

About This Document

Update Whole manual

10.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks is added.

10.6.3 Testing Items is added.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During Deployment...............................52 4 Configuring NE and Network...................................................................................................57

5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site...................................................................................92

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power............................................................................ 181

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

7 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System.............................................................................................................................................253

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

9 Configuring Services and System Features..........................................................................392

10 Commissioning the Network................................................................................................412

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

11 Testing Bit Errors.....................................................................................................................516

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

11.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors.....................................................................................................................520

15 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration...............................531

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide

1 Preparations for Commissioning

Preparations for Commissioning

About This Chapter

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Commissioning Guide